Manual, Operators, T200 PDF

Operation Manual
Model T200
NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer
Also supports operation of: when used in conjunction with:
Model T200U Analyzer T200U addendum, PN 06861
Model T200U-NOy Analyzer T200U addendum, PN 06861 and
T200U-NOy addendum, PN 07303
T200UP Photolytic Analyzer T200UP addendum, PN 07450
Model T201 Analyzer T201 addendum, PN 07271
Model T265 Analyzer T265 addendum, PN 07337
© Teledyne API(TAPI)
9970 Carroll Canyon Road
San Diego, CA 92131
USA
Toll-free Phone: 800-324-5190

Phone: 858-657-9800
Fax: 858-657-9816
Email: [email protected]
Website: http://www.teledyne-api.com/
Copyright 2010-2018 06858F DCN8038

Teledyne API 04 December 2018
NOTICE OF COPYRIGHT
© 2010-2018 Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation. All rights reserved.
TRADEMARKS
All trademarks, registered trademarks, brand names or product names
appearing in this document are the property of their respective owners and are
used herein for identification purposes only.
06858F DCN8038 i
This page intentionally left blank.
ii 06858F DCN8038
SAFETY MESSAGES
Important safety messages are provided throughout this manual for the purpose of
avoiding personal injury or instrument damage. Please read these messages carefully.
Each safety message is associated with a safety alert symbol, and are placed throughout
this manual and inside the instrument. The symbols with messages are defined as follows:
WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard
HAZARD: Strong oxidizer
GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION: Read the accompanying message for

specific information.
CAUTION: Hot Surface Warning
Do Not Touch: Touching some parts of the instrument without protection or

proper tools could result in damage to the part(s) and/or the instrument.
Technician Symbol: All operations marked with this symbol are to be

performed by qualified maintenance personnel only.
Electrical Ground: This symbol inside the instrument marks the central
safety grounding point for the instrument.
CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
The T200 Analyzer should only be used for the purpose and in the
manner described in this manual. If you use the T200 in a manner other
than that for which it was intended, unpredictable behavior could ensue
with possible hazardous consequences.
NEVER use any gas analyzer to sample combustible gas(es).
Technical Assistance regarding the use and maintenance of any Teledyne API
Note
product can be obtained by contacting Teledyne API’s Technical Support
Department:
Phone: 800-324-5190
or by accessing the service options on our website at http://www.teledyne-api.com.
06858F DCN8038 iii

CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ
Des consignes de sécurité importantes sont fournies tout au long du présent manuel dans
le but d’éviter des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager les instruments. Veuillez lire
attentivement ces consignes. Chaque consigne de sécurité est représentée par un
pictogramme d’alerte de sécurité; ces pictogrammes se retrouvent dans ce manuel et à
l’intérieur des instruments. Les symboles correspondent aux consignes suivantes :
AVERTISSEMENT : Risque de choc électrique
DANGER : Oxydant puissant
AVERTISSEMENT GÉNÉRAL / MISE EN GARDE : Lire la consigne

complémentaire pour des renseignements spécifiques
MISE EN GARDE : Surface chaude
Ne pas toucher : Toucher à certaines parties de l’instrument sans protection ou

sans les outils appropriés pourrait entraîner des dommages aux pièces ou à
l’instrument.
Pictogramme « technicien » : Toutes les opérations portant ce symbole doivent
être effectuées uniquement par du personnel de maintenance qualifié.
Mise à la terre : Ce symbole à l’intérieur de l’instrument détermine le point central

de la mise à la terre sécuritaire de l’instrument.
MISE EN GARDE
Cet instrument doit être utilisé aux fins décrites et de la manière décrite dans
ce manuel. Si vous utilisez cet instrument d’une autre manière que celle pour
laquelle il a été prévu, l’instrument pourrait se comporter de façon imprévisible
et entraîner des conséquences dangereuses.
NE JAMAIS utiliser un analyseur de gaz pour échantillonner des gaz
combustibles!
iv 06858F DCN8038
WARRANTY
WARRANTY POLICY (02024 J)
Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation (TAPI), a business unit of Teledyne
Instruments, Inc., provides that:
Prior to shipment, TAPI equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested. Should equipment
failure occur, TAPI assures its customers that prompt service and support will be available.
(For the instrument-specific warranty period, please refer to the “Limited Warranty” section
in the Terms and Conditions of Sale on our website at the following link:
http://www.teledyne-api.com/terms_and_conditions.asp).
COVERAGE
After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime, TAPI stands ready to
provide on-site or in-plant service at reasonable rates similar to those of other manufacturers
in the industry. All maintenance and the first level of field troubleshooting are to be
performed by the customer.
NON-TAPI MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT
Equipment provided but not manufactured by TAPI is warranted and will be repaired to the
extent and according to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment
manufacturer’s warranty.
PRODUCT RETURN
All units or components returned to Teledyne API should be properly packed for
handling and returned freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center. After the
repair, the equipment will be returned, freight prepaid.
The complete Terms and Conditions of Sale can be reviewed at http://www.teledyne-

api.com/terms_and_conditions.asp
CAUTION – Avoid Warranty Invalidation

Failure to comply with proper anti-Electro-Static Discharge (ESD) handling and
packing instructions and Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) procedures
when returning parts for repair or calibration may void your warranty. For anti-
ESD handling and packing instructions please refer to the manual, Fundamentals
of ESD, PN 04786, in its “Packing Components for Return to Teledyne API’s
Customer Service” section. The manual can be downloaded from our website at
http://www.teledyne-api.com. RMA procedures can also be found on our website.
06858F DCN8038 v
vi 06858F DCN8038
CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
In addition to the safety symbols as presented in the Important Safety Information page,
this manual provides special notices related to the safety and effective use of the
analyzer and other pertinent information.
Special Notices appear as follows:
ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY

This special notice provides information to avoid damage to your instrument and
possibly invalidate the warranty.
IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA

Could either affect accuracy of instrument readings or cause loss of data.
Note Pertinent information associated with the proper care, operation or maintenance
of the analyzer or its parts.
06858F DCN8038 vii

Table of Contents Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Safety Messages ............................................................................................................................................. iii
Warranty ......................................................................................................................................................... v
Conventions Used In this Manual.................................................................................................................... vii
Revision History ............................................................................................................................................. vii
1. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................ 15
1.1. Features ................................................................................................................................................. 15
1.2. Support Documentation .......................................................................................................................... 16
1.3. Options ................................................................................................................................................... 16
2. SPECIFICATIONS, APPROVALS, & COMPLIANCE ........................................................ 19
2.1. Specifications ......................................................................................................................................... 19
2.2. EPA Reference Designation.................................................................................................................... 20
2.3. Approvals and Certifications.................................................................................................................... 20
2.3.1. Safety .............................................................................................................................................. 20
2.3.2. EMC ................................................................................................................................................ 20
2.3.3. Other Type Certifications ................................................................................................................. 21
3. GETTING STARTED .......................................................................................................... 23
3.1. Unpacking the T200 Analyzer ................................................................................................................. 23
3.1.1. Ventilation Clearance ....................................................................................................................... 24
3.2. Instrument Layout ................................................................................................................................... 25
3.2.1. Front Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 25
3.2.2. Rear Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 29
3.2.3. Internal Chassis Layout.................................................................................................................... 31
3.3. Connections and Setup ........................................................................................................................... 33
3.3.1. Electrical Connections ..................................................................................................................... 33
3.3.2. Pneumatic Connections ................................................................................................................... 47
3.4. Startup, Functional Checks, and Initial Calibration ................................................................................... 64
3.4.1. Start Up ........................................................................................................................................... 64
3.4.2. Warning Messages .......................................................................................................................... 64
3.4.3. Functional Checks ........................................................................................................................... 67
3.4.4. Initial Calibration .............................................................................................................................. 68
3.4.4.1. Interferents ................................................................................................................................... 68
4. OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES .............................................................................. 73
4.1. Sample Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 74
4.1.1. Test Functions ................................................................................................................................. 74
4.1.2. Warning Messages .......................................................................................................................... 77
4.2. Calibration Mode..................................................................................................................................... 78
4.3. Setup Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 79
4.3.1. Password Security ........................................................................................................................... 79
4.3.2. Primary Setup Menu ........................................................................................................................ 79
4.3.3. Secondary Setup Menu (SETUP àMORE) ...................................................................................... 80
5. SETUP MODE MENUS ...................................................................................................... 81
5.1. SETUP à CFG: Configuration Information .............................................................................................. 81
5.2. SETUP àACAL: Automatic Calibration Option ........................................................................................ 82
5.3. SETUP àDAS: Internal Data Acquisition System.................................................................................... 82
5.4. SETUP àRNGE: Analog Output Reporting Range Configuration ............................................................ 82
5.4.1. T200 Physical Ranges ..................................................................................................................... 82
5.4.2. T200 Analog Output Reporting Ranges ............................................................................................ 82
5.4.3. SETUP à RNGE à MODE ............................................................................................................. 84
5.5. SETUP à PASS: Password Protection ................................................................................................... 93
5.6. SETUP à CLK: Setting the Internal Time-of-Day Clock .......................................................................... 96
5.6.1. Setting the Time of Day.................................................................................................................... 96
5.6.2. Adjusting the Internal Clock’s Speed ................................................................................................ 97
5.7. SETUP à COMM: Communications Ports .............................................................................................. 98
5.7.1. ID (Machine Identification)................................................................................................................ 98
viii 06858F DCN8038

Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual Table of Contents
5.7.2. INET (Ethernet)................................................................................................................................ 99

5.7.3. COM1[COM2] (Mode, Baude Rate and Test Port) ............................................................................ 99
5.8. SETUP à VARS: Variables Setup and Definition .................................................................................... 99
5.9. SETUP à Diag: Diagnostics Functions ................................................................................................. 102
5.9.1. Signal I/O ....................................................................................................................................... 104
5.9.2. Analog Output (DIAG AOUT) ......................................................................................................... 105
5.9.3. Analog I/O Configuration (DIAG AIO) ............................................................................................. 105
5.9.4. Test Chan Output (Selecting a Test Channel Function for Output A4) ............................................ 120
5.9.5. Optic Test ...................................................................................................................................... 122
5.9.6. Electrical Test ................................................................................................................................ 122
5.9.7. Ozone Gen Override ...................................................................................................................... 122
5.9.8. Flow Calibration ............................................................................................................................. 122
6. COMMUNICATIONS SETUP AND OPERATION ............................................................ 123
6.1. Date Terminal / Communication Equipment (DTE DCE) ........................................................................ 123
6.2. Communication Modes, Baud Rate and Port Testing ............................................................................ 123
6.2.1. Communication Modes .................................................................................................................. 124
6.2.2. Com Port Baud Rate ...................................................................................................................... 126
6.2.3. Com Port Testing ........................................................................................................................... 126
6.3. RS-232 ................................................................................................................................................. 128
6.4. RS-485 (Option) ................................................................................................................................... 128
6.5. Ethernet ................................................................................................................................................ 129
6.5.1. Configuring Ethernet Communication Manually (Static IP Address) ................................................ 129
6.5.2. Configuring Ethernet Communication Using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) ............ 131
6.6. USB Port for Remote Access ................................................................................................................ 134
6.7. Communications Protocols ................................................................................................................... 136
6.7.1. MODBUS ....................................................................................................................................... 136
6.7.2. Hessen .......................................................................................................................................... 138
7. DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (DAS) AND APICOM ..................................................... 147
7.1. DAS Structure....................................................................................................................................... 148
7.1.1. DAS Channels ............................................................................................................................... 148
7.1.2. Viewing DAS Data and Settings ..................................................................................................... 153
7.1.3. Editing DAS Data Channels ........................................................................................................... 154
7.2. Remote DAS Configuration ................................................................................................................... 166
7.2.1. DAS Configuration via APICOM ..................................................................................................... 166
7.2.2. DAS Configuration via Terminal Emulation Programs ..................................................................... 168
8. REMOTE OPERATION .................................................................................................... 169
8.1. Computer Mode .................................................................................................................................... 169
8.1.1. Remote Control via APICOM ......................................................................................................... 169
8.2. Interactive Mode ................................................................................................................................... 170
8.2.1. Remote Control via a Terminal Emulation Program ........................................................................ 170
8.3. Remote Access by Modem ................................................................................................................... 172
8.4. Password Security for Serial Remote Communications ......................................................................... 175
9. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES ....................................................................................... 177
9.1. Before Calibration ................................................................................................................................. 178
9.1.1. Required Equipment, Supplies, and Expendables .......................................................................... 178
9.1.2. Calibration Gases .......................................................................................................................... 179
9.1.3. Data Recording Devices ................................................................................................................ 181
9.1.4. NO2 Conversion Efficiency (CE) ..................................................................................................... 181
9.2. Manual Calibration Checks and Calibration of the T200 Analyzer in its Base Configuration ................... 181
9.2.1. Setup for Basic Calibration Checks and Calibration ........................................................................ 182
9.2.2. Performing a Basic Manual Calibration Check ................................................................................ 183
9.2.3. Performing a Basic Manual Calibration ........................................................................................... 184
9.3. Manual Calibration with the Internal Span Gas Generator ..................................................................... 186
9.3.1. Performing “Precision” Manual Calibration when Internal Span Gas (IZS) Generator Option is
Present.................................................................................................................................................... 186
9.3.2. Setup for Calibration with the Internal Span Gas Generator ............................................................ 187
9.3.3. CAL On NO2 Feature ..................................................................................................................... 187
06858F DCN8038 ix
9.3.4. Performing a Manual Calibration Check with the Internal Span Gas Generator ............................... 189
9.3.5. Performing a Manual Calibration with the Internal Span Gas Generator.......................................... 190
9.4. Manual Calibration and Cal Checks with the Valve Options Installed ..................................................... 193
9.4.1. Setup for Calibration Using Valve Options ...................................................................................... 193
9.4.2. Manual Calibration Checks with Valve Options Installed ................................................................. 194
9.4.3. Manual Calibration Using Valve Options ........................................................................................ 195
9.5. Automatic Zero/Span Cal/Check (AutoCal)............................................................................................ 197
9.5.1. SETUP à ACAL: Programming and AUTO CAL Sequence ........................................................... 200
9.6. Calibration Quality Analysis .................................................................................................................. 203
9.7. Gas Flow Calibration............................................................................................................................. 204
10. EPA PROTOCOL CALIBRATION ................................................................................. 205
11. INSTRUMENT MAINTENANCE .................................................................................... 207
11.1. Maintenance Schedule........................................................................................................................ 207
11.2. Predictive Diagnostics ......................................................................................................................... 209
11.3. Maintenance Procedures .................................................................................................................... 210
11.3.1. Replacing the Sample Particulate Filter ........................................................................................ 210
11.3.2. Changing the O3 Dryer Particulate Filter ....................................................................................... 211
11.3.3. Changing the Ozone Cleanser Chemical ...................................................................................... 212
11.3.4. Maintaining the External Sample Pump (Pump Pack) ................................................................... 214
11.3.5. Changing the Pump DFU Filter .................................................................................................... 215
11.3.6. Changing the Internal Span Gas Generator Permeation Tube ...................................................... 216
11.3.7. Changing the External Zero Air Scrubber (OPT 86C) ................................................................... 216
11.3.8. Changing the NO2 Converter........................................................................................................ 219
11.3.9. Cleaning the Reaction Cell ........................................................................................................... 221
11.3.10. Replacing Critical Flow Orifices .................................................................................................. 223
11.3.11. Checking for Light Leaks ............................................................................................................ 224
11.3.12. Checking for Pneumatic Leaks ................................................................................................... 225
12. TROUBLESHOOTING & SERVICE ............................................................................... 227
12.1. General Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................... 228
12.1.1. Fault Diagnosis with WARNING Messages .................................................................................. 228
12.1.2. Fault Diagnosis With Test Functions ............................................................................................ 232
12.1.3. DIAG à SIGNAL I/O: Using the Diagnostic Signal I/O Function................................................... 233
12.2. Using the Analog Output Test Channel ............................................................................................... 235
12.3. Using the Internal Electronic Status LEDs ........................................................................................... 236
12.3.1. CPU Status Indicator.................................................................................................................... 236
12.3.2. Relay PCA Status LEDs ............................................................................................................... 236
12.4. Gas Flow Problems............................................................................................................................. 238
12.4.1. Zero or Low Flow Problems ......................................................................................................... 238
12.5. Calibration Problems ........................................................................................................................... 242
12.5.1. Negative Concentrations .............................................................................................................. 242
12.5.2. No Response ............................................................................................................................... 243
12.5.3. Unstable Zero and Span .............................................................................................................. 243
12.5.4. Inability to Span - No SPAN Button (CALS) .................................................................................. 244
12.5.5. Inability to Zero - No ZERO Button (CALZ) ................................................................................... 244
12.5.6. Non-Linear Response .................................................................................................................. 244
12.5.7. Discrepancy Between Analog Output and Display ........................................................................ 245
12.5.8. Discrepancy Between NO and NOX slopes .................................................................................. 246
12.6. Other Performance Problems .............................................................................................................. 246
12.6.1. Excessive Noise .......................................................................................................................... 246
12.6.2. Slow Response ............................................................................................................................ 246
12.6.3. Auto Zero Warnings .................................................................................................................... 247
12.7. Subsystem Checkout .......................................................................................................................... 248
12.7.1. AC Main Power ............................................................................................................................ 248
12.7.2. DC Power Supply......................................................................................................................... 249
12.7.3. I2C Bus ........................................................................................................................................ 250
12.7.4. LCD/Display Module .................................................................................................................... 250
12.7.5. Relay PCA ................................................................................................................................... 250
12.7.6. Motherboard ................................................................................................................................ 251
x 06858F DCN8038
12.7.7. Pressure / Flow Sensor Assembly ................................................................................................ 255

12.7.8. CPU............................................................................................................................................. 256
12.7.9. RS-232 Communications ............................................................................................................. 256
12.7.10. NO2 à NO Converter ................................................................................................................ 257
12.7.11. Determining CE by Simplified GPT Calibration ........................................................................... 262
12.7.12. Photomultiplier Tube (PMT) Sensor Module ............................................................................... 265
12.7.13. PMT Preamplifier Board ............................................................................................................. 267
12.7.14. PMT Temperature Control PCA.................................................................................................. 268
12.7.15. O3 Generator ............................................................................................................................. 269
12.7.16. Internal Span Gas Generator and Valve Options ........................................................................ 270
12.7.17. Temperature Sensor .................................................................................................................. 271
12.8. Service Procedures............................................................................................................................. 272
12.8.1. Disk-On-Module Replacement Procedure .................................................................................... 272
12.8.2. O3 Generator Replacement .......................................................................................................... 273
12.8.3. Sample and Ozone Dryer Replacement ....................................................................................... 273
12.8.4. PMT Sensor Hardware Calibration ............................................................................................... 274
12.8.5. Replacing the PMT, HVPS or TEC ............................................................................................... 276
12.8.6. Removing / Replacing the Relay PCA from the Instrument ........................................................... 279
12.9. Frequently Asked Questions ............................................................................................................... 280
12.10. Technical Assistance ........................................................................................................................ 281
13. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION...................................................................................... 283
13.1. Measurement Principle ....................................................................................................................... 283
13.1.1. Chemiluminescence Creation in the T200 Reaction Cell ............................................................... 283
13.1.2. Chemiluminescence Detection in the T200 Reaction Cell ............................................................. 285
13.1.3. NOX and NO2 Determination ......................................................................................................... 286
13.1.4. Auto Zero ..................................................................................................................................... 287
13.1.5. Measurement Interferences ......................................................................................................... 288
13.2. Pneumatic Operation .......................................................................................................................... 291
13.2.1. Sample Gas Flow......................................................................................................................... 291
13.2.2. Flow Rate Control - Critical Flow Orifices ..................................................................................... 293
13.2.3. Ozone Gas Generation and Air Flow ............................................................................................ 296
13.2.4. Pneumatic Sensors ...................................................................................................................... 300
13.3. Electronic Operation ........................................................................................................................... 302
13.3.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 302
13.3.2. CPU............................................................................................................................................. 304
13.3.3. Motherboard ................................................................................................................................ 305
13.3.4. Relay PCA ................................................................................................................................... 310
13.4. Sensor Module ................................................................................................................................... 316
13.5. Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) ............................................................................................................... 316
13.5.1. PMT Preamplifier ......................................................................................................................... 317
13.5.2. PMT Cooling System ................................................................................................................... 319
13.6. Pneumatic Sensor Board .................................................................................................................... 320
13.7. Power Supply/Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................. 321
13.7.1. AC Power Configuration ............................................................................................................... 322
13.8. Front Panel Touchscreen/Display Interface ......................................................................................... 327
13.8.1. LVDS Transmitter Board .............................................................................................................. 328
13.8.2. Front Panel Touchscreen/Display Interface PCA .......................................................................... 328
13.9. Software Operation ............................................................................................................................. 328
13.9.1. Adaptive Filter .............................................................................................................................. 329
13.9.2. Temperature/Pressure Compensation (TPC) ................................................................................ 329
13.9.3. Calibration - Slope and Offset ...................................................................................................... 330
Glossary ...................................................................................................................................................... 331
Index ........................................................................................................................................................... 335
APPENDIX A - VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION
APPENDIX B - ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS
06858F DCN8038 xi
FIGURES
Figure 3-1: Front Panel Layout ................................................................................................................. 25
Figure 3-2: Display Screen and Touch Control ......................................................................................... 26
Figure 3-3: Display/Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts .......................................................... 28
Figure 3-4: Rear Panel Layout – Base Unit ............................................................................................... 29
Figure 3-5: Internal Layout – Top View with IZS Option ............................................................................ 31
Figure 3-6: Internal Layout - Top View Showing Other Options ................................................................. 32
Figure 3-7: Analog In Connector ............................................................................................................... 34
Figure 3-8: Analog Output Connector ....................................................................................................... 35
Figure 3-9: Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard .................................................................. 36
Figure 3-10: Status Output Connector ........................................................................................................ 37
Figure 3-11: Energizing the T200 Control Inputs ......................................................................................... 38
Figure 3-12: Concentration Alarm Relay ..................................................................................................... 39
Figure 3-13 Rear Panel Connector Pin-Outs for RS-232 Mode .................................................................. 42
Figure 3-14: Default Pin Assignments for CPU COM Port Connector (RS-232). .......................................... 43
Figure 3-15: Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode .................................................................................. 45
Figure 3-16: RS-232-Multidrop PCA Host/Analyzer Interconnect Diagram .................................................. 46
Figure 3-17: Gas Line Connections from Calibrator – Basic T200 Configuration ......................................... 50
Figure 3-18: Gas Line Connections from Bottled Span Gas – Basic T200 Configuration ............................. 51
Figure 3-19: Pneumatics, Basic Configuration ............................................................................................ 53
Figure 3-20: Rear Panel Layout with Z/S Valve Options (OPT 50A) ............................................................ 54
Figure 3-21: Gas Line Connections for T200 with Z/S Valves Option (OPT 50A)......................................... 54
Figure 3-22: Pneumatics with Zero/Span Valves OPT 50A ......................................................................... 56
Figure 3-23: Rear Panel Layout with Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span Valves OPT 50B.............................. 57
Figure 3-24: Gas Line Connection w/Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span Valves (OPT 50B) ........................... 58
Figure 3-25: Pneumatics with Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span Valves (OPT 50B) ...................................... 59
Figure 3-26: Rear Panel Layout with Internal Span Source (IZS) OPT 50G ................................................ 61
Figure 3-27: Pneumatics with the Internal Span Gas Generator (OPT 50G) ................................................ 62
Figure 3-28: Pneumatics for Sample Conditioner OPT 86A ........................................................................ 63
Figure 4-1: Front Panel Display ................................................................................................................ 73
Figure 4-2: Viewing T200 Test Functions ................................................................................................. 75
Figure 5-1: Analog Output Connector Pin Out........................................................................................... 83
Figure 5-2. SETUP – COM Menu ............................................................................................................. 98
Figure 5-3. COMM– Machine ID ............................................................................................................... 99
Figure 5-4: Accessing the DIAG Submenus ............................................................................................ 103
Figure 5-5: Accessing the Analog I/O Configuration Submenus .............................................................. 106
Figure 5-6: Setup for Checking / Calibrating DCV Analog Output Signal Levels ...................................... 111
Figure 5-7: Setup for Checking / Calibration Current Output Signal Levels Using an Ammeter ................ 113
Figure 5-8: Alternative Setup Using 250Ω Resistor for Checking Current Output Signal Levels ............... 115
Figure 6-1. COM – Communication Modes Setup ................................................................................... 125
Figure 6-2. COM – COM Port Baud Rate ............................................................................................... 126
Figure 6-3. COM – COM1 Test Port ....................................................................................................... 127
Figure 6-4. COM - LAN /Internet Manual Configuration ........................................................................... 130
Figure 6-5. COM – LAN / Internet Automatic Configuration (DHCP) ........................................................ 132
Figure 6-6. COM – Change Hostname .................................................................................................. 133
Figure 7-1: Default DAS Channels Setup ............................................................................................... 152
Figure 7-2: APICOM Remote Control Program Interface......................................................................... 166
Figure 7-3: Sample APICOM User Interface for Configuring the DAS ..................................................... 167
Figure 7-4: DAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program.................................................. 168
Figure 8-1: Remote Access by Modem ................................................................................................... 173
Figure 9-1: Set up for Manual Calibrations/Checks of T200’s in Base Configuration w/ a Gas Dilution
Calibrator ............................................................................................................................. 182
Figure 9-2: Set up for Manual Calibrations/Checks of T200’s in Base Configuration w/ Bottled Gas ........ 182
Figure 9-3: Pneumatic Connections for T200 Precision Calibration when IZS Generator Present ............ 186
Figure 9-4: Pneumatic Connections for Manual Calibration/Checks with the Internal Span Gas Generator187
Figure 11-1 Replacing the Particulate Filter ............................................................................................. 210
xii 06858F DCN8038

Figure 11-2: Particle Filter on O3 Supply Air Dryer .................................................................................... 211

Figure 11-3: Ozone Cleanser Assembly ................................................................................................... 212
Figure 11-4: Zero Air Scrubber Assembly ................................................................................................. 218
Figure 11-5: NO2 Converter Assembly...................................................................................................... 220
Figure 11-6: Reaction Cell Assembly ........................................................................................................ 221
Figure 11-7: Critical Flow Orifice Assembly .............................................................................................. 223
Figure 12-1: Example of Signal I/O Function ............................................................................................ 234
Figure 12-2: CPU Status Indicator ............................................................................................................ 236
Figure 12-3: Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting .............................................................. 237
Figure 12-4: Location of DC Power Test Points on Relay PCA ................................................................. 249
Figure 12-5: Typical Set Up of Status Output Test .................................................................................... 253
Figure 12-6: Pressure / Flow Sensor Assembly ........................................................................................ 255
Figure 12-7: Setup for determining NO2 à NO Efficiency – T200 Base Configuration ............................... 259
Figure 12-8: Pre-Amplifier Board Layout ................................................................................................... 275
Figure 12-9: T200 Sensor Assembly ........................................................................................................ 277
Figure 12-10: Relay PCA with AC Relay Retainer In Place ......................................................................... 279
Figure 12-11: Relay PCA Mounting Screw Locations ................................................................................. 279
Figure 13-1: Reaction Cell with PMT Tube and Optical Filter .................................................................... 285
Figure 13-2: T200 Sensitivity Spectrum .................................................................................................... 286
Figure 13-3: NO2à NO Conversion .......................................................................................................... 286
Figure 13-4: Pneumatic Flow During the Auto Zero Cycle ......................................................................... 288
Figure 13-5. Vacuum Manifold, Standard Configuration ............................................................................ 292
Figure 13-6: Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice....................................................................... 293
Figure 13-7: Location of Flow Control Assemblies & Critical Flow Orifices ................................................ 295
Figure 13-8: Ozone Generator Principle ................................................................................................... 297
Figure 13-9: Semi-Permeable Membrane Drying Process ........................................................................ 297
Figure 13-10: T200 Sample Dryer .............................................................................................................. 298
Figure 13-11: T200 Electronic Block Diagram............................................................................................. 302
Figure 13-12: CPU Board ........................................................................................................................... 304
Figure 13-13: Relay PCA Layout (P/N 045230100) .................................................................................... 310
Figure 13-14: Relay PCA P/N 045230100 with AC Relay Retainer in Place ................................................ 311
Figure 13-15: Status LED Locations – Relay PCA ...................................................................................... 312
Figure 13-16: Heater Control Loop Block Diagram. .................................................................................... 314
Figure 13-17: Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs ............................................................ 316
Figure 13-18: Basic PMT Design ................................................................................................................ 317
Figure 13-19: PMT Preamp Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 318
Figure 13-20: Typical Thermo-Electric Cooler ............................................................................................. 319
Figure 13-21: PMT Cooling System Block Diagram .................................................................................... 320
Figure 13-22: Power Distribution Block Diagram......................................................................................... 322
Figure 13-23: Location of AC power Configuration Jumpers ....................................................................... 323
Figure 13-24: Pump AC Power Jumpers (JP7) ........................................................................................... 324
Figure 13-25: Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP2) ..................................................................... 325
Figure 13-26: Typical Jumper Set (JP2) Set Up of Heaters ........................................................................ 326
Figure 13-27: Front Panel and Display Interface Block Diagram ................................................................. 327
Figure 13-28: Basic Software Operation ..................................................................................................... 328
TABLES
Table 1-1. Analyzer Options .................................................................................................................... 16
Table 3-1: Ventilation Clearance ............................................................................................................. 24
Table 3-5: Analog Output Pin Assignments ............................................................................................. 35
Table 3-6: Status Output Pin Assignments .............................................................................................. 37
Table 3-7: Control Input Pin Assignments................................................................................................ 38
Table 3-8: Zero/Span Valves Operating States OPT 50A ........................................................................ 56
Table 3-9: Valve Operating States OPT 50B installed .............................................................................. 60
06858F DCN8038 xiii

Table 3-10: Internal Span Gas Generator Valve Operating States OPT 50G ............................................. 63
Table 3-11: Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up ................................................................................. 66
Table 4-1: Analyzer Operating Modes ..................................................................................................... 74
Table 4-2: Test Functions Defined........................................................................................................... 75
Table 4-3: Warning Messages Defined .................................................................................................... 77
Table 4-4: Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions ......................................................................... 79
Table 4-5: Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions..................................................................... 80
Table 5-1: IND Mode Analog Output Assignments ................................................................................... 86
Table 5-2: Password Levels .................................................................................................................... 93
Table 5-3: Variable Names (VARS) ....................................................................................................... 100
Table 5-4: Diagnostic Mode (DIAG) Functions ....................................................................................... 102
Table 5-5: DIAG - Analog I/O Functions ................................................................................................ 105
Table 5-6: Analog Output Voltage Range Min/Max ................................................................................ 107
Table 5-7: Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration....................................................... 111
Table 5-8: Current Loop Output Check .................................................................................................. 115
Table 5-9: Test Channels Functions available on the T200’s Analog Output .......................................... 120
Table 6-1: COM Port Communication Modes ........................................................................................ 124
Table 6-2: Ethernet Status Indicators .................................................................................................... 129
Table 6-4: RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol ..................................................... 138
Table 6-5: Teledyne API's Hessen Protocol Response Modes ............................................................... 141
Table 6-6: Default Hessen Status Flag Assignments ............................................................................. 145
Table 7-1: Front Panel LED Status Indicators for DAS ........................................................................... 147
Table 7-2: DAS Data Channel Properties .............................................................................................. 149
Table 7-3: DAS Data Parameter Functions ............................................................................................ 157
Table 8-1: Terminal Mode Software Commands .................................................................................... 170
Table 8-2: Teledyne API's Serial I/O Command Types .......................................................................... 171
Table 9-1: IZS Option Valve States with CAL_ON_NO2 Turned ON ....................................................... 187
Table 9-2: AUTOCAL Modes ................................................................................................................ 197
Table 9-3: AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters ..................................................................................... 198
Table 9-4: Example AutoCal Sequence ................................................................................................. 199
Table 9-5: Calibration Data Quality Evaluation ...................................................................................... 203
Table 11-1: T200 Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................................ 208
Table 11-2: Predictive Uses for Test Functions ....................................................................................... 209
Table 12-1: Front Panel Warning Messages ............................................................................................ 230
Table 12-2: Test Functions - Indicated Failures ....................................................................................... 232
Table 12-3: Test Channel Outputs as Diagnostic Tools ........................................................................... 235
Table 12-4: Relay PCA Watchdog LED Failure Indications ...................................................................... 236
Table 12-5: Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications ............................................................................ 237
Table 12-6: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes ...................................................................... 249
Table 12-7: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels .................................................................................... 250
Table 12-8: Relay PCA Control Devices .................................................................................................. 250
Table 12-9: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values Voltage Outputs ........................................... 251
Table 12-10: Status Outputs Check .......................................................................................................... 253
Table 12-11: T200 Control Input Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I/O Functions ...................... 254
Table 13-1: List of Interferents ................................................................................................................ 290
Table 13-2: T200 Valve Cycle Phases..................................................................................................... 293
Table 13-3: T200 Gas Flow Rates ........................................................................................................... 295
Table 13-4: Relay PCA Status LED’s ...................................................................................................... 312
Table 13-5: Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs ............................................................ 315
Table 13-6: AC Power Configuration for Internal Pumps (JP7) ................................................................ 324
Table 13-7: Power Configuration for Standard AC Heaters (JP2)............................................................. 325
Table 13-8: Power Configuration for Optional Heaters (JP6).................................................................... 326
xiv 06858F DCN8038

1. INTRODUCTION
Teledyne API’s Model T200 (also referred to as T200) NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer uses
chemiluminescence detection (see Principles of Operation, Section 13, this manual),
coupled with state-of-the-art microprocessor technology to provide the sensitivity,
stability and ease of use needed for ambient or dilution CEM monitoring requirements
of nitric oxide (NO), nitrogen dioxide (NO2) and total nitrogen oxides (NOx). Along
with providing high accuracy and dependability, the T200 tracks operational parameters
and issues warnings if they fall outside diagnostic limits, as well as stores easily
retrievable data.
1.1. FEATURES
Some of the other exceptional features of your T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer are:
• Ranges, 0-50 ppb to 0-20 ppm, user selectable
• Independent ranges and auto ranging
• Large, vivid, and durable graphics display with touch screen interface
• Microprocessor controlled for versatility
• Multi-tasking software to allow viewing test variables while operating
• Continuous self checking with alarms
• Permeation dryer on ozone generator
• Bi-directional RS-232, optional USB and RS-485, and 10/100Base-T Ethernet
ports for remote operation
• Front panel USB ports for peripheral devices and firmware upgrades
• Digital status outputs to provide instrument operating condition
• Adaptive signal filtering to optimize response time
• Temperature and pressure compensation
• Converter efficiency correction software
• Catalytic ozone destruct
• Comprehensive internal data logging with programmable averaging periods
• Ability to log virtually any operating parameter
• 8 analog inputs (optional)
• Internal zero and span check (optional)
06858F DCN8038 15
Introduction Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual
1.2. SUPPORT DOCUMENTATION

Download additional manuals from Teledyne API’s website at http://www.teledyne-
api.com/manuals/, to support the operation of the instrument:
• APICOM Software Manual, part number 07463
• DAS Manual, part number 02837
• Fundamentals of ESD (Electro-Static Discharge), part number 04786
1.3. OPTIONS
The options available for your analyzer are presented in Table 1-1. To order these options
or to learn more about them, please contact the Sales Department of Teledyne Advanced
Pollution Instrumentation at:
TOLL-FREE: 800-324-5190
PHONE: +1 858-657-9800
FAX: +1 858-657-9816
EMAIL: [email protected]
WEBSITE: http://www.teledyne-api.com/
Table 1-1. Analyzer Options

Option
Option Description/Notes Reference
Number
Pumps meet all typical AC power supply standards while exhibiting same
Pumps
pneumatic performance.
11A Ship without pump (TAPI Sales)
11B Pumpless Pump Pack (TAPI Sales)
12A Internal Pump 115V @ 60 Hz (TAPI Sales)
12B Internal Pump 220V @ 60 Hz (TAPI Sales)
12C Internal Pump 220V @ 50 Hz (TAPI Sales)
Rack Mount
Options for mounting the analyzer in standard 19” racks
Kits
20A Rack mount brackets with 26 in. (660 mm) chassis slides (TAPI Sales)
20B Rack mount brackets with 24 in. (610 mm) chassis slides (TAPI Sales)
21 Rack mount brackets only (compatible with carrying strap, Option 29) (TAPI Sales)
23 Rack mount for external pump pack (no slides) (TAPI Sales)
16 06858F DCN8038
Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual Introduction
Option
Number
Carrying Strap/Handle Side-mounted strap for hand-carrying analyzer
Extends from “flat” position to accommodate hand for carrying.
Recesses to 9mm (3/8”) dimension for storage.
29 (TAPI Sales)
Can be used with rack mount brackets, Option 21.
Cannot be used with rack mount slides.
CAUTION – GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD

THE T200 ANALYZER WEIGHS ABOUT 18 KG (40 POUNDS).
TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY WE RECOMMEND THAT TWO PERSONS LIFT AND CARRY THE
ANALYZER. DISCONNECT ALL CABLES AND TUBING FROM THE ANALYZER BEFORE MOVING IT.
Used for connecting external voltage signals from other instrumentation (such as
Analog Input and USB port
meteorological instruments).
Also can be used for logging these signals in the analyzer’s internal Sections 3.3.1.2,
64B
DAS and 7
Current Loop Analog Adds isolated, voltage-to-current conversion circuitry to the analyzer’s analog
Outputs outputs.
Can be configured for any output range between 0 and 20 mA.
Sections 3.3.1.4
41 May be ordered separately for any of the analog outputs.
and 5.9.3.7
Can be installed at the factory or retrofitted in the field.
Parts Kits Spare parts and expendables
Expendables Kit includes a recommended set of expendables for
42A one year of operation of this instrument including replacement Appendix B
sample particulate filters.
Expendables Kit with IZS includes the items needed to refurbish
43 Appendix B
the zero air scrubber.
45 Spare Parts Kit includes spares parts for one unit. Appendix B
Used to control the flow of calibration gases generated from external sources,
Calibration Valves
rather than manually switching the rear panel pneumatic connections.
AMBIENT ZERO AND AMBIENT SPAN VALVES
50A Zero Air and Span Gas input supplied at ambient pressure. Section 3.3.2.3
Gases controlled by 2 internal valves; SAMPLE/CAL & ZERO/SPAN.
AMBIENT ZERO AND PRESSURIZED SPAN VALVES
Span Gas input from external, pressurized source;
Span Gas flow rate maintained at 1 ATM by critical flow orifice & vented
through Vent port.
50B Section 3.3.2.4
Shutoff valve stops flow of Span Gas when in sample mode to preserve
pressurized gas source.
Zero Air created via 2-stage scrubber & dry filter unit (DFU).
Gases controlled by 2 internal valves; SAMPLE/CAL & ZERO/SPAN.
ZERO SCRUBBER AND INTERNAL SPAN SOURCE (IZS)
Span Gas generated from internal NO2 permeation tube Sections 3.3.2.5
50G
Zero Air created by 2-stage scrubber & DFU. and 3.3.2.6
Gases controlled by 2 internal valves: Sample/Cal & Zero/Span.
NO2 Permeation Tubes Replacement tubes; identical size/shape; different permeation rates.
Permeation Rate
Approximate NO2 Concentration @ 50°C
(± 25%)
52B 421 ng/min 300ppb – 500 ppb ± 25% (TAPI Sales)
52G 842 ng/min 0600 – 1000 ppb ± 25% (TAPI Sales)
Each tube comes with a calibration certificate, traceable to a NIST standard, Section 3.3.2.5
specifying its actual effusion rate of that tube to within ± 5% @ 0.56 liters per
06858F DCN8038 17
Introduction Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual
Option
Number
minute, calibration performed at a tube temperature of 50°C.
Communication Cables For remote serial, network and Internet communication with the analyzer.
Type Description
Shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-25M cable, about
60A RS-232 1.8 m long. Used to interface with older computers or Section 3.3.1.8
code activated switches with DB-25 serial connectors.
Shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-9F cable of about
60B RS-232 Section 3.3.1.8
1.8 m length.
Patch cable, 2 meters long, used for Internet and LAN
60C Ethernet Section 3.3.1.8
communications.
Cable for direct connection between instrument (rear
60D USB Section 3.3.1.8
panel USB port) and personal computer.
USB Port For remote connection
For connection to personal computer. (Separate option only when Sections 3.3.1.8
64A
Option 64B, Analog Input and USB Com Port not elected). and 6.6
Concentration Alarm Relays Issues warning when gas concentration exceeds limits set by user.
Four (4) “dry contact” relays on the rear panel of the instrument. This Section 3.3.1.7
61 relay option is different from and in addition to the “Contact Closures”
that come standard on all TAPI instruments.
RS-232 Multidrop Enables communications between host computer and up to eight analyzers.
Multidrop card seated on the analyzer’s CPU card.
62 Each instrument in the multidrop network requres this card and a Section 3.3.1.8
communications cable (Option 60B).
Other Gas Options Second gas sensor and gas conditioners
65A Oxygen (O2) Sensor Figure 3-6
86A Ammonia removal sample conditioner (required for EN Certification) 3.3.2.6, 3.4.4.1
Sections 3.3.2.6,
86C External zero air scrubber 9.1.2.1, 11.3.7, and
11.3.7.1, Table 11-1
Special Features Built in features, software activated
Maintenance Mode Switch, located inside the instrument, places
the analyzer in maintenance mode where it can continue sampling,
yet ignore calibration, diagnostic, and reset instrument commands. (TAPI Tech
N/A
This feature is of particular use for instruments connected to Support)
Multidrop or Hessen protocol networks.
Call Customer Service for activation.
Second Language Switch activates an alternate set of display
messages in a language other than the instrument’s default
(TAPI Tech
N/A language.
Support)
Call Customer Service for a specially programmed Disk on Module containing
the second language.
Dilution Ratio Option allows the user to compensate for diluted
sample gas, such as in continuous emission monitoring (CEM) where
N/A the quality of gas in a smoke stack is being tested and the sampling Section 5.4.3.5
method used to remove the gas from the stack dilutes the gas.
Call Customer Service for activation.
18 06858F DCN8038
2. SPECIFICATIONS, APPROVALS, & COMPLIANCE
This section presents specifications for the T200, Agency approvals, EPA designation,
and CE mark and safety compliance.
2.1. SPECIFICATIONS
Table 2-1 presents the instrument’s parameters and the specifications that each meets.
Table 2-1: T200 Basic Unit Specifications

Parameter Specification
Min/Max Range Min: 0-50 ppb Full Scale
(Physical Analog Output) Max: 0-20,000 ppb Full Scale (selectable, independent NO, NO2, NOx ranges and
auto ranges supported)
Measurement Units ppb, ppm, µg/m3, mg/m3 (selectable)
Zero Noise1 < 0.2 ppb (RMS)
Span Noise1 < 0.5% of reading (RMS) above 50 ppb or 0.2 ppb, whichever is greater
Lower Detectable Limit 2 0.4 ppb
Zero Drift < 0.5 ppb (at constant temperature and voltage) /24 hours
Span Drift < 0.5% of Full Scale (at constant temperature and voltage) /24 hours
Lag Time1 20 seconds
Rise/Fall Time1 <60 seconds to 95%
Linearity 1% of full scale / 24 hours
Precision 0.5% of reading above 50 ppb
Sample Flow Rate 500 cm3/min ± 10%
AC Power Rating Typical Power Consumption
110-120 V~ 60 Hz 3.0 A 100 W
220-240 V~ 50/60 Hz 3.0 A 110 W
Power, Ext Pump 100 V~, 50/60 Hz 3.25 A
115 V~, 60 Hz 3.0 A
220-240 V~, 50/60 Hz 2.5 A
10V, 5V, 1V, 0.1V (selectable)
Analog Output Ranges
All Ranges with 5% Under/Over Range
Analog Output Resolution 1 part in 4096 of selected full-scale voltage
Recorder Offset ± 10%
06858F DCN8038 19
Specifications, Approvals, & Compliance Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual
Parameter Specification
Standard I/O 1 Ethernet: 10/100Base-T
2 RS-232 (300 – 115,200 baud)
2 USB device ports
8 opto-isolated digital status outputs (7 defined, 1 spare)
6 opto-isolated digital control inputs (4 defined, 2 spar)
4 analog outputs
Optional I/O 1 USB com port
1 RS485
8 analog inputs (0-10V, 12-bit)
4 digital alarm outputs
Multidrop RS232
3 4-20mA current outputs
Dimensions H x W x D 7" x 17" x 23.5" (178mm x 432 mm x 597 mm)
Weight Analyzer: 40 lbs (18 kg)
External Pump Pack: 15 lbs (7 kg)
Operating Temperature Range 5 - 40 °C (with EPA equivalency)
Humidity Range 0-95% RH non-condensing
Environmental Conditions Installation Category (Over voltage Category) II Pollution Degree 2
Intended for Indoor Use Only at Altitudes ≤ 2000m
1 As defined by the US EPA.
2 Defined as twice the zero noise level by the US EPA.
2.2. EPA REFERENCE DESIGNATION

Teledyne API’s T200 nitrogen oxides analyzer is designated by the US EPA as an
automated reference method (Number RFNA-1194-099) for NO2 measurement, as
defined in 40 CFR Part 53. The official List of Designated Reference and Equivalent
Methods is published in the U.S. Federal Register:
http://www3.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/criteria.html, and specifies the instrument’s settings and
configurations.
2.3. APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS

The Teledyne API Model T200 analyzer was tested and certified for Safety and
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC). This section presents the compliance statements
for those requirements and directives.
2.3.1. SAFETY
IEC 61010-1:2010 (3rd Edition), Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use.
CE: 2006/95/EC, Low-Voltage Directive
2.3.2. EMC
EN 61326-1 (IEC 61326-1), Class A Emissions/Industrial Immunity
FCC 47 CFR Part 15B, Class A Emissions
CE: 2004/108/EC, Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
20 06858F DCN8038
Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual Specifications, Approvals, & Compliance
2.3.3. OTHER TYPE CERTIFICATIONS

MCERTS: Sira MC 050068/11
EN 14211 – Ambient Air Measurement for NO2
EN 15267 – Air Quality – Ambient Air Automated Measuring Systems
For additional certifications, please contact Technical Support:
Phone: 858-657-9800
Fax: 858-657-9816
06858F DCN8038 21
Specifications, Approvals, & Compliance Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual
22 06858F DCN8038
3. GETTING STARTED
This section addresses the procedures for unpacking the instrument and inspecting for
damage, presents clearance specifications for proper ventilation, introduces the
instrument layout, then presents the procedures for getting started: making electrical and
pneumatic connections, and conducting an initial function and calibration check.
3.1. UNPACKING THE T200 ANALYZER
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury, always use two persons to lift and carry the T200.

Printed Circuit Assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too
small to be felt by the human nervous system. Failure to use Electro-Static
Discharge (ESD) protection when working with electronic assemblies will void
the instrument warranty. Refer to the manual, Fundamentals of ESD, PN 04786,
which can be downloaded from our website at http://www.teledyne-api.com
under Help Center > Product Manuals in the Special Manuals section.
CAUTION!
Do not operate this instrument until you’ve removed dust plugs from SAMPLE
and EXHAUST ports on the rear panel.
Note Teledyne API recommends that you store shipping containers/materials for
future use if/when the instrument should be returned to the factory for repair
and/or calibration service. See Warranty section in this manual and shipping
procedures on our Website at http://www.teledyne-api.com under Customer
Support > Return Authorization.
06858F DCN8038 23
Getting Started Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual
Verify that there is no apparent external shipping damage. If damage has occurred,
please advise the shipper first, then Teledyne API.
Included with your analyzer is a printed record of the final performance characterization
performed on your instrument at the factory. This record, titled Final Test and
Validation Data Sheet (P/N 04490) is an important quality assurance and calibration
record for this instrument. It should be placed in the quality records file for this
instrument.
With no power to the unit, carefully removed the top cover of the analyzer and check for
internal shipping damage by carrying out the following steps:
1. Carefully remove the top cover of the analyzer and check for internal shipping
damage.
a. Remove the setscrew located in the top, center of the Front panel.
b. Slide the cover backwards until it clears the analyzer’s front bezel.
c. Lift the cover straight up.
2. Inspect the interior of the instrument to ensure all circuit boards and other
components are in good shape and properly seated.
3. Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic hoses
to ensure they are firmly and properly seated.
4. Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed.
These are listed on the paperwork accompanying the analyzer.
WARNING – ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Never disconnect PCAs, wiring harnesses or electronic subassemblies

while under power.
3.1.1. VENTILATION CLEARANCE

Whether the analyzer is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack, be sure to
leave sufficient ventilation clearance.
Table 3-1: Ventilation Clearance

MINIMUM REQUIRED
AREA
CLEARANCE
Back of the instrument 10 cm / 4 in
Sides of the instrument 2.5 cm / 1 in
Above and below the instrument 2.5 cm / 1 in
See Section 1.3 of this manual for various rack mount kit options are available for this
analyzer. Refer to for more information.
24 06858F DCN8038
Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual Getting Started
3.2. INSTRUMENT LAYOUT

Instrument layout shows front and rear panels and internal chassis.
3.2.1. FRONT PANEL

Figure 3-1 shows the analyzer’s front panel layout, followed by a close-up of the display
screen in Figure 3-2, which is described in Table 3-2. The two USB ports on the front
panel are provided for the connection of peripheral devices:
• plug-in mouse (not included) to be used as an alternative to the touchscreen
interface
• thumb drive (not included) to download updates to instruction software (contact
TAPI Technical Support for information).
Figure 3-1: Front Panel Layout
06858F DCN8038 25
Figure 3-2: Display Screen and Touch Control
The front panel interface shows a splash screen and other initialization indicators before
the main display appears, similar to Figure 3-2 above. The LEDs on the display screen
indicate the Sample, Calibration and Fault states; also on the screen is the gas
concentration field (Conc), which displays real-time readouts for the primary gases, NO,
NO2, and NOx, and for the secondary gas if installed. The display screen also shows
what mode the analyzer is currently in (Mode field), as well as messages and data
(Param field). Along the bottom of the screen is a row of touch control buttons; only
those that are currently applicable will have a label. Table 3-2 provides detailed
information for each component of the screen.

Do not use hard-surfaced instruments such as pens to touch the control buttons.
26 06858F DCN8038
Table 3-2: Display Screen and Touch Control Description
Field Description/Function
Status LEDs indicating the states of Sample, Calibration and Fault, as follows:
Name Color State Definition
Off Unit is not operating in sample mode, DAS is disabled.
On Sample Mode active; Front Panel Display being updated; DAS data
SAMPLE Green being stored.
Blinking Unit is operating in sample mode, front panel display being updated,
DAS hold-off mode is ON, DAS disabled
Off Auto Cal disabled
CAL Yellow On Auto Cal enabled
Blinking Unit is in calibration mode
Off No warnings exist
FAULT Red
Blinking Warnings exist
Displays the actual concentration of the sample gas currently being measured by the analyzer in the
Conc
currently selected units of measure.
Mode Displays the name of the analyzer’s current operating mode
Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages, operational data, test function
Param
values and response messages during interactive tasks.
Control Buttons Displays dynamic, context sensitive labels on each button, which is blank when inactive until applicable.
Figure 3-3 shows how the front panel display is mapped to the menu charts illustrated in
this manual. The Mode, Param (parameters), and Conc (gas concentration) fields in the
display screen are represented across the top row of each menu chart. The eight touch
control buttons along the bottom of the display screen are represented in the bottom
row of each menu chart.
06858F DCN8038 27
Figure 3-3: Display/Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts
Note The menu charts in this manual contain condensed representations of the
analyzer’s display during the various operations being described. These menu
charts are not intended to be exact visual representations of the actual display.
28 06858F DCN8038
3.2.2. REAR PANEL
Figure 3-4: Rear Panel Layout – Base Unit
Table 3-3 provides a description of each component on the rear panel.
06858F DCN8038 29
Table 3-3: Rear Panel Description
Component Function
cooling fan Pulls ambient air into chassis through side vents and exhausts through rear.
Connector for three-prong cord to apply AC power to the analyzer.
AC power
CAUTION! The cord’s power specifications (specs) MUST comply with the power
connector
specs on the analyzer’s rear panel Model number label
Model/specs label Identifies the analyzer model number and provides power specs
TO CONV (not used)
FROM CONV (not used)
MULTI (not used)
TO DRYER (not used)
Outlet for internal sample gas dryer; connect to external zero air scrubber (for IZS options
FROM DRYER only).
Connect a gas line from the source of sample gas here.
SAMPLE Calibration gases can also enter here on units without zero/span/shutoff valve options
installed.
Connect an exhaust gas line of not more than 10 meters long here that leads outside the
EXHAUST shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument. The line must be ¼” tubing or
greater.
On units with zero/span/shutoff valves option installed, connect a gas line to the source of
SPAN 1 calibrated span gas here.
SPAN2/VENT On units with pressurized span valve option, used for venting.
Internal Zero Air: On units with zero/span/shutoff valves option installed but no internal
ZERO AIR zero air scrubber attach a gas line to the source of zero air here.
RX TX LEDs indicate receive (RX) and transmit (TX) activity on the when blinking.
COM 2 Serial communications port for RS-232 or RS-485.
RS-232 Serial communications port for RS-232 only.
Switch to select either data terminal equipment or data communication equipment during
DCE DTE RS-232 communication.
STATUS For outputs to devices such as Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs).
ANALOG OUT For voltage or current loop outputs to a strip chart recorder and/or a data logger.
CONTROL IN For remotely activating the zero and span calibration modes.
ALARM Option for concentration alarms and system warnings.
ETHERNET Connector for network or Internet remote communication, using Ethernet cable
Option for external voltage signals from other instrumentation and for logging these
ANALOG IN signals
USB Connector for direct connection to laptop computer, using USB cable.
Model Label Includes voltage and frequency specifications
30 06858F DCN8038
3.2.3. INTERNAL CHASSIS LAYOUT

Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6 show internal chassis configurations with different options.
Figure 3-5: Internal Layout – Top View with IZS Option
06858F DCN8038 31
Figure 3-6: Internal Layout - Top View Showing Other Options
32 06858F DCN8038
3.3. CONNECTIONS AND SETUP

This section presents the electrical (Section 3.3.1) and pneumatic (Section 3.3.2)
connections for setup and preparing the instrument for operation.
3.3.1. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Note To maintain compliance with EMC standards, cable length must be no greater
than 3 meters for all I/O connections, which include Analog In, Analog Out, Status
Out, Control In, Ethernet/LAN, USB, RS-232, and RS-485.
3.3.1.1. CONNECTING POWER

Attach the power cord to the analyzer and plug it into a power outlet capable of carrying
at least 10 A current at your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a functioning earth
ground.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
High Voltages are present inside the analyzers case.
Power connection must have functioning ground connection.
Do not defeat the ground wire on power plug.
Turn off analyzer power before disconnecting or connecting electrical
subassemblies.
Do not operate with cover off.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to your analyzer, ensure that the AC power voltage
matches the voltage indicated on the analyzer’s model/specs label (Figure
3-4) before plugging the T200 into line power.
06858F DCN8038 33
3.3.1.2. CONNECTING ANALOG INPUTS (OPTION)

The Analog In connector is used for connecting external voltage signals from other
instrumentation (such as meteorological instruments) and for logging these signals in the
analyzer’s internal DAS. The input voltage range for each analog input is 0-10 VDC and
input impedance is nominally 20kΩ in parallel with 0.1µF.
Figure 3-7: Analog In Connector
Pin assignments for the Analog In connector are presented in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4: Analog Input Pin Assignments

DAS
PIN DESCRIPTION
PARAMETER1
1 Analog input # 1 AIN 1
GND Analog input Ground N/A
1 See Section 7 for details on setting up the DAS.
3.3.1.3. CONNECTING ANALOG OUTPUTS
The rear panel Analog Output channels A1, A2 and A3 are assigned to the NOx, NO and
NO2 concentration signals of the analyzer with a default output voltage setting of 0 to 5
VDC and a reporting range of 0 to 500 ppb.
A4 is assigned a user-selected diagnostic test function (see Section 5.9.4), also with a 0
to 5 VDC default analog output voltage setting.An optional Current Loop output is
available for A1, A2 and A3 only.
To access these signals attach a strip chart recorder and/or data-logger to the appropriate
analog output connections on the rear panel of the analyzer. Pin-outs for the analog
output connector are:
34 06858F DCN8038
ANALOG OUT
A1 A2 A3 A4
+ - + - + - + -
Figure 3-8: Analog Output Connector
Table 3-5: Analog Output Pin Assignments

STANDARD CURRENT
PIN ANALOG OUTPUT SIGNAL
VOLTAGE OUTPUT LOOP OPTION
1 V Out I Out +
A1 NOx Concentration
2 Ground I Out -
3 V Out I Out +
A2 NO Concentration
4 Ground I Out -
3 V Out I Out +
A3 NO2 Concentration
4 Ground I Out -
7 V Out Not Available
A41 TEST CHANNEL
8 Ground Not Available
To change the settings for the analog output channels, see Section 5.9.2.
3.3.1.4. CURRENT LOOP ANALOG OUTPUTS (OPTION 41) SETUP

If your analyzer had this option installed at the factory, there are no further connectons
to be made. Otherwise, it can be installed as a retrofit for each of the analog outputs.
This option converts the DC voltage analog output to a current signal with 0-20 mA
output current, which can be scaled to any set of limits within that 0-20 mA range.
However, most current loop applications call for either 2-20 mA or 4-20 mA range. All
current loop outputs have a +5% over-range. Ranges with the lower limit set to more
than 1 mA (e.g., 2-20 or 4-20 mA) also have a -5% under-range.
Figure 3-9 provides installation instructions and illustrates a sample configuration of one
current output combined with two voltage outputs . Next are instructions for converting
current loop analog outputs to standard 0-to-5 VDC outputs. To calibrate or adjust these
outputs see Section 5.9.3.7.
CAUTION – AVOID INVALIDATING WARRANTY

Servicing or handling of circuit components requires electrostatic discharge
protection, i.e. ESD grounding straps, mats and containers. Failure to use ESD
protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument
warranty. For information on preventing ESD damage, refer to the manual,
Fundamentals of ESD, PN 04786, which can be downloaded from our website at
http://www.teledyne-api.com under Help Center > Product Manuals in the Special
Manuals section.
06858F DCN8038 35
Figure 3-9: Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard
CONVERTING CURRENT LOOP ANALOG OUTPUTS TO STANDARD VOLTAGE

OUTPUTS
To convert an output configured for current loop operation to the standard 0 to 5 VDC
output operation:
1. Turn off power to the analyzer.
2. If a recording device was connected to the output being modified, disconnect it.
3. Remove the top cover.
• Remove the set screw located in the top, center of the rear panel.
• Remove the screws fastening the top cover to the unit (one per side).
• Slide the cover back and lift the cover straight up.
4. Remove the screw holding the current loop option to the motherboard.
5. Disconnect the current loop option PCA from the appropriate connector on the
motherboard (see Figure 3-9).
6. Each connector, J19 and J23, requires two shunts. Place one shunt on the two left
most pins and the second shunt on the two adjacent pins (see Figure 3-9).
7. Reattach the top case to the analyzer.
The analyzer is now ready to have a voltage-sensing recording device attached to that
output.
Calibrate the analog output as described in Section 5.9.3.2.
36 06858F DCN8038
3.3.1.5. CONNECTING THE STATUS OUTPUTS

The status outputs report analyzer conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors that
sink up to 50 mA of DC current. These outputs can be used to interface with devices
that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs).
Each status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40 VDC. All of the
emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at pin D (see Figure 3-10).

Most PLC’s have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input will
draw from an external device. When connecting to a unit that does not have this
feature, an external dropping resistor must be used to limit the current through
the transistor output to less than 50 mA. At 50 mA, the transistor will drop
approximately 1.2V from its collector to emitter.
The status outputs are through a 12-pin connector on the analyzer’s rear panel labeled
STATUS (Figure 3-4). Pin-outs for this connector are:
STATUS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D +
ZERO CAL
HIGH RANGE
DIAG MODE
SYSTEM OK
CONC VALID
SPAN CAL
O2 CAL
+5V to external device
Figure 3-10: Status Output Connector
Table 3-6: Status Output Pin Assignments

OUTPUT # STATUS DEFINITION CONDITION
1 SYSTEM OK On if no faults are present.
On if O3 concentration measurement is valid.
2 CONC VALID If the O3 concentration measurement is invalid, this bit is OFF.
3 HIGH RANGE On if unit is in high range of DUAL or AUTO Range Modes.
4 ZERO CAL On whenever the instrument is in CALZ mode.
5 SPAN CAL On whenever the instrument is in CALS mode.
6 DIAG MODE On whenever the instrument is in DIAGNOSTIC mode.
7-8 SPARE
D Emitter BUS The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 to 8 are bussed together.
SPARE
+ DC Power + 5 VDC, 300 mA source maximum
The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies. This
Digital Ground
connection should be used as the ground return when +5VDC power is used.
06858F DCN8038 37
3.3.1.6. CONNECTING THE CONTROL INPUTS

Three digital control inputs, through the rear panel CONTROL IN connector, can be
used to remotely activate the zero and span calibration modes (see Section 9.1.2.4).
Energize the Control Inputs either bythe internal +5V available from the pin labeled “+”
(more convenient), or by a separate external 5 VDC power supply (ensures that these
inputs are truly isolated). Refer to Figure 3-11.
CONTROL IN CONTROL IN
A B C D E F U + A B C D E F U +
ZERO
SPAN
ZERO
SPAN
- 5 VDC Power +
Supply
Local Power Connections External Power Connections
Figure 3-11: Energizing the T200 Control Inputs
Table 3-7: Control Input Pin Assignments

Status
Input # ON Condition
Definition
REMOTE The Analyzer is placed in Zero Calibration mode. The mode field of the display will
A
ZERO CAL read ZERO CAL R.
REMOTE The Analyzer is placed in Lo Span Calibration mode. The mode field of the display will
B
SPAN CAL read SPAN CAL R.
C, D, E
Spare
&F
The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC Power Supplies (same as chassis
Digital Ground
ground).
External Power
U Input pin for +5 VDC required to activate pins A – F.
input
Internally generated 5V DC power. To activate inputs A – F, place a jumper between
+ 5 VDC output this pin and the “U” pin. The maximum amperage through this port is 300 mA
(combined with the analog output supply, if used).
38 06858F DCN8038
3.3.1.7. CONCENTRATION ALARM RELAY (OPTION 61)

The concentration relay option provides four (4) “dry contact” relays on the rear panel
(Figure 3-12), each with 3 pins: Common (C), Normally Open (NO), and Normally
Closed (NC).
Figure 3-12: Concentration Alarm Relay
Alarm 1 “System OK 2”
Alarm 2 “Conc 1”
Alarm 3 “Conc 2”
Alarm 4 “Range Bit”
“ALARM 1” RELAY
Alarm 1 which is “System OK 2” (system OK 1, is the status bit) is in the energized
state when the instrument is “OK” & there are no warnings. If there is a warning active
or if the instrument is put into the “DIAG” mode, Alarm 1 will change states. This
alarm has “reverse logic” meaning that a meter across the Common & Normally Closed
pins on the connector will show that it is OPEN when the instrument is OK. This is so
that if the instrument should turn off or lose power, it will change states and can be
recorded with a data logger or other recording device.
“ALARM 2” RELAY & “ALARM 3” RELAY
The “Alarm 2 Relay” is associated with the “Concentration Alarm 1” set point in the
software, and the “Alarm 3 Relay” on the rear panel is associated with the
“Concentration Alarm 2” set point in the software.
Alarm 2 Relay NO Alarm 1 = xxx PPM

Alarm 3 Relay NO2 Alarm 2 = xxx PPM
Alarm 2 Relay NOX Alarm 1 = xxx PPM
Alarm 3 Relay NOX Alarm 2 = xxx PPM
The Alarm 2 Relay will be turned on any time the concentration set-point is exceeded
and will return to its normal state when the concentration value returns below the
concentration set-point.
Although the relay on the rear panel is a NON-Latching alarm that resets when the
concentration returns below the alarm set point, the warning on the front panel display
will remain latched until it is cleared. Clear the front panel warning on by either
touching the CLR menu button or going through the serial port.
06858F DCN8038 39
In instruments that sample more than one gas type, there could be more than one gas
type triggering the Concentration 1 Alarm (“Alarm 2” Relay). For example, the T200
instrument can monitor both NO & NO2 gas. The software for this instrument allows
configuring the alarms with 2 alarm levels for each gas.
NO Alarm 1 = 20 PPM
NO Alarm 2 = 100 PPM
NO2 Alarm 1 = 20 PPM
In this example, NO Alarm 1 & NO2 Alarm 1 will both be associated with the “Alarm 2”
relay on the rear panel, allowing multiple alarm levels for individual gases.
A more likely configuration for this would be to put one gas on the “Alarm 1” relay and
the other gas on the “Alarm 2” relay.
NO Alarm 1 = 20 PPM
NO Alarm 2 = Disabled
NO2 Alarm 1 = Disabled
“ALARM 4” RELAY
This relay is connected to the “range bit”. If the instrument is configured for “Auto
Range” and the instrument goes up into the high range, it will turn this relay on.
3.3.1.8. CONNECTING THE COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES

The analyzer has connectors for remote communications interfaces: Ethernet, USB,
RS-232, RS-232 Multidrop and RS-485 (each described here). In addition to using the
appropriate cables, each type of communication method must be configured using the
SETUP>COM menu (see Sections 5.7 and 6).
ETHERNET CONNECTION
For network or Internet communication with the analyzer, connect an Ethernet cable
from the analyzer’s rear panel Ethernet interface connector to an Ethernet port. Although
the analyzer is shipped with DHCP enabled by default (Section 6.5.2), it should be
manually assigned a static IP address.
Configuration: (manual, i.e., static) Section 6.5.1
40 06858F DCN8038
USB (OPTION) CONNECTION

The USB option is for direct communication between the analyzer and a PC; connect a
USB cable between the analyzer and a computer USB port. Baud rates must match:
check the baud rate on either the computer or the instrument and change the other to
match (see Section 6.2.2). This USB connection can only be used when the COM2 port
is not in use except for RS-232 Multidrop communication.
Configuration: Section 6.6
Note If this option is installed, the rear panel COM2 port cannot be used for anything
other than Multidrop communication.
RS-232 CONNECTION
For RS-232 communications with data terminal equipment (DTE) or with data
communication equipment (DCE) connect either a DB9-female-to-DB9-female cable
(Teledyne API part number WR000077) or a DB9-female-to-DB25-male cable (Option
60A, Section 1.3), as applicable, from the analyzer’s RS-232 port to the device. Adjust
the DCE-DTE switch (Figure 3-4) to select DTE or DCE as appropriate (Section 6.1).
Configuration: Section 6.3 and Section 6.7.2 (for Hessen protocol)

Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may
incorporate internal wiring that makes the link inoperable. Check cables acquired
from sources other than Teledyne API for pin assignments (Figure 3-13) before
using.
06858F DCN8038 41
Figure 3-13 Rear Panel Connector Pin-Outs for RS-232 Mode
The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring
harness to two 10-pin connectors on the CPU card, J11 and J12 (Figure 3-14).
42 06858F DCN8038
Figure 3-14: Default Pin Assignments for CPU COM Port Connector (RS-232).
Teledyne API offers two mating cables, one of which should be applicable for your use.
• P/N WR000077, a DB-9 female to DB-9 female cable, 6 feet long. Allows
connection of the serial ports of most personal computers.
• P/N WR000024, a DB-9 female to DB-25 male cable. Allows connection to the
most common styles of modems (e.g. Hayes-compatible) and code activated
switches.
Both cables are configured with straight-through wiring and should require no additional
adapters.
Note Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may

incorporate internal wiring that makes the link inoperable. Check cables
acquired from sources other than Teledyne API for pin assignments before
using.
To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem, there
are activity indicators just above the RS-232 port. Once a cable is connected between
the analyzer and a computer or modem, both the red and green LEDs should be on.
• If the lights are not lit, locate the small switch on the rear panel to switch it
between DTE and DCE modes.
• If both LEDs are still not illuminated, ensure that the cable properly constructed.
Received from the factory, the analyzer is set up to emulate an RS-232 DCE device.
06858F DCN8038 43
RS-232 (COM1): RS-232 (fixed) DB-9 male connector

• Baud rate: 115200 bits per second (baud)
• Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit
• Parity: None
COM2: RS-232 (configurable to RS 485), DB-9 female connector

• Baud rate:19200 bits per second (baud)
• Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit
• Parity: None
RS-232 MULTIDROP (OPTION 62) CONNECTION

When the RS-232 Multidrop option is installed, connection adjustments and
configuration through the menu system are required. This section provides instructions
for the internal connection adjustments, then for external connections, and ends with
instructions for menu-driven configuration.
Note Because the RS-232 Multidrop option uses both the RS232 and COM2 DB9
connectors on the analyzer’s rear panel to connect the chain of instruments,
COM2 port is no longer available for separate RS-232 or RS-485 operation.

Printed Circuit Assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too
small to be felt by the human nervous system. Failure to use ESD protection
when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty. For
information on preventing ESD damage, refer to the manual, Fundamentals of
ESD, PN 04786, which can be downloaded from our website at
http://www.teledyne-api.com under Help Center > Product Manuals in the
Special Manuals section.
In each instrument with the Multidrop option there is a shunt jumpering two pins on the
serial Multidrop and LVDS printed circuit assembly (PCA), as shown in Figure 3-15.
This shunt must be removed from all instruments except that designated as last in the
multidrop chain, which must remain terminated. This requires powering off and opening
each instrument and making the following adjustments:
1. With NO power to the instrument, remove its top cover and lay the rear panel open
for access to the Multidrop/LVDS PCA, which is seated on the CPU.
2. On the Multidrop/LVDS PCA’s JP2 connector, remove the shunt that jumpers Pins
21 ↔ 22 as indicated in. (Do this for all but the last instrument in the chain where
the shunt should remain at Pins 21 ↔ 22).
3. Check that the following cable connections are made in all instruments (again refer
to Figure 3-15):
• J3 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA to the CPU’s COM1 connector
(Note that the CPU’s COM2 connector is not used in Multidrop)
• J4 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA to J12 on the motherboard
• J1 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCS to the front panel LCD
44 06858F DCN8038
Figure 3-15: Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode
(Note: If you are adding an instrument to the end of a previously configured chain,
remove the shunt between Pins 21 ↔ 22 of JP2 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA in the
instrument that was previously the last instrument in the chain.)
4. Close the instrument.
5. Referring to Figure 3-16 use straight-through DB9 male à DB9 female cables to
interconnect the host RS232 port to the first analyzer’s RS232 port; then from the
first analyzer’s COM2 port to the second analyzer’s RS232 port; from the second
analyzer’s COM2 port to the third analyzer’s RS232 port, etc., connecting in this
fashion up to eight analyzers, subject to the distance limitations of the RS-232
standard.
6. On the rear panel of each analyzer, adjust the DCE DTE switch so that the green
and the red LEDs (RX and TX) of the COM1 connector (labeled RS232) are both lit.
(Ensure you are using the correct RS-232 cables internally wired specifically for RS-
232 communication; see Table 1-1, “Communication Cables” and Section 3.3.1.8:
Connecting the Communications Interfaces, “RS-232 Connection”).
06858F DCN8038 45
Female DB9
Host
Male DB9
RS-232 port
Analyzer Analyzer Analyzer Last Analyzer

COM2 COM2 COM2 COM2
RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232
Ensure jumper is
installed between
JP2 pins 21 ↔ 22 in
last instrument of
multidrop chain.
Figure 3-16: RS-232-Multidrop PCA Host/Analyzer Interconnect Diagram
7. BEFORE communicating from the host, power on the instruments and check that
the user-selectable Machine ID code is unique for each (Section 5.7.1).
a. In the SETUP Mode menu go to SETUP>MORE>COMM>ID. The default ID is
typically the model number or “0”.
b. to change the identification number, press the button below the digit to be
changed.
c. Press/select ENTER to accept the new ID for that instrument.
8. Next, in the SETUP>MORE>COMM>COM1 menu (do not use the COM2 menu for
multidrop), edit the COM1 MODE parameter as follows: press/select EDIT and set
only QUIET MODE, COMPUTER MODE, and MULTIDROP MODE to ON. Do not
change any other settings.
9. Press/select ENTER to accept the changed settings, and ensure that COM1 MODE
now shows 35.
10. Press/select SET> to go to the COM1 BAUD RATE menu and ensure it reads the
same for all instruments (edit as needed so that all instruments are set at the same
baud rate).
Note The (communication) Host instrument can address only one instrument at a
time, each by its unique ID (see step 7 above).
Note Teledyne API recommends setting up the first link, between the Host and the
first analyzer, and testing it before setting up the rest of the chain.
46 06858F DCN8038
RS-485 (OPTION) CONNECTION

As delivered from the factory, COM2 is configured for RS-232 communications. This
port can be reconfigured for operation as a non-isolated, half-duplex RS-485 port. Using
COM2 for RS-485 communication will disable the USB port. To reconfigure this port
for RS-485 communication, please contact the factory.
3.3.2. PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS

This section provides pneumatic connection information and important information
about the gases required for accurate calibration (Section 3.3.2.1); it also illustrates the
analyzer’s pneumatic layouts in basic configuration and with options.
Before making the pneumatic connections, carefully note the following cautionary and
additional messages:

Do not vent calibration gas or sample gas into enclosed areas.

In units with a permeation tube option installed, vacuum pump must be
connected and powered on to maintain constant gas flow though the analyzer at
all times. Insufficient gas flow allows gas to build up to levels that will
contaminate the instrument or present a safety hazard to personnel.
Remove the permeation tube when taking the analyzer out of operation and store
in sealed container (use the original container that the tube was shipped in).
(See Figure 3-6 for location and Section 11.3.6 for instructions on how to remove
the perm tube when the unit is not in operation).

Sample and calibration gases should only come into contact with PTFE tubing.
06858F DCN8038 47

Venting Pressurized Gas:
In applications where any gas (span gas, zero air supply, sample gas) is received
from a pressurized manifold, a vent must be provided to equalize the gas with
ambient atmospheric pressure before it enters the analyzer to ensure that the
gases input do not exceed the maximum inlet pressure of the analyzer, as well as
to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects. These vents should be:
• at least 0.2m long
• no more than 2m long
• vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument
Dust Plugs:
Remove dust plugs from rear panel exhaust and supply line fittings before
powering on/operating instrument. These plugs should be kept for reuse in the
event of future storage or shipping to prevent debris from entering the
pneumatics.
Leak Check:
IMPORTANT
Run a leak check once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been
made; check all pneumatic fittings for leaks using the procedures defined in
Section 11.3.12.1.
3.3.2.1. ABOUT ZERO AIR AND CALIBRATION (SPAN) GAS

Zero air and span gas are required for accurate calibration.
Note Zero air and span gases must be supplied at twice the instrument’s specified
gas flow rate. Therefore, the T200 zero and span gases should be supplied to
their respective inlets in excess of 1000 cc3/min (500 cc3/min x 2).
ZERO AIR
Zero air, or zero calibration gas, is similar in chemical composition to the measured
medium but without the gas to be measured by the analyzer.
For the T200 this means zero air should be devoid of NO, NO2, CO2, NH3, and H2O
vapor.
Note Moderate amounts of NH3 and H2O can be removed from the sample gas stream
by installing the optional sample gas dryer/scrubber (see Section 3.3.2.6).
• If your application is not a measurement in ambient air, the zero calibration gas
should be matched to the composition of the gas being measured.
• Pure nitrogen (N2) could be used as a zero gas for applications where NOX is
measured in nitrogen.
• If your analyzer is equipped with an external zero air scrubber option, it is capable
of creating zero air from ambient air.
• For analyzers without the external zero air scrubber, a zero air generator, such as
those offered by Teledyne API, can be used. Please visit the company website for
more information.
48 06858F DCN8038
CALIBRATION (SPAN) GAS

Calibration gas is specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of
gas being measured at near full scale of the desired reporting range. To measure NOX
with the T200, it is recommended that the span gas have an NO concentration equal to
80% of the measurement range for your application.
EXAMPLE:
• If the application is to measure NOX in ambient air between 0 ppm and 500 ppb, an
appropriate span gas would be 400 ppb.
• If the application is to measure NOX in ambient air between 0 ppm and 1000 ppb,
an appropriate span gas would be 800 ppb.
Even though NO gas in nitrogen could be used as a span gas, the matrix of the balance
gas is different and may cause interference problems or yield incorrect calibrations.
• The same applies to gases that contain high concentrations of other compounds
(for example, CO2 or H2O).
• The span gas should match all concentrations of all gases of the measured medium
as closely as possible.
Cylinders of calibrated NOx and NO gas traceable to NIST standards specifications (also
referred to as EPA protocol calibration gases or Standard Reference Materials) are
commercially available.
SPAN GAS FOR MULTIPOINT CALIBRATION
Some applications, such as EPA monitoring, require a multipoint calibration where span
gases of different concentrations are needed. We recommend using an NO gas of higher
concentration combined with a gas dilution calibrator such as a Teledyne API 700-Series
Model. This type of calibrator mixes a high concentration gas with zero air to accurately
produce span gas of the desired concentration. Linearity profiles can be automated with
this model and run unattended overnight.
If a dynamic dilution system is used to dilute high concentration gas standards to low,
ambient concentrations, ensure that the NO concentration of the reference gas matches
the dilution range of the calibrator.
Choose the NO gas concentration so that the dynamic dilution system operates in its
mid-range and not at the extremes of its dilution capabilities.
EXAMPLE:
• A dilution calibrator with 10-10000 dilution ratio will not be able to accurately dilute a
5000 ppm NO gas to a final concentration of 500 ppb, as this would operate at the
very extreme dilution setting.
• A 100 ppm NO gas in nitrogen is much more suitable to calibrate the T200 analyzer
(dilution ratio of 222, in the mid-range of the system’s capabilities).
06858F DCN8038 49
3.3.2.2. BASIC CONNECTIONS FROM CALIBRATOR, WITHOUT AND WITH SPAN GAS
Source of
VENT here if input
SAMPLE GAS
is pressurized Removed during
calibration
MODEL T700
Calibrated NOX
at HIGH Span Gas Dilution

Concentration
Enclosure Wall
Calibrator
SAMPLE
MODEL 701
EXHAUST
Zero Gas
Generator Chassis
VENT
PUMP
Figure 3-17: Gas Line Connections from Calibrator – Basic T200 Configuration
50 06858F DCN8038
Source of
VENT here if input
SAMPLE GAS
calibration
Calibrated NOX
Concentration
Enclosure Wall
MODEL 701
at Span Zero Gas
Generator
3-way Valve
SAMPLE
Manual
Control Valve EXHAUST
Chassis
VENT
PUMP
Figure 3-18: Gas Line Connections from Bottled Span Gas – Basic T200 Configuration
For the T200 basic configuration, attach the following pneumatic lines:
SAMPLE GAS SOURCE
Connect a sample gas line to the SAMPLE inlet; ensure that
• PTFE tubing is used; minimum OD ¼”
• sample gas pressure equals ambient atmospheric pressure (1.0 psig)
• In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold and
the analyzer is not equipped with one of the T200’s pressurized span options, a
vent must be placed on the sample gas line. This vent line must be:
• no more than 10 meters long
CALIBRATION GAS SOURCES

• CAL GAS & ZERO AIR SOURCES: The source of calibration gas is also attached
to the SAMPLE inlet, but only when a calibration operation is actually being
performed.
• Use PTFE tubing; minimum OD ¼”.
06858F DCN8038 51
VENTING
To prevent back diffusion and pressure effects, both the span gas and zero air supply
lines should be:
• vented outside the enclosure
• minimum OD ¼”
• not less than 2 meters in length
• not greater than 10 meters in length
EXHAUST OUTLET
Attach an exhaust line to the EXHAUST outlet fitting. The exhaust line should be:
• of PTFE tubing; minimum OD ¼”
• maximum of 10 meters long
• vented outside the T200 analyzer’s enclosure
Note Once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been made, check all
pneumatic fittings for leaks using the procedures defined in Sections 11.3.12
(or 11.3.12.2 for detailed check if leak suspected).
52 06858F DCN8038
PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR BASIC CONFIGURATION
NO/NOX
VALVE
FLOW PRESSURE
SAMPLE COM
SENSOR PCA
NO
GAS INLET
NC SAMPLE VACUUM
PRESSURE PRESSURE
SENSOR SENSOR
NO2 O3 FLOW
Converter SENSOR
EXHAUST
GAS OUTLET
AUTOZERO
NO VALVE
NC
COM
O3 O3
Cleanser
GENERATOR
Orifice Dia.
0.010"
NOX Exhaust
Orifice Dia. Orifice Dia.

Scrubber
0.010" 0.004"
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
O3
PUMP
Destruct
PMT
Orifice Dia.
0.004"
Filter
OZONE DRYER
INSTRUMENT CHASSIS
Figure 3-19: Pneumatics, Basic Configuration
3.3.2.3. CONNECTIONS W/AMBIENT ZERO/AMBIENT SPAN (Z/S) VALVES (OPT 50A)

This valve package includes:
• two solenoid valves located inside the analyzer that allow the user to switch either
zero, span or sample gas to the instrument’s sensor
• two additional gas inlet ports (ZERO AIR and SPAN1)
06858F DCN8038 53
Figure 3-20: Rear Panel Layout with Z/S Valve Options (OPT 50A)
VENT here if input Source of

is pressurized SAMPLE Gas
VENT
MODEL 700
Gas Dilution
Enclosure Wall
Calibrator PUMP SAMPLE

Calibrated NOx
at HIGH Span
Concentration
EXHAUST
SPAN1
MODEL 701 ZERO AIR

Zero Gas
Generator
VENT
Figure 3-21: Gas Line Connections for T200 with Z/S Valves Option (OPT 50A)
54 06858F DCN8038
SAMPLE GAS SOURCE

Attach a sample inlet line to the SAMPLE inlet fitting.
• Use PTFE tubing; minimum O.D ¼”.
• Sample Gas pressure must equal ambient atmospheric pressure (no greater than
1.0 psig).
• In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold, a
vent must be placed on the sample gas line. This vent line must be no more than
10 meters long.

SPAN GAS Attach a gas line from the source of calibration gas (e.g. a Teledyne
API's T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator) to the SPAN1 inlet (see Figure
3-20). Use PTFE tubing; minimum O.D ¼”.
ZERO AIR Zero air is supplied by the zero air generator such as a Teledyne API's
M701. Attach a gas line from the source of zero air to the ZERO AIR
inlet.
VENTING
To prevent back diffusion and pressure effects, both the span gas and zero air supply
lines should be:
EXHAUST OUTLET
Attach an exhaust line to the EXHAUST OUTLET fitting. The exhaust line should be:
• ¼” PTFE tubing
• maximum 10 meters long
Note Once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been made, check all
pneumatic fittings for leaks using the procedures defined in Section 11.3.12.
For instructions on calibrating a T200 with this option installed, see Sections
9.2.3.2 and 9.4.
06858F DCN8038 55
PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR AMBIENT ZERO/AMBIENT SPAN VALVES (OPT 50A)
SAMPLE INSTRUMENT CHASSIS

GAS NO COM
INLET NC
SAMPLE/ CAL NO/NOX

VALVE VALVE
FLOW PRESSURE
SPAN NO COM SENSOR PCA
GAS NC SAMPLE VACUUM
INLET PRESSURE PRESSURE
SENSOR SENSOR
NO2 O3 FLOW
NC Converter SENSOR
ZERO GAS
NO COM
INLET
ZERO/SPAN
ZERO/SPAN VALVES OPTION
VALVE AUTOZERO
COM VALVE
Exhaust
Outlet NC
NO
O3 O3
Cleanser
GENERATOR
Orifice Dia.
0.010"
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
NOX Exhaust
0.010" 0.004"
Scrubber
O3
Destruct
PUMP
PMT
Orifice Dia.
0.004"
Filter
OZONE DRYER
Figure 3-22: Pneumatics with Zero/Span Valves OPT 50A
Table 3-8: Zero/Span Valves Operating States OPT 50A

VALVE PORT
MODE VALVE CONDITION
STATUS
Sample/Cal Open to SAMPLE inlet NO à COM
SAMPLE
Zero/Span Open to ZERO AIR inlet NO à COM
Sample/Cal Open to ZERO/SPAN Valve NC à COM
ZERO CAL
SPAN CAL
Zero/Span Open to SPAN inlet NC à COM
56 06858F DCN8038
3.3.2.4. CONNECTIONS W/AMBIENT ZERO/PRESSURIZED SPAN VALVES (OPT 50B)

This calibration valve package is appropriate for applications where Span Gas is being
supplied from a pressurized source such as bottled NIST SRM gases. This option
includes:
• a critical flow orifice and vent to maintain the span Gas supply at 1 ATM
• a shutoff valve to preserve the span gas source when it is not in use
• two solenoid valves for the user to switch either zero, span or sample gas to the
instrument’s sensor
• three additional gas inlet ports (ZERO AIR, SPAN and VENT)
Figure 3-23: Rear Panel Layout with Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span Valves OPT 50B
06858F DCN8038 57
VENT here if input SAMPLE Gas

is pressurized Source
Enclosure Wall
Calibrated NOX
at HIGH Span
Concentration
PUMP SAMPLE
EXHAUST
SPAN1 Chassis
SPAN2/VENT
ZERO AIR
Zero Air Scrubber
Figure 3-24: Gas Line Connection w/Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span Valves (OPT 50B)
SAMPLE GAS SOURCE

Attach a sample inlet line to the SAMPLE inlet fitting.
• Use PTFE tubing; minimum O.D ¼”.
• Sample Gas pressure must equal ambient atmospheric pressure (29.92 in-Hg).
• In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold, a
vent must be placed on the sample gas line. This vent line must be:
• no more than 10 meters long

SPAN GAS Attach a gas line from the pressurized source of calibration gas (e.g. a
bottle of NISTSRM gas) to the SPAN1 inlet. Use PTFE tubing, minimum
O.D ¼”.
ZERO AIR (the dual-stage zero Air Scrubber makes zero air)
VENTING
Attach a line to the SPAN2/VENT outlet. It should be:
58 06858F DCN8038
EXHAUST OUTLET
Attach an exhaust line to the EXHAUST outlet fitting. The exhaust line should be:
• a maximum of 10 meters long
PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR AMBIENT ZERO/PRESSURIZED SPAN (OPT 50B)
NO/NOX
VALVE
SAMPLE/ CAL NO COM
SAMPLE VALVE NC
GAS
INLET NO
NO2
COM
NOX Scrubber
ZERO GAS NO NC Converter

2-Stage
INLET COM
ZERO/SPAN NC
VALVE
BYPASS SPAN
GAS OUTLET
FLOW PRESSURE
SENSOR PCA
COM
PRESSURIZED SPAN
PRESSURIZED
SPAN GAS INLET NC
OPTION SAMPLE VACUUM
PRESSURE PRESSURE
NO
Orifice Dia. SENSOR SENSOR
DO NOT EXCEED 30 PSIG 0.013"
O3 FLOW
SENSOR
AUTOZERO
COM VALVE
NC
NO
O3 O3
SPAN GAS Cleanser
GENERATOR
Exhaust
Outlet

0.010" 0.004"
Orifice Dia.
0.010"
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
NOX Exhaust
Scrubber
O3
Destruct
PMT
PUMP
Orifice Dia.
0.004"
Filter OZONE DRYER INSTRUMENT CHASSIS
Figure 3-25: Pneumatics with Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span Valves (OPT 50B)
06858F DCN8038 59
Table 3-9: Valve Operating States OPT 50B installed

VALVE PORT
STATUS
SAMPLE
Span Shutoff Closed
Zero Air Shutoff Closed
ZERO CAL
Span Shutoff OPEN
Zero Air Shutoff1 Closed

SPAN CAL
Span Shutoff Closed
Zero Air Shutoff OPEN
3.3.2.5. ZERO SCRUBBER AND INTERNAL SPAN SOURCE (IZS) (OPT 50G)
The internal NO2 span gas generator and calibration valve option is intended for
applications where there is a need for frequent automated calibration checks without
access to an external source of span gas.
This valve package includes:
• a 2-stage external scrubber for producing zero air
• 50% Purafil Chemisorbant® (for conversion of NO àNO2)
• 50% charcoal (for removal of the NO2)
• a heated enclosure for a NO2 permeation tube
• This option package DOES NOT contain an actual permeation tube. See
Table 1-1 for information on specifying the correct permeation tube for each
application.
• a special desorber that removes all HNO3 from the calibration gas stream
• one additional gas inlet port (ZERO AIR)
• one additional gas outlet port (FROM DRYER)
• two internal valves for switching between the sample gas inlet and the output of the
zero/span subsystem
60 06858F DCN8038
Figure 3-26: Rear Panel Layout with Internal Span Source (IZS) OPT 50G
INTERNAL SPAN GAS GENERATION

The primary component of the internal span option is a permeation tube containing
liquid NO2. As zero air is passed over a permeable membrane on the end of the tube,
molecules of NO2 slowly pass through the membrane mixing with the zero air.
The resulting concentration of the NO2 span gas is determined by three factors:
• size of the membrane (the larger the area of the membrane, the more permeation
occurs)
• temperature of the NO2 (increasing the temperature of the permeation tube
increases the pressure inside the tube, thereby increasing the rate of permeation)
• flow rate of the zero air (if the previous two variables are constant, the permeation
rate of the NO2 into the zero air stream will be constant; therefore, a lower flow rate
of zero air produces higher concentrations of NO2)
In the Model T200 the permeation tube enclosure is heated to a constant 50° C (10°
above the maximum operating temperature of the instrument) in order to keep the
permeation rate constant. A thermistor measures the actual temperature and reports it to
the CPU for control feedback.
The flow rate of zero air across the permeation tube is maintained at 50 ± 10 cm³/min
by a critical flow orifice located in the analyzer’s exhaust manifold.
06858F DCN8038 61
NITRIC ACID AND THE CHEMISTRY OF NO2 PERMEATION TUBES

H2O reacts with NO2 to form HNO3 (nitric acid). The T200 mitigates this reaction by
passing the air supply for the span gas generator through a special dryer; however, the
permeable membrane of the NO2 tube will still allow H2O from the ambient
environment to slowly collect in the tube at increasingly higher concentrations. Over
time this results in the presence of HNO3 in the permeation tube which is exuded into
the T200’s pneumatics along with NO2.
HNO3 is a liquid at room temperature, so once the HNO3 is released by the permeation
tube, it condenses and collects along the T200’s wetted surfaces. While liquid HNO3
does not directly affect the quality of NOx measurements of the T200, it does give off
small amounts of gaseous HNO3 which is converted into NO by the T200’s NOx à NO
converter, resulting in an artificially high NO2 concentration by 8% to 12%. This is
particularly bothersome when the T200 is attempting to measure a zero point, such as
during calibration, since the NO2 concentration will only reach a true zero point once the
majority of the HNO3 coating the wetted surfaces has reverted to NO2 and this can take a
very long time.
To resolve this, the T200 includes a special HNO3 desorber, which eliminates any HNO3
given off by the permeation tube before it can be converted into NO by the analyzer’s
converter.
PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR ZERO SCRUBBER AND IZS (OPT 50G)
SAMPLE/ CAL NO/NOX

VALVE VALVE
SAMPLE
GAS NO COM NO COM
INLET NC NC
FLOW PRESSURE
NO2 SENSOR PCA
Converter
IZS Permeation
COM
SAMPLE VACUUM
NC DESORBER
ZERO/SPAN PRESSURE PRESSURE
VALVE NO Source SENSOR SENSOR
O3 FLOW
SENSOR
ZERO GAS
INLET
IZS OPTION w/
AUTOZERO
DESORBER COM VALVE
NOX Scrubber
NC
O3
2-Stage
NO
O3
Cleanser
GENERATOR
Orifice Dia.
0.010"

EXHAUST MANIFOLD
0.010" 0.004"
DRY AIR
OUTLET
O3
Exhaust
Outlet Orifice Dia.
Destruct
0.003"
PMT
NOX Exhaust
Scrubber
Orifice Dia.
0.004"
Filter
OZONE DRYER
PUMP
INSTRUMENT CHASSIS
Figure 3-27: Pneumatics with the Internal Span Gas Generator (OPT 50G)
62 06858F DCN8038
Table 3-10: Internal Span Gas Generator Valve Operating States OPT 50G
VALVE PORT
STATUS
SAMPLE
ZERO CAL
SPAN CAL
3.3.2.6. GAS CONDITIONER OPTIONS

AMMONIA REMOVAL SAMPLE CONDITIONER (OPT 86A)
The T200 includes a permeation gas exchange tube to remove H2O from the ozone
generator supply gas stream to a dew point of about -20° C (~600 ppm H2O) and
effectively remove concentrations of ammonia (NH3) up to about 1 ppm.
An additional sample conditioner can be added to the T200’s sample gas stream.
SAMPLE CONDITIONER
OPTION FLOW PRESSURE
NO/NOX
VALVE SENSOR PCA
SAMPLE
GAS SAMPLE DRYER
SAMPLE VACUUM
INLET
NO COM PRESSURE PRESSURE
NC SENSOR SENSOR
O3 FLOW
SENSOR
Orifice Dia.
0.004"
NO2
Converter
Exhaust
Outlet
AUTOZERO
COM VALVE
NC
NO
O3 O3
Orifice Dia.
Cleanser
GENERATOR
0.010"
EXHAUST MANIFOLD

0.010" 0.004"
NOX Exhaust
O3
Scrubber
Destruct
PMT
PUMP
Orifice Dia.
0.004"
Filter OZONE DRYER INSTRUMENT CHASSIS
Figure 3-28: Pneumatics for Sample Conditioner OPT 86A
06858F DCN8038 63
3.4. STARTUP, FUNCTIONAL CHECKS, AND INITIAL

CALIBRATION
CAUTION!
If the presence of ozone is detected at any time, power down the instrument
and contact Teledyne API Technical Support as soon as possible:
800-324-5190 or email: [email protected]
We recommend that you read Section 13 to become familiar with the T200 principles of
operation. For information on navigating the analyzer’s software menus, see Appendix
A.
3.4.1. START UP
After making the electrical and pneumatic connections, run an initial functional check.
Turn on the instrument. The pump and exhaust fan should start immediately. The
display will show a splash screen and other information during the initialization process
while the CPU loads the operating system, the firmware, and the configuration data.
The analyzer should automatically switch to Sample Mode after completing the boot-up
sequence and start monitoring the gas. However, there is an approximately one hour
warm-up period before reliable gas measurements can be taken. During the warm-up
period, the front panel display may show messages in the parameters (Param) field.
3.4.2. WARNING MESSAGES

Because internal temperatures and other conditions may be outside the specified limits
during the analyzer’s warm-up period, the software will suppress most warning
conditions for 30 minutes after power up. If warning messages persist after the 30
minutes warm up period is over, investigate their cause using the troubleshooting
guidelines in Section 12.1.
To view and clear warning messages, press:
64 06858F DCN8038
NOTE:
If a warning message persists after
several attempts to clear it, the message
SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET
may indicate a real problem and not an
artifact of the warm-up period
Suppresses the
TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP
warning messages
SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET

MSG returns the active
TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP warnings to the message
field.
SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET
TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP Press CLR to clear the current
message.
If more than one warning is active, the
next message will take its place until all
SYSTEM SYSTEM RESET warning messages have been cleared.
TEST CLR SETUP
Once the last warning has
been cleared, the analyzer will
automatically switch to STANDBY RANGE=500.0 PPB NOX=XXXX
SAMPLE mode
Concentration field displays
TEST CAL MSG SETUP all gases.
Table 3-11 lists brief descriptions of possible warning messages during start up.
06858F DCN8038 65
Table 3-11: Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up

MESSAGE MEANING
SYSTEM RESET1 The computer has rebooted.
ANALOG CAL WARNING The A/D or at least one D/A channel have not been calibrated.
BOX TEMP WARNING The temperature inside the T200 chassis is outside the specified limits.
CANNOT DYN SPAN2 Contact closure span calibration failed while DYN_SPAN was set to ON.
CANNOT DYN ZERO3 Contact closure zero calibration failed while DYN_ZERO was set to ON.
CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased.
DATA INITIALIZED DAS data storage was erased before the last power up occurred.
OZONE FLOW WARNING Ozone gas flow is too high or too low for accurate NOx, NO and NO2 readings.
Ozone generator is off.
This is the only warning message that automatically clears itself.
OZONE GEN OFF 4 It clears itself when the ozone generator is turned on.
Upon power up the Ozone generator will remain off for 30 minutes. This allows the ozone
dryer to reach its working dew point.
RCELL PRESS WARN Reaction cell pressure is too high or too low for accurate NOx, NO and NO2 readings.
RCELL TEMP WARNING Reaction cell temperature is too high or too low for accurate NOx, NO and NO2 readings.
IZS TEMP WARNING 5 IZS temperature is too high or too low for efficient O3 production.
CONV TEMP WARNING NO2 to NO Converter temperature too high or too low to efficiently convert NO2 to NO.
PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature outside of warning limits.
AZERO WARN [XXXX] AutoZero reading too high. The value shown in message indicates auto-zero reading at
MV time warning was displayed.
HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply output is too high or too low for proper operation of the PMT.
REAR BOARD NOT DET CPU unable to communicate with motherboard..
RELAY BOARD WARN CPU is unable to communicate with the relay PCA.
SAMPLE FLOW WARN The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.
1 Clears 45 minutes after power up.
2 Clears the next time successful zero calibration is performed.
3 Clears the next time successful span calibration is performed.
4 Clears 30 minutes after power up.
5 Only Appears if the IZS option is installed.
66 06858F DCN8038
3.4.3. FUNCTIONAL CHECKS

After the analyzer’s components have warmed up for at least 60 minutes, verify that the
software properly supports any hardware options that are installed.
For information on navigating through the analyzer’s software menus, see the menu
trees illustrated in Appendix A.1.
Check to ensure that the analyzer is functioning within allowable operating parameters.
• Appendix C includes a list of test functions viewable from the analyzer’s front panel
as well as their expected values.
• These functions are also useful tools for diagnosing problems with your analyzer.
• The enclosed Final Test and Validation Data sheet (P/N 04409) lists these values
before the instrument left the factory.
To view the current values of these parameters press the following button sequence on
the analyzer’s front panel. Remember until the unit has completed its warm up these
parameters may not have stabilized.
• RANGE=[Value]PPB 1
• RANGE1=[Value]PPB 1
SAMPLE RANGE=500.0 PPB NO= XXXX • NOX STB=[Value]PPB2
<TST TST> CAL SETUP • SAMP FLW=[Value]CC/M
• OZONE FL=[Value]CC/M
• PMT=[Value]MV
• NORM PMT=[Value]MV
• AZERO=[Value]MV
Toggle <TST TST> buttons • HVPS=[Value]V
to scroll through list of
functions
• RCELL TEMP=[Value]ºC
• BOX TEMP=[Value]ºC
• PMT TEMP=[Value]ºC
• IZS TEMP=[Value]ºC3
• MOLY TEMP=[Value]ºC
1
This will match the currently selected units of measure • RCEL=[Value]IN-HG-A
for the range being displayed. • SAMP=[Value]IN-HG-A
2
The STB function can be set to display data related to
• NOX SLOPE=[Value]
any of the gases the analyzer measures, e.g. NOX,
NO, NO2 or O2 (if the O2 sensor option is installed. • NOX OFFS=[Value]MV
3
Only appears if IZS option is installed. • NO SLOPE=[Value]
4
Only appears if analog output A4 is actively reporting • NO OFFS=[Value]MV
a TEST FUNCTION • TEST=[Value]MV4
• TIME=[HH:MM:SS]
06858F DCN8038 67
3.4.4. INITIAL CALIBRATION

To perform the following calibration you must have sources for zero air and calibration
(span) gas available for input into the inlet/outlet fittings on the back of the analyzer (see
Section 3.3.2.1).
Note A start-up period of 4-5 hours is recommended prior to performing a calibration

on the analyzer.
The method for performing an initial calibration for the T200 differs slightly depending
on the whether or not any of the available internal zero air or valve options are installed.
• See Section 3.4.4.2 for instructions for initial calibration of the T200 analyzers in
their base configuration.
• See Section 9.3 for instructions for initial calibration of T200 analyzers with an
optional Internal Span Gas Generator (OPT 51A).
• See Section 9.4 for information regarding setup and calibration of T200 analyzers
with Z/S Valve options.
• If you are using the T200 analyzer for EPA monitoring, refer to Section 10 for
references.
3.4.4.1. Interferents for NOx, NO and NO2 Measurements

The chemiluminescence method for detecting NOX is subject to interference from a
number of sources including water vapor (H2O), ammonia (NH3), sulfur dioxide (SO2)
and carbon dioxide (CO2) but the T200 has been designed to reject most of these
interferences.
• Ammonia is the most common interferent, which is converted to NO in the
analyzer’s NO2 converter and creates a NOX signal artifact.
• If the T200 is installed in an environment with high ammonia, steps should be
taken to remove the interferent from the sample gas before it enters the reaction
cell.
• Teledyne API offers a sample gas conditioning option to remove ammonia and
water vapor (Section 3.3.2.6).
• Carbon dioxide (CO2) diminishes the NOX signal when present in high
concentrations.
• If the analyzer is used in an application with excess CO2, contact Teledyne
API's Technical Support
• Department (see Section 12.10) for possible solutions.
• Excess water vapor can be removed with one of the dryer options described in
Section 3.3.2.6. In ambient air applications, SO2 interference is usually negligible.
For more detailed information regarding interferents for NOx, NO and NO2
measurement, see Section 13.1.5.
68 06858F DCN8038
3.4.4.2. INITIAL CALIBRATION PROCEDURE FOR T200 ANALYZERS WITHOUT OPTIONS

The following procedure assumes that:
• The instrument DOES NOT have any of the available calibration valve or gas inlet
options installed;
• Cal gas will be supplied through the SAMPLE gas inlet on the back of the analyzer
and;
• The pneumatic setup matches that described in Section 3.3.2.
VERIFYING THE REPORTING RANGE SETTINGS

Although you can use any range setting, we recommend that you perform this initial
checkout using following reporting range settings:
• Unit of Measure: PPB
• Reporting Range: 500 ppb
• Mode Setting: SNGL
While these are the default settings for the T200 analyzer, it is recommended that you
verify them before starting the calibration procedure, by pressing the following menu
button sequence:
06858F DCN8038 69
SAMPLE RANGE=500.0 PPB NOX= XXXX
<TST TST> CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE SET UNIT DIL EXIT
Verify that the MODE SETUP X.X RANGE MODE:SINGL

is set for SNGL.
SNGL IND AUTO ENTR EXIT
If it is not, press
SINGL àENTR
Verify that the RANGE is

set for 500.0 SETUP X.X RANGE: 500.0 Conc
If it is not, toggle each 0 0 5 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
numeric key until the
proper range is set, then
press ENTR. Press EXIT
3x’s to return to
MODE SET UNIT DIL EXIT SAMPLE mode.
Verify that the UNIT is SETUP X.X CONC UNITS:PPB

set for PPB
PPB PPM UGM MGM ENTR EXIT
If it is not, press
PPB àENTR
VERIFYING THE EXPECTED NOX AND NO SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION

Verify the PRECISE Concentration Value of the SPAN gases independently.
If you supply NO gas to the analyzer, the values for expected NO and NOx
MUST be identical.
The NOx and NO span concentration values automatically defaults to 400.0 PPB and it
is recommended that calibration gases of that concentration be used for the initial
calibration of the unit.
70 06858F DCN8038
To verify that the analyzer span setting is set for 400 PPB, press:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP
M-P CAL RANGE=500.0 PPB NOX=XXXX
<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT
M-P CAL CONCENTRATION MENU
NOX NO CONV EXIT
M-P CAL [GAS TYPE] SPAN CONC:400.0 Conc

EXIT ignores the new
0 4 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT setting and returns to
the previous display.
The NOX & NO span concentration ENTR accepts the new

values automatically default to setting and returns to the
400.0 PPB CONCENTRATION MENU.
If this is not the the concentration of
the span gas being used, toggle If using NO span gas in
these buttons to set the correct addition to NOX repeat last
concentration of the NOX and NO step.
calibration gases.
INITIAL ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

To perform an initial calibration, press:
06858F DCN8038 71

Set the Display to show
Analyzer continues to < TST TST > CAL SETUP the NOX STB test
cycle through NOx, function.
NO, and NO2 This function calculates
measurements the stability of the NO/NOx
throughout this Toggle TST> button until ... measurement
procedure.
SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPB NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
Allow zero gas to enter the sample port

at the rear of the analyzer.
Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppB.
This may take several
minutes.
Press ENTR to changes

M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPB NOX=XXX.X the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for both the NO
<TST TST> ZERO CONC EXIT
and NOx measurements.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPB NOX=X.XXX return to the previous
<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT menu.
Allow span gas to enter the sample port

Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 PPB.
minutes.

The SPAN button now
appears during the transition
from zero to span. Press ENTR to changes
You may see both buttons. M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPB NOX=X.XXX the OFFSET & SLOPE
If either the ZERO or SPAN values for both the NO
buttons fail to appear see the and NOx measurements.
Troubleshooting Section of Press EXIT to leave the
this manual. calibration unchanged and
M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPB NOX=X.XXX

EXIT at this point
<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT returns to the
SAMPLE menu.
The T200 Analyzer is now ready for operation.
Note Once you have completed the above set-up procedures, please fill out the
Quality Questionnaire that was shipped with your unit and return it to Teledyne
API. This information is vital to our efforts in continuously improving our
service and our products. THANK YOU.
72 06858F DCN8038
4. OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES
To assist in navigating the analyzer’s software, a series of menu trees is available for
reference in Appendix A of this manual.
Note Some control buttons on the touch screen do not appear if they are not
applicable to the menu that you’re in, the task that you are performing, the
command you are attempting to send, or to incorrect settings input by the user.
For example, the ENTR button may disappear if you input a setting that is invalid
or out of the allowable range for that parameter, such as trying to set the 24-hour
clock to 25:00:00. Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value, the ENTR
button will reappear.
Of the several operating modes, SAMPLE mode is most common. In this mode, a
continuous read-out of the NOx concentrations can be viewed on the front panel and can
be output as an analog voltage from rear panel terminals.
SETUP is the next most common mode; it is used to configure the various sub systems,
such asthe Data Acquisition System (DAS), the reporting ranges, or the serial (RS-232 /
RS-485 / Ethernet) communication channels. SETUP is also used for diagnostic tests
during troubleshooting.
Figure 4-1: Front Panel Display
The mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the
unit is currently running.
06858F DCN8038 73
Overview of Operating Modes Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual
In addition to SAMPLE and SETUP, other modes the analyzer can be operated in are
described in Table 7-1 below.
Table 4-1: Analyzer Operating Modes

MODE EXPLANATION
DIAG One of the analyzer’s diagnostic modes is active.
LO CAL A Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated automatically by the analyzer’s
AUTOCAL feature
LO CAL R Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated remotely through the COM ports or
digital control inputs.
M-P CAL This is the basic calibration mode of the instrument and is activated by pressing the CAL button.
SAMPLE Sampling normally, flashing text indicates adaptive filter is on.
SAMPLE A Indicates that unit is in SAMPLE mode and AUTOCAL feature is activated.
SETUP X.#2 SETUP mode is being used to configure the analyzer. The gas measurement will continue during
setup.
SPAN CAL A1 Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated automatically by the analyzer’s AUTOCAL feature
SPAN CAL M1 Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated manually by the user.
SPAN CAL R1 Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital control
inputs.
ZERO CAL A1 Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated automatically by the AUTOCAL feature
ZERO CAL M1 Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated manually by the user.
ZERO CAL R1 Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital
control inputs.
1 Only Appears on units with Z/S valve or IZS options.
2 The revision of the analyzer firmware is displayed following the word SETUP, e.g., SETUP G.3.
4.1. SAMPLE MODE

This is the analyzer’s standard operating mode where the instrument calculates NOx, NO
and NO2 concentrations and displays their values in the CONC field of the display
panel..
The PARAM field displays any warning messages and test functions, which provide
information about the operational status of the analyzer.
4.1.1. TEST FUNCTIONS

TEST functions are displayed on the front panel whenever the analyzer is at the MAIN
MENU, to provide information about the various parameters related to the analyzer’s
operation and its measurement of gas concentrations. This information is particularly
useful when troubleshooting a performance problem with the T200 (see Section 13). Use
the TST TST buttons and see Table 4-2 for the available TEST functions and their
descriptions.
74 06858F DCN8038
Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual Overview of Operating Modes
• NO=[Value]PPB2
• NOX=[Value]PPB2
• RANGE=[Value]PPB 1
SAMPLE RANGE=500.0 PPB NOX= XXXX • RANGE1=[Value]PPB 1
<TST TST> CAL SETUP • NOX STB=[Value]PPB2
• SAMP FLW=[Value]CC/M
• OZONE FL=[Value]CC/M
• PMT=[Value]MV
• NORM PMT=[Value]MV
Toggle <TST TST> buttons
• AZERO=[Value]MV
to scroll through list of
functions
• HVPS=[Value]V
• RCELL TEMP=[Value]ºC
• BOX TEMP=[Value]ºC
• PMT TEMP=[Value]ºC
• IZS TEMP=[Value]ºC3
1
This will match the currently selected units of measure
• MOLY TEMP=[Value]ºC
for the range being displayed. • RCEL=[Value]IN-HG-A
2
The STB function can be set to display data related to • SAMP=[Value]IN-HG-A
any of the gasses the analyzer measures, e.g. NOX, • NOX SLOPE=[Value]
NO, NO2 or O2 (if the O2 sensor option is installed. • NOX OFFS=[Value]MV
3
Only appears if IZS option is installed. • NO SLOPE=[Value]
4
Only appears if analog output A4 is actively reporting • NO OFFS=[Value]MV
a TEST FUNCTION. • TEST=[Value]MV4
• TIME=[HH:MM:SS]
Figure 4-2: Viewing T200 Test Functions
Table 4-2: Test Functions Defined

DISPLAY PARAMETER UNITS DESCRIPTION
The Full Scale limit at which the reporting range of the analyzer’s ANALOG
OUTPUTS is currently set.
RANGE
THIS IS NOT the Physical Range of the instrument. See Section 5.4.1 for
more information.
PPB, If AUTO Range mode has been selected, two RANGE functions will
RANGE1 appear, one for each range:
PPM,
RANGE2 RANGE UGM • RANGE1: The range setting for all analog outputs.
& • RANGE2: The HIGH range setting for all analog outputs.
MGM If the IND Range mode has been selected, three RANGE functions will
RANGE1 appear, one for each range:
RANGE2 • RANGE1: NOx concentration output un A1.
RANGE3 • RANGE2: NO concentration output un A2.
• RANGE2: NO2 concentration output un A3.
The standard deviation of concentration readings of the selected gas.
NOX STB STABILITY PPB • Data points are recorded every ten seconds. The calculation uses the
last 25 data points.
SAMP FLW SAMPFLOW CC/M Gas flow rate of the sample gas into the reaction cell.
OZONE FL OZONEFLOW CC/M Gas flow rate of O3 gas into the reaction cell.
PMT PMT MV The raw signal output of the PMT.
The signal output of the PMT after is has been normalized for temperature,
NORM PMT NORMPMT MV pressure, auto-zero offset, but not range.
The PMT signal with zero NOX, which is usually slightly different from 0 V.
AZERO AUTOZERO MV This offset is subtracted from the PMT signal and adjusts for variations in
the zero signal.
06858F DCN8038 75
DISPLAY PARAMETER UNITS DESCRIPTION

HVPS HVPS V The output power level of the high voltage power supply.
RCELL TEMP RCELLTEMP C The temperature of the gas inside the reaction cell temperature.
BOX TEMP BOXTEMP C The temperature inside the analyzer chassis.
PMT TEMP PMTTEMP C The temperature of the PMT .
IZS TEMP1 IZSTEMP C The temperature of the internal span gas generator's permeation tube.
MOLY TEMP CONVTEMP C The temperature of the analyzer's NO2 à NO converter.
The current pressure of the sample gas in the reaction cell as measured at
RCEL RCELLPRESS IN-HG-A the vacuum manifold.
The current pressure of the sample gas as it enters the reaction cell,
SAMP SAMPPRESS IN-HG-A measured between the NO/NOx and Auto-Zero valves.
NOX SLOPE NOXSLOPE The slope calculated during the most recent NOx zero/span calibration.
NOX OFFS NOXOFFSET MV The offset calculated during the most recent NOx zero/span calibration.
NO SLOPE NOSLOPE The slope calculated during the most recent NO zero/span calibration.
NO OFFS NOOFFSET MV The offset calculated during the most recent NO zero/span calibration.
Displays the signal level of the Test Function that is currently being
TEST TESTCHAN MV produced by the Analog Output Channel A4.
The current time. This is used to create a time stamp on DAS readings,
TIME CLOCKTIME HH:MM:SS and by the AutoCal feature to trigger calibration events.
Only appears if Internal Span Gas Generator option is installed.
1

A value of “XXXX” displayed for any of the TEST functions indicates an out-of-
range reading or the analyzer’s inability to calculate it. All pressure
measurements are represented in terms of absolute pressure. Absolute,
atmospheric pressure is 29.92 in-Hg-A at sea level. It decreases about 1 in-Hg
per 300 m gain in altitude. A variety of factors such as air conditioning and
passing storms can cause changes in the absolute atmospheric pressure.
76 06858F DCN8038
4.1.2. WARNING MESSAGES

Warning Messages, listed in Table 4-3, are displayed on the analyzer’s front panel when
failures occur.
Table 4-3: Warning Messages Defined

MESSAGE MEANING
ANALOG CAL WARNING The A/D or at least one D/A channel has not been calibrated.
AZERO WARN Auto-zero reading above set limit. Value shown in message indicates auto-zero
reading at time warning was displayed.
BOX TEMP WARNING The temperature inside the T200 chassis is outside the specified limits.
CANNOT DYN SPAN Contact closure span calibration failed while DYN_SPAN was set to ON.
CANNOT DYN ZERO Contact closure zero calibration failed while DYN_ZERO was set to ON.
CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased.
CONV TEMP WARNING NO2 à NO converter temperature outside of warning limits.
DATA INITIALIZED DAS data storage was erased before the last power up occurred.
HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply output outside of warning limits.
IZS TEMP WARNING 1 IZS temperature outside of warning limits specified by IZS_SET variable.
OZONE FLOW WARNING Ozone flow outside of warning limits.
OZONE GEN OFF Ozone generator is off. This warning message clears itself when the ozone
generator is turned on.
PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature outside of warning limits.
RCELL PRESS WARN Reaction cell pressure outside of warning limits.
RCELL TEMP WARNING Reaction cell temperature outside of warning limits.
REAR BOARD NOT DET Motherboard was not detected during power up.
RELAY BOARD WARN CPU is unable to communicate with the relay PCA.
SAMPLE FLOW WARN The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.
SYSTEM RESET The computer has rebooted.
1 Only Appears if the Internal Span Gas Generator option is installed.
06858F DCN8038 77
4.2. CALIBRATION MODE

The CAL button switches the analyzer into calibration mode. In conjunction with
introducing zero or span gases of known concentrations into the analyzer, the user can
adjust and recalculate the slope (gain) and offset of the measurement range. CAL mode
is also used to check the current calibration status of the instrument.
If the instrument includes one of the available zero/span valve options, the SAMPLE
mode display will also include CALZ and CALS buttons. Pressing either of these
buttons also puts the instrument into calibration mode.
• The CALZ button is used to initiate a calibration of the analyzer’s zero point using
internally generated zero air.
• The CALS button is used to calibrate the span point of the analyzer’s current
reporting range using span gas.
Note It is recommended that this span calibration be performed at 80% of full scale of
the analyzer’s currently selected reporting range.
EXAMPLES:
If the reporting range is set for 0 to 500 ppb, an appropriate span point would be
400 ppb.
If the of the reporting range is set for 0 to 1000 ppb, an appropriate span point
would be 800 ppb.
Due to their critical importance and complexity, calibration operations are described in
detail in other sections of the manual:
• Section 9 details setting up and performing standard calibration operations or
checks.
• Section 10 provides references for guidance in setting up and performing EPA
protocol calibrations.
For information on using the automatic calibrations feature (ACAL) in conjunction with
the one of the calibration valve options, see Sections 9.4.3 and 9.5.

To avoid inadvertent adjustments to critical settings, activate calibration security
by enabling password protection in the SETUP – PASS menu (Section 5.5).
78 06858F DCN8038
4.3. SETUP MODE

Use SETUP Mode to configure the analyzer’s hardware and software features, perform
diagnostic procedures, gather information on the instrument’s performance and
configure or access data from the internal data acquisition system (DAS). For a visual
representation of the software menu trees, refer to Appendix A.
SETUP Mode is divided between Primary and Secondary Setup menus and can be
protected through password security.
4.3.1. PASSWORD SECURITY

Protect SETUP Mode with a security password through the SETUP>PASS menu
(Section 5.5) to prevent unauthorized or inadvertent configuration adjustments.
4.3.2. PRIMARY SETUP MENU

The areas accessed and configured under the primary SETUP Mode menu are shown in
Table 4-4.
Table 4-4: Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions

CONTROL MANUAL
MODE OR FEATURE BUTTON DESCRIPTION SECTION
LABEL
Analyzer Configuration CFG Lists button hardware and software configuration information. 5.1
Used to set up and operate the AutoCal feature.
Auto Cal Feature ACAL • Only appears if the analyzer has one of the calibration valve 5.2, 9.5
options installed.
Internal Data Acquisition
DAS Used to set up the DAS system and view recorded data. 7
(DAS)
Analog Output Reporting Used to configure the output signals generated by the
RNGE 5.4
Range Configuration instruments analog outputs.
Calibration Password Security PASS Turns the calibration password feature ON/OFF. 5.5
Internal Clock Configuration CLK Used to set or adjust the instrument’s internal clock. 5.6
Secondary SETUP Mode See
MORE This button accesses the instruments secondary setup menu.
(Advanced SETUP features) Table 4-5
06858F DCN8038 79
4.3.3. SECONDARY SETUP MENU (SETUP àMORE)

The areas accessed and configured under the secondary SETUP Mode menu are shown
in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5: Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions

CONTROL MANUAL
MODE OR FEATURE BUTTON DESCRIPTION SECTION
LABEL
Used to set up and operate the analyzer’s various external I/O
External Communication
COMM channels including RS-232; RS-485, modem communication 8
Channel Configuration
and/or Ethernet access.
Used to view various variables related to the instruments
current operational status.
• Changes made to any variable are not acknowledged and
recorded in the instrument’s memory until the ENTR button
System Status Variables VARS is pressed. 5.8
• Pressing the EXIT button ignores the new setting.
• If the EXIT button is pressed before the ENTR button, the
analyzer will beep alerting the user that the newly entered
value has been lost.
Used to access a variety of functions that are used to configure,
System Diagnostic Features test or diagnose problems with a variety of the analyzer’s basic
and DIAG systems. 5.9, 5.9.2
Analog Output Configuration Most notably, the menus used to configure the output signals
generated by the instruments’ analog outputs are located here.

Any changes made to a variable during the SETUP procedures are not
acknowledged by the instrument until the ENTR button is pressed. If the EXIT
button is pressed before the ENTR button, the analyzer will make an audible
signal before exiting the menu, alerting the user that the newly entered value had
not been accepted.
80 06858F DCN8038
5. SETUP MODE MENUS
Use SETUP Mode to set instrument parameters for performing configuration,
calibration, reporting and diagnostics operations according to user needs.
5.1. SETUP à CFG: CONFIGURATION INFORMATION

Pressing the CFG button displays the instrument configuration information, which lists
the analyzer model, serial number, firmware revision, software library revision, CPU
type and other information. Use CFG to identify the software and hardware when
contacting Technical Support. Special instrument or software features or installed
options may also be listed here.
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU

Press exit at any
time to return to
the Sample display.
Press NEXT of PREV to move back and SETUP T200 NOX-O2 Analyzer
Press exit at any
forth through the following list of time to return to
Configuration information: PREV NEXT EXIT
the SETUP menu
• MODEL NAME
• PART NUMBER
• SERIAL NUMBER
• SOFTWARE REVISION
• LIBRARY REVISION
• CPU TYPE & OS REVISION
06858F DCN8038 81
Setup Mode Menus Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual
5.2. SETUP àACAL: AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION OPTION

The menu button for this option appears only when the instrument has the zero span
and/or IZS options. Section 9.5 provides details.
5.3. SETUP àDAS: INTERNAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM

Use the SETUP>DAS menu to capture and record data. Section 7 provides configuration
and operation details.
5.4. SETUP àRNGE: ANALOG OUTPUT REPORTING RANGE

CONFIGURATION
Use the SETUP>RNGE menu to configure output reporting ranges, including scaled
reporting ranges to handle data resolution challenges. This section describes
configuration for Single, Dual, and Auto Range modes.
5.4.1. T200 PHYSICAL RANGES

The T200 measures NOx, NO and NO2 concentrations from 2 to 20,000 ppb.
Electronically the T200 analyzer converts the 0-5 volt analog signal output by the PMT
to a digital signal with 4096 counts of resolution. Since its measurement range is 0 ppb
to 20,000 ppb, this only allows about 3 ppb per count. While this might be acceptable
for high concentration measurements made in parts per million units (ppm), it is not
good enough for lower level NOx measurements. To overcome this limitation the T200
is designed with two physical measurement ranges:
• LOW range to measure concentration from 0 ppb to 2,000 ppb with a resolution of
0.27 ppb per count
• HIGH range to measure the full 20,000 ppb range of the analyzer
The analyzer’s CPU chooses the appropriate range based on how the user sets up the
reporting ranges for the instrument’s analog outputs: when an analog range is selected
with a lower limit between 0 and 2000 ppb, the analyzer will utilize its low physical
range. When an analog range is in use that has a reporting range with an upper limit set
between 2001 and 20,000 ppb, the instrument will operate in its high physical range.
Once both ranges have been using the same span gas values, the analyzer’s front panel
will accurately report concentrations between 0 and 20,000 ppb, seamlessly switching
between the low and high physical ranges regardless of the selected analog reporting
range.
5.4.2. T200 ANALOG OUTPUT REPORTING RANGES

For applications using chart recorders or other analog recording devices, the T200's
20,000 ppb physical range can cause resolution problems. For example, in an
application where the expected concentrations of NO, NO2 and NOx are typically less
than 500 ppb, the full scale of expected values is only 2.5% of the instrument’s
20,000 ppb physical range. The corresponding output signal would then only be
recorded across 2.5% of the range of the recording device.
82 06858F DCN8038
Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual Setup Mode Menus
The T200 solves this problem by allowing the user to select a reporting range for the
analog outputs that only includes that portion of the physical range that covers the
specific application. This increases the reliability and accuracy of the analyzer by
avoiding additional gain-amplification circuitry.
Note Only the reporting range of the analog outputs is scaled.
Both the DAS values stored in the CPU’s memory and the concentration values
reported on the front panel are unaffected by the settings chosen for the
reporting range(s) of the instrument.
5.4.2.1. ANALOG OUTPUT RANGES FOR NOX, NO AND NO2 CONCENTRATION

The analyzer has three active analog output signals related to NOx, NO and NO2
concentration, accessible through a connector on the rear panel.
ANALOG OUT
NOx Concentration NO Concentration NO2 Concentration
Test Channel
or O2 concentration
A1 A2 A3 A4 (if optional O2 sensor
+ - + - + - + - is installed)
Figure 5-1: Analog Output Connector Pin Out
The A1, A2 and A3 channels output a signal proportional to the NOx, NO and NO2
concentrations of the sample gas, respectively. The T200 can be set so that these outputs
operate in one of three modes: single range mode, independent range mode, or automatic
range mode (Section 5.4.3).
Additionally, the signal levels of A1, A2 and A3 outputs can be:
• Configured full scale outputs of: 0 - 0.1 VDC; 0 – 1 VDC; 0 – 5 VDC or; 0 – 10 VDC
• Equipped with optional 0-20 mADC current loop drivers (see Section 3.3.1.4 ) and
configured for any current output within that range analog output (e.g. 0-20 mA, 2-
20 mA, 4-20 mA, etc.)
Together these two sets of parameters allow the user a great deal of flexibility in how the
instrument reports NOx , NO and NO2 concentration to external devices. For example,
using the IND mode the following configuration could be created:
A1 OUTPUT: NOx Output Signal = 4 – 20 mA representing 0-1000 ppb concentration
values
06858F DCN8038 83
A2 OUTPUT: NO Output Signal = 0 – 10 VDC representing 0-500 ppb concentration

values.
A3 OUTPUT: NO2 Output Signal = 0 – 5 VDC representing 0-500 ppb concentration
values.
The user may also add a signal offset independently to each output (see Section 5.9.3.9)
to match the electronic input requirements of the recorder or data logger to which the
output is connected.

The instrument does not remember upper range limits settings associated with
the individual modes. Changes made to the range limits (e.g. 400 ppb à 600 ppb)
when in one particular mode will alter the range limit settings for the other
modes.
When switching between reporting range modes, ALWAYS check and reset the
upper range limits for the new mode selection..
5.4.2.2. ANALOG OUTPUT REPORTING RANGE DEFAULT SETTINGS

The default setting for these the reporting ranges of the analog output channels A1, A2
and A3 are:
• SNGL mode
• 0 to 500.0 ppb
• 0 to 5 VDC
5.4.3. SETUP à RNGE à MODE

Single range mode (SNGL) reports all three of the NOx gas concentrations using the
same reporting range span (see Section 5.4.3.1).
Independent range mode (IND) allows the NOx, NO and NO2 analog outputs to be set
with different reporting range spans (see Section 5.4.3.2).
Automatic range mode (AUTO) allows the analyzer to automatically switch the
reporting range between two user upper span limits (designated LOW and HIGH) based
on the actual concentrations being measured for each (see Section 5.4.3.3). These are not
the same as the analyzer’s low and high physical ranges (Section 5.4.1).
5.4.3.1. SETUP à RNGE à MODE à SNGL: CONFIGURING THE T200 ANALYZER FOR SINGLE
RANGE MODE
Note Single Range is the default reporting range mode for the analyzer.
When the single range mode is selected (SNGL), all analog NOx, NO and NO2
concentration outputs (A1, A2 and A3) are slaved together and set to the same reporting
range limits (e.g. 500.0 ppb). This reporting range can be set to any value between 100
ppb and 20,000 ppb.
84 06858F DCN8038
Although all three NOx outputs share the same concentration reporting range, the
electronic signal ranges of the analog outputs may still be configured for different values
(e.g. 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, etc; see Section 5.9.3.1).
To select SNGL range mode and to set the upper limit of the range, press:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
SETUP X.X RANGE MODE MENU
SETUP X.X RANGE MODE:SNGL
SETUP X.X RANGE:500.0 Conc

Toggle these 0 0 5 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
buttons to select
the upper SPAN
limit for the shared
NOX, NO and NO2
reporting range. SETUP X.X O2 RANGE:100.00 %
1 0 0 .0 0 ENTR EXIT
EXIT discards the new
Toggle these buttons to select the setting.
upper SPAN limit for the O2
reporting range. ENTR accepts the
new setting.
NOTE: O2 RANGE only appears if
the optional O2 sensor is installed.
06858F DCN8038 85
5.4.3.2. SETUP à RNGE à MODE à IND: CONFIGURING THE T200 ANALYZER FOR
INDEPENDENT RANGE MODE
The independent range mode (IND) assigns the three NOx, NO and NO2 concentrations
to individual analog output channels. In IND range mode the RANGE test function
displayed on the front panel will then be replaced by three separate functions:
Table 5-1: IND Mode Analog Output Assignments

TEST CONCENTRATION ANALOG OUTPUT
FUNCTION REPORTED CHANNEL
RANGE1 NOx A1
RANGE2 NO A2
RANGE3 NO2 A3
Each can be configured with a different reporting range upper limit and analog signal
span:
EXAMPLE:
• NOx Concentration – RANGE1 Set for 0-800 ppb & output A1 set for 0-10 VDC
• NO Concentration – RANGE2 Set for 0-200 ppb & output A2 set for 0-5 VDC
• NO2 Concentration – RANGE3 Set for 0-400 ppb & output A3 set for 0-5 VDC
Setting analog range limits to different values does not affect the instrument’s
calibration.
86 06858F DCN8038
To select the IND range mode, press the following buttons:
SAMPLE RANGE=500.0 PPM NOX= XXXX
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
SETUP X.X RANGE MODE:IND
06858F DCN8038 87
To set the upper range limit for each independent reporting range, press:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
SETUP X.X NOX RANGE:500.0 Conc
0 0 5 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X NO RANGE:500.0 Conc
0 0 5 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
Toggle these buttons
to select the upper
SPAN limit for the
reporting ranges.
SETUP X.X NO2 RANGE:500.0 Conc
0 0 5 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X O2 RANGE:100.00 %
1 0 0 .0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new

Toggle these buttons to select setting.
the upper SPAN limit for the O2
reporting range. ENTR accepts the
new setting.
NOTE: O2 RANGE only appears
if the optional O2 Sensor is
installed.
.
88 06858F DCN8038
5.4.3.3. SETUP à RNGE à MODE à AUTO: CONFIGURING THE T200 ANALYZER FOR AUTO
RANGE MODE
In AUTO range mode, the analyzer automatically switches the reporting range between
two user-defined ranges (LOW and HIGH). The same low and high span settings are
applied equally to NO, NO2 and NOX readings.
• The unit will switch from LOW range to HIGH range when either the NO, or NOX
concentration exceeds 98% of the low range span.
• The unit will return from HIGH range back to LOW range once both the NO and
NOX concentrations fall below 75% of the low range span.

The LOW & HIGH ranges referred to here are NOT the same as the low & high
physical ranges referred to in Section 5.4.1.
Also the RANGE test function displayed on the front panel will be replaced by two
separate functions:
• RANGE1: The LOW range setting for all analog outputs
• RANGE2: The HIGH range setting for all analog outputs
The LOW/HIGH range status is also reported through the external, digital status bits
(Section 3.3.1.4).
06858F DCN8038 89
To set individual ranges press the following menu sequence:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
NOTE: CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
Avoid accidentally setting the LOW
range (RANGE1) of the instrument
with a higher span limit than the SETUP X.X RANGE MODE MENU
HIGH range (RANGE2).
This will cause the unit to stay in MODE SET UNIT DIL EXIT
the low reporting range perpetually
and defeat the function of the
AUTO range mode. SETUP X.X RANGE MODE:SNGL
SNGL IND AUTO DIL ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X RANGE MODE:AUTO
The LOW and HIGH SNGL IND AUTO ENTR EXIT

ranges have separate
slopes and offsets for
computing the NOX SETUP X.X RANGE MODE MENU
and NO concentration. MODE SET UNIT DIL EXIT
The two ranges must

be independently SETUP X.X LOW RANGE:50.0 Conc
calibrated.
0 0 5 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X HIGH RANGE:200.0 Conc

0 0 5 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT setting.
to select the upper
ENTR accepts the
SPAN limit for the
new setting.
reporting range.
90 06858F DCN8038
5.4.3.4. SETUP à RNGE à UNIT: SETTING THE REPORTING RANGE UNITS OF MEASURE
The T200 can display and report concentrations in ppb, ppm, ug/m3, mg/m3 units.
Changing units affects all of the COM port values, and all of the display values for all
reporting ranges. To change the units of measure press:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.

The following equations give
approximate conversions
between volume/volume units
and weight/volume units: SETUP X.X RANGE CONTROL MENU
NO MODE SET UNIT DIL EXIT

ppb x 1.34 = µg/m3
ppm x 1.34 = mg/m3
NO2 SETUP X.X CONC UNITS:PPB
ppb x 2.05 = µg/m3
ppm x 2.05 = mg/m3 PPB PPM UGM MGM ENTR EXIT

setting.
Toggle these buttons to
select the units of measure ENTR accepts the
for the reporting ranges. new setting.

Concentrations displayed in mg/m3 and ug/m3 use 0°C@ 760 mmHg for
Standard Temperature and Pressure (STP).
Consult your local regulations for the STP used by your agency.
(Example: US EPA uses 25°C as the reference temperature).
Once the Units of Measurement have been changed from volumetric (ppb or ppm)
to mass units (ug/m3 or mg/m3) the analyzer MUST be recalibrated, as the
“expected span values” previously in effect will no longer be valid.
Simply entering new expected span values without running the entire calibration
routine is not sufficient. This will also counteract any discrepancies between STP
definitions.
5.4.3.5. SETUP à RNGE à DIL: USING THE OPTIONAL DILUTION RATIO FEATURE
The dilution ratio feature is a software utility option designed for applications where the
sample gas is diluted before being analyzed by the T200. Typically this occurs in
continuous emission monitoring (CEM) applications where the quality of gas in a smoke
stack is being tested and the sampling method used to remove the gas from the stack
dilutes the gas. Once the degree of dilution is known, this feature allows the user to add
06858F DCN8038 91
an appropriate scaling factor to the analyzer’s NO, NO2 and NOx concentration
calculations so that the measurement range and concentration values shown on the
instrument’s front panel display and reported via the instruments various outputs reflect
the undiluted values.
Using the Dilution Ratio option is a 4-step process:
1. Select the appropriate units of measure (see Section 5.4.3.4).
2. Select the reporting range mode and set the reporting range upper limit (see
Section 5.4.2).
• Ensure that the upper span limit entered for the reporting range is the maximum
expected concentration of the UNDILUTED gas.
3. Set the dilution factor as a gain (e.g., a value of 20 means 20 parts diluent and 1
part of sample gas):
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
SETUP X.X NOX DIL FACTOR:1.0 Gain
0 0 0 0 1 .0 ENTR EXIT
select dilution ratio gain
factor for NOX gas.
SETUP X.X O2 DIL FACTOR:1.0 Gain
Default = 1 (e.g. 1:1) EXIT discards the new
0 0 0 0 1 .0 ENTR EXIT setting.
ENTR accepts the

Toggle these buttons to select dilution new setting.
ratio gain factor for O2 gas.
NOTE: O2 Dil Factor only appears if

the optional O2 Sensor is installed.
4. Calibrate the analyzer.

• Ensure that the calibration span gas is either supplied through the same dilution
system as the sample gas or has an appropriately lower actual concentration.
EXAMPLE: If the reporting range limit is set for 100 ppm and the dilution ratio of
the sample gas is 20 gain, either:
• a span gas with the concentration of 100 ppm can be used if the span gas
passes through the same dilution steps as the sample gas, or;
• a 5 ppm span gas must be used if the span gas IS NOT routed through the
dilution system.
92 06858F DCN8038
5.5. SETUP à PASS: PASSWORD PROTECTION

The T200 provides password protection against accidental or unauthorized adjustments
to the calibration and setup functions. When the passwords have been enabled in the
PASS menu, the system prompts the user for a password anytime a password-protected
function is selected. This allows normal operation of the instrument, but requires the
password (101) to access the menus under SETUP. When PASSWORD is disabled
(PASS>OFF), any operator can enter the Primary Setup (SETUP) and Secondary Setup
(SETUP>MORE) menus, although, a password (default 818) is still required to enter the
VARS or DIAG menus in the Secondary Setup menu.
To enable password protection:
1. Press SETUP>PASS.
2. Press OFF (display shows PASSWORD ENABLE:ON and the OFF button becomes
the ON button).
3. Press ENTR to accept the new setting (pressing EXIT in this submenu ignores the
change and sends an audible signal indicating that the new setting did not take
effect), and returns to the Primary Setup Menu.
4. EXIT the Primary Setup Menu to finish making the change effective.
There are three levels of password protection, which correspond to operator,

maintenance and configuration functions. Each level allows access to all of the
functions in the previous level.
Table 5-2: Password Levels

PASSWORD LEVEL MENU ACCESS ALLOWED
Null (000) Operation All functions of the MAIN menu: TEST, GEN, initiate SEQ , MSG, CLR
101 Configuration/Maintenance Access to Primary Setup and Secondary SETUP Menus when PASSWORD is
enabled.
818 Configuration/Maintenance Access to Secondary SETUP Submenus VARS and DIAG whether PASSWORD
is enabled or disabled.
06858F DCN8038 93
To enable passwords, press:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP
SYSTEM PASSWORD ENABLE: OFF
Toggle this button OFF ENTR EXIT

to enable, disable
PASSWORD
feature.
SETUP X.X PASSWORD ENABLE: ON
ON ENTR EXIT setting.
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU ENTR accepts the new

setting and returns to the
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT Primary Setup menu.
SAMPLE RANGE=500.0 PPB NOX= XXXX To finish applying the

new setting, in the Primary
<TST TST> CAL SETUP Setup Menu press EXIT
and go to Sample Mode.
Example: If all passwords are enabled, the following touchscreen control sequence
would be required to enter the VARS or DIAG submenus:
94 06858F DCN8038
<TST TST> CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
SYSTEM ENTER SETUP PASS:0

Press individual
buttons to set 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT
number.
SYSTEM ENTER SETUP PASS:0

EXAMPLE: This
password enables the 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
SETUP mode.
Instrument enters selected menu.
Note The instrument still prompts for a password when entering the VARS and DIAG
menus, even if passwords are disabled, but it displays the default password (818)
upon entering these menus. In this case, the user only has to press ENTR to
access the password-protected menus.
In order to disable the PASSWORD feature after it has been turned ON, go to the
SETUP menu, input the password, and press ENTR. In the Primary Setup Menu press
PASS; then press ON to turn PASSWORD ENABLE back to OFF, and press ENTR to
accept and apply the change (no need to press EXIT from the Primary Setup Menu this
time).
06858F DCN8038 95
5.6. SETUP à CLK: SETTING THE INTERNAL TIME-OF-DAY

CLOCK
The T200 has an internal clock for setting the time and day and adjusting its speed to
compensate for faster or slower CPU clocks. Press SETUP>CLK to access the clock.
5.6.1. SETTING THE TIME OF DAY

The time-of-day feature of the internal clock supports the DURATION step of the
automatic calibration (ACAL) sequence feature, has a built-in clock for the AutoCal
timer, for the time TEST function, and for time stamps on COM port messages and on
DAS data entries.
To set the clock’s time and date, press:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
SETUP X.X TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK
TIME DATE EXIT
SETUP X.X TIME: 12:00 SETUP X.X DATE: 01-JAN-11
1 2 :0 0 ENTR EXIT 0 1 JAN 1 1 ENTR EXIT
Toggle these
Toggle these
buttons to enter
HOUR MINUTE keys to enter DAY MONTH YEAR current day, month
current hour.
and year.
SETUP X.X TIME: 22:30 SETUP X.X DATE: 18-JUN-11
2 2 :3 0 ENTR EXIT 1 8 JUN 1 1 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK

EXIT returns to
TIME DATE EXIT SAMPLE
MODE.
96 06858F DCN8038
5.6.2. ADJUSTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK’S SPEED

In order to compensate for CPU clocks that run fast or slow, adjust a variable called
CLOCK_ADJ to speed up or slow down the clock by a fixed amount every day.
The CLOCK_ADJ variable is accessed via the VARS submenu: To change the value of
this variable, press:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
SETUP X.X ENTER SETUP PASS:0
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X 0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing NEXT until ...
SETUP X.X 8) CLOCK_ADJUST=0 Sec/Day
PREV NEXT EDIT ENTR EXIT
+ 0 0 EDIT ENTR EXIT
Enter sign and number of

seconds per day the clock
gains (-) or loses(+)
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new
setting.
ENTR accepts the

new setting.
06858F DCN8038 97
5.7. SETUP à COMM: COMMUNICATIONS PORTS

This section introduces the communications setup menu; Section 6 provides the setup
instructions and operation information. Press SETUP>ENTR>MORE>COM to arrive at
the communications menu.
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT
Figure 5-2. SETUP – COM Menu
5.7.1. ID (MACHINE IDENTIFICATION)

In the SETUP>MORE>COM menu press ID to display and/or change the Machine ID,
which must be changed to a unique identifier (number) when more than one instrument
of the same model is used:
• in an RS-232 multidrop configuration (Sections 3.3.1.8)
• on the same Ethernet LAN (Section 6.5)
• when applying MODBUS protocol (Section 6.7.1)
• when applying Hessen protocol (Section 6.7.2)
The default ID is typically the same as the model number, e.g., 0200 for the Model
T200; it may also be 0. Press any button(s) in the MACHINE ID menu (Figure 5-3) until
the Machine ID in the Parameter field displays the desired identifier.
98 06858F DCN8038
Toggle to cycle
through the available
character set: 0-9 ENTR accepts the new
SETUP X. MACHINE ID: 200 ID
settings
0 2 0 0 ENTR EXIT
settings
Figure 5-3. COMM– Machine ID

The ID can be any unique 4-digit number and can also be used to identify analyzers in
other ways (e.g. location numbers, company asset number, etc.)
5.7.2. INET (ETHERNET)

Use SETUP>COMM>INET to configure Ethernet communications, whether manually
or via DHCP. Please see Section 6.5.2 for configuration details.
5.7.3. COM1[COM2] (MODE, BAUDE RATE AND TEST PORT)

Use the SETUP>COMM>COM1[COM2] menus to:
• configure communication modes (Section 6.2.1)
• view/set the baud rate (Section 6.2.2)
• test the connections of the com ports (Section 6.2.3)
Configuring COM1 or COM2 requires setting the DCE DTE switch on the rear panel.
Section 6.1 provides DCE DTE information.
5.8. SETUP à VARS: VARIABLES SETUP AND DEFINITION

Through the SETUP>MORE>VARS menu there are several user-adjustable software
variables that define certain operational parameters. Usually, these variables are
automatically set by the instrument’s firmware, but can be manually re-defined using the
VARS menu.
Table 5-3 lists all variables that are available within the 818 password protected level.
See Appendix A2 for the T200 variables that are accessible through the remote interface.
06858F DCN8038 99
Table 5-3: Variable Names (VARS)

VARS
ALLOWED
NO. VARIABLE DESCRIPTION DEFAULT
VALUES
VALUES
Changes the Internal Data Acquisition System (DAS) May be set for
HOLDOFF timer: intervals
0 DAS_HOLD_OFF No data is stored in the DAS channels during situations when the
software considers the data to be questionable such as during warm
between 15 min.
0.5 – 20 min
up of just after the instrument returns from one of its calibration
mode to SAMPLE Mode.
Selects the gas measurement mode in which the instrument NO;

1 MEASURE_MODE is to operate. NOx only, NO only or NOx and NO NOx; NOx–NO
simultaneously. NOx–NO
Selects which gas measurement is displayed when the NO; NOx;
2 STABIL_GAS
STABIL test function is selected NO2;
NOx
Enables or disables the Temperature and Pressure

3 TPC_ENABLE
Compensation (TPC) feature (Section 13.9.2).
ON/OFF ON
Dynamic zero automatically adjusts offset and slope of the

4 DYN_ZERO NO and NOX response when performing a zero point ON/OFF OFF
calibration during an AutoCal (see Section 9.5).
Dynamic span automatically adjusts the offsets and slopes of
5 DYN_SPAN the NO and NOx response when performing a span point ON/OFF OFF
calibration during an AutoCal (see Section 9.5).
Sets the internal span gas generator’s permeation tube oven
6 IZS_SET temperature. Changing this temperature will impact the NO2 30°C - 70°C 51°C
permeation rate (Section 3.3.2.5).
Sets the number of significant digits to the right of the decimal AUTO, 1, 2,
7 CONC_PRECISION
point display of concentration and stability values. 3, 4
AUTO
Adjusts the speed of the analyzer’s clock. Choose + sign if -60 to +60
8 CLOCK_ADJ
the clock is too slow; choose - sign if the clock is too fast. s/day
0 sec
Allows turning ON and OFF the ability to span the analyzer
with NO2, in which case the instrument acts as if NO and NOX
9 CAL_ON_NO2 are spanned, even though it is supplied with NO2. ON/OFF OFF
The NO2 concentration is then zero by default.
Resets the service timer. Pressing OFF turns the setting to
10 SERVICE_CLEAR
ON. ENTR resets the timer to 0 and returns the setting to OFF.
ON/OFF OFF
Displays number of hours since last service (since

11 TIME_SINCE_SVC
SERVICE_CLEAR was reset).
0-500000 0 Hrs
12 SVC_INTERVAL Sets the number of hours between service reminders. 0-100000 0 Hrs
There is a 2-sec latency period between when a VARS value is changed and the
Note new value is stored into the analyzer’s memory. DO NOT turn the analyzer off
during this period or the new setting will be lost.
100 06858F DCN8038

To access and navigate the VARS menu, use the following button sequence:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU In all cases:

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT EXIT discards the new
setting.
SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818 ENTR accepts the

new setting.
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
Toggle these
buttons to enter
the correct
PASSWORD. SETUP X.X 0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.X DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
1 5 .0 ENTR EXIT
Toggle these buttons to set
the DAS HOLDOFF time
period in minutes
SETUP X.X 1) MEASURE_MODE=NOXNO (MAX = 20 minutes).
SETUP X.X MEASURE_MODE=NOX-NO
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Toggle these keys to
choose the gas(es) for
SETUP X.X 2) STABIL_GAS=NOX analyzer’s measurement
mode.
SETUP X.X STABIL_GAS=NOX
NO NO2 NOX O2 ENTR EXIT Use these buttons to select

which gas will be reported
by the STABIL test
function.
SETUP X.X 3) TPC_ENABLE (O2 is only available if the
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT optional O2 sensor is
SETUP X.X TPC_ENABLE=OFF installed)
OFF ENTR EXIT

Toggle this button to turn
the Temperature /
SETUP X.X 4) DYN_ZERO=OFF Pressure compensation
feature
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT ON/OFF.
SETUP X.X DYN_ZERO=OFF
OFF ENTR EXIT

the Dynamic Zero
SETUP X.X 5) DYN_SPAN=OFF calibration feature ON/
OFF.
SETUP X.X DYN_SPAN=OFF
OFF ENTR EXIT

DO NOT CHANGE Toggle this button to turn
these settings unless the Dynamic Span
SETUP X.X 6) IZS_SET=50.0 DegC
specifically instructed to by calibration feature ON/
Teledyne API’s Customer PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT OFF.
Service
personnel.
SETUP X.X 7) CONC_PRECISION=AUTO

SETUP X.X CONC_PRECISION=AUTO
AUTO 1 2 3 4 ENTR EXIT
Use these buttons to select

SETUP X.X 8) CLOCK_ADJUST=0 Sec/Day the precision of the
concentration display.
PREV JUMP EDIT ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X CLOCK_ADJUST=0 Sec/Day
+ 0 0 ENTR EXIT
Enter sign and number of

seconds per day the clock
SETUP X.X 9) CAL_ON_NO2=OFF gains (-) or loses(+).
SETUP X.X CAL_ON_NO2=OFF
OFF ENTR EXIT

ON/OFF the analyzer’s
ability to be calibrated
using NO2 span gas.
06858F DCN8038 101

5.9. SETUP à DIAG: DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS

A series of diagnostic tools is grouped together under the SETUPàMOREàDIAG
menu. The parameters are dependent on firmware revision (see Appendix A). These
tools can be used for troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures and are referred to in
many places of the maintenance and troubleshooting sections of this manual.
The various operating modes available under the DIAG menu are:
Table 5-4: Diagnostic Mode (DIAG) Functions

Front Panel MANUAL
DIAG SUBMENU SUBMENU FUNCTION
Mode Indicator SECTION
Allows observation of all digital and analog signals

SIGNAL I/O in the instrument. Allows certain digital signals such DIAG I/O 12.1.3
as valves and heaters to be toggled ON and OFF.
When entered, the analyzer performs an analog

ANALOG OUTPUT output step test. This can be used to calibrate a DIAG AOUT 12.7.6.1
chart recorder or to test the analog output accuracy.
The signal levels of the instruments analog outputs

may be calibrated (either individually or as a group).
ANALOG I/O
Various electronic parameters such as signal span, DIAG AIO 5.9.2
CONFIGURATION
and offset are available for viewing and
configuration.
TEST CHAN Selects one of the available test channel signals to

DIAG TCHN 5.9.4
OUTPUT output over the A4 analog output channel.
When activated, the analyzer performs an optic test,
which turns on an LED located inside the sensor module
OPTIC TEST DIAG OPTIC 12.7.12.1
near the PMT (Figure 12-9). This diagnostic tests the
response of the PMT without having to supply span gas.
When activated, the analyzer performs an electrical test,

ELECTRICAL which generates a current intended to simulate the PMT
DIAG ELEC 12.7.12.2
TEST output to verify the signal handling and conditioning of the
PMT preamp board.
Allows the user to manually turn the O3 generator on or

OZONE GEN
off. During initial power up TMR (timer) is displayed while DIAG OZONE 12.7.15.1
OVERRIDE 1 the Ozone brick remains off for the first 30 minutes.
FLOW This function is used to calibrate the gas flow output

DIAG FCAL 9.7
CALIBRATION 1 signals of sample gas and ozone supply.
1 These settings are retained after exiting DIAG mode.
102 06858F DCN8038

To access the various DIAG submenus, press the following buttons:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
DIAG SIGNAL I/O
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
EXIT returns to the

SECONDARY SETUP DIAG TEST CHAN OUTPUT
MENU.
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
ENTR Activates the
currently displayed
DIAG submenu.
DIAG OPTIC TEST
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG ELECTRICAL TEST
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG OZONE GEN OVERRIDE
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG FLOW CALIBRATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
Figure 5-4: Accessing the DIAG Submenus
06858F DCN8038 103

5.9.1. SIGNAL I/O

Use the signal I/O diagnostic mode to review and change the digital and analog
input/output functions of the analyzer. Refer to Appendix A for a list of the parameters
available for review under this menu.

Any changes of signal I/O settings will remain in effect only until the signal I/O
menu is exited. Exceptions are the Ozone Generator Override and the Flow
Sensor calibration, which remain as entered when exiting.
Access the signal I/O test mode from the DIAG Menu (Figure 5-4), then press:
DIAG SIGNAL I / O Press NEXT & PREV to
move between signal
types.
PREV NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT
DIAG I / O 0) EXT_ZERO_CAL=OFF Press JUMP to go

directly to a specific
signal
PREV NEXT JUMP PRNT EXIT
See Appendix A-4 for
a complete list of
available SIGNALS
EXAMPLE
DIAG I / O JUMP TO: 12

EXAMPLE:
1 2 ENTR EXIT Enter 12 to Jump to
12) ST_SYSTEM_OK=ON
DIAG I / O 12) ST_SYSTEM_OK = ON Exit to return

to the
DIAG menu
PREV NEXT JUMP ON PRNT EXIT
Pressing the PRNT button will send a formatted

Toggle ON/(OFF) button to printout to the serial port and can be captured
change status. with a computer or other output device.
104 06858F DCN8038

5.9.2. ANALOG OUTPUT (DIAG AOUT)

Use Analog Output to verify functionality and accuracy of the analog outputs. The test
forces all analog output channels to produce signals ranging from 0% to 100% of the full
scale range in 20% increments. This test is useful to verify the operation of the data
logging/recording devices attached to the analyzer.
Section 12.7.6.1 presents instructions for use in troubleshooting and service.
5.9.3. ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION (DIAG AIO)

The T200 analyzer comes equipped with four analog outputs. The first three outputs
(A1 A2, & A3) carry analog signals that represent the currently measured concentrating
of NOx, NO and NO2 (see Section 5.4.2.1). The fourth output (A4) outputs a signal that
can be set to represent the current value of one of several test functions (see Table 5-9).
The following table lists the analog I/O functions that are available in the T200 analyzer.
Table 5-5: DIAG - Analog I/O Functions

MANUAL
SUB MENU FUNCTION
SECTION
Initiates a calibration of the A1, A2, A3 and A4 analog output channels that
determines the slope and offset inherent in the circuitry of each output.
AOUT CALIBRATED 5.9.3.1
These values are stored and applied to the output signals by the CPU
automatically.
Sets the basic electronic configuration of the A1 output (NOx Concentration).
There are four options:
• RANGE1: Selects the signal type (voltage or current loop) and level of the
output
CONC_OUT_1 • REC OFS: Allows them input of a DC offset to let the user manually adjust
the output level
5.9.2
• AUTO CAL: Enables / Disables the AOUT CALIBRATION Feature
• CALIBRATED: Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED, but
on this one channel only.
CONC_OUT_2 • Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel A2 (NO Concentration)
CONC_OUT_3 • Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel A3 (NO2 Concentration)
TEST OUTPUT • Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel A4 (TEST CHANNEL) 5.9.4
AIN CALIBRATED Initiates a calibration of the A-to-D Converter circuit located on the Motherboard. 5.9.3.10
XIN1
. For each of 8 external analog inputs channels, shows the gain, offset,
. engineering units, and whether the channel is to show up as a Test 5.9.3.11
. function.
XIN8
06858F DCN8038 105

To access the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION sub menu, press:

<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
Toggle these
buttons to enter
the correct
PASSWORD. DIAG SIGNAL I/O
NEXT ENTR EXIT
AIO Configuration Submenu
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO A OUTS CALIBRATED: NO
<SET SET> CAL EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_1: 5V, OVR, NOCAL

Adjusts the signal output
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
for Analog Output A1.

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT: 5V,OVR, NOCAL

Selects the parameter to be
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT output on the TEST channel and
adjusts its signal output.
Replaced by CONC_OUT_4
DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED: NO
(O2 Concentration)
<SET SET> CAL EXIT on analyzers with the optional
O2 sensor installed.
DIAG AIO XIN1:1.00,0.00,V,OFF
<SET SET> CAL EXIT Press SET> to scroll to 8 channels.
Figure 5-5: Accessing the Analog I/O Configuration Submenus
106 06858F DCN8038

5.9.3.1. ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE / CURRENT RANGE SELECTION

In its standard configuration the analog outputs is set to output a 0 – 5 VDC signals.
Several other output ranges are available (see Table 5-6). Each range is usable from -
5% to +5% of the rated span.
Table 5-6: Analog Output Voltage Range Min/Max

RANGE NAME RANGE SPAN MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT
0.1V 0-100 mVDC -5 mVDC 105 mVDC
1V 0-1 VDC -0.05 VDC 1.05 VDC
5V 0-5 VDC -0.25 VDC 5.25 VDC
10V 0-10 VDC -0.5 VDC 10.5 VDC
The default offset for all VDC ranges is 0-5 VDC.
CURR 0-20 mA 0 mA 20 mA
While these are the physical limits of the current loop modules, typical applications use 2-20 mA or 4-20 mA for the lower and upper
limits. Please specify desired range when ordering this option.
The default offset for all current ranges is 0 mA.
To change the output type and range, select the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
submenu (see Figure 5-5) then press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
SET> CAL EXIT
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the

output to be configured
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V

Pressing ENTR records
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT the new setting and
returns to the previous
These buttons
menu.
set the signal
Pressing EXIT ignores the
level and type DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: RANGE: 5V new setting and returns to
of the selected
the previous menu.
channel. 0.1V 1V 5V 10V CURR ENTR EXIT
06858F DCN8038 107

5.9.3.2. CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS

In its default mode, the instrument is configured for automatic calibration of all
channels, which is useful for clearing any analog calibration warnings associated with
channels that will not be used or connected to any input or recording device, e.g., data
logger.
Manual calibration should be used for the 0.1V range or in cases where the outputs must
be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device. The AUTOCAL
feature must be disabled first for manual calibration.
5.9.3.3. ENABLING OR DISABLING THE AUTOCAL FOR AN INDIVIDUAL ANALOG OUTPUT

To enable or disable the AutoCal feature for an individual analog output, elect the
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION submenu (see Figure 5-5) then press:
From the
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
SET> CAL EXIT
NOTE:
ANALOG OUTPUTS Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
configured for 0.1V full output to be configured
scale should always be
calibrated manually.
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: RANGE: 5V
SET> EDIT EXIT
Continue pressing SET> until ...
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: AUTO CAL.:ON
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

ENTR accepts
Toggle this button the new setting.
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: AUTO CAL.:ON
to turn AUTO CAL EXIT ignores the
ON or OFF ON ENTR EXIT new setting.
(OFF = manual
calibration mode).
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: AUTO CAL.:OFF
OFF ENTR EXIT
108 06858F DCN8038

5.9.3.4. AUTOMATIC GROUP CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS

Manual calibration should be used for any analog output set for a 0.1V output
range or in cases where the outputs must be closely matched to the
characteristics of the recording device. (See Sections 5.9.3.2, 5.9.3.3, and 5.9.3.6).

Before performing this procedure, ensure that the AUTO CAL for each analog
output is enabled. (See Section 5.9.3.3).
To calibrate the outputs as a group with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command, select
the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION submenu (see Figure 5-5) then press:
From the
TEST_OUTPUT replaced
by CONC_OUT_4 DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
(O2 Concentration) PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
on analyzers with the
optional O2 sensor
installed. DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
SET> CAL EXIT
DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_1

This message
Analyzer
DIAG AIO NOT AUTO CAL. CONC_OUT_2 appears when
automatically
AUTO-CAL is
calibrates all
turned OFF for a
channels for which DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_3
channel
AUTO-CAL is turned
ON
DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING TEST_OUTPUT
If any of the channels have not DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

been calibrated or if at least one
SET> CAL EXIT
channel has AUTO-CAL turned
OFF, this message will read NO.
06858F DCN8038 109

5.9.3.5. AUTOMATIC INDIVIDUAL CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS

Use the AUTO CAL feature to initiate an automatic calibration for an individual analog
output; access the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION submenu
(SETUP>MORE>DIAG>PASSWORD>NEXT . . . or see Figure 5-5) then press:
From the
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
SET> CAL EXIT

DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: 5V, CONC2, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: CALIBRATED:NO
<SET SET> CAL EXIT
DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_2
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: CALIBRATED: YES
<SET SET> CAL EXIT
110 06858F DCN8038

5.9.3.6. MANUAL CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS CONFIGURED FOR VOLTAGE

RANGES
For highest accuracy, the voltages of the analog outputs can be manually calibrated.
Note The menu for manually adjusting the analog output signal level will only appear
if the AUTO-CAL feature is turned off for the channel being adjusted. (See
Section 5.9.3.3).
Calibration is performed with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals and by
changing the actual output signal level using the front panel buttons in 100, 10 or 1
count increments. See Figure 3-8 for pin assignments and diagram of the analog output
connector.
V
+DC Gnd
Volt
Meter
V OUT + V IN +
V OUT - V IN -
Recording
ANALYZER
Device
Figure 5-6: Setup for Checking / Calibrating DCV Analog Output Signal Levels
Table 5-7: Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration

MINIMUM
FULL ZERO SPAN
SPAN VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT
SCALE TOLERANCE TOLERANCE
(1 count)
0.1 VDC ±0.0005V 90 mV ±0.001V 0.02 mV
1 VDC ±0.001V 900 mV ±0.001V 0.24 mV
5 VDC ±0.002V 4500 mV ±0.003V 1.22 mV
10 VDC ±0.004V 4500 mV ±0.006V 2.44 mV
06858F DCN8038 111

To adjust the signal levels of an analog output channel manually, select the ANALOG
I/O CONFIGURATION submenu (see Figure 5-5) then press:
From the
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
SET> CAL EXIT
DISPLAYED AS = CHANNEL
CONC_OUT_1 = A1
CONC_OUT_2 = A2
CONC_OUT_3 = A3
TEST OUTPUT = A4
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
TEST_OUTPUT replaced SET> EDIT EXIT

by CONC_OUT_4
(O2 Concentration)
on analyzers with the
optional O2 sensor Continue pressing SET> until ...
installed.
<SET SET> CAL EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: VOLT-Z: 0 mV
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT

These buttons increase / These menus
decrease the analog output
signal level (not the value on the
only appear if
display) AUTO-CAL is
by 100, 10 or 1 counts. turned OFF.
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: VOLT-S: 4500 mV
Continue adjustments until the
voltage measured at the output U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
of the analyzer and/or the input
of the recording device matches
the value in the upper right hand
corner of the display
(within the tolerances DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: CALIBRATED: YES
listed in Table 8.8).
<SET SET> CAL EXIT
112 06858F DCN8038

5.9.3.7. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF CURRENT LOOP OUTPUT SPAN AND OFFSET

A current loop option may be purchased for the A1, A2 and A3 Analog outputs of the
analyzer. This option places circuitry in series with the output of the D-to-A converter
on the motherboard that changes the normal DC voltage output to a 0-20 milliamp signal
(See Section 3.3.1.4).
• The outputs can be ordered scaled to any set of limits within that 0-20 mA range,
however most current loop applications call for either 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA range
spans.
• All current loop outputs have a +5% over range. Ranges whose lower limit is set
above 1 mA also have a –5% under range.
To switch an analog output from voltage to current loop, follow the instructions in
Section 5.9.3.1 (select CURR from the list of options on the “Output Range” menu).
Adjusting the signal zero and span levels of the current loop output is done by raising or
lowering the voltage output of the D-to-A converter circuitry on the analyzer’s
motherboard. This raises or lowers the signal level produced by the current loop option
circuitry.
The software allows this adjustment to be made in 100, 10 or 1 count increments. Since
the exact amount by which the current signal is changed per D-to-A count varies from
output-to-output and instrument–to–instrument, you will need to measure the change in
the signal levels with a separate, current meter placed in series with the output circuit.
See Figure 3-8 for pin assignments and diagram of the analog output connector.
mADC
Current
Meter
IN OUT
I OUT + I IN +
I OUT - I IN -
Recording
ANALYZER
Device
Figure 5-7: Setup for Checking / Calibration Current Output Signal Levels Using an Ammeter

Do not exceed 60 V peak voltage between current loop outputs and instrument ground.
06858F DCN8038 113

To adjust the zero and span signal levels of the current outputs, select the ANALOG I/O
CONFIGURATION submenu (see Figure 5-5) then press:
From the
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
SET> CAL EXIT
DISPLAYED AS = CHANNEL
CONC_OUT_1 = A1
CONC_OUT_2 = A2
CONC_OUT_3 = A3
TEST OUTPUT = A4
TEST_OUTPUT replaced <SET SET> EDIT EXIT

by CONC_OUT_4
(O2 Concentration)
on analyzers with the DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: RANGE: CURR
optional O2 sensor
SET> EDIT EXIT
installed.
<SET SET> CAL EXIT
Analyzer automatically DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_2

calibrates the DCV signal
output from the analog
output channel to the
VDC-to-mA converter.
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: CURR-Z: 0 mV

These button increase /
decrease the analog output These menus
signal level (not the value on the adjust the mAmp
display)
by 100, 10 or 1 counts. signal output by
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: CURR-S: 5000 mV
converter circuit.
Continue adjustments until the
current signal measured at the
output of the analyzer matches
the zero and span points of the
intended current range
(e.g. 0 mA–20 mA;
4 mA–20 mA) DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: CALIBRATED: YES
<SET SET> CAL EXIT
114 06858F DCN8038

An alternate method for measuring the output of the Current Loop converter is to
connect a 250 ohm ±1% resistor across the current loop output in lieu of the current
meter (see Figure 3-8 for pin assignments and diagram of the analog output connector).
This allows the use of a voltmeter connected across the resistor to measure converter
output as VDC or mVDC.
V
+DC Gnd
Volt
Meter
V OUT + V IN +
250 Ω
V OUT - V IN -
Recording
ANALYZER
Device
Figure 5-8: Alternative Setup Using 250Ω Resistor for Checking Current Output Signal Levels
In this case, follow the procedure above but adjust the output for the following values:
Table 5-8: Current Loop Output Check

Voltage across Voltage across
% FS
Resistor for 2-20 mA Resistor for 4-20 mA
0 500 mVDC 1000 mVDC
100 5000 mVDC 5000 mVDC
06858F DCN8038 115

5.9.3.8. TURNING AN ANALOG OUTPUT OVER-RANGE FEATURE ON/OFF

In its default configuration, a ± 5% over-range is available on each of the T200’s analog
outputs. This over-range can be disabled if your recording device is sensitive to excess
voltage or current.
To turn the over-range feature on or off, select the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
From the
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
SET> CAL EXIT

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: OVERRANGE: ON
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Toggle this DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: OVERRANGE: ON

button to turn
the Over- ON ENTR EXIT
Range feature
ON/OFF.
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: OVERRANGE: OFF
OFF ENTR EXIT
116 06858F DCN8038

5.9.3.9. ADDING A RECORDER OFFSET TO AN ANALOG OUTPUT

Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal be significantly different from
the baseline of the recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise
around the zero point. This can be achieved in the T200 by defining a zero offset, a
small voltage (e.g., 10% of span).
To add a zero offset to a specific analog output channel, select the ANALOG I/O
CONFIGURATION submenu (see Figure 5-5) then press:
From the
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
SET> CAL EXIT

<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V
SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: REC OFS: 0 mV
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Toggle these DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: REC OFS: 0 mV

buttons to set
+ 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT
the desired
offset value.
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: REC OFS: -10 mV
– 0 0 1 0 ENTR EXIT
EXAMPLE
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: REC OFS: -10 mV
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
06858F DCN8038 117

5.9.3.10. AIN CALIBRATION

This is the submenu to conduct a calibration of the T200 analyzer’s analog inputs. This
calibration should only be necessary after major repair such as a replacement of CPU,
motherboard or power supplies.
To perform an analog input calibration, select the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
From the
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
<SET SET> CAL EXIT

DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED:NO
<SET CAL EXIT
DIAG AIO CALIBRATING A/D ZERO
Firmware automatically performs a zero point calibration

of the Motherboard’s analog Inputs
DIAG AIO CALIBRATING A/D SPAN
Firmware automatically performs a span point calibration

of the Motherboard’s analog Inputs
DIAG AIO A/D CALIBRATION ERROR DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED: YES
EXIT EXIT
Perform
Troubleshooting or call DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED:NO
Teledyne API’s <SET CAL EXIT
Customer Service
118 06858F DCN8038

5.9.3.11. EXTERNAL ANALOG INPUTS (XIN1…XIN8) OPTION CONFIGURATION

To configure the analyzer’s optional external analog inputs, define for each channel:
• gain (number of units represented by 1 volt)
• offset (volts)
• engineering units to be represented in volts (each press of the touchscreen button
scrolls the list of alphanumeric characters from A-Z and 0-9)
• whether to display the channel in the Test functions
These parameters can also be captured in the internal Data Acquisition System (DAS);
refer to Appendix A for Analog-In DAS parameters.
To adjust settings for the Analog Inputs option parameters press:
DIAG ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

Press SET> to scroll to the first
< SET SET> CAL EXIT channel. Continue pressing SET>
to view each of 8 channels.
DIAG AIO XIN1:1.00,0.00,V,OFF
Press EDIT at any channel

< SET SET> EDIT EXIT to to change Gain, Offset,
Units and whether to display
the channel in the Test
functions (OFF/ON).
DIAG AIO XIN1 GAIN:1.00V/V
SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO XIN1 OFFSET:0.00V

DIAG AIO XIN1 GAIN:1.00V/V
< SET SET> EDIT EXIT

+ 0 0 1 .0 0 ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO XIN1 UNITS:V
Press to change
< SET SET> EDIT EXIT Gain value
DIAG AIO XIN1 DISPLAY:OFF Pressing ENTR records the new setting
and returns to the previous menu.
Pressing EXIT ignores the new setting and
< SET EDIT EXIT returns to the previous menu.
06858F DCN8038 119

5.9.4. TEST CHAN OUTPUT (SELECTING A TEST CHANNEL FUNCTION

FOR OUTPUT A4)
The test functions available to be reported are listed in Table 5-9:
Table 5-9: Test Channels Functions available on the T200’s Analog Output
TEST CHANNEL DESCRIPTION ZERO FULL SCALE
NONE TEST CHANNEL IS TURNED OFF

The output of the PMT detector
PMT DETECTOR 0 mV 5000 mV 1
converted to a 0 to 5 VDC scale.
The flow rate of O3 through the analyzer
OZONE FLOW 0 cm3/min 1000 cm3/min
as measured by the O3 flow sensor.
The calculated flow rate for sample gas
SAMPLE FLOW 0 cm3/min 1000 cm3/min
through the analyzer.
The pressure of the sample gas
SAMPLE PRESSURE measured upstream of the Auto Zero 0 Hg-In-A 40 "Hg-In-A
Valve.
The pressure of gas inside the reaction
RCELL PRESSURE 0 Hg-In-A 40 Hg-In-A
cell of the sensor module.
The temperature of gas inside the
RCELL TEMP 0 °C 70 °C
reaction cell of the sensor module.
MANIFOLD TEMP Not used in the Model T200.
The temperature of the permeation tube
IZS TEMP oven of the optional internal span gas 0 °C 70 °C
generator.
CONV TEMP The temperature NO2 à NO converter. 0 °C 500 °C
PMT TEMP The temperature inside PMT. 0 °C 50 °C
The temperature inside the T200’s
BOX TEMP 0 °C 70 °C
chassis.
Represents the output voltage of the
HVPS VOLTAGE 0 mV 5000 mV 1
PMT's high voltage power supply.
Once a function is selected, the instrument not only begins to output a signal on the
analog output, but also adds TEST to the list of test functions viewable via the front
panel display.
120 06858F DCN8038

To activate the TEST Channel and select a function, press:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
Toggle these
buttons to enter
the correct
PASSWORD. DIAG SIGNAL I/O
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG TEST CHAN OUTPUT
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG TEST CHAN:NONE
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

to choose a mass flow
controller TEST
channel parameter. DIAG TEST CHANNEL:PMT DETECTOR
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new

setting.
ENTR accepts the
new setting.
06858F DCN8038 121

5.9.5. OPTIC TEST

The OPTIC TEST function tests the response of the PMT sensor by turning on an LED
located in the cooling block of the PMT. The analyzer uses the light emitted from the
LED to test its photo-electronic subsystem, including the PMT and the current to voltage
converter on the pre-amplifier board. To ensure that the analyzer measures only the light
coming from the LED, the analyzer should be supplied with zero air. The optic test
should produce a PMT signal of about 2000±1000 mV.

This is a coarse test for functionality and not an accurate calibration tool. The
resulting PMT signal can vary significantly over time and also changes with low-
level calibration.
5.9.6. ELECTRICAL TEST

The ELECTRICAL TEST function creates a current, which substitutes the PMT signal,
and feeds it into the preamplifier board. This signal is generated by circuitry on the pre-
amplifier board itself and tests the filtering and amplification functions of that assembly
along with the A/D converter on the motherboard. It does not test the PMT itself. The
electrical test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000 ±1000 mV.
5.9.7. OZONE GEN OVERRIDE

This feature is used to manually turn the ozone generator off and on. Read Section
13.2.3 to understand the ozone generator, and refer to Section 12.7.15.1 for instructions
on using the override feature in troubleshooting and service.
5.9.8. FLOW CALIBRATION

This function is used to calibrate the gas flow output signals of sample gas and ozone
supply. Section 9.7 presents instructions for flow calibration. Used to adjust the gas flow
calculations made by the CPU based on pressure and flow sensor readings.
122 06858F DCN8038

6. COMMUNICATIONS SETUP AND OPERATION
This instrument’s rear panel connections include an Ethernet port, a USB port (option)
and two serial communications ports labeled RS232, which is the COM1 port, and
COM2 (refer to Figure 3-4). These ports give the user the ability to communicate with,
issue commands to, and receive data from the analyzer through an external computer
system or terminal. Connection instructions were provided in Section 3.3.1.8.
This section provides pertinent information regarding communication equipment,
describes the instrument’s communications modes, presents configuration instructions
for the communications ports, and provides instructions for their use, including
communications protocol. Data acquisition is presented in Section 7.
6.1. DATE TERMINAL / COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT (DTE DCE)

RS-232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment
(DTE) and data communication equipment (DCE). Basic terminals always fall into the
DTE category whereas modems are always considered DCE devices. The difference
between the two is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions.
• DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3.
• DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2.
To allow the analyzer to be used with terminals (DTE), modems (DCE) and computers
(which can be either), a switch mounted below the serial ports on the rear panel labeled
DCE DTE (Figure 3-4) allows the user to set the RS-232 configuration for one of these
two data devices. This switch exchanges the Receive and Transmit lines on RS-232
emulating a cross-over or null-modem cable. The switch has no effect on COM2.
6.2. COMMUNICATION MODES, BAUD RATE AND PORT TESTING

Use the SETUP>MORE>COM menu to configure COM1 (labeled RS232 on instrument
rear panel) and/or COM2 (labeled COM2 on instrument rear panel) for communication
modes, baud rate and/or port testing for correct connection. If using a USB option
communication connection, setup requires configuring the COM2 baud rate (Section
6.2.2).
06858F DCN8038 123

Communications Setup and Operation Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual
6.2.1. COMMUNICATION MODES

Each of the analyzer’s serial ports can be configured to operate in a number of different
modes, listed in Table 6-1. As modes are selected, the analyzer sums the mode ID
numbers and displays this combined number on the front panel display. For example, if
quiet mode (01), computer mode (02) and Multi-Drop-Enabled mode (32) are selected,
the analyzer would display a combined MODE ID of 35.
Table 6-1: COM Port Communication Modes

MODE1 ID DESCRIPTION
Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the analyzer (such as warning messages)
to the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating with a
QUIET 1 computer program where such intermittent messages might cause communication
problems.
Such feedback is still available but a command must be issued to receive them.
Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is
COMPUTER 2 communicating with a computer operated control program.
HESSEN The Hessen communications protocol is used in some European countries. TAPI P/N
PROTOCOL 16 02252 contains more information on this protocol.
When turned on this mode switches the COM port settings from
E, 8, 1 8192
No parity; 8 data bits; 1 stop bit to Even parity; 8 data bits; 1 stop bit.
When turned on this mode switches the COM port settings from
E, 7, 1 2048
No parity; 8 data bits; 1 stop bit to Even parity; 7 data bits; 1 stop bit.
Configures the COM2 Port for RS-485 communication. RS-485 mode has precedence
RS-485 1024 over multidrop mode if both are enabled. Also, configuring for RS-485 disables the rear
panel USB port.
When enabled, the serial port requires a password before it will respond (see Section
SECURITY 4 5.5). The only command that is active is the help screen (? CR).
MULTIDROP Multidrop protocol allows a multi-instrument configuration on a single communications
PROTOCOL 32 channel. Multidrop requires the use of instrument IDs.
ENABLE Enables to send a modem initialization string at power-up. Asserts certain lines in the
MODEM 64 RS-232 port to enable the modem to communicate.
ERROR Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations.
CHECKING2 128
XON/XOFF Disables XON/XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking.
HANDSHAKE2 256
Enables CTS/RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking. This style of data
HARDWARE
HANDSHAKE 8 transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation
protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument’s APICOM software.
HARDWARE Disables the HARDWARE FIFO (First In – First Out). When FIFO is enabled, it
FIFO2 512 improves data transfer rate for that COM port.
COMMAND Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode.
PROMPT 4096
1 Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the
SETUP à MORE à COM à COM[1 OR 2] à MODE menu
2 The default setting for this feature is ON. Do not disable unless so instructed by Teledyne API's Customer Service
personnel.
124 06858F DCN8038

Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual Communications Setup and Operation
Communication Modes for each COM port must be configured independently. To turn
on or off the communication modes for either COM1 or COM2, access the
SETUP>MORE.[COM1 OR COM2] menu, and at the COM1 [2] Mode menu press
EDIT.
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MENU
Combined Mode ID
SETUP COM1 MODE:0 displayed here.
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP COM1 QUIET MODE:OFF
PREV NEXT OFF EXIT

Use the PREV and
NEXT buttons to
scroll between the
available modes
SETUP COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL:OFF
Activate / Deactivate PREV NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT

the selected mode by
toggling the ON /
OFF button SETUP COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL:ON
PREV NEXT ON ENTR EXIT

setting.
ENTR accepts the

new setting.
PREV and NEXT buttons to continue selecting
other COM modes you want to enable or disable
using the ON or OFF button.
Figure 6-1. COM – Communication Modes Setup
06858F DCN8038 125

6.2.2. COM PORT BAUD RATE

To select the baud rate of either COM Port, go to SETUP>MORE>COM and select
either COM1 or COM2 as follows (use COM2 to view/match your personal computer
baud rate when using the USB port, Section 6.6):
Select which COM SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU

port to configure.
(COM1 for example). ID INET COM1 COM2
SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0

Press SET> until you
reach the COM1 SET> EDIT EXIT
BAUD RATE
EXAMPLE
SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
Use PREV and NEXT
EXIT
to move between
ignores
available baud rates. <SET SET> EDIT EXIT the new
setting
300
1200
SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
4800
9600 ENTR
19200 PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT accepts
38400 the new
57600 setting
115200 SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:9600
NEXT ON ENTR EXIT
Figure 6-2. COM – COM Port Baud Rate
6.2.3. COM PORT TESTING

The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the COM menu. This
test sends a string of 256 ‘w’ characters to the selected COM port. While the test is
running, the red LED on the rear panel of the analyzer should flicker.
126 06858F DCN8038

To initiate the test press the following button sequence:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Continue pressing <SET or SET> until ...
SETUP X.X COM1: TEST PORT
<SET SET> TEST ENTR EXIT
Test runs
SETUP X.X TRANSMITTING TO COM1
automatically.
SETUP X.X COM1: TEST PORT
PREV NEXT OFF EXIT
Figure 6-3. COM – COM1 Test Port
06858F DCN8038 127

6.3. RS-232
The RS232 and COM2 communications (COMM) ports operate on the RS-232 protocol
(default configuration). Possible configurations for these two COM ports are
summarized as follows:
• RS232 port can also be configured to operate in single or RS-232 Multidrop mode
(Option 62); refer to Section 3.3.1.8.
• COM2 port can be left in its default configuration for standard RS-232 operation
including multidrop, or it can be reconfigured for half-duplex RS-485 operation
(please contact the factory for this configuration).
Note that when the rear panel COM2 port is in use, except for multidrop
communication, the rear panel USB port cannot be used. (Alternatively, when the USB
port is enabled, COM2 port cannot be used except for multidrop).
A code-activated switch (CAS), can also be used on either port to connect typically
between 2 and 16 send/receive instruments (host computer(s) printers, data loggers,
analyzers, monitors, calibrators, etc.) into one communications hub. Contact Teledyne
API Sales for more information on CAS systems.
To configure the analyzer’s communication ports, use the SETUP>MORE>COM menu.
Refer to Section 5.7 for initial setup, and to Section 6.2 for additional configuration
information.
6.4. RS-485 (OPTION)

The COM2 port of the instrument’s rear panel is set up for RS-232 communication but
can be reconfigured for RS-485 communication. Contact Customer Service. If this
option was elected at the time of purchase, the rear panel was preconfigured at the
factory.
128 06858F DCN8038

6.5. ETHERNET
When using the Ethernet interface, the analyzer can be connected to any standard
10BaseT or 100BaseT Ethernet network via low-cost network hubs, switches or routers.
The interface operates as a standard TCP/IP device on port 3000. This allows a remote
computer to connect through the network to the analyzer using APICOM, terminal
emulators or other programs.
The Ethernet connector has two LEDs that are on the connector itself, indicating its
current operating status.
Table 6-2: Ethernet Status Indicators

LED FUNCTION
amber (link) On when connection to the LAN is valid.
green (activity Flickers during any activity on the LAN.
The analyzer is shipped with DHCP enabled by default. This allows the instrument to be
connected to a network or router with a DHCP server. The instrument will automatically
be assigned an IP address by the DHCP server (Section 6.5.2). This configuration is
useful for quickly getting an instrument up and running on a network. However, for
permanent Ethernet connections, a static IP address should be used. Section 6.5.1 below
details how to configure the instrument with a static IP address.
6.5.1. CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATION MANUALLY (STATIC

IP ADDRESS)
To configure Ethernet communication manually:
1. Connect a cable from the analyzer’s Ethernet port to a Local Area Network (LAN) or
Internet port.
2. From the analyzer’s front panel touchscreen, access the Communications Menu
(SETUP>MORE>COMM, see Figure 5-2).
3. Enter the INET menu shown in Figure 6-4, turning DHCP mode to OFF and editing
the Instrument and Gateway IP addresses and Subnet Mask to the desired settings
(default settings showin in Table 6-3).
Alternatively, from the computer, enter the same information through an application
such as HyperTerminal.
06858F DCN8038 129

Internet Configuration Button Functions

BUTTON FUNCTION
Location of cursor. Press to cycle through the range of
[0]
numerals and available characters (“0 – 9” & “ . ”)
<CH CH> Moves the cursor one character left or right.
SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
DEL Deletes a character at the cursor location.
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous
ENTR
menu.
Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous
DHCP: ON is EXIT
menu.
default setting. SETUP X.X DHCP: ON
Skip this step Some buttons appear only when relevant.
if it has been SET> EDIT EXIT
set to OFF.
SETUP X.X DHCP: OFF
SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X INST IP: 000.000.000.000
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Cursor
location is
indicated by
brackets
SETUP X.X INST IP: [0] 00.000.000
<CH CH> DEL [0] ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: 000.000.000.000
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: [0] 00.000.000
<CH CH> DEL [?] ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:255.255.255.0
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:[2]55.255.255.0

SETUP X.X TCP PORT 3000 <CH CH> DEL [?] ENTR EXIT
<SET EDIT EXIT
The PORT number must remain at 3000.

Pressing EXIT from Do not change this setting unless instructed to by
Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel.
any of the above
display menus
causes the Ethernet
option to reinitialize
its internal interface SETUP X.X INITIALIZING INET 0%
firmware …
INITIALIZING INET 100%
SETUP X.X INITIALIZATI0N SUCCEEDED SETUP X.X INITIALIZATION FAILED
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU Contact your IT

Network Administrator
Figure 6-4. COM - LAN /Internet Manual Configuration
130 06858F DCN8038

Table 6-3. LAN/Ethernet Default Configuration Properties

PROPERTY DEFAULT STATE DESCRIPTION
This displays whether the DHCP is turned ON or OFF. Press
DHCP ON EDIT and toggle ON for automatic configuration after first
consulting network administrator.
INSTRUMENT This string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g.
IP ADDRESS 192.168.76.55.) is the address of the analyzer itself.
Can only be edited when DHCP is set to OFF.
GATEWAY IP 0.0.0.0 A string of numbers very similar to the Instrument IP address
ADDRESS (e.g. 192.168.76.1.) that is the address of the computer used by
your LAN to access the Internet.
Can only be edited when DHCP is set to OFF.
Also a string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g.
255.255.252.0) that identifies the LAN to which the device is
0.0.0.0 connected.
SUBNET MASK
All addressable devices and computers on a LAN must have the
same subnet mask. Any transmissions sent to devices with
different subnets are assumed to be outside of the LAN and are
routed through the gateway computer onto the Internet.
3000 This number defines the terminal control port by which the
TCP PORT1 instrument is addressed by terminal emulation software, such as
Internet or Teledyne API’s APICOM.
[initially blank] The name by which your analyzer will appear when addressed
HOST NAME from other computers on the LAN or via the Internet. To assign
or change, see Section 6.5.2.1.
1
Do not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne API’s Customer Service
personnel.
6.5.2. CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATION USING DYNAMIC

HOST CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL (DHCP)
The default Ethernet setting is DHCP.
1. Consult with your network administrator to affirm that your network server is running
DHCP.
2. Access the Communications Menu (SETUP>MORE>COMM, see Figure 5-2).
3. Enter the INET menu and follow the setup sequence as shown in Figure 6-5.
06858F DCN8038 131

From this point on,

EXIT returns to
COMMUNICATIONS
MENU
SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
DHCP: ON is SETUP X.X DHCP: OFF

default setting.
SETUP X.X DHCP: ON If it has been OFF ENTR EXIT
set to OFF,
SET> EDIT EXIT press EDIT
and set to ON. SETUP X.X DHCP: ON
ON ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X INST IP: 0.0.0.0
<SET SET> EXIT
SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: 0.0.0.0

EDIT button
disabled
<SET SET> EXIT
SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK: 0.0.0.0
<SET SET> EXIT
Do not alter unless

SETUP X.X TCP PORT: 3000
directed to by Teledyne
Instruments Customer
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT Service personnel
SETUP X.X TCP PORT2: 502
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X HOSTNAME:
<SET EDIT EXIT
Figure 6-5. COM – LAN / Internet Automatic Configuration (DHCP)
Note If the gateway IP, instrument IP and the subnet mask are all zeroes (i.e.,
“0.0.0.0”), the DCHP was not successful in which case you may have to configure
the analyzer’s Ethernet properties manually. See your network administrator.
132 06858F DCN8038

6.5.2.1. CHANGING THE ANALYZER’S HOSTNAME

The HOSTNAME is the name by which the analyzer appears on your network. The
initial default Hostname is blank. To assign or change this name (particularly if you
have more than one T200 analyzer on your network, where each must have a different
Hostname), enter the SETUP>COMM>INET men and scroll to the HOSTNAME menu
as in Figure 6-5; make the changes as shown in Figure 6-6:
SETUP X.X HOSTNAME:
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X HOSTNAME:

BUTTON FUNCTION
<CH Moves the cursor one character to the left. <CH CH> INS DEL [?] ENTR EXIT
CH> Moves the cursor one character to the right.
INS Inserts a character before the cursor location.
DEL Deletes a character at the cursor location.
Press this button to cycle through th e range of
[?]
numerals and chara cters available for Use these buttons to edit the HOSTNAME
insertion. 0- 9, A- Z, space ’ ~ !  # $ % ^ & * (
) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?
Accepts the new setting and returns to the
ENTR
previous menu.
SETUP X.X HOSTNAME: T200–STATION#2 (example name)
Ignores the new setting and returns to the
EXIT
previo us menu. <CH CH> INS DEL [?] ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts
Some buttons only appear as applicable.
the new setting.
EXIT ignores the
new setting.
SETUP X.X INITIALIZING INET 0%
INITIALIZATION process proceeds

automatically
SETUP X.X INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED SETUP X.X INITIALIZATION FAILED
ID ADDR INET EXIT Contact your

IT Network
Administrator.
Figure 6-6. COM – Change Hostname
06858F DCN8038 133

6.6. USB PORT FOR REMOTE ACCESS

The analyzer can be operated through a personal computer by downloading the TAPI
USB driver and directly connecting their respective USB ports.
1. Install the Teledyne T-Series USB driver on your computer, downloadable from the
Teledyne API website under Help Center>Software Downloads (www.teledyne-
api.com/software).
2. Run the installer file: “TAPIVCPInstaller.exe”
3. Connect the USB cable between the USB ports on your personal computer and your
analyzer. The USB cable should be a Type A – Type B cable, commonly used as a
USB printer cable.
4. Determine the Windows XP Com Port number that was automatically assigned to
the USB connection. (Start → Control Panel → System → Hardware → Device
Manager). This is the com port that should be set in the communications software,
such as APIcom or Hyperterminal.
Refer to the Quick Start (Direct Cable Connection) section of the Teledyne APIcom
Manual, PN 07463.
5. In the instrument’s SETUP>MORE>COMM>COM2 menu, make the following settings:
134 06858F DCN8038

Baud Rate: 115200

COM2 Mode Settings:
Quiet Mode ON
Computer Mode ON
MODBUS RTU OFF
MODBUS ASCII OFF
E,8,1 MODE OFF
E,7,1 MODE OFF
RS-485 MODE OFF
SECURITY MODE OFF
MULTIDROP MODE OFF
ENABLE MODEM OFF
ERROR CHECKING ON
XON/XOFF HANDSHAKE OFF
HARDWARE HANDSHAKE OFF
HARDWARE FIFO ON
COMMAND PROMPT OFF
6. Next, configure your communications software, such as APIcom. Use the COM port
determined in Step 4 and the baud rate set in Step 5. The figures below show how
these parameters would be configured in the Instrument Properties window in
APIcom when configuring a new instrument. See the APIcom manual (PN 07463)
for more details.
• USB configuration requires that the baud rates of the instrument and the PC
Note match; check the PC baud rate and change if needed.
• Using the USB port disallows use of the rear panel COM2 port except for
multidrop communication.
06858F DCN8038 135

6.7. COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOLS

Two communications protocols available with the analyzer are MODBUS and Hessen.
MODBUS setup instructions are provided here (Section 6.7.1) and registers are provided
in Appendix A. Hessen setup and operation instructions are provided in Section 6.7.2.
6.7.1. MODBUS
The following set of instructions assumes that the user is familiar with MODBUS
communications, and provides minimal information to get started. For additional
instruction, please refer to the Teledyne API MODBUS manual, PN 06276. Also refer to
www.modbus.org for MODBUS communication protocols.
Minimum Requirements
• Instrument firmware with MODBUS capabilities installed.
• MODBUS-compatible software (TAPI uses MODBUS Poll for testing; see
www.modbustools.com)
• Personal computer
• Communications cable (Ethernet or USB or RS232)
• Possibly a null modem adapter or cable
Actions
Set Com Mode parameters
Comm Ethernet: Using the front panel menu, go to SETUP – MORE – COM – INET; scroll
through the INET submenu until you reach TCP PORT 2 (the standard setting is
502), then continue to TCP PORT 2 MODBUS TCP/IP; press EDIT and toggle
the menu button to change the setting to ON, then press ENTR. (Change
Machine ID if needed: see “Slave ID”).
USB/RS232: Using the front panel menu, go to SETUP – MORE – COM – COM2 – EDIT;
scroll through the COM2 EDIT submenu until the display shows COM2
MODBUS RTU: OFF (press OFF to change the setting to ON. Scroll NEXT to
COM2 MODBUS ASCII and ensure it is set to OFF. Press ENTR to keep the
new settings. (If RTU is not available with your communications equipment, set
the COM2 MODBUS ASCII setting to ON and ensure that COM2 MODBUS
RTU is set to OFF. Press ENTR to keep the new settings).
Slave ID If your analyzer is connected to a network with at least one other analyzer of the same model,
a unique Slave ID must be assigned to each. Using the front panel menu, go to SETUP –
MORE – COM – ID. The MACHINE ID default is the same as the model number. Toggle the
menu buttons to change the ID.
Reboot analyzer For the settings to take effect, power off the analyzer, wait 5 seconds, and power it on again.
Make appropriate cable Connect your analyzer either:
connections • via its Ethernet or USB port to a PC (this may require a USB-to-RS232 adapter for your PC;
if so, also install the sofware driver from the CD supplied with the adapter, and reboot the
computer if required), or
• via its COM2 port to a null modem (this may require a null modem adapter or cable).
Specify MODBUS software 1. Click Setup / [Read / Write Definition] /.

settings a. In the Read/Write Definition window (see example that follows) select a Function (what
(examples used here are for you wish to read from the analyzer).
MODBUS Poll software) b. Input Quantity (based on your firware’s register map).
c. In the View section of the Read/Write Definition window select a Display (typically Float
Inverse).
d. Click OK.
2. Next, click Connection/Connect.
a. In the Connection Setup window (see example that follows), select the options based on
your computer.
b. Press OK.
Read the Modbus Poll Use the Register Map to find the test parameter names for the values displayed (see example
Register that follows If desired, assign an alias for each.
136 06858F DCN8038

Example Read/Write Definition window:
Example Connection Setup window:
Example MODBUS Poll window:
06858F DCN8038 137

6.7.2. HESSEN
The Hessen protocol is a multidrop protocol, in which several remote instruments are
connected via a common communications channel to a host computer. The remote
instruments are regarded as slaves of the host computer. The remote instruments are
unaware that they are connected to a multidrop bus and never initiate Hessen protocol
messages. They only respond to commands from the host computer and only when they
receive a command containing their own unique ID number.
The Hessen protocol is designed to accomplish two things: to obtain the status of remote
instruments, including the concentrations of all the gases measured; and to place remote
instruments into zero or span calibration or measure mode. Teledyne API’s
implementation supports both of these principal features.
The Hessen protocol is not well defined; therefore, while Teledyne-API’s application is
completely compatible with the protocol itself, it may be different from implementations
by other companies.
6.7.2.1. HESSEN COM PORT CONFIGURATION

Hessen protocol requires the communication parameters of the T200’s COM ports to be
set differently than the standard configuration as shown in the table below.
Table 6-4: RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol

PARAMETER STANDARD HESSEN
Baud Rate 300 – 19200 1200
Data Bits 8 7
Stop Bits 1 2
Parity None Even
Duplex Full Half
To change the baud rate of the T200’s COM ports, See Section 6.2.2.
To change the remaining COM port parameters listed in the table above, see Section
6.2.1, Table 6-1.
Note Ensure that the communication parameters of the host computer are also
properly set.
Also, the instrument software has a 200 ms latency period before it responds to
commands issued by the host computer. This latency should present no
problems, but you should be aware of it and not issue commands to the
instrument too frequently.
138 06858F DCN8038

6.7.2.2. ACTIVATING HESSEN PROTOCOL

Once the COM port has been properly configured, the next step in configuring the T200
in order to operate over a Hessen protocol network is to activate the Hessen mode for
COM ports and configure the communication parameters for the port(s) appropriately.
To activate the Hessen Protocol, press:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
ID COM1 COM2 EXIT
Combined Mode ID
SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0 displayed here.
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 QUIET MODE:OFF
PREV NEXT OFF EXIT

Use the PREV and
NEXT buttons to
between the
available modes.
SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL: OFF
Activate / Deactivate PREV NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT

the HESSEN mode
by toggling the ON /
OFF button. SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL: OFF
PREV NEXT ON ENTR EXIT

setting.
ENTR accepts the

SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:16 new setting.
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT
06858F DCN8038 139

6.7.2.3. SELECTING A HESSEN PROTOCOL TYPE

Currently there are two versions of Hessen Protocol in use. The original
implementation, referred to as TYPE 1, and a more recently released version, TYPE 2
that has more flexibility when operating with instruments that can measure more than
one type of gas. For more specific information about the difference between TYPE 1
and TYPE 2 download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne
API's web site: http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/.
To select a Hessen Protocol Type press:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
SETUP X.X HESSEN VARIATION:TYPE1
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
TYP1 TYP2 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new

Use these setting.
buttons to
choose the ENTR accepts the
Hessen type. new setting.
• While Hessen Protocol Mode can be activated independently for COM1 and
Note COM2, the TYPE selection affects both Ports.
140 06858F DCN8038

6.7.2.4. SETTING THE HESSEN PROTOCOL RESPONSE MODE

The Teledyne API's implementation of Hessen Protocol allows the user to choose one of
several different modes of response for the analyzer.
Table 6-5: Teledyne API's Hessen Protocol Response Modes

MODE ID MODE DESCRIPTION
CMD This is the Default Setting. Reponses from the instrument are encoded as the traditional
command format. Style and format of responses depend on exact coding of the initiating
command.
BCC Responses from the instrument are always delimited with <STX> (at the beginning of the
response, <ETX> (at the end of the response followed by a 2 digit Block Check Code
(checksum), regardless of the command encoding.
TEXT Responses from the instrument are always delimited with <CR> at the beginning and the end of
the string, regardless of the command encoding.
To Select a Hessen response mode, press:

<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X HESSEN RESPONSE MODE:CMD
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X HESSEN RESPONSE MODE:CMD
BCC TEXT CMD ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new

Use these buttons to setting.
choose the Hessen
Response type. ENTR accepts the
new setting.
06858F DCN8038 141

6.7.2.5. HESSEN PROTOCOL GAS LIST ENTRY FORMAT AND DEFINITIONS

The T200 analyzer keeps a list of available gas types. Each entry in this list is of the
following format.
[GAS TYPE],[RANGE],[GAS ID],[REPORTED]
WHERE:
GAS TYPE The type of gas to be reported (e.g. NOx, NO and NO2 etc.).
RANGE The concentration range for this entry in the gas list. This feature permits
the user to select which concentration range will be used for this gas list
entry. The T200 analyzer has two ranges: RANGE1 or LOW & RANGE2
or HIGH (see Section 5.4).
• 0- The HESSEN protocol to use whatever range is currently active.
• 1- The HESSEN protocol will always use RANGE1 for this gas list
entry
• 2- The HESSEN protocol will always use RANGE2 for this gas list
entry
• 3- Not applicable to the T200 analyzer.
GAS ID An identification number assigned to a specific gas. The T200 analyzer

is a multiple gas instrument that measures NOx, NO and NO2. Their ID
numbers are as follows:
NOx 211
NO 212
NO2 213
REPORT States whether this list entry is to be reported or not reported when ever
this gas type or instrument is polled by the HESSEN network. If the list
entry is not to be reported this field will be blank. It’s default gas list
consists of only reads:
NOX, 0, 211, REPORTED
NO, 0, 212, REPORTED
NO2, 0, 213, REPORTED
These default settings cause the instrument to report the concentration value of the
currently active range. If you wish to have just concentration value stored for a specific
range, this list entry should be edited or additional entries should be added to the list.
EXAMPLE: Changing the above NOx gas list entry to read:
NOX, 2, 211, REPORTED

Would only record the last NOx reading that occurred while RANGE2 (HIGH) range
was active.
142 06858F DCN8038

EDITING OR ADDING HESSEN GAS LIST ENTRIES

To add or edit an entry to the Hessen Gas List, press:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X HESSEN GAS LIST
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X NOX, 0, 211, REPORTED
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT

Use the PREV and NEXT
button to move between gas
list entries. SETUP X.X GAS TYPE:NOX
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT EXIT sets the

Use the PREV and NEXT gas type to
buttons to move between gas NONE.
types.
SETUP X.X CONC RANGE:0
Toggle this button to 0 ENTR EXIT
set the concentration
range for the list
entry.
SETUP X.X GAS ID:[ID Number]

EXIT discards the
Toggle these buttons to 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT new setting.
set the appropriate GAS
ID. ENTR accepts the
For new list entries this new setting.
number will be displayed
as 000.
SETUP X.X REPORTED:ON
ON ENTR EXIT
Toggle this button
turn ON/OFF the
REPORT attribute.
PREV MEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
06858F DCN8038 143

DELETING HESSEN GAS LIST ENTRIES

To delete an entry from the Hessen Gas list, press:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Continue pressing SET until ...
SETUP X.X HESSEN GAS LIST
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X DELETE?
YES NO
DELETED
144 06858F DCN8038

6.7.2.6. SETTING HESSEN PROTOCOL STATUS FLAGS

Teledyne API's’ implementation of Hessen protocols includes a set of status bits that the
instrument includes in responses to inform the host computer of its condition. Each bit
can be assigned to one operational and warning message flag. The default settings for
these bit/flags are:
Table 6-6: Default Hessen Status Flag Assignments

DEFAULT BIT
STATUS FLAG NAME3
ASSIGNMENT
WARNING FLAGS
SAMPLE FLOW WARNING 0001
OZONE FLOW WARNING 0002
RCEL PRESS WARN 0004
BOX TEMP WARNING 0008
RCELL TEMP WARNING 0010
IZS TEMP WARNING1 0020
PMT TEMP WARN 0040
CONV TEMP WARNING 0080
INVALID CONC 8000
OPERATIONAL FLAGS
In MANUAL Calibration Mode 0200
In ZERO Calibration Mode 0400
In SPAN Calibration Mode 0800
In WARMUP Mode 1000
UNITS OF MEASURE FLAGS
UGM 0000
MGM 2000
PPB 4000
PPM 6000
SPARE/UNUSED BITS 0100
UNASSIGNED FLAGS (0000)
MANIFOLD TEMPERATURE2 HVPS WARNING
OZONE GEN OFF FRONT PANEL WARN
SYSTEM RESET ANALOG CAL WARNING
RELAY BOARD WARNING CANNOT DYN ZERO
REAR BOARD NOT DETECTED CANNOT DYN SPAN
AUTOZERO WARNING Instrument is in MP CAL mode
1
Only applicable if the optional internal span gas generator is installed.
2
Only applicable if the T200 is equipped with an oxygenator option.
3
It is possible to assign more than one flag to the same Hessen status bit. This
allows the grouping of similar flags, such as all temperature warnings, under the
same status bit.
Be careful not to assign conflicting flags to the same bit as each status bit will be
triggered if any of the assigned flags is active.
06858F DCN8038 145

To assign or reset the status flag bit assignments, press:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

SETUP X.X HESSEN STATUS FLAGS
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X IZS TEMP WARNING:0020
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
PREV NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT
Continue pressing SET until ...

Continue pressing NEXT until desired
flag message is displayed
SETUP X.X BOX TEMP WARNING:0008
PREV NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X BOX TEMP WARNING:[0]008
The <CH and CH> <CH CH> DEL [0] ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the
buttons move the new setting.
cursor brackets “[ ]”
left and right along the ENTR accepts the
bit string. new setting.
Press the [?] button repeatedly to cycle

INS Inserts a the
through the available character set: 0-9
character at the
current location of the NOTE: Values of A-F can also be set
cursor brackets. but are meaningless.
6.7.2.7. INSTRUMENT ID
Each instrument on a Hessen Protocol network must have a unique identifier (ID
number). Refer to Section 5.7.1 for information and to customize the ID of each.
146 06858F DCN8038

7. DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (DAS) AND APICOM
The T200 analyzer contains a flexible and powerful, internal data acquisition system
(DAS) that enables the analyzer to store concentration and calibration data as well as a
host of diagnostic parameters. The DAS feature of the T200 can store a large number of
data points, which can, depending on individual configurations, cover days, weeks or
months of valuable measurements. The data records are stored in non-volatile memory
and are retained even when the instrument is powered off. Data are stored in plain text
format for easy retrieval and use in common data analysis programs (such as electronic
spreadsheets).
The DAS is designed to be flexible, users have full control over the type, length and
reporting time of the data. The DAS permits users to access stored data through the
instrument’s front panel or remotely through its communication ports.
The principal use of the DAS is logging data for trend analysis and predictive
diagnostics, which can assist in identifying possible problems before they affect the
functionality of the analyzer. The secondary use is for data analysis, documentation and
archival in electronic format.
To support the DAS functionality, Teledyne API offers APICOM, a program that
provides a visual interface for remote or local setup, configuration and data retrieval of
the DAS. Using APICOM, data can even be retrieved automatically to a remote
computer for further processing. The APICOM manual, included with the program,
contains a more detailed description of the DAS structure and configuration and is
briefly described in this document.
The T200 is configured with a basic DAS configuration already enabled. The data
channels included in this basic structure may be used as is or temporarily disabled for
later or occasional use.
The green SAMPLE LED on the instrument front panel, which indicates the analyzer
status, also indicates certain aspects of the DAS status:
Table 7-1: Front Panel LED Status Indicators for DAS

LED STATE DAS Status
System is in calibration mode. Data logging can be enabled or disabled for this mode. Calibration
OFF data are typically stored at the end of calibration periods, concentration data are typically not
sampled, diagnostic data should be collected.
Instrument is in hold-off mode, a short period after the system exits calibrations. DAS channels can
BLINKING be enabled or disabled for this period. Concentration data are typically disabled whereas diagnostic
should be collected.
ON Sampling normally.
06858F DCN8038 147

Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual
DAS operation is suspended whenever its configuration is edited using

the analyzer’s front panel and therefore data may be lost. To prevent
such data loss, it is recommended to use the APICOM graphical user
interface for DAS changes (Section 7.2.1).
Please be aware that all stored data will be erased if the analyzer’s disk-on-
module or CPU board is replaced or if the configuration data stored there is
reset.
Note The DAS can be disabled only by disabling or deleting its individual data
channels.
7.1. DAS STRUCTURE

The DAS is designed around the feature of a “record”. A record is a single data point.
The type of data captured in a record are defined by two properties:
• PARAMETER type that defines the kind of data to be stored (e.g. the average of
O3 concentrations measured with three digits of precision). See Section 7.1.3.3.
• A TRIGGER event that defines when the record is made (e.g. timer; every time a
calibration is performed, etc.). See Section 7.1.3.2.
The specific PARAMETERS and TRIGGER events that describe an individual record
are defined in a construct called a DATA CHANNEL (see Section 7.1.3). Each data
channel relates one or more parameters with a specific trigger event and various other
operational characteristics related to the records being made (e.g. the channels name,
number or records to be made, time period between records, whether or not the record is
exported via the analyzer’s RS-232 port, etc.).
7.1.1. DAS CHANNELS

The key to the flexibility of the DAS is its ability to store a large number of
combinations of triggering events and data parameters in the form of data channels.
Users may create up to 20 data channels and each channel can contain one or more
parameters. For each channel, the following are selected:
• one triggering event
• up to 50 data parameters, which can be the shared between channels
• several other properties that define the structure of the channel and allow the user
to make operational decisions regarding the channel
148 06858F DCN8038

Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
Table 7-2: DAS Data Channel Properties

DEFAULT
PROPERTY DESCRIPTION SETTING RANGE
SETTING
NAME The name of the data channel. “NONE” Up to 6 letters or digits1.
TRIGGERING The event that triggers the data channel to Any available event
ATIMER
EVENT measure and store the datum. (see Appendix A-5).
NUMBER AND
A user-configurable list of data types to be 1 Any available parameter
LIST OF
PARAMETERS
recorded in any given channel. (PMTDET) (see Appendix A-5).
000:00:01 to
The amount of time between each channel data 000:01:00
REPORT PERIOD
point. (1 hour)
366:23:59
(Days:Hours:Minutes)
Limited by available
The number of reports that will be stored in the
NUMBER OF storage space, which
data file. Once the limit is exceeded, the oldest 100
RECORDS depends on DAS
data is over-written.
configuration.
Enables the analyzer to automatically report
RS-232 REPORT
channel values to the RS-232 ports.
OFF OFF or ON
CHANNEL Enables or disables the channel. Allows a channel
ENABLED to be temporarily turned off without deleting it.
ON OFF or ON
Disables sampling of data parameters while
CAL HOLD OFF
instrument is in calibration mode2.
OFF OFF or ON
1
More with APICOM, but only the first six are displayed on the front panel).
2
When enabled records are not recorded until the DAS_HOLD OFF period is passed after calibration mode. DAS_HOLD OFF SET in
the VARS menu (see Section 5.8).
06858F DCN8038 149

7.1.1.1. DEFAULT DAS CHANNELS

A set of default Data Channels has been included in the analyzer’s software for logging
NOx, NO and NO2 concentrations as well as certain predictive diagnostic data. For the
software revision being shipped with the T200 at the time of this writing, these default
channels are:
CONC: Samples NOx concentration at one minute intervals and stores an average every
hour with a time and date stamp. Readings during calibration and calibration hold off
are not included in the data.
• By default, the last 800 hourly averages are stored.
CALDAT: Logs new slope and offset of NOX and NO measurements every time a zero
or span calibration is performed and the result changes the value of the slope (triggering
event: SLPCHG). The NOX stability (to evaluate if the calibration value was stable) as
well as the converter efficiency (for trend reference) are also stored.
• This data channel will store data from the last 200 calibrations and can be used to
document analyzer calibration and is useful for detect trends in slope and offset
(instrument response) when performing predictive diagnostics as part of a regular
maintenance schedule (See Section 11.1).
• The CALDAT channel collects data based on events (e.g. a calibration operation)
rather than a timed interval and therefore does not represent any specific length of
time. As with all data channels, a date and time stamp is recorded for every logged
data point.
CALCHECK: This channel logs concentrations and the stability each time a zero or
span check (not calibration) is finished (triggered by exiting any calibration menu).
• The data of this channel enable the user to track the quality of zero and span
responses over time and assist in evaluating the quality of zero and span gases and
the analyzer’s noise specifications.
• The STABIL parameter documents if the analyzer response was stable at the point
of the calibration check reading. The last 200 data points are retained.
DIAG: Daily averages of temperature zones, flow and pressure data as well as some
other diagnostic parameters (HVPS, AZERO).
• This data is useful for predictive diagnostics and maintenance of the T200.
• The last 1100 daily averages are stored to cover more than four years of analyzer
performance.
HIRES: Records one-minute, instantaneous data of all active parameters in the T200.
Short-term trends as well as signal noise levels can be detected and documented.
• Readings during calibration and the calibration hold off period are included in the
averages.
• The last 1500 data points are stored, which covers a little more than one day of
continuous data acquisition.
These default data channels can be used as they are, or they can be customized from the
front panel to fit a specific application. They can also be deleted to make room for
custom user-programmed Data Channels.
150 06858F DCN8038

Appendix A lists the firmware-specific DAS configuration in plain-text format. This

text file can either be loaded into APICOM and then modified and uploaded to the
instrument or can be copied and pasted into a terminal program to be sent to the
analyzer.

Sending a DAS configuration to the analyzer through its COM ports will replace
the existing configuration and will delete all stored data. Back up any existing
data and the DAS configuration before uploading new settings.
06858F DCN8038 151

List of Channels List of Parameters

STORE NUM
PARAMETER MODE PRECISION
SAMPLES
Name: CONC NOXCNC1 AVG 4 OFF

Event: ATIMER NOCNC1 AVG 4 OFF
Parameters: 5 N2CNC1 AVG 4 OFF
Report Period: 000:01:00 O2CONC AVG 4 OFF
No. of Records: 800 STABIL AVG 4 ON
RS-232 Report: OFF
Channel Enabled: ON
Cal Hold OFF: ON NXZSC1 AVG 4 OFF
NXSLP1 AVG 4 OFF
Name: CALDAT NXOFS1 AVG 4 OFF
Event: SLPCHG NOZSC1 AVG 4 OFF
Parameters: 9 NOSLP1 AVG 4 OFF
Report Period: N/A NOOFS1 AVG 4 OFF
No. of Records: 200 N2ZSC1 AVG 4 OFF
RS-232 Report: OFF CNVEF1 AVG 4 OFF
Channel Enabled: ON STABIL AVG 4 OFF
Cal Hold OFF: OFF
NXCNC1 AVG 4 OFF
Name: CALCHECK NOCNC1 AVG 4 OFF
Event: EXITMP N2CNC1 AVG 4 OFF
STABIL AVG 4 OFF
Parameters: 4
Report Period: N/A
No. of Records: 200 SMPFLW AVG 2 OFF
RS-232 Report: OFF O3FLOW AVG 2 OFF
Channel Enabled: ON RCPRES AVG 2 OFF
Cal Hold OFF: OFF SMPPRS AVG 2 OFF
RCTEMP AVG 2 OFF
Name: DIAG PMTTMP AVG 2 OFF
Event: ATIMER CNVTMP AVG 2 OFF
Parameters: 12 MFTEMP AVG 2 OFF
BOXTMP AVG 2 OFF
Report Period: 001:00:00
O2TEMP AVG 2 OFF
No. of Records: 1100
AZERO AVG 2 OFF
RS-232 Report: OFF
HVPS AVG 1 OFF
Channel Enabled: ON
Cal Hold OFF: OFF
NXCNC1 AVG 4 OFF
NOCNC1 AVG 4 OFF
N2CNC1 AVG 4 OFF
STABIL AVG 4 OFF
SMPFLW AVG 2 OFF
O3FLOW AVG 2 OFF
RCPRES AVG 2 OFF
Name: HIRES SMPPRS AVG 2 OFF
Event: ATIMER RCTEMP AVG 2 OFF
Parameters: 18 PMTTMP AVG 2 OFF
Report Period: 000:00:01 CNVTMP AVG 2 OFF
No. of Records: 1500 MFTEMP AVG 2 OFF
RS-232 Report: OFF BOXTMP AVG 2 OFF
Channel Enabled: OFF O2TEMP AVG 2 OFF
Cal Hold OFF: OFF AZERO AVG 2 OFF
HVPS AVG 1 OFF
REFGND AVG 1 OFF
REF4096 AVG 1 OFF
Figure 7-1: Default DAS Channels Setup
152 06858F DCN8038

7.1.1.2. DAS CONFIGURATION LIMITS

The number of DAS objects is limited by the instrument’s finite storage capacity. For
information regarding the maximum number of channels, parameters, and records and
how to calculate the file size for each data channel, refer to the DAS manual
downloadable from the TAPI website at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/ under
Special Manuals.
7.1.2. VIEWING DAS DATA AND SETTINGS

DAS data and settings can be viewed on the front panel through the following menu
sequence.

DAS VIEW – Touchscreen Functions
<TST TST> CAL SETUP
Concentration field Button FUNCTION
displays all gases. PV10 Moves the VIEW backward 10 record
PREV Moves the VIEW backward 1 records or channel
NEXT Moves the VIEW forward 1 record or channel
NX10 Moves the VIEW forward 10 records

SETUP X.X DATA ACQUISITION
<PRM Selects the previous parameter on the list
VIEW EDIT EXIT
PRM> Selects the next parameter on the list
Buttons only appear when applicable.
SETUP X.X CONC: DATA AVAILABLE
NEXT VIEW EXIT
SETUP X.X 101:21:00 NXCNC1=59.0346 PPB
PV10 PREV NX10 NEXT <PRM PRM> EXIT
SETUP X.X 101:22:00 NXCNC1=000.0000 PPB SETUP X.X 101:21:00 NOCNC1=22.0934 PPB
PV10 PREV NX10 NEXT <PRM PRM> EXIT PV10 PREV NX10 NEXT <PRM PRM> EXIT
SETUP X.X CALDAT: DATA AVAILABLE
NEXT VIEW EXIT
SETUP X.X 101:19:45 NXZSC1=401.0346
PV10 PREV NX10 NEXT <PRM PRM> EXIT
SETUP X.X 102:04:55 NXZSC1=400.9868 SETUP X.X 101:19:45 NXSLP1=0.9987 PPB

PV10 PREV NX10 NEXT <PRM PRM> EXIT PV10 PREV NX10 NEXT <PRM PRM> EXIT
Continue pressing NEXT to view remaining

DAS channels
06858F DCN8038 153

7.1.3. EDITING DAS DATA CHANNELS

DAS configuration is most conveniently done through the APICOM remote control
program. The following list of button strokes shows how to edit using the front panel.
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
Main DAS Menu

SETUP X.X DATA ACQUISITION DAS EDIT – Touchscreen Button Functions
VIEW EDIT EXIT Button FUNCTION
PREV Selects the previous data channel in the list
NEXT Selects the next data channel in the list

Inserts a new data channel into the list BEFORE the
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
INS selected channel
DEL Deletes the currently selected data channel
EDIT Channel Menu EDIT Enters EDIT mode

SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER 4, 800 Exports the configuration of all data channels to the
PRINT RS-232 interface
Buttons only appear when applicable.
Enters EDIT mode for the selected channel
When editing the data channels, the top line of the display indicates some of the
configuration parameters.
For example, the display line:
0) NXCNC1: ATIMER, 5, 800

Translates to the following configuration:
Channel No.: 0
NAME: NXCNC1
TRIGGER EVENT: ATIMER
PARAMETERS: Five parameters are included in this channel
EVENT: This channel is set up to store 800 records.
154 06858F DCN8038

7.1.3.1. EDITING DAS DATA CHANNEL NAMES

To edit the name of a DAS data channel, follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.3
then press:
Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU
SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER 5, 800
<SET SET> EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X NAME: CONC
C O N C — — ENTR EXIT
setting.
ENTR accepts the

new setting.
Press each button repeatedly to

cycle through the available
character set:
0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ ! # $ % ^ &
* ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?
06858F DCN8038 155

7.1.3.2. EDITING DAS TRIGGERING EVENTS

Triggering events define when and how the DAS records a measurement of any given
data channel. Triggering events are firmware-specific and a complete list of Triggers for
this model analyzer can be found in Appendix A-5. The most commonly used triggering
events are:
• ATIMER: Sampling at regular intervals specified by an automatic timer. Most
trending information is usually stored at such regular intervals, which can be
instantaneous or averaged.
• EXITZR, EXITSP, and SLPCHG (exit zero, exit span, slope change): Sampling at
the end of (irregularly occurring) calibrations or when the response slope changes.
These triggering events create instantaneous data points, e.g., for the new slope
and offset (concentration response) values at the end of a calibration. Zero and
slope values are valuable to monitor response drift and to document when the
instrument was calibrated.
• WARNINGS: Some data may be useful when stored if one of several warning
messages appears such as WTEMPW (GFC wheel temperature warning). This is
helpful for troubleshooting by monitoring when a particular warning occurred.
To edit the list of data parameters associated with a specific data channel, follow the
instruction shown in Section 7.1.3 then press:
C O N C — — ENTR EXIT
setting.
ENTR accepts the

new setting.
Press each button repeatedly to

cycle through the available
character set:
0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ ! # $ % ^ &
* ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?
Note A full list of DAS Trigger Events can be found in Appendix A-5 of this manual.
156 06858F DCN8038

7.1.3.3. EDITING DAS PARAMETERS

Data parameters are types of data that may be measured and stored by the DAS. For
each Teledyne API's analyzer model, the list of available data parameters is different,
fully defined and not customizable. Appendix A-5 lists firmware specific data
parameters for the T200. DAS parameters include data such as NOx, NO and NO2
concentration measurements, temperatures of the various heaters placed around the
analyzer, pressures and flows of the pneumatic subsystem and other diagnostic
measurements as well as calibration data such as stability, slope and offset.
Most data parameters have associated measurement units, such as mV, ppb, cm³/min,
etc., although some parameters have no units (e.g. SLOPE). With the exception of
concentration readings, none of these units of measure can be changed. To change the
units of measure for concentration readings, see Section 5.4.3.4.
Note DAS does not keep track of the units (i.e. PPM or PPB) of each concentration
value. Therefore, DAS data files may contain concentration data recorded in
more than one type of unit if the units of measure were changed during data
acquisition
Each data parameter has user-configurable functions that define how the data are
recorded which are listed in Table 7-3:
Table 7-3: DAS Data Parameter Functions

FUNCTION EFFECT
PARAMETER Instrument specific parameter name.
SAMPLE MODE INST: Records instantaneous reading.
AVG: Records average reading during reporting interval.
SDEV: Records the standard deviation of the data points recorded during the reporting interval.
MIN: Records minimum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval.
MAX: Records maximum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval.
PRECISION 0 to 4: Sets the number of digits to the right decimal point for each record.
Example: Setting 4; “399.9865 PPB”
Setting 0; “400 PPB”
STORE NUM. OFF: Stores only the average (default).
SAMPLES ON: Stores the average and the number of samples in used to compute the value of the
parameter. This property is only useful when the AVG sample mode is used. Note that the
number of samples is the same for all parameters in one channel and needs to be specified
only for one of the parameters in that channel.
Users can specify up to 50 parameters per data channel (the T200 provides about 40
parameters). However, the number of parameters and channels is ultimately limited by
available memory.
Data channels can be edited individually from the front panel without affecting other
data channels. However, when editing a data channel, such as during adding, deleting or
editing parameters, all data for that particular channel will be lost, because the DAS can
store only data of one format (number of parameter columns etc.) for any given channel.
In addition, a DAS configuration can only be uploaded remotely as an entire set of
channels. Hence, remote update of the DAS will always delete all current channels and
stored data.
06858F DCN8038 157

To modify, add or delete a parameter, follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.3 then
press:
DAS EDIT – Touchscreen Functions
SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER 5, 800 Button FUNCTION

PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT PREV Selects the previous data channel or parameter
NEXT Selects the next data channel or parameter

<SET Selects the previous property to be edited
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SET> Selects the next property to be edited
Inserts a new data channel or parameter into the list
INS BEFORE the selected channel
Deletes the currently selected data channel or
DEL parameter
EDIT Enters EDIT mode
Exports the configuration of all data channels to the
PRINT RS-232 interface
SETUP X.X PARAMETER:5 Buttons only appear when applicable
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X EDIT PARAMS (DELETE DATA)?

YES deletes all data NO retains the
YES NO
currently stored for data and
this data channel and returns to the
continues into EDIT previous
mode. menu.
SETUP X.X 0) PARAM=NXCNC1, MODE=AVG
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT EXIT discards the new
setting.
Toggle these ENTR accepts the

buttons to select a new setting.
different parameter.
SETUP X.X PARAMETER:NXCNC1
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

cycle through the list of
available parameters.
SETUP X.X SAMPLE MODE:AVG
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Pressing <SET INST AVG SDEV MIN MAX ENTR EXIT

returns to the Press the desired
previous Function. MODE button.
SETUP X.X PRECISION:4
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X PRECISION:5
5 ENTR EXIT
Toggle this button to
set from 1 to 4.
SETUP X.X STOR NUM SAMPLE:OFF
<SET EDIT EXIT

SETUP X.X STOR NUM SAMPLE:OFF
OFF ENTR EXIT

Toggle this button to
turn ON/OFF.
Note When the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature is turned on, the instrument will store
the number of measurements that were used to compute the AVG, SDEV, MIN or
MAX value but not the actual measurements themselves.
158 06858F DCN8038

7.1.3.4. EDITING SAMPLE PERIOD AND REPORT PERIOD

The DAS defines two principal time periods by which sample readings are taken and
permanently recorded:
• SAMPLE PERIOD: Determines how often DAS temporarily records a sample
reading of the parameter in volatile memory. SAMPLE PERIOD is only used when
the DAS parameter’s sample mode is set for AVG, SDEV, MIN or MAX.
• The SAMPLE PERIOD is set to one minute by default and generally cannot be
accessed from the standard DAS front panel menu, but is available via the
instruments communication ports by using APICOM or the analyzer’s standard
serial data protocol.
• REPORT PERIOD: Sets how often the sample readings stored in volatile memory
are processed, (e.g. average, minimum or maximum are calculated) and the results
stored permanently in the instruments Disk-on-Module (DOM) as well as transmitted
via the analyzer’s communication ports. The Report Period may be set from the
front panel. If the INST sample mode is selected the instrument stores and reports
an instantaneous reading of the selected parameter at the end of the chosen report
period.
Note In AVG, SDEV, MIN or MAX sample modes (see Section 7.1.3.3), the settings for
the Sample Period and the Report Period determine the number of data points
used each time the parameters are calculated, stored and reported to the COM
ports.
The actual sample readings are not stored past the end of the chosen report
period.
When the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature is turned on, the instrument will store
the number of measurements that were used to compute the AVG, SDEV, MIN or
MAX value but not the actual measurements themselves.
06858F DCN8038 159

To define the REPORT PERIOD, follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.3 then
press:
Use the PREV and PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
NEXT buttons to
scroll to the DATA
CHANNEL to be SETUP X.X NAME: CONC
edited.
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X REPORT PERIOD:000:01:00
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X REPORT PERIOD DAYS:0
0 0 0 ENTR EXIT

set the days between
reports (0 – 366).
SETUP X.X REPORT PERIOD TIME:01:00
0 1 :0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new

setting.
Press buttons to set amount of
time between reports, in hours ENTR accepts the
(HH) and/or minutes (MM) new setting.
(max: 23:59). 01:00 sets a
report to be made every hour.
The SAMPLE PERIOD and REPORT PERIOD intervals are synchronized to the
beginning and end of the appropriate interval of the instruments internal clock.
• If SAMPLE PERIOD is set for one minute the first reading would occur at the
beginning of the next full minute according to the instrument’s internal clock.
• If the REPORT PERIOD is set for of one hour, the first report activity would occur at
the beginning of the next full hour according to the instrument’s internal clock.
EXAMPLE:
Given the above settings, if DAS parameters are activated at 7:57:35 the first sample
would occur at 7:58 and the first report would be calculated at 8:00 consisting of data
points for 7:58. 7:59 and 8:00.
During the next hour (from 8:01 to 9:00), the instrument will take a sample reading
every minute and include 60 sample readings.
160 06858F DCN8038

7.1.3.5. REPORT PERIODS IN PROGRESS WHEN INSTRUMENT IS POWERED OFF

If the instrument is powered off in the middle of a REPORT PERIOD, the samples
accumulated during that period are lost. Once the instrument is turned back on, the DAS
restarts taking samples and temporarily stores them in volatile memory as part of the
REPORT PERIOD currently active at the time of restart. At the end of this REPORT
PERIOD, only the sample readings taken since the instrument was turned back on will
be included in any AVG, SDEV, MIN or MAX calculation.
The STORE NUM SAMPLES feature will also report the number of sample readings
taken since the instrument was restarted.
7.1.3.6. EDITING THE NUMBER OF RECORDS

The number of data records in the DAS is limited by its configuration (one megabyte of
space on the DOM). However, the actual number of records is also limited by the total
number of parameters and channels and other settings in the DAS configuration. Every
additional data channel, parameter, number of samples setting etc. will reduce the
maximum amount of data points. In general, however, the maximum data capacity is
divided amongst all channels (max: 20) and parameters (max: 50 per channel).
The DAS will check the amount of available data space and prevent the user from
specifying too many records at any given point. If, for example, the DAS memory space
can accommodate 375 more data records, the ENTR button will disappear when trying
to specify more than that number of records. This check for memory space may also
make an upload of a DAS configuration with APICOM or a terminal program fail, if the
combined number of records would be exceeded. In this case, it is suggested to either
try to determine what the maximum number of records available is using the front panel
interface or use trial-and-error in designing the DAS script or calculate the number of
records using the DAS or APICOM manuals.
06858F DCN8038 161

To set the NUMBER OF RECORDS, follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.3
then press:
Use the PREV and PREV MEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
NEXT buttons to
scroll to the DATA
edited.
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X NUMBER OF RECORDS:800
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X EDIT PARAMS (DELETE DATA)?

NO retains the
YES deletes all data YES NO
data and
currently stored for returns to the
this data channel and previous
continues into EDIT menu.
mode. SETUP X.X NUMBER OF RECORDS:200
0 0 0 2 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new

setting.
to set the Number of
ENTR accepts the
Records to record
new setting.
(0 – 100,000)
162 06858F DCN8038

7.1.3.7. RS-232 REPORT FUNCTION

The DAS can automatically report data to the communications ports, where they can be
captured with a terminal emulation program or simply viewed by the user using the
APICOM software.
To enable automatic COM port reporting, follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.3
then press:
NEXT buttons to
scroll to the DATA
edited.
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X RS-232 REPORT: OFF
SETUP X.X RS-232 REPORT: OFF
OFF ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new

setting.
to turn the RS-232
ENTR accepts the
REPORT feature
new setting.
ON/OFF.
06858F DCN8038 163

7.1.3.8. HOLDOFF FEATURE

The DAS HOLDOFF feature prevents data collection during calibration operations.
To enable or disable the HOLDOFF, follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.3 then
press:
NEXT buttons to
scroll to the DATA
edited.
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X CAL.HOLD OFF: OFF
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X CAL.HOLD OFF: OFF
OFF ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new

setting.
to turn the HOLDOFF ENTR accepts the
feature ON/OFF. new setting.
HOLDOFF also prevents DAS measurements from being made at certain times when
the quality of the analyzer’s sample measurements may be suspect (e.g. while the
instrument is warming up). In this case, the length of time that the HOLDOFF feature
is active is determined by the value of the internal variable (VARS), DAS_HOLDOFF.
To set the length of the DAS_HOLDOFF period, go to the SETUP>MORE>VARS
menu and at the DAS_HOLDOFF parameter (see Table 5-3), press the Edit button.
164 06858F DCN8038

7.1.3.9. THE COMPACT REPORT FEATURE

When enabled, this option avoids unnecessary line breaks on all RS-232 reports. Instead
of reporting each parameter in one channel on a separate line, up to five parameters are
reported in one line.
The COMPACT DATA REPORT generally cannot be accessed from the standard
DAS front panel menu, but is available via the instrument’s communication ports by
using APICOM or the analyzer’s standard serial data protocol.
7.1.3.10. THE STARTING DATE FEATURE

This option allows the user to specify a starting date for any given channel when the user
wants to start data acquisition only after a certain time and date. If the STARTING
DATE is in the past (the default condition), the DAS ignores this setting and begins
recording data as defined by the REPORT PERIOD setting.
The STARTING DATE generally cannot be accessed from the standard DAS front
panel menu, but is available via the instrument’s communication ports by using
APICOM or the analyzer’s standard serial data protocol.
7.1.3.11. DISABLING/ENABLING DATA CHANNELS

Data channels can be temporarily disabled, which can reduce the read/write wear on the
Disk-on-Module (DOM).
To disable a data channel, go to the DAS>EDIT menu as shown in Section 7.1.3 then
continue as follows:
NEXT buttons to
scroll to the DATA
edited.
SETUP X.X CHANNEL ENABLE:ON
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X CHANNEL ENABLE:ON
ON ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new

setting.
to enable or disable ENTR accepts the
the CHANNEL. new setting.
06858F DCN8038 165

7.2. REMOTE DAS CONFIGURATION

The DAS can be configured and operated remotely via either the APICOM interface or a
terminal emulation program. Once a DAS configuration is edited (which can be done
offline and without interrupting DAS data collection), it is conveniently uploaded to the
instrument and can be stored on a computer for later review, alteration or documentation
and archival.
7.2.1. DAS CONFIGURATION VIA APICOM

Table 7-2 shows examples of APICOM’s main interface, which emulates the look and
functionality of the instrument’s actual front panel. Figure 7-3 shows an example of
APICOM being used to remotely configure the DAS feature.
The APICOM user manual (Teledyne API’s P/N 039450000) is included in the
APICOM installation file, which can be downloaded at http://www.teledyne-
api.com/software/apicom/.
Figure 7-2: APICOM Remote Control Program Interface
166 06858F DCN8038

Figure 7-3: Sample APICOM User Interface for Configuring the DAS
06858F DCN8038 167

7.2.2. DAS CONFIGURATION VIA TERMINAL EMULATION PROGRAMS

Although Teledyne API recommends the use of APICOM, the DAS can also be
accessed and configured through a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal
(see Figure 7-4 for example). It is best to start by downloading the default DAS
configuration, getting familiar with its command structure and syntax conventions, and
then altering a copy of the original file offline before uploading the new configuration.
Figure 7-4: DAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program
See Section 8.2.1 for configuration commands and their strict syntax. Commands can be
pasted in from of an existing text file, which was first edited offline and then uploaded
through a specific transfer procedure.

Whereas the editing, adding and deleting of DAS channels and parameters of
one channel through the front-panel control buttons can be done without
affecting the other channels, uploading a DAS configuration script to the
analyzer through its communication ports will erase all data, parameters and
channels by replacing them with the new DAS configuration. Backup of data
and the original DAS configuration is advised before attempting any DAS
changes.
168 06858F DCN8038

8. REMOTE OPERATION
This section provides information needed when using external digital and serial I/O for
remote operation. It assumes that the electrical connections have been made as described
in Section 3.3.1.
The T200 can be remotely configured, calibrated or queried for stored data through the
serial ports, via either Computer mode (using a personal computer) or Interactive
mode (using a terminal emulation program).
8.1. COMPUTER MODE

Computer Mode is used when the analyzer is connected to a computer with a dedicated
interface program such as APICOM.
8.1.1. REMOTE CONTROL VIA APICOM

APICOM is an easy-to-use, yet powerful interface program that allows the user to access
and control any of Teledyne API's’ main line of ambient and stack-gas instruments from
a remote connection through direct cable, modem or Ethernet. Running APICOM, a
user can:
• Establish a link from a remote location to the T200 through direct cable connection
via RS-232 modem or Ethernet.
• View the instrument’s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be
accessed manually on the instrument.
• Remotely edit system parameters and set points.
• Download, view, graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis.
• Retrieve, view, edit, save and upload DAS configurations (Section 7.2.1).
• Check on system parameters for troubleshooting and quality control.
APICOM is very helpful for initial setup, data analysis, maintenance and
troubleshooting. Refer to the APICOM manual available for download from
http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.
06858F DCN8038 169

Remote Operation Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual
8.2. INTERACTIVE MODE

Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs or a “dumb” computer
terminal.
8.2.1. REMOTE CONTROL VIA A TERMINAL EMULATION PROGRAM

Start a terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal. All configuration
commands must be created following a strict syntax or be pasted in from a text file,
which was edited offline and then uploaded through a specific transfer procedure. The
commands that are used to operate the analyzer in this mode are listed in Table 8-1 and
in Appendix A.
8.2.1.1. HELP COMMANDS IN INTERACTIVE MODE
Table 8-1: Terminal Mode Software Commands

COMMAND Function
Control-T Switches the analyzer to terminal mode (echo, edit). If mode flags 1 & 2 are OFF, the
interface can be used in interactive mode with a terminal emulation program.
Control-C Switches the analyzer to computer mode (no echo, no edit).
CR A carriage return is required after each command line is typed into the terminal/computer.
(carriage return) The command will not be sent to the analyzer to be executed until this is done. On
personal computers, this is achieved by pressing the ENTER button.
BS Erases one character to the left of the cursor location.
(backspace)
ESC Erases the entire command line.
(escape)
?[ID] CR This command prints a complete list of available commands along with the definitions of
their functionality to the display device of the terminal or computer being used. The ID
number of the analyzer is only necessary if multiple analyzers are on the same
communications line, such as the multi-drop setup.
Control-C Pauses the listing of commands.
Control-P Restarts the listing of commands.
8.2.1.2. COMMAND SYNTAX

Commands are not case-sensitive and all arguments within one command (i.e. ID
numbers, key words, data values, etc.) must be separated with a space character.
All Commands follow the syntax:
X [ID] COMMAND <CR>

Where:
X is the command type (one letter) that defines the type of command. Allowed
designators are listed in Table 8-2 and Appendix A-6.
[ID] is the machine identification number (Section 5.7.1). Example: the
Command “? 200” followed by a carriage return would print the list of
available commands for the revision of software currently installed in the
instrument assigned ID Number 200.
170 06858F DCN8038

Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual Remote Operation
COMMAND is the command designator: This string is the name of the command being
issued (LIST, ABORT, NAME, EXIT, etc.). Some commands may have
additional arguments that define how the command is to be executed.
Press ? <CR> or refer to Appendix A-6 for a list of available command
designators
<CR> is a carriage return. All commands must be terminated by a carriage return
(usually achieved by pressing the ENTER button on a computer).
Table 8-2: Teledyne API's Serial I/O Command Types

COMMAND COMMAND TYPE
C Calibration
D Diagnostic
L Logon
T Test measurement
V Variable
W Warning
8.2.1.3. DATA TYPES

Data types consist of integers, hexadecimal integers, floating-point numbers, Boolean
expressions and text strings.
Integer data are used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records, a filter
length, etc. They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by one or more
digits. For example, +1, -12, 123 are all valid integers.
Hexadecimal integer data are used for the same purposes as integers. They consist of
the two characters “0x,” followed by one or more hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, a-f),
which is the ‘C’ programming language convention. No plus or minus sign is permitted.
For example, 0x1, 0x12, 0x1234abcd are all valid hexadecimal integers.
Floating-point numbers are used to specify continuously variable values such as
temperature set points, time intervals, warning limits, voltages, etc. They consist of an
optional plus or minus sign, followed by zero or more digits, an optional decimal point
and zero or more digits. (At least one digit must appear before or after the decimal
point.) Scientific notation is not permitted. For example, +1.0, 1234.5678, -0.1, 1 are
all valid floating-point numbers.
Boolean expressions are used to specify the value of variables or I/O signals that may
assume only two values. They are denoted by the key words ON and OFF.
Text strings are used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other data
types, such as data channel names, which may contain letters and numbers. They
consist of a quotation mark, followed by one or more printable characters, including
spaces, letters, numbers, and symbols, and a final quotation mark. For example, “a”,
“1”, “123abc”, and “()[]<>” are all valid text strings. It is not possible to include a
quotation mark character within a text string.
Some commands allow you to access variables, messages, and other items. When using
these commands, you must type the entire name of the item; you cannot abbreviate any
names.
06858F DCN8038 171

8.2.1.4. STATUS REPORTING

Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the
RS-232 interface (the other two being the command line interface for controlling the
instrument and the download of data in electronic format). You can effectively disable
the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode (Section 6.2.1, Table 6-1).
Status reports include warning messages, calibration and diagnostic status messages.
Refer to Appendix A-3 for a list of the possible messages, and this for information on
controlling the instrument through the RS-232 interface.
8.2.1.5. GENERAL MESSAGE FORMAT

All messages from the instrument (including those in response to a command line
request) are in the format:
X DDD:HH:MM [Id] MESSAGE<CRLF>

Where:
X is a command type designator, a single character indicating the

message type, as shown in the Table 8-2.
DDD:HH:MM is the time stamp, the date and time when the message was issued. It
consists of the Day-of-year (DDD) as a number from 1 to 366, the hour
of the day (HH) as a number from 00 to 23, and the minute (MM) as a
number from 00 to 59.
[ID] is the analyzer ID, a number with 1 to 4 digits.
MESSAGE is the message content that may contain warning messages, test
measurements, variable values, etc.
<CRLF> is a carriage return / line feed pair, which terminates the message.
The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse
them into an easy structure. Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any
information on the time a message was issued, hence it is useful to log such messages
for troubleshooting and reference purposes. Terminal emulation programs such as
HyperTerminal can capture these messages to text files for later review.
8.3. REMOTE ACCESS BY MODEM

The T200 can be connected to a modem for remote access. This requires a cable
between the analyzer’s COM port and the modem, typically a DB-9F to DB-25M cable
(available from Teledyne API with P/N WR0000024).
Once the cable has been connected, check to ensure that:
• The DTE-DCE is in the DCE position.
• The T200 COM port is set for a baud rate that is compatible with the modem,
• The Modem is designed to operate with an 8-bit word length with one stop bit.
• The MODEM ENABLE communication mode is turned ON (Mode 64, see Section
6.2.1).
172 06858F DCN8038

Once this is completed, the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be
entered into the analyzer. The default setting for this feature is:
AT Y0 D0 H0 I0 S0=0
This string can be altered to match your modem’s initialization and can be up to 100
characters long.
To change this setting press:
Concentration field
<TST TST> CAL SETUP displays all gases.
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT


SETUP X.X COM1 MODEM INIT:AT Y0 D0 H0 I0 S0=0
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 MODEM INIT:AT Y0 D0 H0 I0 S0=0
<CH CH> INS DEL [A] ENTR EXIT

EXIT discards the
The <CH and CH> new setting.
buttons move the
cursor left and right ENTR accepts the
along the text string. new setting.
The INS and CH> Toggle this button to cycle through

button inserts a new DEL deletes the available character set:
character before the character at
the cursor • Alpha: A-Z (Upper and Lower
cursor position. Case);
position.
• Special Characters: space ’ ~ ! # $
% ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < > | ; : , . / ?
• Numerals: 0-9
Figure 8-1: Remote Access by Modem
06858F DCN8038 173

To initialize the modem press:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration field
displays all gases.
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
ID COM1 COM2 EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1: INITIALIZE MODEM
<SET SET> INIT ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X INITIALIZING MODE
Test runs
automatically.
SETUP X.X MODEM INITIALIZED
PREV NEXT OFF EXIT
If there is a problem initializing the

modem the message,
“MODEM NOT INITIALIZED”
will appear.
174 06858F DCN8038

8.4. PASSWORD SECURITY FOR SERIAL REMOTE

COMMUNICATIONS
In order to provide security for remote access of the T200, a LOGON feature can be
enabled to require a password before the instrument will accept commands. This is done
by turning on the SECURITY MODE (refer to Section 5.5). Once the SECURITY
MODE is enabled, the following items apply.
• A password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands.
• If the port is inactive for one hour, it will automatically logoff, which can also be
achieved with the LOGOFF command.
• Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause
subsequent logins to be disabled for 1 hour, even if the correct password is used.
• If not logged on, the only active command is the '?' request for the help screen.
• The following messages will be returned at logon:
• LOGON SUCCESSFUL - Correct password given
• LOGON FAILED - Password not given or incorrect
• LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL - Connection terminated successfully
To log on to the T200 analyzer with SECURITY MODE feature enabled, type:
LOGON 940331
940331 is the default password. To change the default password, use the variable RS-
232_PASS issued as follows:
V RS-232_PASS=NNNNNN
Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9.
06858F DCN8038 175

176 06858F DCN8038

9. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
This section contains information for calibrating the T200 as well as other supporting
information. For information on EPA protocol calibration, please refer to the references
provided in Section 10. This section is organized as follows:
SECTION 9.1 – Before Calibration
This section contains general information you should know before about calibrating
the analyzer.
SECTION 9.2 – Manual Calibration Checks and Calibration of the T200 Analyzer in its
Base Configuration
This section describes:
• The procedure for checking the calibration of the T200 and calibrating the
instrument with no zero/span valves installed or if installed, not operating. It
requires that zero air and span gas be installed through the Sample port.
• Instructions for selecting the reporting range to be calibrated when the T200
analyzer is set to operate in either the IND or AUTO reporting range modes.
SECTION 9.3 – Manual Calibration with the Internal Span Gas Generator
• The procedure for manually checking the calibration of the instrument with
optional internal span gas generator installed.
• The procedure for manually calibrating the instrument using the optional internal
span gas generator.
SECTION 9.4 – Manual Calibration and Cal Checks with the Valve Options Installed
• The procedure for manually checking the calibration of the instrument with
optional zero/span valves option installed.
• The procedure for manually calibrating the instrument with zero/span valves
and operating.
• Instructions on activating the zero/span valves via the control in contact
closures of the analyzers external digital I/O.
SECTION 9.5 – Automatic Zero/Span Cal/Check (AutoCal)

• The procedure for using the AutoCal feature of the analyzer to check or
calibrate the instrument.
• The AutoCal feature requires that either the zero/span valve option or the
internal span gas generator option be installed and operating.
06858F DCN8038 177

Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual
SECTION 9.6 – Calibration Quality Analysis

This section describes how to judge the effectiveness of a recently performed
calibration.
SECTION 9.7 – Gas Flow Calibration
This section describes how to adjust the gas flow calculations made by the CPU based
on pressure and flow sensor readings.
Note Throughout this Section are various diagrams showing pneumatic connections
between the T200 and various other pieces of equipment such as calibrators and
zero air sources.
These diagrams are only intended to be schematic representations of these

connections and do not reflect actual physical locations of equipment and fitting
location or orientation.
Contact your regional EPA or other appropriate governing agency for more
detailed recommendations.
9.1. BEFORE CALIBRATION

The calibration procedures in this section assume that the range mode, analog range and
units of measure have already been selected for the analyzer. If this has not been done,
please do so before continuing (see Section 5.4.3 for instructions).
Note If any problems occur while performing the following calibration procedures,
refer to Section 12.1 for troubleshooting tips.
9.1.1. REQUIRED EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIES, AND EXPENDABLES

Calibration of the T200 requires:
• Zero-air source.
• Span gas source.
• Gas lines - all gas line materials should be stainless steel or Teflon-type (PTFE or
FEP).
• High-concentration NO gas transported over long distances may require
stainless steel to avoid oxidation of NO due to the possibility of O2 diffusing into
the tubing.
• A recording device such as a strip-chart recorder and/or data logger (optional).
• For electronic documentation, the internal data acquisition system (DAS) can be
used.
178 06858F DCN8038

Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual Calibration Procedures
9.1.2. CALIBRATION GASES
9.1.2.1. ZERO AIR

Zero air or zero calibration gas is defined as a gas that is similar in chemical
composition to the measured medium but without the gas to be measured by the
analyzer.
For the T200, this means zero air should be devoid of NO, NO2, CO2, NH3 or H2O
vapor.
Note Moderate amounts of NH3 and H2O can be removed from the sample gas stream
by installing the optional sample gas dryer/scrubber (see Section 3.3.2.6).
• Pure nitrogen (N2) could be used as a zero gas for applications where NOX is
measured in nitrogen.
• If your analyzer is equipped with an external zero air scrubber option, it is capable
of creating zero air from ambient air.
For analyzers without the external zero air scrubber, a zero air generator such as the
Teledyne API's Model 701 can be used. Please visit the company website for more
information.
If your analyzer is equipped with an external zero air scrubber option, it is capable of
creating zero air from ambient air.
• Pure nitrogen could be used as a zero gas for applications where NOX is measured
in nitrogen.
9.1.2.2. SPAN GAS

Span calibration gas is a gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of
the type of gas being measured at near full scale of the desired reporting range. To
measure NOX with the T200, it is recommended that you use a span gas with an NO
concentration equal to 80% of the measurement range for your application
EXAMPLE:
• If the application is to measure NOX in ambient air between 0 ppm and 500 ppb, an
appropriate span gas would be 400 ppb.
• If the application is to measure NOX in ambient air between 0 ppm and 1000 ppb,
an appropriate span gas would be 800 ppb.
We strongly recommend that span calibration be carried out with NO span gas.
Alternatively, it is possible to use NO2 gas in a gas phase titration (GPT) calibration
system.
06858F DCN8038 179

Even though NO gas mixed into in nitrogen gas (N2) could be used as a span gas, the
matrix of the balance gas is different and may cause interference problems or yield
incorrect calibrations.
• The same applies to gases that contain high concentrations of other compounds
(for example, CO2 or H2O).
Note The span gas should match all concentrations of all gases of the measured
medium as closely as possible.
Cylinders of calibrated NOx and NO gas traceable to NIST-standards specifications (also

referred to as EPA protocol calibration gases or Standard Reference Materials) are
commercially available.
9.1.2.3. SPAN GAS FOR MULTIPOINT CALIBRATION

Some applications, such as EPA monitoring, require a multipoint calibration where span
gases of different concentrations are needed. We recommend using an NO gas of higher
concentration combined with a gas dilution calibrator such as a Teledyne API's Model
T700. For more information see Section 3.3.2.1 and Section 10.
9.1.2.4. NO2 PERMEATION TUBES

Teledyne API offers an optional internal span gas generator that utilizes an NO2
permeation tube as a span gas source. The accuracy of these devices is only about ±5%.
Whereas this may be sufficient for quick, daily calibration checks, we recommend using
certified NO gases for accurate calibration.
CAUTION!
Insufficient gas flow allows gas to build up to levels that will contaminate
the instrument or present a safety hazard to personnel.
In units with a permeation tube option installed, either the tube must be
removed and stored in sealed container (use original container that tube
was shipped in) during periods of non-operation, or vacuum pump must
be connected and powered on to maintain constant gas flow though the
analyzer at all times.
(See Figure 3-6 for location and Section 11.3.6 for instructions on how to remove the
perm tube when the unit is not in operation).
180 06858F DCN8038

9.1.3. DATA RECORDING DEVICES

A strip chart recorder, data acquisition system or digital data acquisition system should
be used to record data from the serial or analog outputs of the T200.
• If analog readings are used, the response of the recording system should be
checked against a NIST traceable voltage source or meter.
• Data recording devices should be capable of bi-polar operation so that negative
readings can be recorded.
For electronic data recording, the T200 provides an internal data acquisition system
(DAS), which is described in detail in Section 7.
APICOM, a remote control program, is also provided as a convenient and powerful tool
for data handling, download, storage, quick check and plotting (see Sections 7.2.1, and
the APICOM software manual downloadable from:
http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals
9.1.4. NO2 CONVERSION EFFICIENCY (CE)

In order for the NO2 converter to function properly, oxygen must be present in the
sample stream. In addition, to ensure accurate operation of the T200, it is important to
check the NO2 conversion efficiency (CE) periodically and to update this value as
necessary.
• See Section 12.7.10 for instructions on checking or calculating the current NO2 à
NO converter efficiency using T200’s onboard firmware.
• See Section 12.7.11 for instructions on checking or calculating the current NO2 à
NO converter efficiency using a simplified Gas Phase Titration Method.
9.2. MANUAL CALIBRATION CHECKS AND CALIBRATION OF

THE T200 ANALYZER IN ITS BASE CONFIGURATION

ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION CHECKS VS. ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION
Pressing the ENTR button during the following procedure resets the stored
values for OFFSET and SLOPE and alters the instrument’s Calibration.
This should ONLY BE DONE during an actual calibration of the T200.
NEVER press the ENTR button if you are only checking calibration.
06858F DCN8038 181

9.2.1. SETUP FOR BASIC CALIBRATION CHECKS AND CALIBRATION

Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown below in one of the following
ways:
Source of
VENT here if input
SAMPLE GAS
calibration
MODEL 700E
Gas Dilution
Calibrated NOX
Concentration
at HIGH Span
Calibrator
Enclosur Wall
SAMPLE
MODEL 701
EXHAUST
Zero Gas
Generator Chassis
Vent here if output of calibrator
is not already vented.
PUMP
Figure 9-1: Set up for Manual Calibrations/Checks of T200’s in Base Configuration w/ a Gas Dilution
Calibrator
Source of
VENT here if input
SAMPLE GAS
calibration
Calibrated NOX
at HIGH Span
Concentration
MODEL 701
Enclosur Wall
Zero Gas
Generator
3-way Valve
SAMPLE
Manual
Control Valve EXHAUST
Chassis
VENT
PUMP
Figure 9-2: Set up for Manual Calibrations/Checks of T200’s in Base Configuration w/ Bottled Gas
182 06858F DCN8038

9.2.2. PERFORMING A BASIC MANUAL CALIBRATION CHECK

<TST TST> CAL SETUP the NOX STB test
function.
Concentration field This function calculates
displays all of the the stability of the NO/NOx
available gas Toggle TST> button until ... measurement
measurements
throughout this
procedure.
SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X
Allow ZERO GAS to enter the sample port

Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.
minutes.
Record NOX, NO or NO2 zero point readings
DO NOT press the ENTR button
Allow SPAN GAS to enter the sample port

Wait until NOX STB The ZERO and/or SPAN
falls below 0.5 ppm. buttons will appear at various
points of this process.
minutes. It is not necessary to press
them.
Record NOX, NO, NO2 span point readings
NOTE:
In certain instances where low Span
gas concentrations are present (≤ 50
ppb), both the ZERO & SPAN buttons
may appear simultaneously.
Note If the ZERO or SPAN buttons are not displayed, the measurement made is outside
the allowable range for a reliable calibration.
See Section 12 for troubleshooting tips.
06858F DCN8038 183

9.2.3. PERFORMING A BASIC MANUAL CALIBRATION

The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the T200.
If the analyzer’s reporting range is set for the AUTO range mode, a step will appear for
selecting which range is to be calibrated (LOW or HIGH). Each of these two ranges
MUST be calibrated separately.
9.2.3.1. SETTING THE EXPECTED SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION
Note The expected concentrations for both NOx and NO are usually set to the same
value unless the conversion efficiency is not equal to 1.000 or not entered
properly in the conversion efficiency setting.
When setting expected concentration values, consider impurities in your span

gas source (e.g. NO often contains 1-3% NO2 and vice versa).
The NO and NOx span gas concentrations should be 80% of range of concentration
values likely to be encountered in your application. The default factory reporting range
setting is 500 ppb and the default span gas concentration is 40.0 ppb.
To set the span gas concentration, press:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP
SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW
Only appears if the AUTO LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT

range mode is selected.
the appropriate range.
Repeat entire procedure for M-P CAL RANGE=500.0 PPB NOX= XXXX
each range.
NOX NO CONV EXIT
M-P CAL NOX SPAN CONC:80.0 Conc

The NOX & NO span concentration 0 4 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT setting and returns to
values automatically default to the previous display.
400.0 PPB.
the span gas being used, toggle ENTR accepts the new
these buttons to set the correct setting and returns to
concentration of the NOX and NO the
calibration gases. CONCENTRATION
MENU.
If using NO span gas
in addition to NOX
repeat last step.
184 06858F DCN8038

9.2.3.2. ZERO/SPAN POINT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

<TST TST> CAL SETUP

the STABIL test function.
This function calculates
Toggle TST> button until ...
the stability of the NOX
measurement.
SAMPLE STABIL=XXXX PPB NOX= XXXX

Wait until STABIL
minutes.
SAMPLE STABIL=XXXX PPB NOX= XXXX
Press ENTR to change

M-P CAL STABIL=XXXX PPB NOX= XXXX the OFFSET & SLOPE
values based on the zero
point measurement.
M-P CAL STABIL=XXXX PPB NOX= XXXX return to the previous

Wait until STABIL
minutes.
M-P CAL STABIL=XXXX PPB NOX= XXXX

The SPAN button now
appears during the transition
from zero to span. Press ENTR to change
You may see both buttons. M-P CAL STABIL=XXXX PPB NOX= XXXX the OFFSET & SLOPE
If either the ZERO or SPAN values based on the zero
buttons fail to appear refer to point measurement.
the Troubleshooting section Press EXIT to leave the
of this manual. calibration unchanged and
M-P CAL STABIL=XXXX PPB NOX= XXXX return to the previous
M-P CAL STABIL=XXXX PPB NOX= XXXX

EXIT at this point
SAMPLE menu.
Note If the ZERO or SPAN buttons are not displayed, the measurement made during is
out of the allowable range allowed for a reliable calibration. See Section 12 for
troubleshooting tips.
06858F DCN8038 185

9.3. MANUAL CALIBRATION WITH THE INTERNAL SPAN GAS

GENERATOR

The internal span gas generator’s NO2 permeation tube has a limited accuracy of
about ±5%.
9.3.1. PERFORMING “PRECISION” MANUAL CALIBRATION WHEN

INTERNAL SPAN GAS (IZS) GENERATOR OPTION IS PRESENT
It is necessary to perform a precision calibration using more accurate zero and span gas
standards prior to IZS span calibration or cal check.
To perform a precision calibration of the T200, connect external sources of zero air and
calibrated span gas (Section 9.1.2) and temporarily disconnect the sample gas source as
shown below; then follow the procedures described in Section 9.2.3.
Source of
VENT here if input
SAMPLE GAS
“CAL” calibration
MODEL 700E
Calibrated NOx
Gas Dilution
at HIGH Span
Concentration
Enclosure Wall
Calibrator
SAMPLE
MODEL 701 EXHAUST

Zero Gas
Generator Filter ZERO AIR Chassis

External Zero
is not already vented. FROM DRYER
PUMP Air Scrubber
Figure 9-3: Pneumatic Connections for T200 Precision Calibration when IZS Generator Present
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA

IMPORTANT
DO NOT USE THE CALZ or CALS buttons even though they will be visible, as this
will cause the instrument to use the internal zero air and span gas.
Instead, press the CAL button. This will cause the analyzer to use the external
calibration gas sources.
186 06858F DCN8038

9.3.2. SETUP FOR CALIBRATION WITH THE INTERNAL SPAN GAS

GENERATOR
Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown in Figure 9-4.
Source of
VENT here if input SAMPLE GAS
(reconnected after
is pressurized “precision” cal
performed)
Enclosure Wall
SAMPLE
EXHAUST
PUMP
Filter ZERO AIR Chassis
External Zero
FROM DRYER
Air Scrubber
Figure 9-4: Pneumatic Connections for Manual Calibration/Checks with the Internal Span Gas
Generator
9.3.3. CAL ON NO2 FEATURE

When using the IZS option to calibrate the T200, the analyzer’s CAL_ON_NO2 feature
must be turned on. This feature enables a continuous zero gas flow across the IZS
permeation tube and through the NO2 converter. It also programs the analyzer to use the
NO output from the NO2 converter to calibrate the span value of both NO and NOX.
Note This feature should only be enabled when a span calibration or calibration check
is performed.
While CAL_ON_NO2 is enabled, the NO2 concentration will always be reported as

zero. This is because the gas is continuously routed through the NO2 converter and the
analyzer’s firmware simulates calibration with NO gas.
Table 9-1: IZS Option Valve States with CAL_ON_NO2 Turned ON

Valve Condition Valve Port Connections
Sample/Cal Open to zero/span valve 1à2
Zero/Span Open to SPAN GAS inlet 1à2
NO/NOx Valve Open to NO2 converter 1à2
Auto Zero Valve Cycles normally N/A
Since the instrument sees the same concentration of NO during both NO and NOX
cycles, it reports an NO2 concentration of zero.
06858F DCN8038 187

TO turn the CAL_ON_NO2 feature ON/OFF, press:
SAMPLE RANGE=500.0 PPB NO=XXXX
<TST TST> CAL SETUP
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT

Press EXIT
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
3 times.
SETUP X.X 0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
<PREV NEXT> JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X 09)CAL_ON_NO2=OFF
<PREV NEXT> JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
MODE FLD CAL_ON_NO2=OFF CONC
ON ENTR EXIT
Use this button to

turn this feature
ON/OFF.
188 06858F DCN8038

9.3.4. PERFORMING A MANUAL CALIBRATION CHECK WITH THE

INTERNAL SPAN GAS GENERATOR

<TST TST> CAL CALZ CALS SETUP the NOX STB test
function.
the stability of the NO/NOx
Toggle TST> button until ... measurement.
SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPB NOX= XXXX
<TST TST> CAL CALZ CALS SETUP
ZERO GAS enters the analyzer via the

External Scrubber.
Wait until NOX STB
minutes.
Turn ON the CAL_ON_NO2 feature
SPAN GAS enters the reaction cell from the

internal NO2 permeation tube.
falls below 0.5 PPB. buttons will appear at various
them.
DO NOT press the ENTR button.
Turn OFF the CAL_ON_NO2 feature
Note If the ZERO or SPAN buttons are not displayed, the measurement made is out of
the allowable range for a reliable calibration. See Section 12 for troubleshooting
tips.
06858F DCN8038 189

9.3.5. PERFORMING A MANUAL CALIBRATION WITH THE INTERNAL

SPAN GAS GENERATOR

When calibrating the instrument using the internal permeation tube as a span gas source,
it is necessary to know, as close as possible, the concentration value of the gas being
outputted by the tube. To determine this value:
1. Perform a precision calibration of the instrument as describes in Section 9.3.1.
2. Perform a calibration check as described in Section 9.3.4.
• Record the value displayed for NO/NOx during the span check portion of the
procedure.
• This will be the concentration value used in subsequent calibrations using the
internal span gas source.
• It is a good idea to measure the permeation tube output once every 4 to 6
months.
3. Ensure that the reporting range span point is set for a value at least 10% higher
than the measured value of the permeation tube output
190 06858F DCN8038



each range.
NOX NO CONV EXIT
M-P CAL NOX SPAN CONC:80.0 Conc EXIT ignores the new setting and
returns to the previous display.
Enter the 0 4 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
concentration ENTR accepts the new setting and
measured during returns to the
the last span check CONCENTRATION MENU.
of the permeation If using NO span gas in addition to NOX
tube output. repeat last step.
06858F DCN8038 191

9.3.5.2. ZERO/SPAN POINT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE WITH INTERNAL SPAN GAS

GENERATOR
Analyzer continues to
throughout this Toggle TST> button until ... measurement.
procedure.

Wait until NOX STB
minutes.

Press ENTR to change
Repeat entire procedure for M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPB NOX=XXX.X the OFFSET & SLOPE
each range. values for both the NO
Turn ON the CAL_ON_NO2 feature

Wait until NOX STB
minutes.

Press to select the
appropriate range.
Repeat entire procedure for Press ENTR to change
M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPB NOX=X.XXX the OFFSET & SLOPE
each range.
The SPAN button now
appears during the transition <TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT menu.
from zero to span.
You may see both buttons.
If either the ZERO or SPAN M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPB NOX=X.XXX
EXIT at this point
buttons fail to appear, refer to
the Troubleshooting section
SAMPLE menu.
of this manual.
Turn OFF the CAL_ON_NO2 feature
If the ZERO or SPAN buttons are not displayed, the measurement made during
Note during this procedure is out of the range allowed for a reliable calibration. See
Section 12 for troubleshooting tips.
192 06858F DCN8038

9.4. MANUAL CALIBRATION AND CAL CHECKS WITH THE

VALVE OPTIONS INSTALLED
There are a variety of valve options available on the T200 for handling calibration gases
(see Section 1.3 for descriptions of each).
Generally performing calibration checks and zero/span point calibrations on analyzers
with these options installed is similar to the methods discussed in the previous sections.
The primary differences are:
• On instruments with Z/S valve options, zero air and span gas is supplied to the
analyzer through other gas inlets besides the sample gas inlet.
• The zero and span calibration operations are initiated directly and independently
with dedicated buttons (CALZ & CALS).
9.4.1. SETUP FOR CALIBRATION USING VALVE OPTIONS

Each of the various calibration valve options requires a different pneumatic setup that is
dependent on the exact nature and number of valves present. Refer to the following
diagrams for information on each or these valve sets.
06858F DCN8038 193

9.4.2. MANUAL CALIBRATION CHECKS WITH VALVE OPTIONS

INSTALLED

function.
Analyzer display This function calculates
continues to cycle the stability of the NO/NOx
through all of the Toggle TST> button until ... measurement.
available gas
measurements
throughout this
procedure. SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPB NOX= XXXX
Wait until NOX STB

minutes.
DO NOT PRESS THE ENTR KEY

falls below 0.5 PPB. buttons will appear at various
them.
DO NOT PRESS THE ENTR button
194 06858F DCN8038

9.4.3. MANUAL CALIBRATION USING VALVE OPTIONS

The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the T200
NOX analyzer.

The NO and NOx span gas concentrations should be 80% of range of concentration
values likely to be encountered in your application. The default factory reporting range
setting is 500 ppb and the default span gas concentration is 400.0 ppb.
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Use these keys to select the
appropriate range.
each range.
NOX NO CONV EXIT
M-P CAL NOX SPAN CONC:80.0 Conc

The NOX & NO span concentration 0 4 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT setting and returns to
values automatically default to the previous display.
400.0 PPB.
the span gas being used, toggle ENTR accepts the new
these buttons to set the correct setting and returns to
concentration of the NOX and NO the
calibration gases. CONCENTRATION
MENU.
If using NO span gas
in addition to NOX
repeat last step.
06858F DCN8038 195

9.4.3.2. ZERO/SPAN POINT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

Analyzer continues to
throughout this Toggle TST> button until ... measurement
procedure.

Wait until NOX STB
minutes.

Press to select the
appropriate range.
Press ENTR to changes
Repeat entire procedure for M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPB NOX=XXX.X the OFFSET & SLOPE
each range. values for both the NO

Wait until NOX STB
minutes.

Press to select the
appropriate range.
Repeat entire procedure for Press ENTR to changes
M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPB NOX=X.XXX the OFFSET & SLOPE
each range.
The SPAN button now
appears during the transition <TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT menu.
from zero to span.
You may see both buttons.
If either the ZERO or SPAN M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPB NOX=X.XXX
EXIT at this point
buttons fail to appear see
Section 11 for
SAMPLE menu.
Note If the ZERO or SPAN buttons are not displayed, the measurement made during is
out of the allowable range allowed for a reliable calibration. See Section 12 for
196 06858F DCN8038

9.4.3.3. USE OF ZERO/SPAN VALVE WITH REMOTE CONTACT CLOSURE

Contact closures for controlling calibration and calibration checks are located on the rear
panel CONTROL IN connector. Instructions for setup and use of these contacts are
found in Section 3.3.1.6.
When the contacts are closed for at least 5 seconds, the instrument switches into zero,
low span or high span mode and the internal zero/span valves will be automatically
switched to the appropriate configuration.
• The remote calibration contact closures may be activated in any order.
• It is recommended that contact closures remain closed for at least 10 minutes to
establish a reliable reading.
• The instrument will stay in the selected mode for as long as the contacts remain
closed.
If contact closures are being used in conjunction with the analyzer’s AutoCal (see
Section 9.5) feature and the AutoCal attribute “CALIBRATE” is enabled, the T200 will
not re-calibrate the analyzer UNTIL when the contact is opened. At this point, the new
calibration values will be recorded before the instrument returns to SAMPLE mode.
If the AutoCal attribute “CALIBRATE” is disabled, the instrument will return to
SAMPLE mode, leaving the instrument’s internal calibration variables unchanged.
9.5. AUTOMATIC ZERO/SPAN CAL/CHECK (AUTOCAL)

The AutoCal system allows unattended periodic operation of the ZERO/SPAN valve
options by using the T200’s internal time of day clock. AutoCal operates by executing
SEQUENCES programmed by the user to initiate the various calibration modes of the
analyzer and open and close valves appropriately. It is possible to program and run up
to three separate sequences (SEQ1, SEQ2 and SEQ3). Each sequence can operate in
one of three modes, or be disabled.
Table 9-2: AUTOCAL Modes

MODE NAME ACTION
DISABLED Disables the Sequence.
ZERO Causes the Sequence to perform a Zero calibration/check.
Causes the Sequence to perform a Zero point
ZERO-SPAN calibration/check followed by a Span point
calibration/check.
Causes the Sequence to perform a Span concentration
SPAN
calibration/check only.
06858F DCN8038 197

For each mode, there are seven parameters that control operational details of the
SEQUENCE. They are:
Table 9-3: AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters

ATTRIBUTE ACTION
TIMER
Turns on the Sequence timer.
ENABLED
STARTING DATE Sequence will operate after Starting Date.
STARTING TIME Time of day sequence will run.
Number of days to skip between each Sequence execution.
DELTA DAYS • If set to 7, for example, the AutoCal feature will be enabled once
every week on the same day.
Number of hours later each “Delta Days” Sequence is to be run.
• If set to 0, the sequence will start at the same time each day. Delta
DELTA TIME Time is added to Delta Days for the total time between cycles.
• This parameter prevents the analyzer from being calibrated at the
same daytime of each calibration day and prevents a lack of data for
one particular daytime on the days of calibration
Number of minutes the sequence operates.
• This parameter needs to be set such that there is enough time for the
concentration signal to stabilize.
DURATION
• The STB parameter shows if the analyzer response is stable at the
end of the calibration.
• This parameter is logged with calibration values in the DAS.
Enable to do a calibration – Disable to do a cal check only.
CALIBRATE Automatically disabled in analyzers with internal zero/span (IZS) gas
generators installed and functioning.
LOW calibrates the low range, HIGH calibrates the high range. Applies
RANGE TO CAL only to auto and remote range modes; this property is not available in
single and independent range modes.
198 06858F DCN8038

The following example sets sequence #2 to do a zero-span calibration every other day
starting at 1:00 AM on September 4, 2011, lasting 15 minutes, without calibration. This
will start ½ hour later each iteration.
Table 9-4: Example AutoCal Sequence
MODE AND
VALUE COMMENT
ATTRIBUTE
SEQUENCE 2 Define Sequence #2
Select Zero and
MODE ZERO-SPAN Span Mode
TIMER ENABLE ON Enable the timer
Start after
STARTING DATE Sept. 4, 2011 Sept 4, 2011
First Span starts at
STARTING TIME 1:00 AM 1:00AM
Do Sequence #2
DELTA DAYS 2 every other day
Do Sequence #2 ½
DELTA TIME 00:30 hr later each day
Operate Span valve
DURATION 15.0 for 15 min
Calibrate at end of
CALIBRATE OFF Sequence

• The programmed STARTING_TIME must be a minimum of 5 minutes later than the
real time clock for setting real time clock (See Section 5.6).
• Avoid setting two or more sequences at the same time of the day.
• Any new sequence that is initiated whether from a timer, the COM ports or the
contact closure inputs will override any sequence that is in progress.
• It is recommended that calibrations be performed using external sources of Zero Air
and Span Gas whose accuracy is traceable to EPA standards.
06858F DCN8038 199

9.5.1. SETUP à ACAL: PROGRAMMING AND AUTO CAL SEQUENCE

To program the example sequence shown in Table 9-4, press:
SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CZLS SETUP
SETUP X.X
CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SEQ 1) DISABLED
NEXT MODE EXIT
SETUP X.X SEQ 2) DISABLED
PREV NEXT MODE EXIT
SETUP X.X MODE: DISABLED
NEXT ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X MODE: ZERO
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X MODE: ZERO–SPAN
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 1:00:00
PREV NEXT MODE SET EXIT
SETUP X.X TIMER ENABLE: ON
SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–07
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–02
0 4 SEP 0 8 ENTR EXIT

Toggle buttons to set
Day, Month & Year:
Format : DD-MON-YY
CONTINUE NEXT PAGE
With STARTING TIME
200 06858F DCN8038

CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE -

STARTING DATE
SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 04–SEP–03
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X STARTING TIME:00:00
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

time: SETUP X.X STARTING TIME:00:00
Format : HH:MM
This is a 24 hr clock . PM 1 4 :1 5 ENTR EXIT
hours are 13 – 24.
Example 2:15 PM = 14:15
SETUP X.X STARTING TIME:14:15
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X DELTA DAYS: 1
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X DELTA DAYS: 1

number of days between
0 0 2 ENTR EXIT
procedures (1-365).
SETUP X.X DELTA DAYS:2
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X DELTA TIME00:00
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Toggle buttons to set SETUP X.X DELTA TIME: 00:00

delay time for each
iteration of the sequence:
HH:MM 0 0 :3 0 ENTR EXIT
(0 – 24:00)
SETUP X.X DELTA TIME:00:30
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
CONTINUE NEXT PAGE

With DURATION TIME
06858F DCN8038 201

CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

DELTA TIME
SETUP DURATION:15.0 MINUTES
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Toggle buttons to set SETUP DURATION 15.0MINUTES

duration for each iteration
of the sequence:
Set in Decimal minutes 3 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
from 0.1 – 60.0.
SETUP DURATION:30.0 MINUTES
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP CALIBRATE: OFF
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP CALIBRATE: OFF

Toggle button
Between Off and ON ENTR EXIT
ON.
SETUP X.X CALIBRATE: ON
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT

Display show:
SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 2:00:30
SETUP X.X SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 2:00:30 EXIT returns

Sequence Delta Time
to the SETUP
MODE Delta Days
PREV NEXT MODE SET EXIT Menu.
Note If at any time an unallowable entry is selected (Example: Delta Days > 367) the
ENTR button will disappear from the display.
202 06858F DCN8038

9.6. CALIBRATION QUALITY ANALYSIS

After completing one of the calibration procedures described above, it is important to
evaluate the analyzer’s calibration SLOPE and OFFSET parameters. These values
describe the linear response curve of the analyzer, separately for NO and NOX. The
values for these terms, both individually and relative to each other, indicate the quality
of the calibration.
To perform this quality evaluation, you will need to record the values of the following
test functions (see Section 4.1.1), all of which are automatically stored in the DAS
channel CALDAT for data analysis, documentation and archival.
NO OFFS
NO SLOPE
NOX OFFS
NOX SLOPE
Ensure that these parameters are within the limits listed in Table 9-5 and frequently
compare them to those values on the Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (P/N 04490)
that came attached to your manual, which should not be significantly different. If they
are, refer to the troubleshooting Section 12.
Table 9-5: Calibration Data Quality Evaluation

Function Minimum Value Optimum Value Maximum Value
NOX SLOPE -0.700 1.000 1.300
NO SLOPE -0.700 1.000 1.300
NOX OFFS -20.0 mV 0.0 mV 150.0 mV
NO OFFS -20.0 mV 0.0 mV 150.0 mV
The default DAS configuration records all calibration values in channel CALDAT as
well as all calibration check (zero and span) values in its internal memory.
• Up to 200 data points are stored for up 4 years of data (on weekly calibration
checks) and a lifetime history of monthly calibrations.
• Review these data to see if the zero and span responses change over time.
• These channels also store the STB figure (standard deviation of NOX concentration)
to evaluate if the analyzer response has properly leveled off during the calibration
procedure.
• Finally, the CALDAT channel also stores the converter efficiency for review and
documentation.
06858F DCN8038 203

9.7. GAS FLOW CALIBRATION

Rate of sample gas and O3 flow through the T200 is a key part of the NOx, NO and NO2
concentration calculations. The FLOW CALIBRATION submenu located under the
DIAG menu allows the calibration/ adjustment of these calculations.
Note A separate flow meter is required for this procedure.
To calibrate the flow of gas calculations made by the CPU, press.

SAMPLE RANGE=500.0 PPB O3= XXXX
<TST TST> CAL SETUP
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
DIAG SIGNAL I/O
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG FLOW CALIBRATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG FCAL FLOW SENSOR TO CAL

Use these buttons to select which flow SAMP OZONE ENTR EXIT
calculation to adjust:
• SAMP: Calibrates the sample gas flow
calculation derived from the pressure
measurements before and after the sample gas
enters the reaction cell.
• OZONE Calibrates the O3 gas flow calculation
derived from the direct measurements of DIAG FCAL WAITING FOR FLOW
gas flow into the O3 Generator.
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG FCAL ACTUAL FLOW: 1.000 LPM
1 .0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new

Toggle these keys to setting.
match the actual flow as
measured by the external
flow meter. ENTR accepts the
new setting.
:.
204 06858F DCN8038

10. EPA PROTOCOL CALIBRATION
For U.S. EPA compliance always calibrate this instrument prior to use, adhering to the
EPA designation conditions for operating this instrument. (The official List of
Designated Reference and Equivalent Methods is published in the U.S. Federal Register:
http://www3.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/criteria.html). Pay strict attention to the built-in warning
features, periodic inspection, regular zero/span checks, regular test parameter evaluation
for predictive diagnostics and data analysis, and routine maintenance. Any instrument(s)
supplying the zero air and span calibration gasses used must themselves be calibrated
and that calibration must be traceable to an EPA/NIST primary standard.
Comply with Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40 (downloadable from the U.S.
Government Publishing Office at http://www/gpo.gov/fdsys/) and with Quality
Assurance Guidance documents (available on the EPA website,
http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/qalist.html). Give special attention to specific regulations
regarding the use and operation of ambient NOx analyzers (chemiluminescence).
06858F DCN8038 205

EPA Protocol Calibration Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual
This page intentionally left blank
206 06858F DCN8038

11. INSTRUMENT MAINTENANCE
Follow the maintenance schedule set forth in Section 11.1. In general, the exterior can
be wiped down with a lightly damp cloth.

Avoid spraying anything directly onto any part of the analyzer.
Service and troubleshooting are covered in Section Troubleshooting & Service.
11.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Table 11-1 shows a typical maintenance schedule for the T200. Please note that in
certain environments (i.e. dusty, very high ambient pollutant levels) some maintenance
procedures may need to be performed more often than shown.

DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE PERFORMING ANY OF THE FOLLOWING
OPERATIONS THAT REQUIRE ENTRY INTO THE INTERIOR OF THE ANALYZER.
CAUTION – QUALIFIED PERSONNEL

These maintenance procedures must be performed by qualified technicians only.

A span and zero calibration check (see CAL CHECK REQ’D Column of Table 11-1,
T200 Maintenance Schedule) must be performed following some of the
maintenance procedures listed herein. To perform a CHECK of the instrument’s
Zero or Span Calibration, refer to Section 9.3.
DO NOT press the ENTR button at the end of each operation. Pressing the ENTR
button resets the stored values for OFFSET and SLOPE and alters the instrument’s
Calibration.
Alternatively, use the Auto Cal feature described in Section 9.5 with the
CALIBRATE attribute set to OFF.
06858F DCN8038 207

Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual
Table 11-1: T200 Maintenance Schedule

CAL DATE PERFORMED
ITEM ACTION FREQ CHECK
REQ’D
TEST Review and Weekly No
functions evaluate
Particulate Change Weekly (if in No
filter particle filter stack system:
As Needed)
Zero/span Evaluate Weekly No
check offset and
slope
Zero/span Zero and Every 3 months Yes
calibration span
calibration
External zero Exchange Every 3 months No
air scrubber chemical
option
External Replace When indicator No
dryer option chemical color changes
Ozone Change Annually Yes
cleanser chemical
Reaction cell Clean Annually or as Yes
window necessary
(“optical
filter” in
Figure 11-6)
DFU filters Change Annually No
particle filter
Pneumatic Check for Annually or Yes if a
sub-system leaks in gas after repairs leak is
flow paths involving repaired
pneumatics
Reaction cell Replace Annually Yes
O-rings &
sintered
filters
PMT Sensor Low-level On PMT/ Yes
Hardware hardware preamp
Calibration calibration changes or if
slope is outside
of 1.0±0.3
Pump Rebuild head when RCEL Yes
pressure
exceeds 10 in-
Hg-A (at sea
level)
Inline Replace Annually No
Exhaust
Scrubber
NO2 Replace Every 3 years Yes
converter converter or if conversion
efficiency drops
below 96%
Desiccant Replace Any time PMT n/a
bags housing is
opened for
maintenance
208 06858F DCN8038

Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance
11.2. PREDICTIVE DIAGNOSTICS

Predictive diagnostic functions, including failure warnings and alarms built into the
analyzer’s firmware, aid in determining whether and when repairs are necessary.
The Test Functions can also be used to predict failures by looking at how their values
change over time, compared to the values recorded on the printed record of the Final
Test and Validation Data Sheet, P/N 04490. The internal data acquisition system (DAS)
is a convenient way to record and track these changes. Use APICOM (Section 8.1.1) to
download and review this data from a remote location.
The following table, checked weekly, can be used as a basis for taking action as these
values change with time.
Table 11-2: Predictive Uses for Test Functions

FUNCTION EXPECTED ACTUAL INTERPRETATION & ACTION
Fluctuating Developing leak in pneumatic system. Check for leaks.
RCEL Constant to within
(pressure) ± 0.5 in-Hg-A Pump performance is degrading. Rebuild pump when pressure
Slowly increasing
is above 10 in-Hg-A.
Fluctuating Developing leak in pneumatic system. Check for leaks.
SAMP Constant within
Slowly increasing Flow path is clogging up. Replace orifice filters.
atmospheric
(pressure) changes Developing leak in pneumatic system to vacuum (developing
Slowly decreasing
valve failure). Check for leaks.
Constant to within
OZONE FL ± 15
Slowly decreasing Flow path is clogging up. Replace orifice filters.
Developing AZERO valve failure. Replace valve.

Constant within PMT cooler failure. Check cooler, circuit, and power supplies.
AZERO ±20 of check-out Significantly increasing
value Developing light leak.
O3 air filter cartridge is exhausted. Change chemical.
Constant for Slowly decreasing
NO2 Converter efficiency may be degrading. Replace converter
constant signal for same
(Concentration) components.
concentrations concentration
Change in instrument response. Low level (hardware) calibrate
NO2 Decreasing over time the sensor.
Constant
with IZS Option
response from day Degradation of IZS permeation tube. Change permeation tube.
installed to day
(Concentration) Heavily fluctuating from Ambient changes in moisture are affecting the performance.
day to day Add a dryer to the zero air inlet.
Constant for
NO Drift of instrument response; clean RCEL window. Check for
constant Decreasing over time
(Concentration) flow leaks or irregularities.
concentration
06858F DCN8038 209

11.3. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

Perform the following procedures as standard maintenance per Table 11-1.
11.3.1. REPLACING THE SAMPLE PARTICULATE FILTER

Inspect the particulate filter often for signs of plugging or contamination. Do not touch
any part of the housing, filter element, PTFE retaining ring, glass cover and the o-ring
with your bare hands: use gloves or PTFE coated tweezers or similar handling to avoid
contamination of the sample filter assembly.
To change the filter:
1. Turn OFF the analyzer to prevent drawing debris into the instrument.
2. Open the T200’s hinged front panel and unscrew the retaining ring on the filter
assembly.
RETAINING RING
PTFE O-RING
HOLDER
Figure 11-1 Replacing the Particulate Filter
3. Carefully remove the retaining ring, PTFE o-ring, glass window and filter element.
4. Replace the filter, being careful that the element is fully seated and centered in the
bottom of the holder.
5. Reinstall the PTFE o-ring with the notches up; the glass window, then screw on the
retaining ring and hand tighten. Inspect the seal between the edge of filter and the
o-ring to assure a proper seal.
6. Restart the Analyzer.
210 06858F DCN8038

11.3.2. CHANGING THE O3 DRYER PARTICULATE FILTER

The air for the O3 generator passes through a dryer equipped with a small particulate
filter at its inlet, which prevents dust from entering the ozone dryer and degrading the
dryer’s performance over time. Change the filter according to the service interval in
Table 11-1 as follows:
1. Before starting the procedure, check and record the average RCEL pressure and
the OZONE FLOW values.
2. Turn off the analyzer, unplug the power cord and remove the cover.
3. Unscrew the nut around the port of the filter using two 5/8” wrenches.

Ensure to use proper wrenches.
Hold the main dryer fitting with a 5/8” wrench to ensure that it does not turn
against the dryer.
Performing this procedure improperly or with incorrect tools creates a risk of
causing a significant leak.
4. Take off the old filter element and replace it with a suitable equivalent (Teledyne
API P/N FL-3).
Figure 11-2: Particle Filter on O3 Supply Air Dryer
5. Hold the main dryer fitting steady with a 5/8” wrench and tighten the nut with your
hands.
• If necessary use a second wrench but do not over-tighten the nut.
6. Replace the cover, plug in the power cord and restart the analyzer.
06858F DCN8038 211

7. Check the O3 flow rate; it should be around 80 cm³/min ± 15.

8. Check the RCEL pressure.
• It should be the same value as before.
9. Refer to Section 11.3.12to leak check after installing the new DFU particle filter.
11.3.3. CHANGING THE OZONE CLEANSER CHEMICAL

The ozone (O3) cleanser is located next to the O3 generator (see Figure 3-5) and cleans
the O3 stream from solid and liquid contaminants that are created inside the O3
generator. The content of the ozone cleanser needs periodical exchange according to
Table 11-1. A rebuild kit is available from the factory (see Appendix B of this manual
lists the part numbers).
To change the ozone cleanser chemical, follow these steps:
1. Turn of power to the analyzer and pump. Remove the analyzer cover and locate the
O3 filter in the front of the analyzer next to the O3 generator.
2. Use a 7/16” wrench to remove both pieces of 1/8” male nut with tubing from the
NPT fittings.
Figure 11-3: Ozone Cleanser Assembly
212 06858F DCN8038

3. Remove the integrated screws with a Phillips screw driver and remove the scrubber
manifold from the chassis.
4. Using a 9/16” wrench, remove both fittings from the cartridge.
5. Discard the glass wool.
6. Pour the contents of the scrubber manifold onto a sheet of white paper. If
necessary, remove the plug to ensure that all the contents are poured out.
• Notice any discoloration of the contents, which is usually white and slightly
transparent.
• The amount of discolored chemical (usually with yellow tint) may give you an
indication of the lifetime of the chemical in your application.
The maintenance cycle of this item is dependent on ambient moisture, sub-micron

particle load and other factors and may differ from that shown in Table 11-1.
7. Discard the used silica gel desiccant without touching it. It may contain nitric acid,
which is a corrosive and highly irritating substance.

Immediately wash your hands after contact with the silica gel disiccant.
8. Using a small powder funnel, fill the cartridge with about 10 g new silica gel
desiccant (Teledyne API P/N CH43) so that it is level on both legs of the cartridge.
• Slight vibration is required to settle the chemical into the cartridge and achieve
tightest packing, which increases performance and lifetime of the filter.
• Ensure that the level of the chemical does not protrude farther than the first two
threads of the NPT fitting.

Use only genuine, pre-conditioned Teledyne API's refill kits for this procedure.
Teledyne API's refill kits have been properly conditioned to prevent a significant
increase of the T200’s Auto Zero value which can cause large negative offsets,
which may take 2-3 weeks to disappear.
Do not leave this material uncovered for more than a few seconds, as it will
absorb contaminants from ambient air. Always store unused, well-covered refill
material in a cool dry place.
9. Seal the silica gel desiccant with 1 cm3 of glass wool on each well.
• Ensure that the plug is large enough and compressed into the cartridge so that
the chemical is securely held in place.
10. Add new Teflon tape (P/N HN000036) to the NPT fittings.
11. Screw the NPT fittings back into the scrubber manifold.
12. Screw the cartridge back onto the chassis; orientation is not important.
13. Evaluate the ferrules on the tubing.
• If the ferrules are too old, we recommend replacing them with new ferrules.
14. Reconnect the tubing using 7/16” and 9/16” wrenches.
06858F DCN8038 213

• Do not over-tighten the fittings.
15. If the service interval for this item has been exceeded, it may also be necessary to
clean the reaction cell as described in Section 11.3.9.
16. Leak check the system using the pressurized approach described in Section
11.3.12.2.
• If necessary, tighten the fittings some more but do not over-tighten.
17. Restart the analyzer and pump and continue operation.

18. Recalibrate the analyzer after one hour (Section 9).
• If Auto Zero is high or is changing/not constant, you may have to wait a day until
the silica gel is conditioned before recalibrating the instrument.
11.3.4. MAINTAINING THE EXTERNAL SAMPLE PUMP (PUMP PACK)
11.3.4.1. REBUILDING THE PUMP

The sample pump head periodically wears out and must be replaced when the RCEL
pressure exceeds 10 in-Hg-A (at sea level, adjust this value accordingly for elevated
locations).
• A pump rebuild kit is available from the factory. Refer to the label on the pump for
the part number. Instructions and diagrams are included in the kit.
• A flow and leak check after rebuilding the sample pump is recommended.
• A span check and re-calibration after this procedure is necessary as the response
of the analyzer changes with the RCEL pressure.
11.3.4.2. REPLACING THE SCRUBBER
CAUTION!
Do NOT attempt to change the contents of the inline exhaust scrubber
cartridge; change the entire cartridge.
1. Through the SETUP>MORE>DIAG menu turn OFF the OZONE GEN OVERRIDE.
Wait 10 minutes to allow pump to pull room air through scrubber before proceeding
to step 2.
2. Disconnect exhaust line from analyzer.
3. Turn off (unplug) analyzer sample pump.
4. Disconnect tubing from (NOx or charcoal) scrubber cartridge.
5. Remove scrubber from system.
6. Dispose of according to local laws.
7. Install new scrubber into system.
8. Reconnect tubing to scrubber and analyzer.
9. Turn on pump.
10. Through the SETUP menu (per Step 1 above) turn ON the OZONE GEN
OVERRIDE.
214 06858F DCN8038

11.3.5. CHANGING THE PUMP DFU FILTER

The exhaust air from the analyzer passes through a small particle filter (Dry Filter Unit
(DFU - filter), P/N FL3) before entering the pump. It should be replaced when:
• It becomes visibly dirty or;
• The pressure differential between the test functions SAMP and RCEL increases
significantly.
11.3.5.1. PROCEDURE FOR REPLACING FILTERS ON EXTERNAL PUMPS

1. Power down the analyzer and pump.
2. For internally mounted filters, skip the next two steps.
3. Remove the analyzer exhaust tube from the dust filter.
4. Remove the particle filter from the pump by pushing the white plastic ring into the
fitting and pulling the filter out of the fitting.
• If necessary, use needle-nose pliers to pry the filter out of the fittings.
5. Push a new filter into the pump fitting and ensure that the arrow on the filter points
towards the pump.
6. Push the exhaust tubing onto the filter. Skip the next two steps.
7. For internally mounted filters at the inside rear panel, remove the chassis and locate
the filter between the vacuum manifold and the exhaust port fitting.
8. Disconnect the clear tubing from the filter body and change the filter with the arrow
pointing against the gas flow. To remove the hose clamps, slide the two clamp
ends in opposite directions with a needle-nose pliers until the clamp comes apart.
Reconnect the tubing by using the same or new clamps and pushing tightening
them until a good seal is achieved.
9. Restart the pump and clear any error warnings from the front panel display.
10. After about 5 minutes, check the RCEL pressure reading and ensure that it is
similar to its value before changing the filter but less than 10 in-Hg-A.
11.3.5.2. PROCEDURE FOR REPLACING FILTERS ON INTERNAL PUMPS

1. Power down the analyzer and pump.
2. Remove the chassis top and locate the filter between the vacuum manifold and the
exhaust port fitting.
3. Disconnect the clear tubing from the filter body and change the filter with the arrow
pointing against the gas flow.
4. To remove the hose clamps, slide the two clamp ends in opposite directions with a
needle-nose pliers until the clamp comes apart.
5. Reconnect the tubing by using the same or new clamps and pushing tightening
them until a good seal is achieved.
6. Restart the pump and clear any error warnings from the front panel display.
7. After about 5 minutes, check the RCEL pressure reading and ensure that it is
similar to its value before changing the filter (but less than 10 in-Hg-A).
06858F DCN8038 215

11.3.6. CHANGING THE INTERNAL SPAN GAS GENERATOR PERMEATION

TUBE
1. Turn off the analyzer, unplug the power cord and remove the cover.
2. Locate the permeation tube (see Figure 3-5) oven in the rear left of the analyzer.
3. Remove the top layer of insulation if necessary.
4. Unscrew the black aluminum cover of the oven (3 screws) using a medium Phillips-
head screw driver.
• Leave the fittings and tubing connected to the cover.
5. Remove the old permeation tube and replace it with the new tube.
• Ensure that the tube is placed into the larger of two holes and that the open
permeation end of the tube (plastic) is facing up.
6. Re-attach the cover with three screws.
• Ensure that the three screws are tightened evenly.
7. Replace the analyzer cover, plug the power cord back in and turn on the analyzer.
8. Carry out a span check to see if the new permeation device works properly (see
Section 9.3.4).
9. The permeation rate may need several days to stabilize.

Do not leave instrument turned off for more than 8 hours without removing the
permeation tube. Do not ship the instrument without removing the permeation
tube. The tube continues to emit NO2, even at room temperature and will
contaminate the entire instrument.
11.3.7. CHANGING THE EXTERNAL ZERO AIR SCRUBBER (OPT 86C)

The external zero air scrubber that is included with several of the T200’s optional
calibration valve packages contains two chemicals:
• Pink Purafil© (P/N CH 9)that converts NO in the ambient air to NO2, and;
• Black, charcoal (P/N CH 1) that absorbs the NO2 thereby creating zero air.
These chemicals need to be replaced periodically (see Table 11-1) or as needed.
CAUTION!
The following procedures apply only to the External Zero Air Scrubber and NOT
to the inline exhaust scrubber cartridge that is part of the pump pack assembly.
216 06858F DCN8038


This procedure can be carried out while the instrument is running, however
ensure that the analyzer is not in ZERO calibration mode.
1. Locate the scrubber on the outside rear panel; Figure 11-4 shows the exploded
assembly.
2. Remove the old scrubber by disconnecting the 1/4” plastic tubing from the DFU
particle filter using 9/16” and 1/2" wrenches.
3. Remove the DFU particle filter from the cartridge using 9/16” wrenches.
4. Unscrew the top of the scrubber canister and discard the Purafil© and charcoal
contents.
• Ensure to abide to local laws about discarding these chemicals.
• The rebuild kit (listed in Appendix B) comes with a Material and Safety Data
Sheet, which contains more information on these chemicals.
5. It is not necessary to remove the insert from the barrel, but if removed, perform the
following procedure:
• Coat the threads of the insert with epoxy (Teledyne API P/N CH32).
• Hand tighten insert to barrel.
6. It is not necessary to remove the nylon tube fitting from the insert, but if removed,
apply Teflon tape (Teledyne API P/N HW36) to the threads of the nylon tube fitting
before installing on the insert.
7. Refill the scrubber with charcoal at the bottom and the Purafil© chemical at the top.
• Use three, white retainer pads to separate the chemicals as shown Figure 11-4
8. Replace the screw-top cap and tighten the cap; hand-tighten only.
9. If necessary, replace the filter with a new unit and discard the old. See Section
11.3.7.1.
• The bottom retainer pad should catch most of the dust, the filter should not be
visibly dirty (on the inside).
10. Replace the scrubber assembly into its clips on the rear panel.
11. Reconnect the plastic tubing to the fitting of the DFU particle filter.
12. Adjust the scrubber cartridge such that it does not protrude above or below the
analyzer in case the instrument is mounted in a rack.
• If necessary, squeeze the clips for a tighter grip on the cartridge.
06858F DCN8038 217

Figure 11-4: Zero Air Scrubber Assembly
11.3.7.1. CHANGING THE EXTERNAL SCRUBBER’S DFU FILTER

There is also a DFU filter on the inlet of the external zero air scrubber that is included in
several of the optional calibration valve packages.
To change this filter:
1. Disconnect the tube and fitting from one end and remove the filter from the scrubber
canister.
2. Insert a new filter and reattach the tubing.
3. Ensure that the small arrow embedded on the filter points in flow direction, i.e., to
analyzer.
218 06858F DCN8038

11.3.8. CHANGING THE NO2 CONVERTER

The NO2 converter is located in the center of the instrument, Figure 3-5 for the location,
and Figure 11-5 for the assembly.
The converter is designed for replacement of the cartridge only; the heater with built-in
thermocouple is to be reused.
CAUTION!
Wear gloves prior to changing the NO2 Converter to ensure that the fiberglass
insulation does not come into contact with your skin.
1. Turn off the analyzer power.

2. Remove the instrument cover and allow the converter to cool.
3. Remove the converter assembly cover as well as the Moly insulation (top layer and
corner cut out layers) until the Moly converter assembly can be seen.
CAUTION
HOT SURFACE HAZARD
The converter operates at 315º C. Severe burns can result if the assembly is not
allowed to cool.
Do not handle the assembly until it is at room temperature. This may take several
hours
4. Remove the tube fittings from the Moly converter assembly.

5. Disconnect the power and the thermocouple from the Moly converter assembly.
6. Unscrew the steel cable clamp (for the power leads) from the converter housing
with a Phillips-head screw driver.
7. Remove the Moly converter assembly (converter cartridge and band heater) from
the converter housing.
• Make a note of the orientation of the tubes relative to the heater cartridge.
8. Unscrew the band heater and loosen it.

9. Remove the old converter cartridge.
06858F DCN8038 219

Figure 11-5: NO2 Converter Assembly
10. Wrap the band heater around the new replacement converter cartridge and tighten
the screws using a high-temperature anti-seize agent (Teledyne API P/N CH42)
such as copper paste.
• Ensure to use proper alignment of the heater with respect to the converter
tubes.
11. Replace the Moly converter assembly by routing the cables through the holes in the
converter housing and reconnecting them properly.
12. Reconnect the steel cable clamp around the power leads for safe operation.
13. Reattach the tube fittings to the converter and replace the Moly insulation (top layer
and corner cut out layers).
14. Reinstall the converter assembly cover.
15. Reinstall the instrument cover and power up the analyzer.
16. Allow the converter to burn-in for 24 hours, and then recalibrate the instrument.
220 06858F DCN8038

11.3.9. CLEANING THE REACTION CELL

A dirty reaction cell will cause excessive noise, drifting zero or span values, low
response or a combination of all.
To clean the reaction cell, it is necessary to remove it from the sensor housing.
1. Turn off the instrument power and vacuum pump. Refer to Figure 11-6 for the
following procedure.
2. Disconnect the black 1/4" exhaust tube and the 1/8” sample and ozone air tubes
from the reaction cell. Disconnect the heater/thermistor cable.
3. Remove two screws (Teledyne API P/N SN144) and two washers holding the
reaction cell to the PMT housing and lift the cell and manifold out.
Figure 11-6: Reaction Cell Assembly
06858F DCN8038 221

4. Remove two screws (Teledyne API P/N SN150) and two washers.
5. The reaction cell will separate into two halves, the stainless steel manifold assembly
and the black plastic reaction cell with window gasket, stainless steel reaction cell
sleeve, optical filter and O-rings.
6. The reaction cell (both plastic part and stainless steel sleeve) and optical filter
should be cleaned with Distilled Water (DI - Water) and a clean tissue, and dried
thereafter.
7. Usually it is not necessary to clean the sample and ozone flow orifices since they
are protected by sintered filters.
• If tests show that cleaning is necessary, refer to Section 11.3.10 on how to
clean the critical flow orifice.
8. Do not remove the sample and ozone nozzles. They are Teflon threaded and
require a special tool for reassembly. If necessary, the manifold with nozzles
attached can be cleaned in an ultrasonic bath.
9. Reassemble in proper order and re-attach the reaction cell to the sensor housing.
Reconnect pneumatics and heater connections, then re-attach the pneumatic
sensor assembly and the cleaning procedure is complete.
10. After cleaning the reaction cell, it is also recommended to exchange the ozone
supply air filter chemical as described in Section 11.3.3.
11. After cleaning, the analyzer span response may drop 10 - 15% in the first 10 days
as the reaction cell window conditions. This is normal and does not require another
cleaning.
222 06858F DCN8038

11.3.10. REPLACING CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICES

There are several critical flow orifices installed in the T200 (see Figure 13-7 for a
pneumatic location of each orifice). Despite the fact that these flow restrictors are
protected by sintered stainless steel filters, they can, on occasion, clog up, particularly if
the instrument is operated without sample filter or in an environment with very fine,
sub-micron particle-size dust.
Figure 11-7: Critical Flow Orifice Assembly
To clean or replace a critical flow orifice:

1. Turn off power to the instrument and vacuum pump.
2. Remove the analyzer cover and locate the reaction cell (Figure 11-5 and Figure
11-6).
3. Unscrew the 1/8” sample and ozone air tubes from the reaction cell.
4. For orifices on the reaction cell (Figure 11-6): Unscrew the orifice holder with a
9/16” wrench.
• This part holds all components of the critical flow assembly as shown in Figure
11-7.
• Appendix B contains a list of spare part numbers.
5. For orifices in the vacuum manifold: the assembly is similar to the one shown in
Figure 11-7, except:
• Without the orifice holder, P/N 04090, and bottom O-ring, P/N OR34 and;
• With an NPT fitting in place of the FT 10 fitting.
6. After taking off the connecting tube, unscrew the NPT fitting.
06858F DCN8038 223

7. Take out the components of the assembly:

• spring
• sintered filter
• two O-rings
• the orifice
Note For the vacuum manifold only, you may need to use a scribe or pressure from the
vacuum port to get the parts out of the manifold.
8. Discard the two O-rings and the sintered filter and install new ones.
9. Reassemble the parts as shown in Figure 11-7.
10. Reinstall the critical flow orifice assembly into the reaction cell manifold or the
vacuum manifold.
11. Reconnect all tubing, power up the analyzer and pump. After a warm-up period of
30 minutes, carry out a leak test as described in Section 13.3.12.
11.3.11. CHECKING FOR LIGHT LEAKS

When re-assembled or operated improperly, the T200 can develop small gaps around the
PMT, which let stray light from the analyzer surrounding into the PMT housing. To find
such light leaks, follow the procedures below.
CAUTION – QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY

This procedure is carried out with the analyzer running and its cover removed.
1. Scroll the front panel display to show then test function to PMT.
2. Supply zero gas to the analyzer.
3. With the instrument still running, carefully remove the analyzer cover.
Do NOT touch any of the inside wiring with the metal cover or with your body.
Do NOT drop screws or tools into a running analyzer.
4. Shine a powerful flashlight or portable incandescent light at the inlet and outlet
fitting and at all of the joints of the reaction cell as well as around the PMT housing.
• The PMT value should not respond to the light, the PMT signal should remain
steady within its usual noise floor.
5. If there is a PMT response to the external light, symmetrically tighten the reaction
cell mounting screws or replace the 1/4” vacuum tubing with new, black PTFE
tubing (this tubing will fade with time and become transparent).
Note Often, light leaks are also caused by O-rings being left out of the assembly.
6. If, during this procedure, the black PMT housing end plate for the Sensor Assembly
is removed, ensure to replace the 5 desiccant bags inside the housing.
7. Carefully replace the analyzer cover. If tubing was changed, carry out a pneumatic
leak check.
224 06858F DCN8038

11.3.12. CHECKING FOR PNEUMATIC LEAKS

CAUTION - TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Do not exceed 15 psi when pressurizing the system during either Simple or
Detailed checks.
11.3.12.1. SIMPLE VACUUM LEAK AND PUMP CHECK

Leaks are the most common cause of analyzer malfunction. This section presents a
simple leak check, whereas the next section details a more thorough procedure. The
method described here is easy, fast and detects, but does not locate, most leaks. It also
verifies the sample pump condition.
1. Turn the analyzer ON, and allow at least 30 minutes for flows to stabilize.
2. Cap the sample inlet port (cap must be wrench-tight).
3. After several minutes, when the pressures have stabilized, note the SAMP (sample
pressure) and the RCEL (vacuum pressure) readings.
• If both readings are equal to within 10% and less than 10 in-Hg-A, the
instrument is free of large leaks.
• It is still possible that the instrument has minor leaks.
• If both readings are < 10 in-Hg-A, the pump is in good condition.
• A new pump will create a pressure reading of about 4 in-Hg-A (at sea level).
11.3.12.2. DETAILED PRESSURE LEAK CHECK

If a leak cannot be located by the above procedure, obtain a leak checker that contains a
small pump, shut-off valve, and pressure gauge to create both over-pressure and
vacuum. Alternatively, a tank of pressurized gas, with the two-stage regulator adjusted
to ≤ 15 psi, a shutoff valve and a pressure gauge may be used.

Once tube fittings have been wetted with soap solution under a pressurized
system, do not apply or reapply vacuum as this will cause soap solution to be
sucked into the instrument, contaminating inside surfaces.
1. Turn OFF power to the instrument and remove the instrument cover.
2. Install a leak checker or a tank of gas (compressed, oil-free air or nitrogen) as
described above on the sample inlet at the rear panel.
3. Disconnect the pump tubing on the outside rear panel and cap the pump port.
• If IZS or zero/span valves are installed, disconnect the tubing from the zero and
span gas ports and plug them (Figure 3-3).
• Cap the DFU particle filter on the dryer.
4. Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker or tank gas, allowing enough time
to fully pressurize the instrument through the critical flow orifice.
• Check each tube connection (fittings, hose clamps) with soap bubble solution,
looking for fine bubbles.
06858F DCN8038 225

• Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution, do not reapply vacuum
as it will draw soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it.
• Do not exceed 15 psi pressure.
5. If the instrument has the zero and span valve option, the normally closed ports on
each valve should also be separately checked.
• Connect the leak checker to the normally closed ports and check with soap
bubble solution.
6. If the analyzer is equipped with an IZS Option, connect the leak checker to the Dry
Air inlet and check with soap bubble solution.
7. Once the leak has been located and repaired, the leak-down rate of the indicated
pressure should be less than 1 in-Hg-A (0.4 psi) in 5 minutes after the pressure is
turned off.
8. Clean surfaces from soap solution, reconnect the sample and pump lines and
replace the instrument cover.
9. Restart the analyzer.
11.3.12.3. PERFORMING A SAMPLE FLOW CHECK

Use a separate, calibrated flow meter capable of measuring flows between 0 and
1000 cm³/min to measure the gas flow rate though the analyzer. Do not use the
built in flow measurement viewable from the front panel of the instrument.
This value is only calculated, not measured.
Sample flow checks are useful for monitoring the actual flow of the instrument, as the
front panel display shows only a calculated value. A decreasing, actual sample flow
may point to slowly clogging pneumatic paths, most likely critical flow orifices or
sintered filters. To perform a sample flow check:
1. Disconnect the sample inlet tubing from the rear panel SAMPLE port.
2. Attach the outlet port of a flow meter to the sample inlet port on the rear panel.
• Ensure that the inlet to the flow meter is at atmospheric pressure.
3. The sample flow measured with the external flow meter should be 500 cm³/min ±
10%.
• If a combined sample/ozone air dryer is installed (optional equipment), the flow
will be 640 cm³/min ± 10% (500 cm³/min for the sample and 80 cm³/min for the
ozone generator supply air and 60 cm³/min for the purge flow).
• Low flows indicate blockage somewhere in the pneumatic pathway.
226 06858F DCN8038

12. TROUBLESHOOTING & SERVICE
This section contains a variety of methods for identifying the source of performance
problems with the analyzer. Also included in this section are procedures that are used in
repairing the instrument.
Note: To support your understanding of the technical details of maintenance, Section

13, Principles of Operation, provides information about how the instrument
works.
CAUTION
The operations outlined in this section must be performed by qualified
maintenance personnel only.
WARNING
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK
Some operations need to be carried out with the analyzer open and
running.
Exercise caution to avoid electrical shocks and electrostatic or
mechanical damage to the analyzer.
Do not drop tools into the analyzer or leave those after your procedures.
Do not short or touch electric connections with metallic tools while
operating inside the analyzer.
Use common sense when operating inside a running analyzer.
Note The front panel of the analyzer is hinged at the bottom and may be
opened to gain access to various components mounted on the panel
itself or located near the front of the instrument (such as the particulate
filter).
Remove the locking screw located at the right-hand side of the front
panel.
06858F DCN8038 227

Troubleshooting & Service Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOx Analyzer Operation Manual
12.1. GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING

The T200 has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected, evaluated and
repaired. During operation, it continuously performs diagnostic tests and provides the
ability to evaluate its key operating parameters without disturbing monitoring
operations.
A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five
steps:
1. Note any WARNING MESSAGES and take corrective action as necessary.
2. Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values.
Note any major deviations from the factory values and take corrective action.
3. Use the internal electronic status LEDs to determine whether the electronic
communication channels are operating properly.
• Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the
voltage test points on the relay PCA.
• Note that the analyzer’s DC power wiring is color-coded and these colors match
the color of the corresponding test points on the relay PCA.
4. Suspect a leak first!

• Customer service data indicate that the majority of all problems are eventually
traced to leaks in the internal pneumatics of the analyzer or the diluent gas and
source gases delivery systems.
• Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or blocked internal/external gas
lines, damaged seals, punctured gas lines, a damaged / malfunctioning pumps,
etc.
5. Follow the procedures defined in Section 3.4.3 to confirm that the analyzer’s vital
functions are working (power supplies, CPU, relay PCA, touchscreen, PMT cooler,
etc.).
• See Figure 3-5 or the general layout of components and sub-assemblies in the
analyzer.
• See the wiring interconnect diagram and interconnect list in Appendix D.
12.1.1. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH WARNING MESSAGES

The most common and/or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message
being displayed on the front panel. Table 12-1 lists warning messages, along with their
meanings and recommended corrective action.
It should be noted that if more than two or three warning messages occur at the same
time, it is often an indication that some fundamental sub-system (power supply, relay
PCA, motherboard) has failed rather than an indication of the specific failures
referenced by the warnings.
The analyzer will alert the user that a Warning Message is active by flashing the FAULT
LED and displaying the Warning message in the Param field along with the CLR button
(press to clear Warning message). The MSG button displays if there is more than one
warning in queue or if you are in the TEST menu and have not yet cleared the message.
228 06858F DCN8038

Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Service
The following display/touch screen examples provide an illustration of each:
The analyzer will also alert the user via the Serial I/O COM port(s).
To view or clear the various warning messages press:
NOTE:
If a warning message persists after
SAMPLE O3 GEN WARNING
several attempts to clear it, the message
Suppresses the may indicate a real problem and not an
TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP
warning messages. artifact of the warm-up period.
TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP MSG returns the active

warnings to the message
field.
TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP Press CLR to clear the current
message.
If more than one warning is
active, the next message will take
SYSTEM O3 GEN WARNING its place.
TEST CLR SETUP
Once the last warning has
been cleared, the analyzer’s
display will return to its
standard Sample Mode STANDBY RANGE=500.0 PPB NOX=XXXX The display will continually
configuration. cycle between showing the
TEST CAL MSG SETUP current NOX, NO and NO2
concentrations.
06858F DCN8038 229

Table 12-1: Front Panel Warning Messages

WARNING FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES
AZERO valve not working
Valve control driver failed
Auto-zero reading above 200 mV.
Bad Relay PCA
AZERO WARN Value shown in message indicates Failed +12 VDC power supply
XXX.X MV auto-zero reading at time warning
Gas leak across AZERO Valve ports
was displayed.
Dirty Reaction Cell
O3 flow problem to RCELL
Box Temperature typically runs ~7°C warmer than ambient
temperature
Box Temp is < 7°C
BOX TEMP WARNING Poor/blocked ventilation to the analyzer
or > 48°C.
Stopped Exhaust-Fan
Ambient Temperature outside of specified range
Measured concentration value is too high or low
CANNOT DYN SPAN Dynamic Span operation failed.
Concentration Slope value to high or too low
Measured concentration value is too high
CANNOT DYN ZERO Dynamic Zero operation failed.
Concentration Offset value to high
Configuration and Calibration data Failed Disk on Module
CONFIG INITIALIZED reset to original Factory state. User erased data
Heater configured for wrong voltage type
NO2 à NO Converter temperature < Failed converter Temperature Sensor
CONV TEMP WARNING
305°C or > 325°C. Relay controlling the Heater is not working
Failed Relay Board
Failed Disk-on-Module
DATA INITIALIZED Data Storage in DAS was erased.
User cleared data.
No +15 VDC power supply to Preamplifier PCA
Drive voltage not adjusted properly
High voltage power supply output
HVPS WARNING outside of warning limits.
Failed PMT Preamplifier PCA
Dirty reaction cell
Bad pneumatic flow
Permeation tube oven temperature is Failed permeation tube Temperature Sensor
IZS TEMP WARNING
< 45°C or > 55°C. Relay controlling the Heater is not working
Failed Relay Board
Failed Sample Pump
Blocked O3 dryer
OZONE FLOW O3 flow rate is < 50 cc/min or > Blocked inlet/outlet to O3 purifier
WARNING 150 cc/min. Dirty O3 dryer DFU
Leak downstream of RCELL
Failed O3 Flow Sensor
Ozone generator is off. This is the O3 generator override is turned ON.
only warning message that
Electrical connection between motherboard and generator is
OZONE GEN OFF automatically clears itself. It clears
faulty.
itself when the ozone generator is
turned on. Bad +15VDC power supply
PMT fan not operating

Sample temperature is < 5°C or > Failed PMT Temperature Sensor
PMT TEMP WARNING
12°C. TEC not functioning
Failed PMT Preamp PCA
230 06858F DCN8038

WARNING FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES

If Sample Pressure is < 15 in-HG:
Sample Pressure is <15 in-Hg or > • Blocked Particulate Filter
35 in-Hg • Blocked Sample Inlet/Gas Line
RCELL PRESS WARN Normally 29.92 in-Hg at sea level • Failed Pressure Senor/circuitry
decreasing at 1 in-Hg per 1000 ft of
altitude (with no flow – pump If Sample Pressure is > 35 in-HG:
disconnected). • Bad Pressure Sensor/circuitry
• Pressure too high at Sample Inlet.
Failed RCELL Temperature Sensor
RCELL temperature is < 45°C or >
RCELL TEMP WARNING Relay controlling the heater is not working
55°C.
Failed Relay Board
I2C Bus
This WARNING only appears on Serial I/O COM Port(s) Front
Motherboard not detected on
REAR BOARD NOT DET power up.
Panel Display will be frozen, blank or will not respond.
Failure of Motherboard
I2C Bus failure
The CPU cannot communicate with
RELAY BOARD WARN the Relay Board.
Failed Relay Board
Loose connectors/wiring
Failed Sample Pump
Blocked Sample Inlet/Gas Line
Sample flow rate is < 350 cc/min or > Dirty Particulate Filter
SAMPLE FLOW WARN 600 cc/min. Leak downstream of RCELL Critical Flow Orifice
Failed Sample Pressure Sensor
Failed Vacuum Pressure Sensor
This message occurs at power on.
If it is confirmed that power has not been interrupted:
The computer has rebooted.
SYSTEM RESET Failed +5 VDC power
Fatal Error caused software to restart
Loose connector/wiring
Note A failure of the analyzer’s CPU, motherboard or power supplies can result in any
or ALL of the above messages.
06858F DCN8038 231

12.1.2. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH TEST FUNCTIONS

In addition to being useful as predictive diagnostic tools, the test functions viewable
from the analyzers front panel can be used to isolate and identify many operational
problems when combined with a thorough understanding of the analyzer’s principles of
operation (see Section 13).
The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in the “Nominal Range” column
of the analyzer Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (P/N 04490) shipped with the
instrument. Values outside these acceptable ranges indicate a failure of one or more of
the analyzer’s subsystems. Functions whose values are still within acceptable ranges but
have significantly changed from the measurement recorded on the factory data sheet
may also indicate a failure.
A worksheet has been provided in Appendix C to assist in recording the value of these
test functions.
Note A value of “XXXX” displayed for any of these TEST functions indicates an OUT
OF RANGE reading.
Note Sample Pressure measurements are represented in terms of ABSOLUTE pressure

because this is the least ambiguous method reporting gas pressure.
Absolute atmospheric pressure is about 29.92 in-Hg-A at sea level. It decreases

about 1 in-Hg per 1000 ft gain in altitude. A variety of factors such as air
conditioning systems, passing storms, and air temperature, can also cause
changes in the absolute atmospheric pressure.
Table 12-2: Test Functions - Indicated Failures

TEST FUNCTION INDICATED FAILURE(S)
NOX STB Unstable concentrations; leaks
SAMP FlW Leaks; clogged critical flow orifice
OZONE FL Leaks; clogged critical flow orifice
PMT Calibration off; HVPS problem; no flow (leaks)
NORM PMT Auto Zero too high
AZERO Leaks; malfunctioning NO, NOx or Auto Zero valve; O3 air filter cartridge exhausted
HVPS Calibration off; preamp board circuit problems
RCELL TEMP Malfunctioning heater; relay board communication (I2C bus); relay burnt out
BOX TEMP Environment out of temperature operating range; broken thermistor
PMT TEMP TEC cooling circuit broken; relay board communication (I2C bus); 12 V power supply
IZS TEMP (option) Malfunctioning heater; relay board communication (I2C bus); relay burnt out
Malfunctioning heater; disconnected or broken thermocouple; relay board communication
MOLY TEMP
(I2C bus); relay burnt out; incorrect AC voltage configuration
RCEL (pressure) Leak; malfunctioning valve; malfunctioning pump; clogged flow orifices
SAMP (pressure) Leak; malfunctioning valve; malfunctioning pump; clogged flow orifices; sample inlet
232 06858F DCN8038

TEST FUNCTION INDICATED FAILURE(S)

overpressure
HVPS out of range; low-level (hardware) calibration needs adjustment; span gas
NOX SLOPE
concentration incorrect; leaks
NOX OFFset Incorrect span gas concentration; low-level calibration off
NO SLOPE HVPS out of range; low-level calibration off; span gas concentration incorrect; leaks
NO OFFSet Incorrect span gas concentration; low-level calibration off
TIME Internal clock drifting; move across time zones; daylight savings time?
12.1.3. DIAG à SIGNAL I/O: USING THE DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL I/O

FUNCTION
The signal I/O diagnostic mode allows access to the digital and analog I/O in the
analyzer. Some of the digital signals can be controlled through the touchscreen. These
signals, combined with a thorough understanding of the instrument’s principles of
operation (Section 13), are useful for troubleshooting in three ways:
• The technician can view the raw, unprocessed signal level of the analyzer’s critical
inputs and outputs.
• Many of the components and functions that are normally under algorithmic control
of the CPU can be manually exercised.
• The technician can directly control the signal level Analog and Digital Output
signals.
This allows the technician to observe systematically the effect of directly controlling
these signals on the operation of the analyzer. Following is an example of how to use
the Signal I/O menu to view the raw voltage of an input signal or to control the state of
an output voltage or control signal.
06858F DCN8038 233

<TST TST> CAL SETUP

Concentration display
continuously cycles
through all gasses
DIAG SIGNAL I/O

NEXT ENTR EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
DIAG I/O 0) EXT_ZERO_CAL=OFF

SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818 PREV NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT Use the PREV and
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT NEXT keys to cycle
through the VARS.
DIAG I/O 1)EXT_SPAN_CAL=OFF
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT Use the JUMP key to go
directly to a specific
signal.
(see Appendix A for a list
DIAG I/O JUMPTO: 0 of all I/O SIGNALS)
0 0 JUMP ENTR EXIT
Toggle these keys

to set No. of the
VAR to JUMP to.
EXAMPLE
DIAG I/O JUMPTO: 29
2 9 JUMP ENTR EXIT
DIAG I/O 29) AUTO_ZERO_VALVE=OFF
PREV NEXT JUMP OFF PRNT EXIT
On status signals this Pressing the PRNT key will send a

key toggles the signal formatted printout to the serial port
ON / OFF. and can be captured with a computer
or other output device.
Figure 12-1: Example of Signal I/O Function
Note Any I/O signals changed while in the signal I/O menu will remain in effect ONLY
until signal I/O menu is exited. The Analyzer regains control of these signals
upon exit.
See Appendix A for a complete list of the parameters available for review under
this menu.
234 06858F DCN8038

12.2. USING THE ANALOG OUTPUT TEST CHANNEL

The signals available for output over the T200’s analog output channel can also be used
as diagnostic tools. See Section 5.9.2 for instruction on activating the analog output and
selecting a function.
Table 12-3: Test Channel Outputs as Diagnostic Tools

TEST FULL CAUSES OF EXTREMELY
DESCRIPTION ZERO
CHANNEL SCALE HIGH / LOW READINGS
Failed PMT
PMT Temperature too High/Low
The output of the PMT
PMT Bad PMT Preamp PCA
detector converted to a 0 0 mV 5000 mV
DETECTOR to 5 VDC scale. Failed HVPS
Misadjusted HVPS drive Voltage
Light Leak in reaction cell
The flow rate of O3
OZONE through the analyzer as 0 1000
Check for Gas Flow problems in the O3 gas lines.
FLOW measured by the O3 flow cm3/min cm3/min
sensor
The calculated flow rate
SAMPLE 0 1000
for sample gas through Check for Gas Flow problems in the sample gas lines.
FLOW the analyzer. cm3/min cm3/min
The pressure of the
SAMPLE sample gas measured
0 In-Hg-A 40 In-Hg-A Check for Gas Flow problems in the sample gas lines.
PRESSURE upstream of the Auto
Zero Valve
The pressure of gas
RCELL
inside the reaction cell of 0 In-Hg-A 40 In-Hg-A Check for Gas Flow problems in all gas lines.
PRESSURE the sensor module
The temperature of gas
RCELL TEMP inside the reaction cell of 0 °C 70 °C Same as RCELL TEMP WARNING in Table 12-1.
the sensor module
The temperature of the
permeation tube oven of
IZS TEMP the optional internal span
0 °C 70 °C Same as IZS TEMP WARNING in Table 12-1.
gas generator.
The temperature NO2 à
CONV TEMP NO converter
0 mV 5000 mV Same as CONV TEMP WARNING in Table 12-1.
The temperature inside

PMT TEMP PMT 0 °C 50 °C Same as PMT TEMP WARNING in Table 12-1.
The temperature inside

BOX TEMP the T200’s chassis 0 °C 70 °C Same as BOX TEMP WARNING in Table 12-1.
Represents the output

HVPS
voltage of the PMT's high 0 mV 5000 mV Same as HVPSWARNING in Table 12-1.
VOLTAGE voltage power supply
06858F DCN8038 235

12.3. USING THE INTERNAL ELECTRONIC STATUS LEDS

Several LEDs are located inside the instrument to assist in determining if the analyzer’s
CPU, I2C bus and Relay PCA are functioning properly.
12.3.1. CPU STATUS INDICATOR

DS5, a red LED, that is located on upper portion of the motherboard, just to the right of
the CPU board, flashes when the CPU is running the main program loop. After power-
up, approximately 30 – 60 seconds, DS5 should flash on and off. If characters are
written to the front panel display but DS5 does not flash then the program files have
become corrupted, contact Teledyne API's Customer Service Department (see Section
12.10) because it may be possible to recover operation of the analyzer. If after 30 – 60
seconds, neither DS5 is flashing nor have any characters been written to the front panel
display then the CPU is bad and must be replaced.
Motherboard
CPU Status LED
Figure 12-2: CPU Status Indicator
12.3.2. RELAY PCA STATUS LEDS

There are sixteen LEDs located on the Relay PCA. Some are not used on this model.
12.3.2.1. I2C BUS WATCHDOG STATUS LEDS

The most important is D1 (see Figure 12-3), which indicates the health of the I2C bus.
Table 12-4: Relay PCA Watchdog LED Failure Indications

LED Function Fault Status Indicated Failure(s)
Failed/Halted CPU
Continuously ON Faulty Motherboard, Touchscreen or Relay PCA
D1 I2C bus Health
or Faulty Connectors/Wiring between Motherboard,
(Red) (Watchdog Circuit)
Continuously OFF Touchscreen or Relay PCA
Failed/Faulty +5 VDC Power Supply (PS1)
If D1 is blinking, then the other LEDs can be used in conjunction with DIAG Menu
Signal I/O to identify hardware failures of the relays and switches on the Relay PCA.
236 06858F DCN8038

12.3.2.2. RELAY PCA STATUS LEDS
D10 (Green) – NO/NOx Valve

D9 (Green) – AutoZero Valve
D8 (Green) – Optional Sample/Cal Valve
D7 (Green) – Optional Zero/Span Valve
D3 (Yellow) NO2 à NO Converter Heater
D2 (Yellow) Reaction Cell Heater
D5 (Yellow) – Optional Internal Span Gas Gen Heater
D11 (Green) – Optional Dual Span Select Valve

D12 (Green) – Optional Pressurized Span Shutoff Valve
D13 (Green) – Optional Pressurized Zero Shutoff Valve
D1 (RED)
Watchdog Indicator
Figure 12-3: Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting
Table 12-5: Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications

FAULT
LED COLOR FUNCTION INDICATED FAILURE(S)
STATUS
LED ROW 1
Continuously
D2 Yellow Reaction Cell heater ON or OFF
Heater broken, thermistor broken
Continuously
D3 Yellow NO2 converter heater ON or OFF
Heater broken, thermocouple broken
Continuously
D7 Green Zero/Span valve status ON or OFF
Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip broken
Continuously
D8 Green Sample/Cal valve status ON or OFF
Continuously
D9 Green Auto-zero valve status ON or OFF
Continuously
D10 Green NO/NOx valve status ON or OFF
LED ROW 2
Internal span gas generator Continuously
D5 Yellow ON or OFF
Heater broken, thermistor broken
perm tube heater
Continuously
D11 Green Dual span select valve ON or OFF
Continuously
D12 Green Pressurized Span shutoff valve ON or OFF
Continuously
D13 Green Pressurized Zero shutoff valve ON or OFF
Note: D4, D6, and D14-16 are not indicated as they are not used.
06858F DCN8038 237

12.4. GAS FLOW PROBLEMS

The T200 has two main flow paths, the sample flow and the flow of the ozone supply
air. With IZS or zero/span valve option installed, there is a third (zero air) and a fourth
(span gas) flow path, but either one of those is only controlled by critical flow orifices
and not displayed on the front panel or stored to the DAS.
• Flow is too high
• Flow is greater than zero, but is too low, and/or unstable
• Flow is zero (no flow)
When troubleshooting flow problems, it is essential to confirm the actual flow rate
without relying on the analyzer’s flow display. The use of an independent, external flow
meter to perform a flow check as described in Section 11.3.12.3 is essential. Refer to
the pneumatic flow diagrams as needed for reference.
12.4.1. ZERO OR LOW FLOW PROBLEMS
12.4.1.1. SAMPLE FLOW IS ZERO OR LOW

The T200 does not actually measure the sample flow but rather calculates it from a
differential pressure between sample and vacuum manifold. On flow failure, the unit
will display a SAMPLE FLOW WARNING on the front panel display and the
respective test function reports XXXX instead of a value “0”. This message applies to
both a flow rate of zero as well as a flow that is outside the standard range (350-600
cm³/min).
If the analyzer displays XXXX for the sample flow, confirm that the external sample
pump is operating and configured for the proper AC voltage.
• Whereas the T200 can be internally configured for two different power regimes
(100-120 V and 220-240 V, either 50 or 60 Hz), the external pump is physically
different for each of three power regimes (100 V / 50 Hz, 115 V / 60 Hz and 230 V /
50 Hz).
• If the pump is not running, use an AC Voltmeter to ensure that the pump is supplied
with the proper AC power. If AC power is supplied properly, but the pump is not
running, replace the pump.
Note Sample and vacuum pressures mentioned in this chapter refer to operation of the
analyzer at sea level. Pressure values need to be adjusted for elevated locations,
as the ambient pressure decreases by about 1 in-Hg per 300 m / 1000 ft.
If the pump is operating but the unit reports a XXXX gas flow, take the following three
steps:
1. Check for actual sample flow.
• To check the actual sample flow, disconnect the sample tube from the sample
inlet on the rear panel of the instrument.
• Ensure that the unit is in basic SAMPLE mode.
• Place a finger over the inlet and see if it gets sucked in by the vacuum or, more
properly, use a flow meter to measure the actual flow.
• If there is proper flow of around 450-550 cm³/min, contact customer service.
238 06858F DCN8038

• If there is no flow or low flow, continue with the next step.
2. Check pressures.
• Check that the sample pressure is at or around 28 in-Hg-A at sea level (adjust
as necessary when in elevated location, the pressure should be about 1” below
ambient atmospheric pressure) and that the RCEL pressure is below 10 in-Hg-A.
• The T200 will calculate a sample flow up to about 14 in-Hg-A RCEL pressure
but a good pump should always provide less than 10 in.
• If both pressures are the same and around atmospheric pressure, the pump
does not operate properly or is not connected properly. The instrument does
not get any vacuum.
• If both pressures are about the same and low (probably under 10 in-Hg-A, or
~20” on sample and 15” on vacuum), there is a cross-leak between sample flow
path and vacuum, most likely through the dryer flow paths. See troubleshooting
the dryer later in this chapter.
• If the sample and vacuum pressures are around their nominal values (28 and
<10 in-Hg-A, respectively) and the flow still displays XXXX, carry out a leak
check as described in Section 13.3.12.
• If gas flows through the instrument during the above tests but goes to zero or is
low when it is connected to zero air or span gas, the flow problem is not internal
to the analyzer but likely caused by the gas source such as
calibrators/generators, empty gas tanks, clogged valves, regulators and gas
lines.
• If an IZS or Zero/Span valve option is installed in the instrument, press CALZ
and CALS. If the sample flow increases, suspect a bad Sample/Cal valve.
3. If none of these suggestions help, carry out a detailed leak check of the analyzer as
described in Section 11.3.12.2.
12.4.1.2. OZONE FLOW IS ZERO OR LOW

If there is zero or a low (<50 cm³/min) ozone flow, the unit displays an OZONE FLOW
WARNING message on the front panel and a value between 0.0 and 50 cm³/min for the
actual ozone flow as measured by the internal mass flow meter. In this case, carry out
the following steps:
1. Check the actual flow rate through the ozone dryer by using an external flow meter
to the inlet port of the dryer.
• This inlet port is inside the analyzer at the end of the plastic particle filter
(Section 11.3.2 for illustration).
• If there is nominal flow (about 160 cm³/min from 80 cm³/min O3 flow and 80
cm³/min purge flow), consult customer service as there is a problem with the
firmware or electronics.
2. If the actual flow is low or zero, check if the pump operates properly. The RCEL
pressure should be below 10 in-Hg-A at sea level.
• If it is above 10”, rebuild the pump (Section 11.3.4.1). Check the spare parts list
in Appendix B on how to order pump rebuild kits.
3. Check if the particle filter is clogged.

• Briefly remove the particle filter to see if this improves the flow.
06858F DCN8038 239

• Be very cautious when handling the dryer fittings (see Section 11.3.2 on proper
handling instructions).
• If the filter is clogged, replace it with a new unit.
• If taking off this filter does not solve the problem, continue to the next step.
• Do not leave the dryer without filter for more than a few seconds, as you may
draw in dust, which will reduce the performance of the dryer.
4. A leak between the flow meter and the reaction cell (where the flow-determining
critical orifice is located) may cause a low flow (the system draws in ambient air
through a leak after the flow meter).
• Check for leaks as described in Section 11.3.12.
• Repair the leaking fitting, line or valve and re-check.
5. The most likely cause for zero or low ozone flow is a clogged critical flow orifice or
sintered filter within the orifice assembly.
• The orifice that sets the ozone flow is located on the reaction cell.
• Check the actual ozone flow by disconnecting the tube from the reaction cell
and measuring the flow going into the cell.
• If this flow is correct (~80 cm³/min), the orifice works properly.

• If this flow is low, replace the sintered filter.
• The orifice holder assembly allows a quick and easy replacement of the filter
(see Section 11.3.5 and on for replacement procedures).
• Appendix B lists a spare part kit with a complete orifice assembly that allows a
quick replacement with minimum instrument down-time.
12.4.1.3. HIGH FLOW

Flows that are significantly higher than the allowed operating range (typically ±10-11%
of the nominal flow) should not occur in the T200 unless a pressurized sample, zero or
span gas is supplied to the inlet ports.
• Ensure to vent excess pressure and flow just before the analyzer inlet ports.
When supplying sample, zero or span gas at ambient pressure, a high flow would
indicate that one or more of the critical flow orifices are physically broken (very
unlikely case), allowing more than nominal flow, or were replaced with an orifice of
wrong specifications.
• If the flows are within 15% higher than normal, we recommend measuring and
recalibrating the flow electronically using the procedure in Section 10, followed by a
regular review of these flows over time to see if the new setting is retained properly.
• Also, check the flow assembly o-rings and replace as needed.
12.4.1.4. SAMPLE FLOW IS ZERO OR LOW BUT ANALYZER REPORTS CORRECT FLOW
Note that the T200 analyzer can report a correct flow rate even if there is no or a low
actual sample flow through the reaction cell.
• The sample flow on the T200 is only calculated from the sample pressure and
critical flow condition is verified from the difference between sample pressure and
vacuum pressure.
240 06858F DCN8038

• If the critical flow orifice assembly is partially or completely clogged, both the
sample and vacuum pressures are still within their nominal ranges (the pump keeps
pumping, the sample port is open to the atmosphere), but there is no flow possible
through the reaction cell.
Although measuring the actual flow is the best method, in most cases, this fault can also
be diagnosed by evaluating the two pressure values.
• Since there is no longer any flow, the sample pressure should be equal to ambient
pressure, which is about 1 in-Hg-A higher than the sample pressure under normal
operation.
• The reaction cell pressure, on the other hand, is significantly lower than under
normal operation, because the pump no longer has to remove 500 cm³/min of
sample gas and evacuates the reaction cell much better.
• Those two indicators, taken together with a zero or low actual flow, indicate a
clogged sample orifice.
The T200 features a new orifice holder, which makes switching sample and ozone flow
orifices very easy; refer to Section 11.3.10 on how to change the sample orifices and to
Appendix B for part numbers of these assemblies.
Again, monitoring the pressures and flows regularly will reveal such problems, because
the pressures would slowly or suddenly change from their nominal, mean values.
Teledyne API recommends to review all test data once per week and to do an exhaustive
data analysis for test and concentration values once per month, paying particular
attention to sudden or gradual changes in all parameters that are supposed to remain
constant, such as the flow rates.
06858F DCN8038 241

12.5. CALIBRATION PROBLEMS

This section describes possible causes of calibration problems.
12.5.1. NEGATIVE CONCENTRATIONS

Negative concentration values can be caused for several reasons:
• A slight, negative signal is normal when the analyzer is operating under zero gas
and the signal is drifting around the zero calibration point.
• This is caused by the analyzer’s zero noise and may cause reported
concentrations to be negative for a few seconds at a time down to -20 ppb, but
should randomly alternate with similarly high, positive values.
• The T200 has a built-in Auto Zero function, which should take care of most of
these deviations from zero, but may yield a small, residual, negative value.
• If larger, negative values persist continuously, check if the Auto Zero function
was accidentally turned off using the remote variables in Appendix A-2.
• In this case, the sensitivity of the analyzer may be drifting negative.
• A corruption of the Auto Zero filter may also cause negative concentrations.
• If a short, high noise value was detected during the Auto Zero cycle, that higher
reading will alter the Auto Zero filter value.
• As the value of the Auto Zero filter is subtracted from the current PMT
response, it will produce a negative concentration reading.
• High Auto Zero readings can be caused by
• a leaking or stuck Auto Zero valve (replace the valve),

• by an electronic fault in the preamplifier causing it to have a voltage on the
PMT output pin during the Auto Zero cycle (replace the preamplifier),
• by a reaction cell contamination causing high background (>40 mV) PMT
readings (clean the reaction cell),
• by a broken PMT temperature control circuit, allowing high zero offset
(repair the faulty PMT cooler). After fixing the cause of a high Auto Zero
filter reading, the T200 will take 15 minutes for the filter to clear itself, or
• by an exhausted chemical in the ozone cleanser (see Section 11.3.3).
• Calibration error is the most likely explanation for negative concentration values.
• If the zero air contained some NO or NO2 gas (contaminated zero air or a worn-
out zero air scrubber) and the analyzer was calibrated to that concentration as
“zero”, the analyzer may report negative values when measuring air that
contains little or no NOx.
• The same problem occurs, if the analyzer was zero-calibrated using zero gas
that is contaminated with ambient air or span gas (cross-port leaks or leaks in
supply tubing or user not waiting long enough to flush pneumatic systems).
• If the response offset test functions for NO (NO OFFS) or NOX (NOX OFFS) are
greater than 150 mV, a reaction cell contamination is indicated.
• Clean the reaction cell as described in Section 11.3.9.
242 06858F DCN8038

12.5.2. NO RESPONSE
If the instrument shows no response (display value is near zero) even though sample gas
is supplied properly and the instrument seems to perform correctly.
1. Carry out an electrical test with the ELECTRICAL TEST procedure in the
diagnostics menu, see Section 12.7.12.2.
• If this test produces a concentration reading, the analyzer’s electronic signal
path is correct.
2. Carry out an optical test using the OPTIC TEST procedure in the diagnostics menu,
see Section 12.7.12.1.
• If this test results in a concentration signal, then the PMT sensor and the
electronic signal path are operating properly.
• If the T200 passes both ETEST and OTEST, the instrument is capable of
detecting light and processing the signal to produce a reading.
• Therefore, the problem must be in the pneumatics or the ozone generator.
3. Check if the ozone generator is turned on.

• Usually, the analyzer issues a warning whenever the ozone generator is turned
off.
• Go to SETUP-MORE-DIAG-ENTR, then scroll to the OZONE GEN OVERRIDE
and see if it shows ON.
• If it shows OFF, turn it ON and EXIT the DIAG menu.

• If this is done and the ozone flow is correct, the analyzer should be properly
supplied with ozone unless the generator itself is broken.
4. Confirm the lack of response by supplying NO or NO2 span gas of about 80% of the
range value to the analyzer.
5. Check the sample flow and ozone flow rates for proper values.
6. Check for disconnected cables to the sensor module.
7. If NO2 signal is zero while NO signal is correct, check the NO/NOx valve and the
NO2 converter for proper operation.
12.5.3. UNSTABLE ZERO AND SPAN

Leaks in the T200 or in the external gas supply and vacuum systems are the most
common source of unstable and non-repeatable concentration readings.
1. Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11.3.12.
2. Consider pneumatic components in the gas delivery system outside the T200 such
as a change in zero air source (ambient air leaking into zero air line or a worn-out
zero air scrubber) or a change in the span gas concentration due to zero air or
ambient air leaking into the span gas line.
3. Once the instrument passes a leak check, do a flow check (this chapter) to ensure
that the instrument is supplied with adequate sample and ozone air.
4. Confirm the sample pressure, sample temperature, and sample flow readings are
correct and steady.
5. Verify that the sample filter element is clean and does not need to be replaced.
06858F DCN8038 243

12.5.4. INABILITY TO SPAN - NO SPAN BUTTON (CALS)

In general, the T200 will not display certain buttons whenever the actual value of a
parameter is outside of the expected range for that parameter. If the calibration menu
does not show a SPAN button when carrying out a span calibration, the actual
concentration must be outside of the range of the expected span gas concentration,
which can have several reasons.
1. Verify that the expected concentration is set properly to the actual span gas
concentration in the CONC sub-menu.
2. Confirm that the NOx span gas source is accurate.
• This can be done by comparing the source with another calibrated analyzer, or
by having the NOx source verified by an independent traceable photometer.
3. Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11.3.12.

• Leaks can dilute the span gas and, hence, the concentration that the analyzer
measures may fall short of the expected concentration defined in the CONC
sub-menu.
4. If the low-level, hardware calibration has drifted (changed PMT response) or was
accidentally altered by the user, a low-level calibration may be necessary to get the
analyzer back into its proper range of expected values.
• One possible indicator of this scenario is a slope or offset value that is outside
of its allowed range (0.7-1.3 for slope, -20 to 150 for offsets). See Section
12.8.4 on how to carry out a low-level hardware calibration.
12.5.5. INABILITY TO ZERO - NO ZERO BUTTON (CALZ)

In general, the T200 will not display certain buttons whenever the actual value of a
parameter is outside of the expected range for that parameter. If the calibration menu
does not show a ZERO button when carrying out a zero calibration, the actual gas
concentration must be significantly different from the actual zero point (as per last
calibration), which may be for any of several reasons.
1. Confirm that there is a good source of zero air. If the IZS option is installed,
compare the zero reading from the IZS zero air source to a zero air source using
NOX-free air. Check any zero air scrubber for performance. It may need to be
replaced (Section 11.3.4.2).
2. Check to ensure that there is no ambient air leaking into zero air line. Check for
leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11.3.12.
12.5.6. NON-LINEAR RESPONSE

The T200 was factory calibrated to a high level of NO and should be linear to within 1%
of full scale. Common causes for non-linearity are:
• Leaks in the pneumatic system:
• Leaks can add a constant of ambient air, zero air or span gas to the current
sample gas stream, which may be changing in concentrations as the linearity
test is performed.
• Check for leaks as described in Section 11.3.12.
• The calibration device is in error:
244 06858F DCN8038

• Check flow rates and concentrations, particularly when using low

concentrations.
• If a mass flow calibrator is used and the flow is less than 10% of the full scale
flow on either flow controller, you may need to purchase lower concentration
standards.
• The standard gases may be mislabeled as to type or concentration.
• Labeled concentrations may be outside the certified tolerance.
• The sample delivery system may be contaminated.
• Check for dirt in the sample lines or reaction cell.
• Calibration gas source may be contaminated (NO2 in NO gas is common).
• Dilution air contains sample or span gas.
• Ozone concentration too low because of wet air in the generator.
• Generator system needs to be cleaned and dried with dry supply air.
• Check the dryer for leaks.
• This mostly affects linearity at the low end.
• Ozone stream may be contaminated with impurities.
• An exhausted ozone cleanser chemical will let compounds such as HNO3 and
ammonia derivatives break through to the reaction cell.
• Check the contents of the ozone cleanser and replace as necessary (Section
11.3.3).
• This also will affect linearity mostly at the low level.
• Sample inlet may be contaminated with NOx exhaust from this or other analyzers.
• Verify proper venting of the pump exhaust.
• Span gas overflow is not properly vented and creates a back-pressure on the
sample inlet port.
• Also, if the span gas is not vented at all and does not supply enough sample
gas, the analyzer may be evacuating the sample line.
• Ensure to create and properly vent excess span gas.
• Diffusion of oxygen into Teflon-type tubing over long distances.
• PTFE or related materials can act as permeation devices. In fact, the
permeable membrane of NO2 permeation tubes is made of PTFE.
• When using very long supply lines (> 1 m) between high concentrations span
gases and the dilution system, oxygen from ambient air can diffuse into the line
and react with NO to form NO2.
• This reaction is dependent on NO concentration and accelerates with increasing NO
concentration, hence, affects linearity only at high NO levels.
• Using stainless steel for long span gas supply lines avoids this problem.
12.5.7. DISCREPANCY BETWEEN ANALOG OUTPUT AND DISPLAY

If the concentration reported through the analog outputs does not agree with the value
reported on the front panel, you may need to recalibrate the analog outputs.
• This becomes more likely when using a low concentration or low analog output
range.
• Analog outputs running at 0.1 V full scale should always be calibrated manually.
• See Section 5.9.3.2 for a detailed description of this procedure.
06858F DCN8038 245

12.5.8. DISCREPANCY BETWEEN NO AND NOX SLOPES

If the slopes for NO and NOX are significantly different after software calibration (more
than 1%), consider the following three problems:
• NO2 impurities in the NO calibration gas. NO gases often exhibit NO2 on the order
of 1-2% of the NO value.
• This will cause differences in the calibration slopes. If the NO2 impurity in NO is
known, it can easily be accounted for by setting the expected values for NO and
NO2 accordingly to different values, e.g., 448 ppb NO and 450 ppb NOX.
• This problem is worse if NO gas is stored in a cylinder with balance air instead
of balance gas nitrogen or large amounts of nitrous oxide (N2O).
• The oxygen in the air slowly reacts with NO to yield NO2, increasing over time.
• The expected concentrations for NO and NOX in the calibration menu are set to
different values.
• If a gas with 100% pure NO is used, this would cause a bias.
• See Section 9.2.3.1 on how to set expected concentration values.
• The converter efficiency parameter has been set to a value not equal to 1.000 even
though the conversion efficiency is 1.0.
• The actual conversion efficiency needs to match the parameter set in the CAL
menu.
• See Section 9.1.4 for more information on this feature.
An instrument calibration with the IZS option (and expected concentrations set to the
same amount) will always yield identical slopes for NO and NOX, as the instrument
measures only NOX and assumes NO to be the same (with NO2 being zero).
12.6. OTHER PERFORMANCE PROBLEMS

Dynamic problems (i.e. problems that only manifest themselves when the analyzer is
monitoring sample gas) can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and
resolve. The following section provides an itemized list of the most common dynamic
problems with recommended troubleshooting checks and corrective actions.
12.6.1. EXCESSIVE NOISE

Excessive noise levels under normal operation usually indicate leaks in the sample
supply or the analyzer itself. Ensure that the sample or span gas supply is leak-free and
carry out a detailed leak check as described earlier in this chapter.
Another possibility of excessive signal noise may be the preamplifier board, the high
voltage power supply and/or the PMT detector itself.
• Contact the factory on troubleshooting these components.
12.6.2. SLOW RESPONSE

If the analyzer starts responding too slow to any changes in sample, zero or span gas,
check for the following:
• Dirty or plugged sample filter or sample lines.
• Sample inlet line is too long.
246 06858F DCN8038

• Leaking NO/NOX valve. Carry out a leak check.

• Dirty or plugged critical flow orifices. Check flows, pressures and, if necessary,
change orifices (Section 11.3.10).
• Wrong materials in contact with sample - use glass, stainless steel or Teflon
materials only. Porous materials, in particular, will cause memory effects and slow
changes in response.
• Dirty reaction cell. Clean the reaction cell.
• Insufficient time allowed for purging of lines upstream of the analyzer. Wait until
stability is low.
• Insufficient time allowed for NO or NO2 calibration gas source to become stable.
Wait until stability is low.
• NO2 converter temperature is too low. Check for proper temperature.
12.6.3. AUTO ZERO WARNINGS

Auto Zero warnings occur if the signal measured during an Auto Zero cycle is higher
than 200 mV.
Note The Auto-Zero warning displays the value of the Auto Zero reading when the
warning occurs.
• If this value is higher than 150 mV, check that the Auto Zero valve is operating
properly.
• To do so, use the SIGNAL I/O functions in the DIAG menu to toggle the valve
on and off.
• Listen if the valve is switching, see if the respective LED on the relay board is
indicating functionality.
• Scroll the TST functions until PMT is displayed and observe the PMT value change
between the two valve states.
• If the valve is operating properly, you should be able to hear it switch (once a
minute under normal operation or when manually activated from the SIGNAL
I/O menu):
• the PMT value should drop from span gas reading (e.g., 800-900 mV at
400 ppb NO) to less than 150 mV and;
• the LED on the relay board should light up when the valve is activated.
• If the PMT value drops significantly but not to less than 150 mV, the valve is
probably leaking across its ports.
• In this case, replace the valve.
• If the PMT value does not change at all, the valve is probably not switching at
all.
• Check the power supply to the valve (12 V to the valve should turn on and
off when measured with a voltmeter).
Note It takes only a small leak across the ports of the valve to show excessive Auto
Zero values when supplying high concentrations of span gas.
06858F DCN8038 247

Another reason for high (although not necessarily out-of-range) values for Auto Zero
could be the ozone air filter cartridge, if its contents have been exhausted and needs to
be replaced.
• This filter cartridge chemicals that can cause chemiluminescence and, if saturated,
these chemicals can break through to the reaction cell, causing an erroneously high
Auto Zero value (background noise).
A dirty reaction cell can cause high Auto Zero values.

• Clean the reaction cell according to Section 11.3.9.
Finally, a high HVPS voltage value may cause excess background noise and a high
AZERO value.
• The HVPS value changes from analyzer to analyzer and could show nominal values
between 450 and 800 V.
• Check the low-level hardware calibration of the preamplifier board and, if necessary,
recalibrate exactly as described in Section 12.8.4 in order to minimize the HVPS.
12.7. SUBSYSTEM CHECKOUT

The preceding sections of this manual discussed a variety of methods for identifying
possible sources of failures or performance problems within the analyzer. In most cases
this included a list of possible causes and, in some cases, quick solutions or at least a
pointer to the appropriate sections describing them. This section describes how to
determine if a certain component or subsystem is actually the cause of the problem being
investigated.
12.7.1. AC MAIN POWER

The T200 analyzer’s electronic systems will operate with any of the specified power
regimes. As long as system is connected to 100-120 VAC or 220-240 VAC at either 50
or 60 Hz it will turn on and after about 30 seconds show a front panel display.
• Internally, the status LEDs located on the Relay PCA, Motherboard and CPU should
turn on as soon as the power is supplied.
• If they do not, check the circuit breaker built into the ON/OFF switch on the
instruments front panel.
• If the instrument is equipped with an internal pump, it will begin to run. If it does not:
• Verify that the pump power configuration plug is properly wired (see Section
13.7.1.1 and Figure 13-24)
• If the configuration plug is set for 230 VAC and the instrument is plugged into
115 VAC or 100 VAC the sample pump will not start.
• If the configuration plug is set for 115 or 100 VAC and the unit is plugged into a 230
VAC circuit, the circuit breaker built into the ON/OFF Switch on the front panel will
trip to the OFF position immediately after power is switched on.
• T200’s without internal pumps that are configured for 230 V will still turn on at 115
V, but the heaters may burn out or not heat up fast enough.
248 06858F DCN8038


Should the AC power circuit breaker trip, investigate and correct the condition
causing this situation before turning the analyzer back on.
12.7.2. DC POWER SUPPLY

If you have determined that the analyzer’s AC mains power is working, but the unit is
still not operating properly, there may be a problem with one of the instrument’s
switching power supplies. The supplies can have two faults, namely no DC output, and
noisy output.
To assist tracing DC Power Supply problems, the wiring used to connect the various
printed circuit assemblies and DC Powered components and the associated test points on
the relay PCA follow a standard color-coding scheme as defined in the following table.
Table 12-6: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes

NAME TEST POINT# COLOR DEFINITION
DGND 1 Black Digital ground
+5V 2 Red
AGND 3 Green Analog ground
+15V 4 Blue
-15V 5 Yellow
+12R 6 Purple 12 V return
(ground) line
+12V 7 Orange
TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7

DGND +5V AGND +15V -15V +12R 12V
Figure 12-4: Location of DC Power Test Points on Relay PCA
A voltmeter should be used to verify that the DC voltages are correct per the values in
the table below, and an oscilloscope, in AC mode, with band limiting turned on, can be
used to evaluate if the supplies are producing excessive noise (> 100 mV p-p).
06858F DCN8038 249

Table 12-7: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels

VOLTAGE CHECK RELAY BOARD TEST POINTS MIN V MAX V
POWER FROM TO
SUPPLY Test Point Test Point
NAME # NAME #
PS1 +5 DGND 1 +5 2 +4.85 +5.25
PS1 +15 AGND 3 +15 4 +13.5 +16.0
PS1 -15 AGND 3 -15V 5 -13.5 -16.0
PS1 AGND AGND 3 DGND 1 -0.05 +0.05
PS1 Chassis DGND 1 Chassis N/A -0.05 +0.05
PS2 +12 +12V Ret 6 +12V 7 +11.8 +12.5
PS2 DGND +12V Ret 6 DGND 1 -0.05 +0.05
12.7.3. I2C BUS

Operation of the I2C bus can be verified by observing the behavior of D1 on the relay
PCA & D2 on the Valve Driver PCA. Assuming that the DC power supplies are
operating properly, the I2C bus is operating properly if D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of
the Valve Driver PCA are flashing
There is a problem with the I2C bus if both D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of the Valve
Driver PCA are ON/OFF constantly.
12.7.4. LCD/DISPLAY MODULE

TOUCHSCREEN INTERFACE
Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are
operating properly, the display screen should light and show the splash screen and other
indications of its state as the CPU goes through its initialization process.
12.7.5. RELAY PCA

The Relay PCA can be most easily checked by observing the condition of the status
LEDs on the Relay PCA (see Section 12.3.2), and using the SIGNAL I/O submenu
under the DIAG menu (see Section 12.1.3) to toggle each LED ON or OFF.
If D1 on the Relay PCA is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question
(Heater power, Valve Drive, etc.) toggles properly using the Signal I/O function, then
the associated control device on the Relay PCA is bad.
Several of the control devices are in sockets and can be easily replaced. The following
table lists the control device associated with a particular function:
Table 12-8: Relay PCA Control Devices

FUNCTION CONTROL DEVICE SOCKETED
All valves U5 Yes
Reaction Cell Heater K1 Yes
NO2 à NO Converter heater K2 Yes
Permeation Tube Heater for
K4 Yes
Optional Internal Span Gas Generator
250 06858F DCN8038

12.7.6. MOTHERBOARD
12.7.6.1. TEST CHANNEL / ANALOG OUTPUTS VOLTAGE

The ANALOG OUTPUT submenu, located under the SETUP à MORE à DIAG
menu is used to verify that the T200 analyzer’s three analog outputs are working
properly. The test generates a signal on all three outputs simultaneously as shown in the
following table:
Table 12-9: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values Voltage Outputs
FULL SCALE OUTPUT OF VOLTAGE RANGE
(see Section 5.9.3.1)
100MV 1V 5V 10V*
STEP % NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1 0 0 0 0 0
2 20 20 mV 0.2 1 2
3 40 40 mV 0.4 2 4
4 60 60 mV 0.6 3 6
5 80 80 mV 0.8 4 8
6 100 100 mV 1.0 5 10
* For 10V output, increase the Analog Output Calibration Limits (AOUT CAL LIM in the
DIAG>Analog I/O Config menu) to 4% (offset limit) and 20% (slope limit).
For each of the steps the output should be within 1% of the nominal value listed except
for the 0% step, which should be within 0mV ±2 to 3 mV. Ensure you take into account
any offset that may have been programmed into channel (See Section 5.9.3.9).
If one or more of the steps fails to be within these ranges, it is likely that there has been
a failure of the either or both of the Digital-to-Analog Converters (DACs) and their
associated circuitry on the motherboard. To perform the test connect a voltmeter to the
output in question and perform an analog output step test as follows:
06858F DCN8038 251

<TST TST> CAL SETUP

SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU DIAG SIGNAL I/O

COMM VARS DIAG EXIT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG AOUT ANALOG OUTPUT

Performs analog output step
test 0% to 100% 0% EXIT
DIAG AOUT ANALOG OUTPUT

· Pressing the “x%” button pauses the
test. Brackets will appear around the [10%] EXIT
value: EXAMPLE: [10%]
· Pressing the “[x%]” button resumes the
test.
12.7.6.2. A/D FUNCTIONS

The simplest method to check the operation of the A-to-D converter on the motherboard
is to use the Signal I/O function under the DIAG menu to check the two A/D reference
voltages and input signals that can be easily measured with a voltmeter.
1. Use the Signal I/O function (see Section 12.1.3 and Appendix A) to view the value
of REF_4096_MV and REF_GND.
• If both are within 3 mV of nominal (4096 and 0), and are stable, ±0.2 mV then
the basic A/D is functioning properly. If not then the motherboard is bad.
2. Choose a parameter in the Signal I/O function list (see Section 12.1.3) such as
OZONE_FLOW .
• Compare this voltages at its origin (see the interconnect drawing and
interconnect list in Appendix D) with the voltage displayed through the signal I/O
function.
• If the wiring is intact but there is a large difference between the measured and
displayed voltage (±10 mV) then the motherboard is bad.
252 06858F DCN8038

12.7.6.3. STATUS OUTPUTS
V
+DC Gnd
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D +
SYSTEM_OK
1000 Ω
Figure 12-5: Typical Set Up of Status Output Test
To test the status output electronics:

1. Connect a jumper between the “D" pin and the “” pin on the status output
connector.
2. Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the “+” pin and the pin for the status output
that is being tested.
3. Connect a voltmeter between the “” pin and the pin of the output being tested.
4. Under the DIAGà Signal I/O menu (see Section 12.1.3), scroll through the inputs
and outputs until you get to the output in question.
5. Alternately, turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter.
• It should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF.
Table 12-10: Status Outputs Check

PIN (LEFT TO RIGHT) STATUS
1 ST_SYSTEM_OK
2 ST_CONC_VALID
3 ST_HIGH_RANGE
4 ST_ZERO_CAL
5 ST_SPAN_CAL
6 ST_DIAG_MODE
7 Not Used on T200
8 ST_O2_CAL
06858F DCN8038 253

12.7.6.4. CONTROL INPUTS

The control input bits can be tested by applying a trigger voltage to an input and
watching changes in the status of the associated function under the SIGNAL I/O
submenu:
EXAMPLE: to test the “A” control input:
1. Under the DIAGà Signal I/O menu (see Section 12.1.3), scroll through the inputs
and outputs until you get to the output named EXT_ZERO_CAL.
2. Connect a jumper from the “+” pin on the appropriate connector to the “U” on the
same connector.
3. Connect a second jumper from the “” pin on the connector to the “A” pin.
4. The status of EXT_ZERO_CAL should change to read “ON”.
5. Connect a second jumper from the “” pin on the connector to the “B” pin.
6. The status of EXT_ZERO_CAL should change to read “ON”.
Table 12-11: T200 Control Input Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I/O
Functions
INPUT CORRESPONDING I/O SIGNAL
A EXT_ZERO_CAL
B EXT_SPAN_CAL1
C, D, E& F NOT USED
254 06858F DCN8038

12.7.7. PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY

The flow and pressure sensors of the T200 are located on a PCA just behind the PMT
sensor (see Figure 3-5) can be checked with a voltmeter.
Figure 12-6: Pressure / Flow Sensor Assembly
The following procedure assumes that the wiring is intact and that the motherboard and
power supplies are operating properly:
12.7.7.1. BASIC PCA OPERATION CHECK:

• Measure the voltage between TP2 and TP1 C1 it should be 10 VDC ± 0.25 VDC. If
not then the board is bad. Replace the PCA.
12.7.7.2. SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR CHECK:

1. Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S1 with an external pressure meter.
2. Measure the voltage across TP4 and TP1.
• The expected value for this signal should be:
Expected mVDC =
( Pressure
30.0Hg-In-A )
x 4660mvDC + 250mvDC ± 10%rdg
EXAMPLE: If the measured pressure is 20 Hg-in-A, the expected voltage level between
TP4 and TP1 would be between 2870 mVDC and 3510 mVDC.
EXAMPLE: If the measured pressure is 25 Hg-in-A, the expected voltage level between
TP4 and TP1 would be between 3533 mVDC and 4318 mVDC.
06858F DCN8038 255

• If this voltage is out of range, then either pressure transducer S1 is bad, the board is
bad or there is a pneumatic failure preventing the pressure transducer from sensing
the absorption cell pressure properly. Replace the PCA.
12.7.7.3. VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR CHECK

• Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S2 with an external pressure meter.
• Measure the voltage across TP5 and TP1.
• Evaluate the reading in the same manner as for the sample pressure sensor.
12.7.7.4. O3 FLOW SENSOR CHECK

• Measure the voltage across TP3 and TP1.
• With proper flow (80 cc3/min through the O3 generator), this should be
approximately 2V ± 0.25 (this voltage will vary with altitude).
• With flow stopped (photometer inlet disconnected or pump turned OFF) the
voltage should be approximately 1V.
• If the voltage is incorrect, the flow sensor S3 is bad, the board is bad (replace
the PCA) or there is a leak upstream of the sensor.
12.7.8. CPU
There are two major types of CPU board failures, a complete failure and a failure
associated with the Disk On Module (DOM). If either of these failures occurs, contact
the factory.
For complete failures, assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the
wiring is intact, the CPU is faulty if on power-on, the watchdog LED on the
motherboard is not flashing.
• In some rare circumstances, this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the
motherboard, specifically U57, the large, 44 pin device on the lower right hand side
of the board. If this is true, removing U57 from its socket will allow the instrument to
start up but the measurements will be invalid.
• If the analyzer stops during initialization (the front panel display shows a fault or
warning message), it is likely that the DOM, the firmware or the configuration and
data files have been corrupted.
12.7.9. RS-232 COMMUNICATIONS
12.7.9.1. GENERAL RS-232 TROUBLESHOOTING

Teledyne API's analyzers use the RS-232 communications protocol to allow the
instrument to be connected to a variety of computer-based equipment. RS-232 has been
used for many years and as equipment has become more advanced, connections between
various types of hardware have become increasingly difficult. Generally, every
manufacturer observes the signal and timing requirements of the protocol very carefully.
Problems with RS-232 connections usually center around 4 general areas:
• Incorrect cabling and connectors. See Section 3.3.1.8, Figure 3-13 for connector
and pin-out information.
• The BAUD rate and protocol are incorrectly configured. See Section 6.2.2.
256 06858F DCN8038

• If a modem is being used, additional configuration and wiring rules must be

observed. See Section 8.3
• Incorrect setting of the DTE – DCE Switch. See Section 6.1 to set correctly.
• Verify that cable (P/N 03596) that connects the serial COM ports of the CPU to J12
of the motherboard is properly seated.
12.7.9.2. TROUBLESHOOTING ANALYZER/MODEM OR TERMINAL OPERATION

These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a
Teledyne API's analyzer.
1. Check cables for proper connection to the modem, terminal or computer.
2. Check to ensure that the DTE-DCE is in the correct position as described in
Section 6.1.
3. Check to ensure that the set up command is correct (see Section 8.3).
4. Verify that the Ready to Send (RTS) signal is at logic high. The T200 sets pin 7
(RTS) to greater than 3 volts to enable modem transmission.
5. Ensure that the BAUD rate, word length, and stop bit settings between modem and
analyzer match. See Section 6.2.2.
6. Use the RS-232 test function to send “w” characters to the modem, terminal or
computer. See Section 6.2.3.
7. Get your terminal, modem or computer to transmit data to the analyzer (holding
down the space bar is one way); the green LED should flicker as the instrument is
receiving data.
8. Ensure that the communications software or terminal emulation software is
functioning properly.
Note Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual “RS-
232 Programming Notes” Teledyne API's P/N 01350.
12.7.10. NO2 à NO CONVERTER

Provided that oxygen was present in the Sample stream during operation for the NO2
converter to function properly, the NO2 converter assembly can fail in two ways:
• An electrical failure of the band heater and/or the thermocouple control circuit and;
• A performance failure of the converter itself.
12.7.10.1. NO2 à NO CONVERTER ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

NO2 converter heater failures can be divided into two possible problems:
• Temperature is reported properly but heater does not heat to full temperature.
• In this case, the heater is either disconnected or broken or the power relay is
broken.
• Disconnect the heater cable coming from the relay board and measure
the resistance between any two of the three heater leads with a multi-
meter.
• The resistance between A and B should be about 1000 Ω.
06858F DCN8038 257

• That between A and C should be the same as between B and C, about

500 Ω each.
• If any of these resistances is near zero or without continuity, the heater is
broken.
• Temperature reports zero or overload (near 500° C).
• This indicates a disconnected or failing thermocouple or a failure of the
thermocouple circuit.
• Check that the thermocouple is connected properly and the wire does not
show signs of a broken or kinked pathway.
• If it appears to be properly connected, disconnect the yellow
thermocouple plug (marked K) from the relay board and measure the
voltage (not resistance) between the two leads with a multi-meter
capable of measuring in the low mV range.
• The voltage should be about 12 mV (ignore the sign) at 315° C and about
0 mV at room temperature.
• Measure the continuity with an Ohm-meter.
• It should read close to zero Ω. If the thermo-couple does not have continuity, it
is broken.
• If it reads zero voltage at elevated temperatures, it is broken.
• To test the thermocouple at room temperature, heat up the converter can (e.g., with
a heat gun) and see if the voltage across the thermocouple leads changes.
• If the thermocouple is working properly, the electronic circuit is broken.

If the thermocouple is broken, do NOT replace the thermocouple without first
consulting the factory; using the wrong Type could cause permanent damage to
the instrument. The Type K thermocouple has a red and a yellow wire. If in doubt,
consult the factory.
12.7.10.2. NO2 CONVERSION EFFICIENCY

The efficiency at which the NO2 à NO converter changes NO2 into NO directly effects
the accuracy of the T200’s NOx, NO and NO2 measurements. The T200 firmware
includes a Converter Efficiency (CE) gain factor that is multiplied by the NO2 and NOX
measurements to calculate the final concentrations for each. This gain factor is stored in
the analyzer’s memory.
The default setting for the NO2 converter efficiency is 1.0000. Over time, the
molybdenum in the NO2 à NO converter oxidizes and it becomes less efficient at
converting NO2 into NO.
To ensure accurate operation of the T200, it is important to check the NO2 conversion
efficiency periodically and to update this value as necessary.
• For the analyzer to function correctly, the converter efficiency must be greater than
0.9600 (96% conversion efficiency) as per US-EPA requirements.
• If the converter’s efficiency is below this limit, the NO2 converter should be replaced.
• The current converter efficiency level is also recorded along with the calibration data
in the DAS for documentation and performance analysis (Section 7).
258 06858F DCN8038

12.7.10.3. CALCULATING / CHECKING CONVERTER EFFICIENCY

The T200 automatically calculates the current NO2 conversion efficiency by comparing
a known starting concentration of NO2 gas to the measured NO output of the converter.
This can be accomplished through Gas Phase Titration (GPT), which is the
recommended method (see Section 12.7.11), or by using bottled NO2.
There are three steps to performing the bottled NO2 method:
Step 1:
Supply the analyzer with a known concentration of NO2 gas, to the analyzer.
Source of
VENT here if input
SAMPLE GAS
calibration
MODEL 700E
Calibrated NO2
Gas Dilution
at HIGH Span
Concentration
Enclosure Wall
Calibrator
SAMPLE
MODEL 701
EXHAUST
Zero Gas
Generator Chassis
is not already vented.
PUMP
Figure 12-7: Setup for determining NO2 à NO Efficiency – T200 Base Configuration
Step 2:
Input the starting NO2 concentration value into the T200 by pressing:
06858F DCN8038 259

<TST TST> CAL SETUP
This step only appears if the

analyzer’s reporting range is
SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL set for AUTO range mode.
LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT
Select LOW and press ENTR.
Use these buttons to Repeat entire procedure for
select the appropriate HIGH range.
range.
Repeat entire procedure SAMPLE RANGE=500.0 PPB NO=XXXX
for each range.
<TST TST> CAL SETUP
<TST TST> ZERO CONC SETUP
M-P CAL CONCENTRATON MENU
NOX NO CONV EXIT
Converter Efficiency Menu

M-P CAL CONVERTER EFICIENCY MENU
NO2 CAL SET EXIT
The expected NO2 span

M-P CAL NO2 CE CONC: 500.0 Conc concentration value defaults
to 400.0 Conc.
0 4 0 0. 0 0 ENTR EXIT
Toggle these buttons Make sure that you specify
to change this value to the actual concentration value
the concentration of of the NO2 gas.
the NO2 gas being
used.
260 06858F DCN8038

STEP 3:
To cause the analyzer to calculate and record the NO2 à NO converter efficiency, press:
Starting from
CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU
(see preceding steps)
M-P CAL CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU
NO2 CAL SET EXIT
M-P CAL CE FACTOR:1000.0 Gain
1. 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT
Toggle these
buttons to initialize
the converter
efficiency at 1.0000.
M-P CAL CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU
NO2 CAL SET EXIT
< TST TST > ENTR SETUP
Toggle TST> button until ... Set the Display to show

the NOX STB test
function.
SAMPLE NO2 STB=XX.X PPB
the stability of the NO/NOx
<TST TST> SETUP measurement.
Allow NO2 gas of the proper concetration to enter

the sample port at the rear of the analyzer.
Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppb.
The analyzer minutes.
calculates the SAMPLE NO2 STB=XX.X PPB
converter’s <TST TST> ENTR SETUP
efficiency.
M-P CAL CONVERTER EFICIENCY MENU
NO2 CAL SET EXIT

Check the calculated converter
efficiency gain factor.
If the gain factor is NOT greater M-P CAL CE FACTOR=0.9852 Gain
than 0.9600, the
NO2 à NO converter 0. 8 8 5 2 ENTR EXIT
needs to be replaced.
12.7.10.4. EVALUATING NO2 à NO CONVERTER PERFORMANCE

If the converter appears to have performance problems (conversion efficiency is less
than 96%), check the following:
06858F DCN8038 261

• Recalculate the converter efficiency (see previous section)

• Accuracy of NO2 source (GPT or gas tank standard).
• NO2 gas standards are typically certified to only ±2% and often change in
concentrations over time. You should get the standard re-certified every year.
• If you use the GPT calibration, check the accuracy of the ozone source.
• Age of the converter.
• The NO2 converter has a limited operating life and may need to be replaced
every ~3 years or when necessary (e.g., earlier if used with continuously high
NO2 concentrations).
• We estimate a lifetime of about 10000 ppm-hours (a cumulative product of the
NO2 concentration times the exposure time to that concentration).
• This lifetime heavily depends on many factors such as:
• Absolute concentration (temporary or permanent poisoning of the

converter is possible).
• Sample flow rate and pressure inside the converter.
• Converter temperature.
• Duty cycle.
• This lifetime is only an estimated reference and not a guaranteed lifetime.
• In some cases with excessive sample moisture, the oxidized molybdenum metal
chips inside the converter cartridge may bake together over time and restrict air flow
through the converter, in which case it needs to be replaced.
• To avoid this problem, we recommend the use of a sample gas conditioner
(Section 3.3.2.6).
• Section 11.3.8 describes how to replace the NO2 converter cartridge.
• With no NO2 in the sample gas and a properly calibrated analyzer, the NO reading
is negative, while the NO2 reading remains around zero.
• The converter is destroying NO and needs to be replaced.
• With no NO2 in the sample gas and a properly calibrated analyzer, the NOX reading
is significantly higher than the actual (gas standard) NO concentration.
• The converter is producing NO2 and needs to be replaced.
12.7.11. DETERMINING CE BY SIMPLIFIED GPT CALIBRATION

This section describes how to determine the NO2 à NO converter’s efficiency using a
GPT method where the actual concentration of ozone is not a factor in the accuracy of
the calculation.
• This procedure is based on the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Chapter I,
subchapter C, Part 50, Appendix F.
• In the following example a reference point of 450 ppb NO gas will be used. This is
only an example. Any other reference points within measurement range of the
instrument may be used.
• For this procedure use a calibrated O3 generator, such as a Teledyne API's T700.
Note There must be a minimum of 10% more NO than O3 produced.

Example, if the Ozone concentration used is 400 ppb then the NO concentration
must be used must be 440 ppb or more.
262 06858F DCN8038

PART 1: PREPARATION
1. Leak check machine to ensure that there are no leaks in the analyzer.
2. Calibrate the instrument at the same NO span gas value as being used in this
method.
• For this example 450 ppb NO span gas
3. If you have input a converter efficiency (CE) factor into the instrument firmware (see
Section 12.7.10.3) other than 100%, change this back to 100% for the duration of
this test. (CAL>CONC>CONV>SET).
PART 2: DETERMINE THE AMOUNT OF NO OUTGASSED BY THE NO2 à NO

CONVERTER.
4. Bypass the NO2 à NO converter by placing a short piece of tubing in the gas
stream in place of the converter.
5. Perform a straight dilution with 445 ppb NO gas & air as a diluent gas.
6. Input the NO gas into the analyzer.
7. Allow the machine to stabilize & write down the NOx value on line 2 of GPT data
sheet (Section 12.7.11.1).
8. Remove the converter bypass so that the NO gas is flowing through the NO2 à NO
converter
9. Allow the machine to stabilize.
10. Write down your NOx value on your data sheet on lines 3 AND line 5 of the GPT
data sheet.
11. Subtract line 2 from line 3 & write that number down on line 4. Also write the NO
value on line 8 of the data sheet.
• The specification shown on the data sheet is the value that is used by Teledyne
API when performing the procedure on new NO2 à NO converters.
• Older NO2 à NO converters might outgas a bit more NO, therefore a slightly
wider specification might be in order.
• If this value is a constant or changes only slightly over time, this is not a
problem the machine will calibrate this out.
PART 3: PERFORM THE SIMPLIFIED GPT CALCULATION.

12. Generate the same 450 ppb NO gas & input 400 ppb of O3 (or generate 450 ppb
NO & 400 ppb NO2, if that’s what your calibrator says).
13. Allow the instrument to stabilize for 10 minutes.
14. Write down the NOx value on line 6 & the NO value on line 9.
15. Subtract line 6 from line 6 & put that onto line 7.
16. Subtract line 8 from line 7 & put that onto line 10.
17. Write the number from line 7 into the blank next to letter A on line 11 & put the
number from line 10 into the blank next to letter B on line 11.
18. Divide A by B & multiply it by 100.
19. Write this value it into the blank next to letter C on lines 11 and 12.
20. Subtract that value from 100 & write it in the blank next to the letter D on line 12.
21. This is the converter efficiency.
• This value should be >96%.
06858F DCN8038 263

12.7.11.1. SIMPLIFIED GPT DATA SHEET
Line # TEST RESULT
1 LEAK-CHECK (WHEN HOT) YES / NO
2 NOx RESPONSE (MOLY BYPASSED) __________
3 NOx RESPONSE (MOLY IN-LINE) __________
4 OUT-GASSING (NO – NOX) __________ (>-5 ppb, <5 ppb)
5 (NOx ORIG) (NOx mode, O3 off) __________ ppb
6 (NOx REM) (NOx mode, O3 on) __________ ppb
7 NOx LOSS __________ (A)

(<4% of NOx ORIG:
for 450PP 4% is 18 ppb)
8 (NO ORIG) (NO mode, O3 off) __________ ppb
9 (NO REM) (NO mode, O3 on) __________ ppb
10 NO2 __________ (B) (>300ppb)
11 Efficiency LOSS [ ( A / B ) x 100 ] = [ ( ____A / ____B ) x 100 ] = ____C%
12 Total Conv Eff [ 100% – C ] = 100% - ____C = _____D% ( > 96%)
264 06858F DCN8038

12.7.12. PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE (PMT) SENSOR MODULE

The PMT detects the light emitted by the reaction of NO with ozone. It has a gain of
about 500000 to 1000000. It is not possible to test the detector outside of the instrument
in the field. The basic method to diagnose a PMT fault is to eliminate the other
components using ETEST, OTEST and specific tests for other sub-assemblies.
12.7.12.1. OPTIC TEST

The optic test function tests the response of the PMT sensor by turning on an LED
located in the cooling block of the PMT (see Figure 12-9). The analyzer uses the light
emitted from the LED to test its photo-electronic subsystem, including the PMT and the
current to voltage converter on the pre-amplifier board.
• To ensure that the analyzer measures only the light coming from the LED, the
analyzer should be supplied with zero air.
• The optic test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000±1000 mV.
To activate the optics test, press:

<TST TST> CAL SETUP

continuously cycles
through all gasses.
Continue pressing <TST or TST> until ...
SAMPLE PMT=2750 MV NOX= XXXX
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

DIAG OPTIC TEST
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

While the OTEST is
active PMT should =
2000 mv ± 1000mv SAMPLE PMT=2750 MV NOX= XXXX
<TST TST> CAL EXIT
This is a coarse test for functionality and not an accurate calibration tool. The
Note resulting PMT signal can vary significantly over time and also changes with low-
level calibration.
06858F DCN8038 265

12.7.12.2. ELECTRICAL TEST

The electrical test function creates a current, which is substituted for the PMT signal and
feeds it into the preamplifier board.
• This signal is generated by circuitry on the pre-amplifier board itself and tests the
filtering and amplification functions of that assembly along with the A/D converter on
the motherboard.
• It does not test the PMT itself.
• The electrical test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000 ±1000 mV.
To activate the electrical test, press:
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

continuously cycles
through all gasses.
<TST TST> CAL SETUP

8 1 8 ENTR EXIT

DIAG OPTIC ELECTRICAL TEST
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT

While the ETEST is
active PMT should =
2000 mv ± 1000mv DIAG ELEC PMT=2750 MV NOX= XXXX
<TST TST> CAL EXIT
266 06858F DCN8038

12.7.13. PMT PREAMPLIFIER BOARD

To check the correct operation of the preamplifier board, perform an optics test
(OTEST) and an electrical test (ETEST) described in Sections 12.7.12.1 and 12.7.12.2
above.
• If the instrument passes the OTEST but fails the ETEST, the preamplifier board
may be faulty or need a hardware calibration.
12.7.13.1. HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY

The HVPS is located in the interior of the sensor module and is plugged into the PMT
tube. It requires 2 voltage inputs.
• The first is +15 V, which powers the supply.
• The second is the programming voltage which is generated on the preamplifier
board.
• Adjustment of the HVPS is covered in the factory calibration procedure in Section
12.8.4.
This power supply has 10 independent power supply steps, one to each pin of the PMT.
The following test procedure below allows you to test each step.
1. Turn off the instrument.
2. Remove the cover and disconnect the 2 connectors at the front of the NOX sensor
module.
3. Remove the end cap from the sensor (4 screws).
4. Remove the HVPS/PMT assembly from the cold block inside the sensor (2 plastic
screws).
5. Disconnect the PMT from the HVPS.
6. Re-connect the 7 pin connector to the sensor end cap, and power-up the
instrument.
7. Scroll the front panel display to the HVPS test parameter.
8. Divide the displayed HVPS voltage by 10 and test the pairs of connector points as
shown in the figure below.
9. Check the overall voltage (should be equal to the HVPS value displayed on the front
panel and the voltages between each pair of pins of the supply
EXAMPLE
If the HVPS signal is 700 V the pin-to-pin voltages should be 70 V.
06858F DCN8038 267

1. Turn off the instrument power, and reconnect the PMT, and then reassemble the sensor.
• If any faults are found in the test, you must obtain a new HVPS as there are no
user serviceable parts inside the supply.
12.7.14. PMT TEMPERATURE CONTROL PCA

The TEC control PCA is located on the sensor housing assembly, under the slanted
shroud, next to the cooling fins and directly above the cooling fan.
If the red LED located on the top edge of this assembly is not glowing the control circuit
is not receiving power. Check the analyzers power supply, the relay board’s power
distribution circuitry and the wiring connecting them to the PMT temperature control
PCA.
TEC Control Test Points
Four test points are also located at the top of this assembly they are numbered left to
right start with the T1 point immediately to the right of the power status LED. These
test points provide information regarding the functioning of the control circuit.
• To determine the current running through the control circuit, measure the voltage
between T1 and T2. Multiply that voltage by 10.
• To determine the drive voltage being supplied by the control circuit to the TEC,
measure the voltage between T2 and T3.
• If this voltage is zero, the TEC circuitry is most likely open.
Or,
• If the voltage between T2 and T3 = 0 VDC and the voltage measured between
T1 and T2 = 0 VDC there is most likely an open circuit or failed op amp on
control PCA itself.
• If the voltage between T2 and T3 = 0 VDC and the voltage measured between
T1 to T2 is some voltage other than 0 VDC, the TEC is most likely shorted.
• T4 is tied directly to ground. To determine the absolute voltage on any one of the
other test points make a measurement between that test point and T4.
268 06858F DCN8038

12.7.15. O3 GENERATOR
The ozone generator can fail in two ways, electronically (printed circuit board) and
functionally (internal generator components). Assuming that air is supplied properly to
the generator, the generator should automatically turn on 30 minutes after the instrument
is powered up or if the instrument is still warm. See Section 13.2.3 for ozone generator
functionality. Accurate performance of the generator can only be determined with an
ozone analyzer connected to the outlet of the generator. However, if the generator
appears to be working properly but the sensitivity or calibration of the instrument is
reduced, suspect a leak in the ozone generator supply air.
A leak in the dryer or between the dryer and the generator can cause moist, ambient air
to leak into the air stream, which significantly reduces the ozone output. The generator
will produce only about half of the nominal O3 concentration when run with moist,
ambient air instead of dried air. In addition, moist supply air will produce large amounts
of nitric acid in the generator, which can cause analyzer components downstream of the
generator to deteriorate and/or causes significant deposit of nitrate deposits on the
reaction cell window, reducing sensitivity and causing performance drift. Carry out a
leak check as described earlier in this Section.
12.7.15.1. O3 GENERATOR OVERRIDE

This feature allows the user to manually turn the ozone generator off and on. This
should be done before disconnecting the generator, to prevent ozone from leaking out, or
after a system restart if the user does not want to wait for 30 minutes during warm-up
time. To access this feature press the following buttons: (Also note that the ozone
generator does not turn on if the ozone flow conditions are out of specification (e.g., if
there is no flow through the system or the pump is broken).
06858F DCN8038 269

<TST TST> CAL SETUP

shows all gasses.
<TST TST> CAL SETUP SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT DIAG SIGNAL I/O
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until ...
DIAG OZONE GEN OVERRIDE
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG OZONE OZONE GEN OVERIDE
Toggling this button OFF EXIT

turns ON/OFF the O3
generator.
Note This is one of the two settings in the DIAG menu that is retained after you exit the
menu.
12.7.16. INTERNAL SPAN GAS GENERATOR AND VALVE OPTIONS

The zero/span valves and internal span gas generator options need to be enabled in the
software (contact the factory on how to do this).
• Check for the physical presence of the valves or the IZS option.
• Check front panel for correct software configuration. When the instrument is in
SAMPLE mode, the front panel display should show CALS and CALZ buttons in the
second line of the display. The presence of the buttons indicates that the option
has been enabled in software. In addition, the IZS option is enabled if the TEST
functions show a parameter named IZS TEMP.
The semi-permeable PTFE membrane of the permeation tube is severely affected by

humidity. Variations in humidity between day and night are usually enough to yield
very variable output results. If the instrument is installed in an air-conditioned shelter,
the air is usually dry enough to produce good results. If the instrument is installed in an
environment with variable or high humidity, variations in the permeation tube output
270 06858F DCN8038

will be significant. In this case, a dryer for the supply air is recommended (dew point
should be –20° C or less).
The permeation tube of the internal span gas generator option is heated with a
proportional heater circuit and the temperature is maintained at 50°C ±1°C. Check the
front panel display or the IZS_TEMP signal voltage using the SIGNAL I/O function
under the DIAG Menu (Section 5.9.1). At 50° C, the temperature signal from the IZS
thermistor should be around 2500 mV.
12.7.17. TEMPERATURE SENSOR

12.7.17.1. BOX TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The box temperature sensor (thermistor) is mounted on the motherboard below the
bottom edge of the CPU board when looking at it from the front. It cannot be
disconnected to check its resistance.
• Box temperature will vary with, but will usually read about 5° C higher than, ambient
(room) temperature because of the internal heating zones from the NO2 converter,
reaction cell and other devices.
• To check the box temperature functionality, we recommend checking the
BOX_TEMP signal voltage using the SIGNAL I/O function under the DIAG Menu
(Section 12.1.3).
• At about 30° C, the signal should be around 1500 mV.
• To check the accuracy of the sensor, use a calibrated external thermometer /
temperature sensor to verify the accuracy of the box temperature by:
• Placing it inside the chassis, next to the thermistor labeled XT1 (above
connector J108) on the motherboard.
• Compare its reading to the value of the test function PMT TEMP.
12.7.17.2. PMT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONTROL

The temperature of the PMT should be low and constant. It is more important that this
temperature is maintained at a constant level than it is to be a specific temperature.
The PMT cooler uses a Peltier, thermo-electric cooler element supplied with 12 V DC
power from the switching power supply PS2. The temperature is controlled by a
proportional temperature controller located on the preamplifier board.
• Voltages applied to the cooler element vary from 0.1 to 12 VDC.
• The temperature set point (hard-wired into the preamplifier board) will vary by ±2
• The actual temperature will be maintained to within 0.1° C around that set point.
To check the operation of the PMT temperature control system:
1. Turn off the analyzer and let its internal components cool / heat to ambient
temperature.
2. Turn on the analyzer.
3. Set the front panel to show the PMT TEMP test function (see Section 4.1.1).
• The temperature should fall steadily to 6-10° C.
• If the temperature fails to reach this point after 60 minutes, there is a problem in
the cooler circuit.
• If the control circuit on the preamplifier board is faulty, a temperature of –1° C
will be reported.
06858F DCN8038 271

12.8. SERVICE PROCEDURES

This section contains some procedures that may need to be performed when a major
component of the analyzer requires repair or replacement.
Note Maintenance procedures (e.g., replacement of regularly changed expendables)

are discussed in Section 11 (Instrument Maintenance) and are not listed here).
Also, there may be more detailed service notes for some of the below
procedures. Contact Teledyne API's Customer Service Department.

Unless the procedure being performed requires that the instrument be operating,
turn it off and disconnect power before opening the analyzer and removing,
adjusting or repairing any of its components or subsystems.
CAUTION – QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN

The operations outlined in this chapter are to be performed by qualified
maintenance personnel only.
12.8.1. DISK-ON-MODULE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
Note Servicing of circuit components requires electrostatic discharge protection, i.e.

ESD grounding straps, mats and containers. Failure to use ESD protection when
working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty. For
information on preventing ESD damage, refer to the manual, Fundamentals of
ESD, PN 04786, which can be downloaded from our website at
http://www.teledyne-api.com under Help Center > Product Manuals in the Special
Manuals section.
Replacing the Disk-on-Module (DOM) will cause loss of all DAS data; it may also
cause loss of some instrument configuration parameters unless the replacement DOM
carries the exact same firmware version. Whenever changing the version of installed
software, the memory must be reset. Failure to ensure that memory is reset can cause the
analyzer to malfunction, and invalidate measurements. After the memory is reset, the
A/D converter must be re-calibrated, and all information collected in Step 1 below must
be re-entered before the instrument will function correctly. Also, zero and span
calibration should be performed.
1. Document all analyzer parameters that may have been changed, such as range,
auto-cal, analog output, serial port and other settings before replacing the DOM.
2. Turn off power to the instrument, fold down the rear panel by loosening the
mounting screws.
272 06858F DCN8038

3. While looking at the electronic circuits from the back of the analyzer, locate the Disk-
on-Module in the right-most socket of the CPU board.
4. The DOM should carry a label with firmware revision, date and initials of the
programmer.
5. Remove the nylon standoff clip that mounts the DOM over the CPU board, and lift
the DOM off the CPU. Do not bend the connector pins.
6. Install the new Disk-on-Module, making sure the notch at the end of the chip
matches the notch in the socket.
7. It may be necessary to straighten the pins somewhat to fit them into the socket.
Press the chip all the way in.
8. Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine.
9. If the replacement DOM carries a firmware revision, re-enter all of the setup
information.
12.8.2. O3 GENERATOR REPLACEMENT

The ozone generator is a black, brick-shaped device with printed circuit board attached
to its rear and two tubes extending out the right side in the front of the analyzer (see
Figure 3-5). The board has a red LED that, when lit, indicates ozone is being generated.
To replace the ozone generator:
1. Turn off the analyzer power, remove the power cord and the analyzer cover.
2. Disconnect the 1/8” black tube from the ozone cleanser and the ¼” clear tube from
the plastic extension tube at the brass fitting nearest to the ozone generator.
3. Unplug the electrical connection on the rear side of the brick.
4. Unscrew the two mounting screws that attach the ozone generator to the chassis
and take out the entire assembly.
5. If you received a complete replacement generator with circuit board and mounting
bracket attached, simply reverse the above steps to replace the current generator.
Note Ensure to carry out a leak check (11.3.12) and a recalibration after the analyzer
has warmed up for about 60 minutes.
12.8.3. SAMPLE AND OZONE DRYER REPLACEMENT

The T200 standard configuration is equipped with a dryer for the ozone supply air. An
optional dryer is available for the sample stream and a combined dryer for both gas
streams can also be purchased. To change one or both of these dryers:
1. Turn off power to the analyzer and pump, remove the power cord and the analyzer
cover.
2. Locate the dryers in the center of the instrument, between sensor and NO2
converter (see Figure 3-5).
• They are mounted to a bracket, which can be taken out when unscrewing the
two mounting screws (if necessary).
3. Disconnect all tubing that extends out of the dryer assembly.
• Take extra care not to twist any of the white plastic fittings on the dryer.
• These connect the inner drying tube to the outer purge tube and are delicate.
See Sections 13.3.1 and 11.3.2.
06858F DCN8038 273

4. Note the orientation of the dryer on the bracket.

5. Cut the tie wraps that hold the dryer to the mounting bracket and take out the old
dryer.
• If necessary, unscrew the two mounting screws on the bracket and take out the
entire assembly.
6. Attach the replacement dryer to the mounting bracket in the same orientation as the
old dryer.
7. Fix the dryer to the bracket using new tie wraps.
8. Cut off excess length of the wraps.
9. Put the assembly back into the chassis and tighten the mounting screws.
10. Re-attach the tubes to vacuum manifold, flow meter and/or NO/NOx valve using at
least two wrenches.
• Take extra care not to twist the dryer’s white plastic fittings, as this will result in
large leaks that are difficult to trouble-shoot and fix.
11. Carry out a detailed leak check (see Section 11.3.12.2),

12. Close the analyzer.
13. Power up pump and analyzer and re-calibrate the instrument after it stabilizes.
12.8.4. PMT SENSOR HARDWARE CALIBRATION

The sensor module hardware calibration is used in the factory to adjust the slope and
offset of the PMT output and to optimize the signal output and HVPS.
• If the instrument’s slope and offset values are outside of the acceptable range and
all other more obvious causes for this problem have been eliminated, the hardware
calibration can be used to adjust the sensor as has been done in the factory.
• This procedure is also recommended after replacing the PMT or the preamplifier
board.
To calibrate the PMT preamplifier PCA:

1. Perform a full zero point calibration using zero air (see Section 9).
2. Display the NOX STB test function on the front panel (Section 4.1.1).
3. Locate the preamplifier board (see Figure 3-5).
4. Locate the following components on the preamplifier board (Figure 12-8):
• HVPS coarse adjustment switch (Range 0-9, then A-F).
• HVPS fine adjustment switch (Range 0-9, then A-F).
• Gain adjustment potentiometer (Full scale is 10 turns).
5. Turn the gain adjustment potentiometer 12 turns clockwise or to its maximum

setting.
6. Feed NO gas into the analyzer.
• This should be 90% of the upper limit setting for the T200’s reporting range:
EXAMPLE: if the reporting range is set at 500 ppb, use 450 ppb NO.
274 06858F DCN8038

7. Wait until the STB value is below 0.5 ppb
Figure 12-8: Pre-Amplifier Board Layout
8. Scroll to the NORM PMT test function on the analyzer’s front panel.
9. With the NO gas concentrations mentioned in Step 5 above, the norm pmt value
should be 900 mV.
10. Set the HVPS coarse adjustment to its minimum setting (0).
11. Set the HVPS fine adjustment switch to its maximum setting (F).
• Set the HVPS coarse adjustment switch to the lowest setting that will give you
just above the target value for NORM PMT signal.
12. Adjust the HVPS fine adjustment such that the NORM PMT value is close to the
target value.
• It may be necessary to go back and forth between coarse and fine adjustments
if the proper value is at the threshold of the min/max coarse setting.

Do not overload the PMT by accidentally setting both adjustment switches to
their maximum setting. Start at the lowest setting and increment slowly. Wait 10
seconds between adjustments.
Note During these adjustments, the NORM PMT value will fluctuate as the analyzer
continues to switch between NO and NOx streams as well as between measure
and Auto Zero modes.
13. Perform a span point calibration (see Section 9) to normalize the sensor response
to its new PMT sensitivity.
14. Review the slope and offset values:
• The slope values should be 1.000±0.300.
• The offset values should be approximately 0.0 (-20 to +150 mV is allowed).
06858F DCN8038 275

12.8.5. REPLACING THE PMT, HVPS OR TEC

The photo multiplier tube (PMT) should last for the lifetime of the analyzer, however,
the high voltage power supply (HVPS) or the thermo-electric cooler (TEC) components
may fail. Replacing any of these components requires opening the sensor module. This
is a delicate assembly and it is recommend that you ensure the PMT, HVPS or TEC
modules are, indeed, faulty before unnecessarily opening of the module.
CAUTION
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
While the PMT or HVPS can be removed through the front panel without un-
mounting the entire sensor module, we recommend turning off the instrument,
opening its top cover and removing the entire assembly so that further repairs can
be carried out at an anti-ESD workstation.
Follow the guidelines for preventing electrostatic damage to electronic
components, defined in the manual, Fundamentals of ESD, PN 04786, which can be
downloaded from our website at http://www.teledyne-api.com under Help Center >
Product Manuals in the Special Manuals section..
1. Turn OFF the analyzer and disconnect the power cord.

2. Remove the cover.
3. Disconnect all pneumatic and electrical connections from the sensor assembly.
4. Remove the sensor assembly.
5. If the TEC is to be replaced, remove the reaction cell assembly at this point by
unscrewing two holding screws.
• This is necessary only if the repair being performed involves removing the PMT
cold block.
276 06858F DCN8038

PMT Housing End Plate

This is the entry to the PMT Exchange
PMT Output
Connector PMT Preamp PCA
PMT Power Supply High voltage Power Supply

& Aux. Signal (HVPS)
Connector
PMT
O-Test LED
Sensor Housing
PMT Cold Block
Connector to PMT
Pre Amp PCA
Insulation Gasket 12V Power

Insertion point for Connector
reaction cell assembly
Light from Reaction

PMT Temperature Chamber shines
Sensor (thermistor) through hole in side
of Cold Block
Thermo-Electric Cooler
(TEC)
PMT Heat Exchange Fins

TEC Driver PCA
Cooling Fan
Housing
Figure 12-9: T200 Sensor Assembly
6. Remove the two connectors on the PMT housing end plate facing towards the front
panel.
7. Remove the end plate itself (4 screws with plastic washers).
Note If the black PMT housing end plate for the Sensor Assembly is removed, ensure
to replace the 5 desiccant bags inside the housing.
8. Remove the desiccant bags from the PMT housing.

9. Unscrew the PMT assembly, which is held to the cold block by two plastic screws.
10. Discard the plastic screws and replace with new screws at the end of this procedure
(the threads get stripped easily and it is recommended to use new screws).
11. Along with the plate, slide out the optic test (O-Test) LED and the thermistor that
measures the PMT temperature.
• Thermistor will be coated with a white, thermal conducting paste.
• Do not contaminate the inside of the housing with this grease, as it may
contaminate the PMT glass tube on re-assembly.
12. Carefully take out the assembly consisting of the HVPS, the insulation gasket and
the PMT.
13. Change the PMT or the HVPS or both, clean the PMT glass tube with a clean, anti-
static wipe and do not touch it after cleaning.
06858F DCN8038 277

14. If the cold block or TEC is to be changed:

• Disconnect the TEC driver board from the preamplifier board, remove the cooler
fan duct (4 screws on its side) including the driver board.
• Disconnect the driver board from the TEC and set the sub-assembly aside.
15. Remove the end plate with the cooling fins (4 screws) and slide out the PMT cold
block assembly, which contains the TEC.
16. Unscrew the TEC from the cooling fins and the cold block and replace it with a new
unit.
17. Reassemble this TEC subassembly in reverse order.
• Ensure to use thermal grease between TEC and cooling fins as well as between
TEC and cold block and that the side opening in the cold block will face the
reaction cell when assembled.
• Evenly tighten the long mounting screws for good thermal conductivity.
CAUTION
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
The thermo-electric cooler needs to be mounted flat to the heat sink.
If there is any significant gap, the TEC might burn out. Ensure to apply heat sink
paste before mounting it and tighten the screws evenly and cross-wise.
18. Reinsert the TEC subassembly in reverse order.

• Ensure that the O-ring is seated properly and the assembly is tightened evenly.
19. Insert the O-Test LED and thermistor into the cold block, insert new desiccant bags
and carefully replace the end plate by making sure that the O-ring is properly in
place.
• Improperly placed O-rings will cause leaks, which – in turn – cause moisture to
condense on the inside of the cooler and likely cause a short in the HVPS.
20. Reinsert the PMT/HVPS subassembly in reverse order.

• Don’t forget the insulation gasket between HVPS and PMT.
• Use new plastic screws to mount the PMT assembly on the PMT cold block.
21. Install new silica gel packets (desiccant bags).

22. Reconnect the cables and the reaction cell (evenly tighten these screws).
23. Replace the sensor assembly into the chassis and fasten with four screws and
washers.
24. Reconnect all electrical and pneumatic connections.
25. Leak check the system (see Section 13.3.12).
26. Turn ON the analyzer.
27. Verify the basic operation of the analyzer using the ETEST(12.7.12.2) and OTEST
features (12.7.12.1) or zero and span gases, then carry out a hardware calibration
of the analyzer followed by a zero/span point calibration (See Section 9.4.3.2).
278 06858F DCN8038

12.8.6. REMOVING / REPLACING THE RELAY PCA FROM THE

INSTRUMENT
This is the most commonly used version of the Relay PCA. It includes a bank of solid
state AC relays. This version is installed in analyzers where components such as AC
powered heaters must be turned ON & OFF.
A retainer plate is installed over the relay to keep them securely seated in their sockets.
Figure 12-10: Relay PCA with AC Relay Retainer In Place
The Relay retainer plate installed on the relay PCA covers the lower right mounting
screw of the relay PCA. Therefore, when removing the relay PCA, the retainer plate
must be removed first.
Figure 12-11: Relay PCA Mounting Screw Locations
06858F DCN8038 279

12.9. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

The following list was compiled from the Teledyne API's Customer Service
Department’s 10 most commonly asked questions relating to the T200 NOx Analyzer.
QUESTION ANSWER
Why does the ENTR button Sometimes the ENTR button will disappear if you select a setting that is
sometimes disappear on the front invalid or out of the allowable range for that parameter, such as trying to set
panel display? the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00 or a range to less than 1 or more than 20000
ppb. Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value, the ENTR button
will re-appear.
Why is the ZERO or SPAN button The T200 disables these buttons during calibration when the measured gas
not displayed during calibration? concentration differs significantly from the span or zero gas concentration
value entered by the user. This prevents accidental recalibration of the
analyzer to an out-of-range response curve.
EXAMPLE: The span set point is 400 ppb but gas concentration being
measured is only 50 ppb.
How do I enter or change the Press the CONC button found under the CAL or CALS buttons of the main
value of my Span Gas? SAMPLE display menus to enter the expected NOx span concentration.
See Section 9.2.3.1 or for more information.
Can I automate the calibration of Any analyzer with zero/span valve or IZS option can be automatically
my analyzer? calibrated using the instrument’s AutoCal feature.
Can I use the IZS option to Yes. However, the accuracy of the IZS option’s permeation tube is only
calibrate the analyzer? ±5%. To achieve highest accuracy, it is recommended to use cylinders of
calibrated span gases in combination with a zero air source.
How do I measure the sample Sample flow is measured by attaching a calibrated flow meter to the sample
flow? inlet port when the instrument is operating. The sample flow should be 500
cm³/min ±10%.
Section 13.3.12.3 includes detailed instructions on performing a check of

the sample gas flow.
Can I use the DAS system in Yes. Section 7 describes the setup and operation of the DAS system in
place of a strip chart recorder or detail.
data logger?
How often do I need to change Once per week or as needed. Section 11 contains a maintenance schedule
the particulate filter? listing the most important, regular maintenance tasks. Highly polluted
sample air may require more frequent changes.
280 06858F DCN8038

QUESTION ANSWER
How long does the sample pump The sample pump should last one to two years and the pump head should
last? be replaced when necessary. Use the RCEL pressure indicator on the front
panel to see if the pump needs replacement.
If this value goes above 10 in-Hg-A, on average, the pump head needs to
be rebuilt.
Why does my RS-232 serial There are several possible reasons:

connection not work? • The wrong cable: please use the provided or a generic “straight-
through” cable (do not use a “null-modem” type cable) and ensure the
pin assignments are correct (Sections 3.3.1.8 and 6.3).
• The DCE/DTE switch on the back of the analyzer is not set properly;
ensure that both green and red lights are on (Section 6.1).
• The baud rate of the analyzer’s COM port does not match that of the
serial port of your computer/data logger (Section 6.2.2).
How do I make the instrument’s This most commonly occurs when an independent metering device is used
display and my data logger besides the data logger/recorder to determine gas concentration levels
agree? while calibrating the analyzer. These disagreements result from the
analyzer, the metering device and the data logger having slightly different
ground levels.
Use the data logger itself as the metering device during calibration
procedures.
Do the critical flow orifices of my No. The o-rings and the sintered filter associated with them require
analyzer require regular replacement once a year, but the critical flow orifices do not.
replacement?
See Section 11 for instructions.
How do I set up and use the See Section 3.3.1.6.

Contact Closures (Control Inputs)
on the Rear Panel of the
analyzer?
12.10. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE

If this manual and its troubleshooting & service section do not solve your problems,
technical assistance may be obtained from:
Teledyne API Technical Support,

9970 Carroll Canyon Road
San Diego, California 92131 USA
Phone: 858-657-9800
Fax: 858-657-9816
Website: http://www.teledyne-api.com/
Before you contact Teledyne API's Technical Support, fill out the problem report form
available online for electronic submission at http://www.teledyne-api.com.
06858F DCN8038 281

282 06858F DCN8038

13. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The T200 Nitrogen Oxides Analyzer is a microprocessor controlled instrument that
determines the concentration of nitric oxide (NO), total nitrogen oxides (NOX, the sum
of NO and NO2) and nitrogen dioxide (NO2) in a sample gas drawn through the
instrument.
• It requires that sample and calibration gases be supplied at ambient atmospheric
pressure in order to establish a constant gas flow through the reaction cell where
the sample gas is exposed to ozone (O3), initiating a chemical reaction that gives off
light (hv).
• The instrument measures the amount of chemiluminescence to determine the
amount of NO in the sample gas.
• A catalytic-reactive converter converts NO2 in the sample gas to NO which, along
with the NO present in the sample is reported as NOX. NO2 is calculated as the
difference between NOX and NO.
Calibration of the instrument is performed in software and usually does not require
physical adjustments to the instrument. During calibration, the microprocessor measures
the sensor output signal when gases with known amounts of NO or NO2 are supplied
and stores these results in memory. The microprocessor uses these calibration values
along with the signal from the sample gas and data of the current temperature and
pressure of the gas to calculate a final NOX concentration.
The concentration values and the original information from which it was calculated are
stored in the unit’s internal data acquisition system (DAS Section 7) and are reported to
the user through a vacuum fluorescence display or several output ports.
13.1. MEASUREMENT PRINCIPLE
13.1.1. CHEMILUMINESCENCE CREATION IN THE T200 REACTION CELL

The T200’s measures the amount of NO present in a gas by detecting the
chemiluminescence which occurs when nitrogen oxide (NO) is exposed to ozone (O3).
This reaction is a two-step process:
• In the first step, one molecule of NO and one molecule of O3 collide and chemically
react to produce one molecule of oxygen (O2) and one molecule of nitrogen dioxide
(NO2). Some of the NO2 molecules created by this reaction retain excess energy
from the collision and exist in an excited state, where one of the electrons of the
NO2 molecule resides in a higher energy state than normal (denoted by an asterisk
in the following equation).
06858F DCN8038 283

Principles of Operation Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOx Analyzer Operation Manual
Equation 13-1
NO + O3 → NO2* + O2
• The second step occurs because the laws of thermodynamics require that systems
seek the lowest stable energy state available, therefore the excited NO2 molecule
quickly returns to its ground state, releasing the excess energy. This release takes
the form of a quantum of light (hν). The distribution of wavelengths for these quanta
range between 600 and 3000 nm, with a peak at about 1200 nm.
Equation 13-2
NO2* → NO2 + hν 1200 nm

All things being constant (temperature, pressure, amount of ozone present, etc.), the
relationship between the amount of NO present in the reaction cell and the amount of
light emitted from the reaction is very linear. If more NO is present, more IR light is
produced. By measuring the amount of IR light produced with a sensor sensitive in the
near-infrared spectrum (see Figure 13-2) the amount of NO present can be determined.
In addition, sometimes the excited NO2 collides with other gaseous molecules in the
reaction cell chamber or even the molecules of the reaction cell walls and transfers its
excess energy to this collision partner (represented by M in the equation 12-3 below)
without emitting any light at all. In fact, by far the largest portion of the excited NO2
returns to the ground state this way, leaving only a few percent yield of usable
chemiluminescence.
Equation 13-3
NO2* + M → NO2 + M
The probability of a collision between the NO2* molecule and a collision partner M
increases proportionally with the reaction cell pressure. This non-radiating collision
with the NO2* molecules is usually referred to as third body quenching, an unwanted
process further described in Section 13.1.5.2.
Even under the best conditions only about 20% of the NO2 that is formed by the reaction
described in equation 12-1 is in the excited state. In order to maximize
chemiluminescence, the reaction cell is maintained at reduced pressure (thereby
reducing the amount of available collision partners) and is supplied with a large,
constant excess of ozone (about 3000-5000 ppm) from the internal ozone generator.
284 06858F DCN8038

Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual Principles of Operation
13.1.2. CHEMILUMINESCENCE DETECTION IN THE T200 REACTION CELL
13.1.2.1. THE PHOTO MULTIPLIER TUBE (PMT)

The T200 uses a special kind of vacuum tube, called a photo-multiplier tube (PMT), to
detect the amount of light created by the NO and O3 reaction in the reaction cell.
Photons enter the PMT and strike a negatively charged photo cathode causing it to emit
electrons. These electrons are accelerated by an applied high voltage and multiplied
through a sequence of similar acceleration steps (dynodes) until a useable current signal
is generated (see Section 13.5 for a more detailed description). The more light present
(in this case photons given off by the chemiluminescent reaction described above), the
more current is produced. Therefore the more NO present in the reaction cell the more
current is produced by the PMT.
The current produced by the PMT is converted to a voltage and amplified by the
preamplifier board and then communicated to the T200’s CPU via the Aà D converter
circuitry on the analyzer.
13.1.2.2. OPTICAL FILTER

A high pass optical filter, only transparent to wavelengths of light above 645nm, placed
between the reaction cell and the PMT (see Figure 13-1) in conjunction with the
response characteristics of the PMT creates a very narrow window of wavelengths of
light to which the T200 will respond.
NO O3
Reaction
Cell
NO+O3
Optical
Filter
PMT
PMT HOUSING
Figure 13-1: Reaction Cell with PMT Tube and Optical Filter
The narrowness of this band of sensitivity allows the T200 to ignore extraneous light
and radiation that might interfere with the T200’s measurement. For instance, some
oxides of sulfur can also be chemiluminescent emitters when in contact with O3 but give
off light at much shorter wavelengths (usually around 260nm to 480nm).
06858F DCN8038 285

140
Visible Infrared àà
Spectrum
120
Intensity (arbitrary units)

100
NO + O3 Emission Spectrum
80
PMT
Response
60
40
20
Optical Hi-Pass Filter Performance
0
0.5 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.7 1.9
Wavelength (micrometers)
Area of Sensitivity
Figure 13-2: T200 Sensitivity Spectrum
13.1.3. NOX AND NO2 DETERMINATION

The only gas that is actually measured by the T200 is NO. NO2, and therefore NOx
(which is defined here as the sum of NO and NO2 in the sample gas), contained in the
gas is not detected because NO2 does not react with O3 to create chemiluminescence.
In order to measure the concentration of NO2, and therefore the concentration of NOx,
the T200 periodically switches the sample gas stream so that the pump pulls it through a
special converter cartridge filled with molybdenum (Mo, “moly”) chips that are heated
to a temperature of 315°C.
NO only
3 2
NO/NOX
1
VALVE
AUTOZERO
VALVE
2 To Exhaust
1
3 Manifold & Pump
NO2 + Mo NO + MoyOz
NO only
O3 from
at 315˚C
O3 Generator
MOLYBDENUM
CONVERTER
To Exhaust
Manifold
& Pump
NO+O3
NO2 + NO
from Sample Gas Inlet
PMT
Figure 13-3: NO2à NO Conversion
286 06858F DCN8038

The heated molybdenum reacts with NO2 in the sample gas and produces a NO gas and
a variety of molybdenum.
Equation 13-4
xNO2 + yMo → xNO + M y Oz (at 315° C )
Once the NO2 in the sample gas has been converted to NO, it is routed to the reaction
cell where it undergoes the chemiluminescence reaction described in Equation 13-1 and
Equation 13-2.
By converting the NO2 in the sample gas into NO, the analyzer can measure the total
NOX) content of the sample gas (i.e. the NO present + the converted NO2 present). By
switching the sample gas stream in and out of the “moly” converter every 6 - 10
seconds, the T200 analyzer is able to quasi-continuously measure both the NO and the
total NOX content.
Finally, the NO2 concentration is not directly measured but calculated by subtracting the
known NO content of the sample gas from the known NOX content.
13.1.4. AUTO ZERO

Inherent in the operation of any PMT is a certain amount of noise. This is due to a
variety of factors such as black body infrared radiation given off by the metal
components of the reaction cell, unit to unit variations in the PMT units and even the
constant universal background radiation that surrounds us at all times. In order to
reduce this amount of noise and offset, the PMT is kept at a constant 7° C (45° F) by a
Thermo-Electric Cooler (TEC).
While this intrinsic noise and offset is significantly reduced by cooling the PMT, it is
not eradicated. To determine how much noise remains, once every minute for about 8
seconds the T200 diverts the sample gas flow directly to the vacuum manifold without
passing the reaction cell.
During this time, only O3 is present in the reaction cell, effectively turning off the
chemiluminescence reaction. Once the chamber is completely dark, the T200 records
the output of the PMT and keeps a running average of these AZERO values. This
average offset value is subtracted from the raw PMT readings while the instrument is
measuring NO and NOX to arrive at an Auto Zero corrected reading.
06858F DCN8038 287

NO/NOX
VALVE
FLOW PRESSURE
SAMPLE SENSOR PCA
COM NO
GAS INLET
NC SAMPL E VACUUM
PRESS URE PRESS URE
SENSO R SENSO R
NO2 O3 FLOW
Converter SENSO R
EX HA UST
GAS OUTLET
AUTOZERO
NO VALVE
NC
COM
O3 O3
Cleanser
GENERATOR
Orifice Dia.
0.010"
NOX Exhaust

Scrubber
0.010" 0.004"
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
O3
PUMP
Destruct
PMT
Orifice Dia.
0.004"
Filter
OZONE DRYER
INSTRUMENT CHASSIS
Figure 13-4: Pneumatic Flow During the Auto Zero Cycle
13.1.5. MEASUREMENT INTERFERENCES

It should be noted that the chemiluminescence method is subject to interferences from a
number of sources. The T200 has been successfully tested for its ability to reject
interference from most of these sources. Table 13-1 list the most common types of
interferents that could affect the performance of your T200.
13.1.5.1. DIRECT INTERFERENCE

Some gases can directly alter the amount of light detected by the PMT due to
chemiluminescence in the reaction cell. This can either be a gas that undergoes
chemiluminescence by reacting with O3 in the reaction cell or a gas that reacts with
other compounds and produces excess NO upstream of the reaction cell.
13.1.5.2. THIRD BODY QUENCHING

As described by Equation 13-3, other molecules in the reaction cell can collide with the
excited NO2*, causing the excited NO2* to return to its ground state without releasing a
photon of light. This is known as third party quenching.
288 06858F DCN8038

Quenching is an unwanted phenomenon and the extent to which it occurs depends on the
properties of the collision partner.
• Larger, more polarized molecules such as H2O and CO2 are the most significant
quenching interferents of NO chemiluminescence.
• The influence of water vapor on the T200 measurement can be eliminated with
an optional, internal sample gas dryer (see Section 3.3.2.6).
• The interference of varying CO2 amounts at low concentrations (less that 0.5%)
is negligible.
• In cases with excessively high CO2 concentrations (larger than 0.5%), the effect
can be calibrated out by using calibration gases with a CO2 content equal to the
measured air.
• Only very high and highly variable CO2 concentrations will then cause a
measurable interference. For those applications, it is recommended to use
other analyzer models. Please consult Teledyne API's Sales Department or our
website (see Section 12.10).
• Smaller less polar and electronically “harder” molecules such as N2 and O2 can
cause interference of this type as well, however, the concentrations of N2 and O2
are virtually constant in ambient air measurements, hence provide a constant
amount of quenching that is accounted for in the calibration of the instrument .
13.1.5.3. LIGHT LEAKS

The T200 sensitivity curve includes a small portion of the visible light spectrum (see
Figure 13-2), therefore it is important to ensure that the reaction cell is completely
sealed with respect to light. To ensure this:
• All pneumatic tubing leading into the reaction cell is opaque in order to prevent light
from entering the cell.
• Light penetration is prevented by stainless steel filters and orifices.
06858F DCN8038 289

Table 13-1: List of Interferents

Gas Interference Type Rejection Method
Dilution: Viscosity of CO2 molecules causes them to
collect in aperture of Critical Flow Orifice altering flow If high concentrations of CO2 are suspected,
rate of NO. special calibration methods must be performed to
CO2 account for the affects of the CO2.
3rd Body Quenching: CO2 molecules collide with Contact Teledyne API’s Customer Service
NO2* molecules absorbing excess energy kinetically Department (see Section 12.10) for details.
and preventing emission of photons.
Some SOX variants can also initiate a Wavelengths of light produced by
chemiluminescence reaction upon exposure to O3 chemiluminescence of SOX are screened out by
producing excess light. the Optical Filter.
Chemically reacts with NH3, O2 and H2O in O3
Most of the ammonium sulfate and ammonium
generator to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium sulfate)
nitrate produced is removed from the sample gas
and NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) which form opaque
by an air purifier located between the O3
SOX white deposits on optical filter window. Also forms
Generator and the reaction cell.
highly corrosive HNO3 (Nitric Acid)
If high concentrations of SOX are suspected,
3rd Body quenching: SOX molecules collide with NO2* special calibration methods must be performed to
molecules absorbing excess energy kinetically and account for the affects of the SO2.
preventing emission of photons. Contact Teledyne API’s Customer Service
Department (see Section 12.10) for details.
3rd Body quenching: H2O molecules collide with NO2* Analyzer’s operating in high humidity areas must
molecules absorbing excess energy kinetically and have some drying applied to the sample gas (see
preventing emission of light. Section 3.3.2.6 for more details).
H2O Water also reacts with NH3 and SOX in the O3 Water is effectively removed from the O3 gas
generator to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium sulfate) stream by the Sample Dryer (Section 13.2.3.2 for
and NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) which form opaque more details). We offer several Sample dryers
white deposits on the optical filter window. This also for the sample stream (see Section 3.3.2.6 for
forms highly corrosive HNO3 (nitric acid) more details).
Direct Interference: NH3 is converted to H2O and NO If a high concentration of NH3 is suspected, steps
by the NO2 converter. Excess NO reacts with O3 in must be taken to remove the NH3 from the sample
the reaction cell creating a chemiluminescence gas prior to its entry into the NO2 converter (see
artifact. Section 3.3.2.6 for more details).
NH3 NH3 also reacts with H2O, O2 and SOX in the O3
generator to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium sulfate) The Sample dryer built into the T200 is sufficient
and NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) which form opaque for removing typical ambient concentration levels
white deposits on optical filter window. Also forms of NH3.
highly corrosive HNO3 (nitric acid).
13.1.5.4. REACTION CELL TEMPERATURE CONTROL

The stability of the chemiluminescence reaction between NO and O3 can be affected by
changes in the temperature and pressure of the O3 and sample gases in the reaction cell.
In order to reduce temperature effects, the reaction cell is maintained at a constant
50° C, just above the high end of the instrument’s operation temperature range.
Two AC heaters, one embedded into the bottom of the reaction cell, the other embedded
directly above the chamber’s exhaust fitting, provide the heat source. These heaters
operate off of the instrument’s main AC power and are controlled by the CPU through a
power relay on the relay board (see Section 13.3.4.4).
A thermistor, also embedded in the bottom of the reaction cell, reports the cell’s
temperature to the CPU through the thermistor interface circuitry of the motherboard
(see Section 13.3.3.3).
290 06858F DCN8038

13.2. PNEUMATIC OPERATION
Note The sample gas is the most critical flow path in the analyzer. At any point before
and in the reaction cell, the integrity of the sample gas must not be compromised.
Therefore, it is important that the sample airflow system is both leak tight and not
pressurized over ambient pressure.
Regular leak checks should be performed on the analyzer as presented in the

maintenance schedule, Table 13-1. Procedures for correctly performing leak checks can
be found in Section 13.3.12.
13.2.1. SAMPLE GAS FLOW
Note In this section of the manual vacuum readings are given in inches of mercury
absolute (In-Hg-A). This pressure value is referenced against zero (a perfect
vacuum).
The gas flow for the T200 is created by a pump that is pneumatically downstream from
the rest of the instrument’s components. This is either:
• An external pump pneumatically connected to the analyzer’s exhaust port located
on the rear panel. This is the most common configuration for the T200 or,
• An optional internal pump pneumatically connected between the vacuum manifold
and the exhaust outlet (special order).
In either case, the pump creates a vacuum of approximately 5 in-Hg-A at one standard
liter/minute, which is provided to various pneumatic components by a vacuum manifold
located just in front of the rear panel (see Figure 3-5).
Gas flow is created by keeping the analyzer’s sample gas inlet near ambient pressure,
usually by means of a small vent installed in the sample line at the inlet, in effect pulling
the gas through the instrument’s pneumatic systems.
By placing the pump downstream from the analyzer’s reaction cell, several problems are
avoided.
• First, the pumping process heats and compresses the sample air complicating the
measurement process.
• Additionally, certain physical parts of the pump itself are made of materials that
might chemically react with the sample gas.
• Finally, in certain applications where the concentration of the target gas might be
high enough to be hazardous, maintaining a negative gas pressure relative to
ambient means that should a minor leak occur, no sample gas would be pumped
into the atmosphere surrounding the analyzer.
06858F DCN8038 291

13.2.1.1. VACUUM MANIFOLD

The vacuum created by the analyzer’s pump is supplied to all of the gas streams for the
T200 analyzer through the vacuum manifold (also called the exhaust manifold).
Figure 13-5. Vacuum Manifold, Standard Configuration
Configurations will vary depending on the optional equipment that is installed. For
example:
• An T200 with the optional internal span gas generator installed will add another FT8
connector and orifice assembly to the manifold where the FT28 fitting is shown in
the above drawing.
• An optional sample gas dryer will add a Tee-fitting so that two ¼” tubes can be
connected to the same port.
13.2.1.2. SAMPLE GAS FLOW VALVES AND ROUTING

As discussed in Section 13.1, the measurement of NOx, NO and NO2 requires that the
sample gas flow cycles through different routes that include and exclude various
scrubbers and converters. There are several valves that perform this function:
• The NO/NOX valve directs the sample gas either directly to the reaction cell or
through the unit’s NO2 converter, alternating every ~8 sec.
• The Auto Zero valve directs the sample gas stream to completely bypass the
reaction cell for dark noise measurement once every minute, which is then
subtracted as a measurement offset from the raw concentration signal.
292 06858F DCN8038

Table 13-2: T200 Valve Cycle Phases

NO/ NOX Auto Zero
Time
Phase Valve Valve Activity Figure
Index
Status Status
Open to Wait period (NO dwell time). Ensures reaction cell has
NO Open to 0-2s Figure
Auto Zero been flushed of previous gas.
Measure reaction cell 13-3
valve 2-4s Analyzer measures chemiluminescence in reaction cell.
Wait period (NOX dwell time). Ensures reaction cell has
Open to 4–6s
NOX Open to been flushed of previous gas. Figure
NO2
Measure reaction cell Analyzer measures NO + O3 chemiluminescence in 13-3
converter 6–8s
reaction cell.
Cycle repeats every ~8 seconds
Wait period (AZERO dwell time). Ensures reaction cell
Open to Open to 0–4s has been flushed of sample gas and chemi-
Auto luminescence reaction is stopped. Figure
Auto Zero vacuum
Zero 13-4
valve manifold Analyzer measures background noise without sample
4-6s
gas
Cycle repeats every minute
13.2.2. FLOW RATE CONTROL - CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICES

Sample gas flow in the T200 analyzer is created via the use of several flow control
assemblies (see Figure 13-6 for an example) located in various places in the gas streams
of the instrument. These assemblies consist of:
• a critical flow orifice
• two o-rings, Located just before and after the critical flow orifice, the o-rings seal the
gap between the walls of assembly housing and the critical flow orifice
• a sintered filter
• a spring (applies mechanical force needed to form the seal between the o-rings, the
critical flow orifice and the assembly housing)
Figure 13-6: Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice
06858F DCN8038 293

13.2.2.1. CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICE

The most important component of each flow control assembly is the critical flow orifice.
Critical flow orifices are a simple means to regulate stable gas flow rates. They operate
without moving parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics. By restricting
the flow of gas through the orifice, a pressure differential is created. This pressure
differential, created by the analyzer’s external pump, draws the gas through the orifice.
As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice (the pump side) continues to drop,
the speed that the gas flows though the orifice continues to rise. Once the ratio of
upstream pressure to downstream pressure is greater than 2:1, the velocity of the gas
through the orifice reaches the speed of sound. As long as that ratio stays at least 2:1,
the gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations, surges, or changes in downstream
pressure because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are
therefore cancelled out by the sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical
flow orifice.
The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice (volume of gas per unit of time), depends
on the size and shape of the aperture in the orifice. The larger the hole, the more gas
molecules (moving at the speed of sound) pass through the orifice.
In addition to controlling the gas flow rates into the reaction cell, the two critical flow
orifices at the inlets of the reaction cell also maintain an under-pressure inside it,
effectively reducing the number of molecules in the chamber and the corresponding
incidence of third body quenching (see Section 13.1.5.2) and therefore increasing the
chemiluminescence yield.
• The T200 reaches its peak sensitivity at about 2 in-Hg-A, below which the sensitivity
drops due to there being too few molecules present and a corresponding decrease
in chemiluminescence.
13.2.2.2. LOCATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICES INSIDE THE T200
The T200 uses several of the following critical flow orifices (Figure 13-7) to create and
maintain the proper flow rate of gas through its various components. (Please note that
Figure 13-7 represents the standard configuration and is provided for reference).
294 06858F DCN8038

NO/NOX
VALVE
FLOW PRESSURE
SAMPLE SENSOR PCA
COM NO
GAS INLET
NC SAMPL E VACUUM
PRESS URE PRESS URE
SENSO R SENSO R
NO2 O3 FLOW
Converter SENSO R
EX HA UST
GAS OUTLET
AUTOZERO
NO VALVE
NC
COM
O3 O3
Cleanser
GENERATOR
Orifice Dia.
0.010"
NOX Exhaust

Scrubber
0.010" 0.004"
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
O3
PUMP
Destruct
Critical PMT
Flow
Orifice’s
Orifice Dia.
0.004"
Filter
OZONE DRYER
INSTRUMENT CHASSIS
Figure 13-7: Location of Flow Control Assemblies & Critical Flow Orifices
Table 13-3: T200 Gas Flow Rates

Orifice Flow rate
Location Purpose
Diameter (nominal)
Controls rate of flow of sample gas into the
Sample gas inlet of reaction cell 0.010” (0.25 mm) 500 cm³/min
reaction cell.
Controls rate of flow of ozone gas into the
O3 supply inlet of reaction cell 0.004” (0.10 mm) 80 cm³/min
reaction cell.
Controls flow rate of dry air return / purge
Dry air return of Sample dryer 0.004” (0.10 mm) 80 cm³/min
air of the dryer.
Controls rate of sample gas flow when
Vacuum manifold, Auto Zero port. bypassing the reaction cell during the Auto 0.010” (0.25 mm) 500 cm³/min
Zero cycle.
Controls rate of flow of zero purge gas
Vacuum manifold, Internal span gas
through the optional Internal span gas 0.003” (0.10 mm) 60 cm³/min
generator exhaust port
generator when it is installed.
The necessary 2:1 ratios across the critical flow orifices is largely exceeded by the
pumps supplied with the analyzer which are designed to accommodate a wide range of
possible variability in atmospheric pressure and age related degradation of the pump
itself. Once the pump does degrade the ratio between sample and vacuum pressures
may fall to less than 2:1. At this point, the instrument will display an invalid sample
flow rate measurement (XXXX).
06858F DCN8038 295

Note The diameter of a critical flow orifice may change with temperature because of
expansion of the orifice material and, hence, the most crucial critical flow orifices
in the T200 (those controlling the sample gas and O3 flow into the cell itself) are
located in the reaction cell where they can be maintained at a constant
temperature.
13.2.3. OZONE GAS GENERATION AND AIR FLOW

The excess ozone needed for reaction with NO in the reaction cell is generated inside the
analyzer because of the instability and toxicity of ozone. Besides the ozone generator
itself, this requires a dry air supply and filtering of the gas before it is introduced into the
reaction cell.
Due to its toxicity and aggressive chemical behavior, O3 must also be removed from the
gas stream before it can be vented through the exhaust outlet.
CAUTION
Ozone (O3) is a toxic gas.
Obtain a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for this gas. Read and
rigorously follow the safety guidelines described there.
Always ensure that the plumbing of the O3 generation and supply system
is maintained and leak-free.
13.2.3.1. THE O3 GENERATOR

The T200 uses a dual-dielectric, Corona Discharge (CD) tube for creating its O3, which
is capable of producing high concentrations of ozone efficiently and with low excess
heat (see Figure 13-8). The primary component of the generator is a glass tube with
hollow walls of which the outermost and innermost surfaces are coated with electrically
conductive material.
Air flows through the glass tube, between the two conductive coatings, in effect creating
a capacitor with the air and glass acting as the dielectric. The layers of glass also
separate the conductive surfaces from the air stream to prevent reaction with the O3. As
the capacitor charges and discharges, electrons are created and accelerated across the air
gap and collide with the O2 molecules in the air stream splitting them into elemental
oxygen.
Some of these oxygen atoms recombine with O2 to O3. The quantity of ozone produced
is dependent on factors such as the voltage and frequency of the alternating current
applied to the CD cells. When enough high-energy electrons are produced to ionize the
O2 molecules, a light emitting, gaseous plasma is formed, which is commonly referred to
as a corona, hence the name corona discharge generator.
296 06858F DCN8038

Figure 13-8: Ozone Generator Principle
13.2.3.2. OZONE GENERATOR DRY AIR SUPPLY

Ambient air usually contains enough water vapor to greatly diminishes the yield of
ozone produced by the ozone generator. Water also reacts with chemicals inside the O3
Generator to produce caustic substances such as ammonium sulfate or highly corrosive
nitric acid that will damage the optical filter located between the reaction cell and the
PMT.
To prevent this, the air supply for the O3 generator is dried using a special single tube
permeation dryer. The dryer consists of a single tube of Nafion® that is mounted within
an outer, flexible plastic tube. Nafion® is a co-polymer that absorbs water very well but
not most other chemicals. As gas flows through the inner Nafion® tube, water vapor is
absorbed into the membrane walls. The absorbed water is transported through the
membrane wall and evaporated into the dry purge gas flowing through the outer tube,
countercurrent to the gas in the inner tube.
Figure 13-9: Semi-Permeable Membrane Drying Process
The process by which the water vapor molecules are collected and transported through
Nafion® material is called per-evaporation and is driven by the humidity gradient
between the inner and outer tubes as well as the flow rates and pressure difference
between inner and outer tubing. Unlike micro-porous membrane permeation, which
06858F DCN8038 297

transfers water through a relatively slow diffusion process, per-evaporation is a simple

kinetic reaction. Therefore, the drying process occurs quickly, typically within
milliseconds.
Because this chemical reaction is based on hydrogen bonds between the water molecule
and the Nafion® material most other chemical components of the gas to be dried are
usually unaffected. Specifically, the gases of interest for the T200, NO and NO2, do not
get absorbed and pass the dryer unaltered.
On the other hand, other small polar gases that are capable of hydrogen bonds such as
ammonia (NH3) can be absorbed this way, too. This is an advantage since gases such as
NH3 can cause interference for the measurement of NOx, NO and NO2 (see Table 13-1).
Figure 13-10: T200 Sample Dryer
To provide a dry purge gas for the outer side of the Nafion tube, the T200 returns some
of the dried air from the inner tube to the outer tube. This means that any time the
analyzer is turned on after having been OFF for 30 minutes or more, the humidity
gradient between the inner and outer tubes is not very large and the dryer’s efficiency is
low. Since it takes a certain amount of time for the humidity gradient to become large
enough for the Sample Dryer operate efficiently, in such cold start cases the O3
Generator is not turned on until 30 minutes has passed in order to ensure that it is not
operating until its air supply is properly dry. During this 30 minute duration the O3 GEN
OVERRIDE menu displays “TMR” on the front panel screen.
Note When rebooting the instrument within less than 30 minutes of power-down, the
generator is turned on immediately.
The Sample Dryer used in the T200 is capable of adequately drying ambient air to a dew
point of ≤ -5˚C (~4000 ppm residual H2O) at a flow rate of 1 standard liter per minute
(slpm) or down to ≤ -15˚C (~1600 ppm residual H2O) at 0.5 slpm. The Sample Dryer is
also capable of removing ammonia from the sample gas up to concentrations of
approximately 1 ppm.
298 06858F DCN8038

13.2.3.3. OZONE SUPPLY AIR FILTER

The T200 uses ambient air as the supply gas for the O3 generator and may produce a
variety of byproducts. Small amounts of water, ammonia and various sulfur oxides can
combine to create ammonium sulfate, ammonium nitrate, nitric acid and other
compounds. Whereas sulfates and nitrates can create powdery residues inside the
reaction cell causing sensitivity drift, nitric acid is a very aggressive compound, which
can deteriorate the analyzer’s components. In order to remove these chemical
byproducts from the O3 gas stream, the output of the O3 generator flows through a
special filter between the generator and the reaction cell.
The small amount of NOX produced in the generator (from the reaction of O2 or O3 and
N2 in the air) will not affect the T200’s ability to measure NOx, NO and NO2 as it is
accounted for and removed from the concentration calculations by the analyzer’s Auto
Zero feature (see Section 13.1.4).
13.2.3.4. OZONE DESTRUCT

Even though ozone is unstable and typically reacts to form O2, the break-down is not
quite fast enough to ensure that it is completely removed from the exhaust gas stream of
the T200 by the time the gas exits the analyzer. Due to the high toxicity and reactivity
of O3, a highly efficient catalytic converter scrubs or converts all of the O3 from the gas
exiting the reaction cell. The conversion process is very safe. It only converts ozone to
oxygen and does not produce any toxic or hazardous gases.
The O3 destruct is located just inside the NO2 converter. As this is a true catalytic
converter, there are no maintenance requirements as would be required for charcoal-
based ozone destructs.
A certain amount of fine, black dust may exit the catalyst, particularly if the analyzer is
subjected to sudden pressure drops (for example, when disconnecting the running pump
without letting the analyzer properly and slowly equilibrate to ambient pressure). To
prevent the dust from entering the reaction cell or the pump, the ozone destruct is
equipped with a quartz wool filter material.
06858F DCN8038 299

13.2.4. PNEUMATIC SENSORS
Note The T200 displays all pressures in inches of mercury absolute (in-Hg-A), i.e.
absolute pressure referenced against zero (a perfect vacuum).
The T200 uses three pneumatic sensors to verify the flow and pressure levels of its gas
streams. They are located on a printed circuit assembly, called the pneumatic
pressure/flow sensor board, located just behind the sensor assembly. The measurements
made by these sensors are used for a variety of important calculations and diagnostics.
13.2.4.1. SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR

An absolute pressure transducer connected to the input of the NO/NOX valve is used to
measure the pressure of the sample gas before it enters the analyzer’s reaction cell.
• In conjunction with the measurement made by the vacuum pressure sensor, this
“upstream” measurement is used to compute the sample gas sample flow rate and
to validate the critical flow condition (2:1 pressure ratio) through the sample gas
critical flow orifice (Section 13.2.2).
• If the Temperature/Pressure Compensation (TPC) feature is turned on (Section
13.9.2), the output of this sensor is also used to supply pressure data for that
calculation.
• The actual pressure value is viewable through the analyzer’s front panel display as
the test function SAMP.
• The flow rate of the sample gas is displayed as SAMP FLW and the SIGNAL I/O
function SAMPLE_PRESSURE.
13.2.4.2. VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR

An absolute pressure transducer connected to the exhaust manifold is used to measure
the pressure downstream from and inside the instrument’s reaction cell.
• The output of the sensor is used by the CPU to calculate the pressure differential
between the gas upstream of the reaction cell and the gas downstream from it and
is also used as the main diagnostic for proper pump operation.
• If the ratio between the upstream pressure and the downstream pressure falls
below 2:1, a warning message (SAMPLE FLOW WARN) is displayed on the
analyzer’s front panel (see Section 4.1.2) and the sample flow rate will display
XXXX instead of an actual value.
• If this pressure exceeds 10 in-Hg-A, an RCEL PRESS WARN is issued, even
though the analyzer will continue to calculate a sample flow up to ~14 in Hg.
• If the Temperature/Pressure Compensation (TPC) feature is turned on (see Section
13.9.2), the output of this sensor is also used to supply pressure data for that
calculation.
• This measurement is viewable through the analyzer’s front panel as the test
function RCEL and the SIGNAL I/O function RCELL_PRESSURE.
300 06858F DCN8038

13.2.4.3. SAMPLE GAS FLOW CALCULATION

Sample gas flow in the T200 analyzer is not a directly measured value, but is rather
calculated based on the measured pressure differential across the sample gas critical
flow orifice. Specifically, the upstream reading of the sample pressure sensor is
compared to the downstream pressure reading of the vacuum pressure sensor and this
differential is used, by the analyzer’s CPU, to derive the gas flow rate through the
reaction cell.
• The results of this calculation are viewable from the instruments front panel via the
test function
SAMP FLW.
• Since this is a calculated value and not a measured reading there is no
corresponding SIGNALI/O function.
13.2.4.4. O3 SUPPLY AIR FLOW SENSOR

In contrast to the sample gas flow, the ozone flow is measured with a mass flow sensor,
which is mounted on the flow/pressure sensor PCA just behind the PMT sensor
assembly. Pneumatically, it lies between the Sample dryer and the O3. This mass flow
sensor has a full scale range of 0-1000 cm³/min and can be calibrated through software
to its span point (Section 9.7).
Since the flow value displayed on the front panel is an actual measurement (and not a
calculated value), short term variability in the measurement may be higher than that of
the sample flow, which is based on a calculation from (more stable) differential
pressures. On the other hand, any sustained drift, i.e. long-term change, in the ozone
flow rate may usually indicate a flow problem.
This information is used to validate the O3 gas flow rate.
• If the flow rate exceeds ±15% of the nominal flow rate (80 cm³/min), a warning
message OZONE FLOW WARNING is displayed on the analyzer’s front panel (see
Section 4.1.2) and the O3 generator is turned off.
• A second warning, OZONE GEN OFF is also displayed.
• This flow measurement is viewable through instrument’s front panel display as the
test function OZONE FL and the SIGNAL I/O function OZONE_FLOW.
As with all other test parameters, we recommend to monitor the ozone flow over time
for predictive diagnostics and maintenance evaluation.
06858F DCN8038 301

13.3. ELECTRONIC OPERATION
13.3.1. OVERVIEW
Figure 13-11 shows a block diagram of the major electronic components of the analyzer.
ANALOG COM2 USB COM RS232 Ethernet

IN Female port Male
(I2C Bus)
Analog Outputs Status Control

Outputs Outputs
COM2 (RS-232 or RS-485)

TEST CHANNEL OUTPUT
Aout 4 1-8 1–6
or USB
Optional O2 Sensor Concetration
NO2 Concentration Aout 3 Optional

Current
NO Concentration Aout 2 Loop
Outputs Touchscreen
NOx Concentration Aout 1
Display
USB
Flow/Pressure Sensor PCA
Sample Pressure LVDS
Analog Outputs External Digital I/O
Sensor transmitter board
(D/A)
O3 Flow Sensor
Power Up
Reaction Cell PC 104
Pressure Sensor Circuit
Sensor Inputs
CPU Card
Disk on
A/D
PC 104 Bus Module
Converter
Flash
Box
Chip
PMT Output (PMT DET)
Temperature
CPU
Status
High Voltage Power
PMT Temperature
LED
MOTHERBOARD
Supply Level
Internal
Thermistor Interface
Digital I/O I2C Bus NO/NOX Valve
PMT Reaction Cell Internal Span RELAY PCA

O2 Sensor AutoZero Valve
Temperature Temperature Gas Generator Temperature
Perm Tube Oven (Optional)
Temperature I2C Status
(Optional) LED Sample/Cal
Valve (Optional)
Optical Test Control
PMT PREAMP PCA
Electric Test Control
Preamp Range HI
O3 Gen Status Zero/Span
Reaction Cell Valve (Optional)
Thermo-Electric Cooler Heater
Drive PCA
NO2 to NO
O3 Generator Converter Heater
PMT Thermo-
Pressurized
Electric Cooler
High Span Shutoff
Internal Span Gas Valve (Optional)
Voltage Generator Perm Tube
PMT
Power Oven Heater
Supply
Optional
SENSOR MODULE Internal Pump
NO2 to NO Converter
Thermocouple Sensor
Figure 13-11: T200 Electronic Block Diagram
302 06858F DCN8038

The core of the analyzer is a microcomputer/central processing unit (CPU) that controls
various internal processes, interprets data, makes calculations, and reports results using
specialized firmware developed by Teledyne API. It communicates with the user as
well as receives data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral devices via a
separate printed circuit assembly onto which the CPU is mounted: the motherboard.
The motherboard is directly mounted to the inside rear panel and collects data, performs
signal conditioning duties and routes incoming and outgoing signals between the CPU
and the analyzer’s other major components.
Data are generated by the sensor module which outputs an analog signal corresponding
to the amount of chemiluminescence present in the reaction cell. This signal is
converted into digital data by a unipolar, analog-to-digital converter, located on the
motherboard.
A variety of sensors report the physical and operational status of the analyzer’s major
components, again through the signal processing capabilities of the motherboard. These
status reports are used as data for the various concentration calculations and as trigger
events for certain warning messages and control commands issued by the CPU. This
information is stored in memory by the CPU and in most cases can be viewed by the
user via the front panel display.
The CPU issues commands via a series of relays and switches (also over the I2C bus)
located on a separate printed circuit assembly, called the relay PCA, to control the
function of key electromechanical devices such as heaters and valves. It also issues
some commands directly to the Sensor module (e.g. initiate Electric Test or Optical
Test).
By controlling the state of various valves the CPU directs the flow of sample gas
through the various gas paths of the analyzer (NO measurement path; NOx measurement
path; Auto Zero Path). Based on which path is active, the CPU interprets the sensor
output to derive raw data representing concentrations for NOx, NO and zero (dark
condition), accesses the operational data stored in memory then calculates final
concentrations for NOx, NO and NO2.
The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in several ways:
• Through the analyzer’s front panel LCD touch-screen interface
• Through the serial I/O channels
• Various analog voltage and current outputs
• Several sets of Digital I/O channels
• Ethernet
06858F DCN8038 303

13.3.2. CPU
The unit’s CPU card, installed on the motherboard located inside the rear panel, is a low
power (5 VDC, 720mA max), high performance, Vortex86SX-based microcomputer
running Windows CE. Its operation and assembly conform to the PC 104 specification.
Figure 13-12: CPU Board
The CPU includes two types of non-volatile data storage: a Disk-on-Module (DOM) and
an embedded flash chip.
13.3.2.1. DISK-ON-MODULE
The DOM is a 44-pin IDE flash drive with storage capacity to 128 MB. It is used to
store the computer’s operating system, the Teledyne API firmware, and most of the
operational data generated by the analyzer’s internal data acquisition system (DAS).
13.3.2.2. FLASH CHIP

This non-volatile, embedded flash chip includes 2MB of storage for calibration data as
well as a backup of the analyzer configuration. Storing these key data on a less heavily
accessed chip significantly decreases the chance of data corruption.
In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail, the analyzer will continue to operate
with just the DOM. However, all configuration information will be lost, requiring that
the unit be recalibrated.
304 06858F DCN8038

13.3.3. MOTHERBOARD
This PCA provides a multitude of functions including, A/D conversion, digital
input/output, PC-104 to I2C translation, temperature sensor signal processing and is a
pass through for the RS-232 and RS-485 signals.
13.3.3.1. A TO D CONVERSION
Analog signals, such as the voltages received from the analyzers various sensors, are
converted into digital signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog
to digital converter (A/D). Under the control of the CPU, this functional block selects a
particular signal input and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital word.
The A/D consists of a Voltage-to-Frequency (V-F) converter, a Programmable Logic
Device (PLD), three multiplexers, several amplifiers and some other associated devices.
The V-F converter produces a frequency proportional to its input voltage. The PLD
counts the output of the V-F during a specified time, and sends the result of that count,
in the form of a binary number, to the CPU.
The A/D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in the T200
it is used in unipolar mode with a +5V full scale. The converter includes a 1% over and
under-range. This allows signals from –0.05V to +5.05V to be fully converted.
For calibration purposes, two reference voltages are supplied to the A/D converter:
Reference ground and +4.096 VDC. During calibration, the device measures these two
voltages, outputs their digital equivalent to the CPU. The CPU uses these values to
compute the converter’s offset and slope and uses these factors for subsequent
conversions. See Section 5.9.3.10 for instructions on performing this calibration.
13.3.3.2. SENSOR INPUTS

The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A/D through the master multiplexer
from two connectors on the motherboard. 100K terminating resistors on each of the
inputs prevent cross talk from appearing on the sensor signals.
PMT DETECTOR OUTPUT: The PMT detector output from the PMT preamplifier is
used in the computation of the NO, NOX and NO2 concentrations displayed on the front
panel display and reported through the instrument’s analog outputs and COM ports.
This information is available in several forms:
• As a raw voltage signal via the test function PMTDET and the SIGNAL I/O function
PMT_SIGNAL, or;
• Normalized for temperature, pressure and auto-zero offset via the front panel test
function NORM PMT.
• It is recorded by the DAS system in the following parameters:
• PMTDET – The same as the test function PMT DET.
• RAWNOX – The raw PMT output when the instrument is measuring NOX.
• RAW NO – The raw PMT output when the instrument is measuring NO.
06858F DCN8038 305

HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY LEVEL: The PMT high voltage is based on
the drive voltage from the preamplifier board. It is digitized and sent to the CPU where
it is used to calculate the voltage setting of the HVPS.
• The value of this signal is viewable via the front panel test function HVPS and the
SIGNAL I/O function HVPS_VOLTAGE.
• It is recorded by the DAS system as the parameter HVPS.
PMT TEMPERATURE: The PMT temperature is measured with a thermistor inside

the PMT cold block. Its signal is amplified by the PMT temperature feedback circuit on
the preamplifier board and is digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used to calculate
the current temperature of the PMT.
• The value of this signal is viewable via the front panel test function PMT TEMP and
the SIGNAL I/O function PMT_TEMP.
• It is recorded by the DAS system as the parameter PMTTMP.
SAMPLE GAS PRESSURE SENSOR: This sensor, located on the flow/pressure

sensor PCA, measures the gas pressure in the sample chamber upstream of the sample
gas stream flow control assembly. Its functions are described in Section 13.2.4.1.
• The value of this signal is viewable via the front panel test function SAMP and the
SIGNAL I/O function SAMPLE_PRESSURE.
• It is recorded by the DAS system as the parameter SMPPRS.
VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR: This sensor, also located on the flow/pressure

sensor PCA, is pneumatically located downstream from the reaction cell and measures
the pressure of the gas mixture inside the reaction cell . Its functions are described in
Section 13.2.4.2.
• The value of this signal is viewable via the front panel test function RCEL and the
SIGNAL I/O function RCEL_PRESSURE.
• It is recorded by the DAS system as the parameter RCPRES.
O3 FLOW SENSOR: This sensor, located on the flow/pressure sensor PCA, measures
the flow rate of the O3 gas stream as it is supplied to the reaction cell. Its functions are
described in Section 13.2.4.4.
• The value of this signal is viewable via the front panel test function OZONE FLOW
and the SIGNAL I/O function OZONE_FLOW.
• It is recorded by the DAS system as the parameter O3FLOW.
306 06858F DCN8038

13.3.3.3. THERMISTOR INTERFACE
This circuit provides excitation, termination and signal selection for several negative
coefficient, thermistor temperature sensors located inside the analyzer. They are:
REACTION CELL TEMPERATURE SENSOR: The reaction cell temperature
sensor is a thermistor embedded in the reaction cell manifold. This temperature is used
by the CPU to control the reaction cell heating circuit and as a parameter in the
temperature/pressure compensation algorithm.
• The value of this signal is viewable via the front panel test function RCEL TEMP
and the SIGNAL I/O function RCELL_TEMP.
• It is recorded by the DAS system as the parameter RCTEMP.
BOX TEMPERATURE SENSOR: A thermistor is attached to the motherboard. It

measures the analyzer’s inside temperature. This information is stored by the CPU and
can be viewed by the user for troubleshooting purposes through the front panel display.
It is also used as part of the NO, NOx and NO2 calculations when the instrument’s
Temperature/Pressure Compensation feature is enabled.
• The value of this signal is viewable via the front panel test function BOX TEMP and
the SIGNAL I/O function BOX_TEMP.
• It is recorded by the DAS system as the parameter BOXTMP.
INTERNAL SPAN GAS GENERATOR OVEN TEMPERATURE: This thermistor

reports the temperature of the optional internal span gas generator’s NO2 permeation
source to the CPU as part of a control loop that keeps the tube at a high constant
temperature (necessary to ensure that the permeation rate of NO2 is constant). It is
stored and reported as test function IZS TEMP.
• The value of this signal is viewable via the front panel test function IZS TEMP and
the SIGNAL I/O function IZS_TEMP.
• It is recorded by the DAS system as the parameter IZTEMP.
Note There are two thermistors that monitor the temperature of the PMT assembly:
One is embedded in the cold block of the PMT’s TEC. Its signal is conditioned
by the PMT preamplifier PCA and reported to the CPU via the motherboard
(see Section 13.3.3.2).
The second is located on the PMT Preamplifier PCA and is used only as a
reference for the preamplifier circuitry. Its output is neither reported nor
stored.
06858F DCN8038 307

13.3.3.4. ANALOG OUTPUTS

The analyzer comes equipped with four analog outputs. On the instrument’s rear panel
analog connector (see Figure 3-4), they are labeled A1, A2, A3 and A4.
CONCENTRATION OUTPUTS: Outputs labeled A1, A2 and A3 carry the
concentration signals of NOX, NO and NO2, respectively. A variety of scaling
measurement and electronic factors apply to these signals.
• See Sections 3.3.1.3 and 5.4 for information on setting the reporting range type and
measurement range scaling factors for these output channels.
• See Sections 5.9.3.2 for instructions calibrating and scaling the electronic output of
these channels.
TEST OUTPUT: The fourth analog output, labeled A4 is special. It can be set by the
user (see Section 5.9.4) to carry the current signal level of most of the parameters
accessible through the TEST menu of the unit’s software.
• In its standard configuration, the T200 comes with all four of these channels set up
to output a DC voltage. However, 4-20mA current loop drivers can be purchased
for the first three of these outputs, A1, A2 and A3.
OUTPUT LOOP-BACK: All of the functioning analog outputs are connected back to
the A/D converter through a Loop-back circuit. This permits the voltage outputs to be
calibrated by the CPU without need for any additional tools or fixtures (see Section
5.9.3.4).
13.3.3.5. EXTERNAL DIGITAL I/O

This external digital I/O performs two functions.
STATUS OUTPUTS: Logic-Level voltages (0-5 VDC) are output through an optically
isolated 8-pin connector located on the rear panel of the analyzer (see Figure 3-4).
These outputs convey good/bad and on/off information about certain analyzer
conditions. They can be used to interface with certain types of programmable devices.
• For information on setting up the status outputs (see Section 3.3.1.4).
CONTROL INPUTS: By applying 5V DC power to these digital inputs from an

external source such as a PLC or Data logger zero point and span point calibrations can
be remotely initiated. .
• For information on setting up the status inputs (see Section 3.3.1.6).
13.3.3.6. INTERNAL DIGITAL I/O

There are several internal digital control signals that are generated by the motherboard
under CPU control and used to control subsystems of the analyzer.
ELECTRICAL TEST CONTROL: When the CPU sets this control signal to high
(ON) the electric test feature (ETEST) is initiated (see Section 8.3).
• The ETEST can be initiated by following the procedure in Section 12.7.12.2, or by
setting the SIGNAL I/O Function ELEC_TEST to ON.
308 06858F DCN8038

OPTICAL TEST (OTEST) CONTROL: When the CPU sets this control signal to
high (ON) the optical test feature is initiated (see Section 8.3).
• The OTEST can be initiated by following the procedure in 12.7.12.1, or by setting
the SIGNAL I/O Function OPTIC_TEST to ON.
PMT PREAMPLIFIER RANGE CONTROL: The CPU uses this control switch the
instrument between its LOW and HIGH physical ranges (see Section 5.4.1).
• The instrument can be forced into its HIGH physical range setting the SIGNAL I/O
function PREAMP_RANGE_HI to ON.
O3 GEN STATUS: The CPU uses this control signal to turn the O3 generator ON/OFF
by setting it to HIGH/LOW respectively. The CPU turns OFF the O3 generator if there
is if there is no or low air flow to it as measured by the O3 flow sensor or if the
instrument has been turned off for more than 30 minutes.
• The O3 generator can be manually turned ON/OFF by using the OZONE
GENERATOR OVERIDE feature (See Section 12.7.15.1) or by setting the SIGNAL
I/O function O3GEN_STATUS to ON or OFF.
Note Any I/O signals changed while in the signal I/O menu will remain in effect ONLY
until signal I/O menu is exited.
The analyzer regains control of these signals upon exit and returns them to their
normal value/setting.
13.3.3.7. I2C DATA BUS

I2C is a two-way, clocked, bi-directional digital serial I/O bus that is used widely in
commercial and consumer electronic systems. A transceiver on the Motherboard
converts data and control signals from the PC-104 bus to I2C format. The data is then
fed to the relay board, optional analog input board and valve driver board circuitry.
13.3.3.8. POWER-UP CIRCUIT

This circuit monitors the +5V power supply during start-up and sets the analog outputs,
external digital I/O ports, and I2C circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots and the
instrument software can establish control.
06858F DCN8038 309

13.3.4. RELAY PCA

The CPU issues commands via a series of relays and switches located on a separate
printed circuit assembly, called the relay PCA (Figure 13-13), to control the function of
key electromechanical devices such as heaters and valves. The relay PCA receives
instructions in the form of digital signals over the I2C bus, interprets these digital
instructions and activates its various switches and relays appropriately.
The relay PCA is located in the right-rear quadrant of the analyzer and is mounted
vertically on the backside of the same bracket as the instrument’s DC power supplies.
Thermocouple Status LED’s
Signal Output (D2 through D16)
Watchdog DC Power Supply
(JP5) Status LED (D1) Test Points
Thermocouple
Configuration I2C Connector
Jumpers
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
J3
TC1 Input J15
NO2 à NO Converter J21
Temp Sensor
J19
J14 Power
Connection
J16 Heater AC Power for DC
J17
Configuration Heaters
U6
Pump AC Jumpers
Configuration Valve Control
Jumper JP2 Drivers
R16 JP7
U5
J12
Pump Power J4
JP6
Output J11
Valve Control
AC Relay K4 J10
(OPT Internal Span Gen Heater) Connector
AC Power
J13
J5
IN J18 J9
J2
AC Relay K2 J8
(NO2 à NO Converter Heater)
Connector for
AC Relays AC Relay K1 J7
(Reaction Cell Heater)
K1 & K2
DC Power
Distribution
Connectors
Connector for AC Relays K4 & K5
Figure 13-13: Relay PCA Layout (P/N 045230100)
CAUTION
Only those relays actually required by the configuration of the T200 are populated.
A protective retainer plate is installed over the ac power relay to keep them securely
seated in their sockets and prevent accidental contact with those sockets that are not
populated see Figure 13-14).
Never remove this retainer while the instrument is plugged in and turned on. The
contacts of the AC relay sockets beneath the shield carry high AC voltages even
when no relays are present.
310 06858F DCN8038

Figure 13-14: Relay PCA P/N 045230100 with AC Relay Retainer in Place
13.3.4.1. STATUS LED’S

Sixteen LED’s are located on the analyzer’s relay PCA (some are designated “spare”
and are not used) to show the current status on the various control functions performed
by the relay PCA (see Figure 13-15). The LED’s are described in Table 13-4).
06858F DCN8038 311

D10 (Green) – NO/NOx Valve

D9 (Green) – AutoZero Valve
D8 (Green) – Optional Sample/Cal Valve
D7 (Green) – Optional Zero/Span Valve
D3 (Yellow) NO2 à NO Converter Heater
D2 (Yellow) Reaction Cell Heater
D5 (Yellow) – Optional Internal Span Gas Gen Heater
D11 (Green) – Optional Dual Span Select Valve

D12 (Green) – Optional Pressurized Span Shutoff Valve
D13 (Green) – Optional Pressurized Zero Shutoff Valve
D1 (RED)
Watchdog Indicator
Figure 13-15: Status LED Locations – Relay PCA
Table 13-4: Relay PCA Status LED’s
LED Color Function Status When Lit Status When Unlit

(Energized State) (Default State)
Cycles ON/OFF every 3 Seconds
D1 Red Watchdog Circuit
under direct control of the analyzer’s CPU.
D2 Yellow Reaction Cell Heater Heating Not Heating
D3 Yellow NO2 à NO Converter Heater Heating Not Heating
D4 SPARE
Internal Span Gas Generator
D51 Yellow Heating Not Heating
Perm Tube Oven Heater
D6 SPARE
D7 Green Zero/Span Valve Valve OPEN to span gas flow Valve OPEN to zero gas flow
Valve OPEN to Valve OPEN to
D8 Green Sample/Cal Valve
calibration gas flow sample gas flow
Sample gas flow BYPASSES Sample gas flow is routed
D9 Green Auto Zero Valve
the reaction cell THROUGH the reaction cell
Gas flow routed THROUGH Gas Flow BYPASSES
D10 Green NO/NOx Valve
NO2 à NO converter NO2 à NO converter
Dual Span Gas Valve OPEN to SPAN 1
D112 Green Valve OPEN to SPAN2 inlet
Select Valve gas inlet
Pressurized Span
D123 Green Span gas flow SHUTOFF Span gas flow OPEN
Shutoff Valve
Pressurized Zero
D134 Green Zero gas flow SHUTOFF Zero gas flow OPEN
Shutoff Valve
D14 - 16 SPARE
1
Only active when the optional internal span gas generator is installed.
2
Only active when the dual pressurized span option is installed.
3
Only active when one of the pressurized span gas options is installed.
4
Only active when one of the pressurized zero gas options is installed.
312 06858F DCN8038

13.3.4.2. WATCHDOG CIRCUITRY

The most important of the status LED’s on the relay board is the red I2C bus watch-dog
LED. It is controlled directly by the analyzer’s CPU over the I2C bus. Special circuitry
on the relay PCA watches the status of D1. Should this LED ever stay ON or OFF for
30 seconds, indicating that the CPU or I2C bus has stopped functioning, this Watchdog
Circuit automatically shuts all valves and turns off all heaters.
13.3.4.3. VALVE CONTROL

The relay board also hosts two valve driver chips, each of which can drive up four
valves. The main valve assembly in the T200 is the NO/NOX - Auto-zero solenoid valve
component mounted right in front of the NO2 converter housing (see Figure 3-5).
• These two valves are actuated with 12 V supplied from the relay board and under
the control of the CPU through the I2C bus.
Additional valve sets also controlled by the CPU via the I2C bus and the relay PCA can
be included in the T200 (see Table 1-1 and Sections 3.3.2.3, 3.3.2.4, and 3.3.2.5 for
descriptions of these valve sets).
06858F DCN8038 313

13.3.4.4. HEATER CONTROL

For a variety of reasons such as, efficiency of certain chemical reactions, stabilization of
sample gas temperature and pressure, etc., various subcomponents of the T200 are
heated/cooled.
Two types of sensors are used to gather temperature data for the CPU:
• THERMISTORS: These are used in areas where the temperature control point is at
or near ambient temperature (e.g. the reaction cell temperature, internal chassis
temperate).
• Thermistors change resistance as they heat up and cool down. A DC signal is
sent from the Mother board of a sent voltage and current. As the thermistor
changes resistance, the returning voltage rises and falls in direct relationship to
the change in temperature.
• The output signal from the thermistors is received by the motherboard,
converted into digital data which is forwarded to the CPU.
• THERMOCOUPLES: These are used where the target temperature is high such as
the NO2 à NO converter.
• Thermocouples generate DC voltage that rises and falls as the thermocouple
heats up and cools down.
• This DC signal interpreted, conditioned and amplified by the Relay PCA then
transmitted to the motherboard where it is also converted into digital data and
forwarded to the CPU.
All of the heaters used in the T200 are AC powered which are turned ON/OFF by AC
Relays located on the relay PCA in response to commands issued by the CPU.
Thermistor(s) – Reaction Cell, Optional Internal
Span Gas Generator, Optional O2
Sensor) MOTHER BOARD
Thermistor
interface
RELAY PCA
Preamplifiers A/D
and Signal Converter
Conditioning (V/F)
THERMOCOUPLE
CONFIGURATION
JUMPER
Cold Junction
Compensation CPU
(JP5)
J-type
Thermocouple
( NO2 à NO converter) Solid State
AC Relays
DC Control Logic
(for DC heaters)
Not used
on the T200
Reaction Cell NO2 à NO Other Optional

Heater Converter AC HEATERs
Heater (Internal Span Gas
Generator;O2 Sensor)
Figure 13-16: Heater Control Loop Block Diagram.
314 06858F DCN8038

Note The PMT temperature is maintained by a separate control loop that does not
involve the relay PCA (see Section 13.5.2).
13.3.4.5. THERMOCOUPLE INPUTS AND CONFIGURATION JUMPER (JP5)

Although the relay PCA supports two thermocouple inputs, the current T200 analyzers
only utilize one. It is used to sense the temperature of the NO2 à NO converter.
• This single thermocouple input is plugged into the TC1 input (J15).
• TC2 (J16) is currently not used (see Figure 13-13 for location of J15 and J16).
The type and operating parameters of this thermocouple are set using a jumper plug
(JP5).
The default configuration for this thermocouple is:
• Type-K
• Temperature compensated for Type-K
• Isolated
Table 13-5: Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs

JUMPER
TC INPUT DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
PAIR
Selects preamp gain factor for J or K TC
1 – 11 Gain Selector OUT = K TC gain factor;
IN = J TC gain factor
Selects preamp gain factor for J or K TC
2 – 12 Output Scale Selector
OUT = 10 mV / °C; IN = 5 mV / °C
When present, sets Cold Junction
TC1 3 – 13 Type J Compensation Compensation for J type Thermocouple
Type K When present, sets Cold Junction
4 – 14 Compensation Compensation for K type Thermocouple
Selects between Isolated and grounded TC
Termination
5 – 15 Selector
IN = Isolate TC;
OUT = Grounded TC
TC2 NOT USED

The correct Thermocouple Type must be used if there is ever the need for
replacement. If in doubt please consult Teledyne API Customer Service.
06858F DCN8038 315

TC2
TC1
Not Used
Type J Compensation 3 – 13
Type K Compensation 4 – 14
Termination Selector 5 – 15
Input Gain Selector 1 – 11

Output Scale Selector 2 – 12
Purple Jumpers
Figure 13-17: Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs
13.4. SENSOR MODULE

The T200 sensor assembly (Figure 12-9) consists of several subassemblies, each with
different tasks:
• The Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) detects the intensity of the light from the
chemiluminescence reaction between NO and O3 in the reaction cell. It outputs a
current signal that varies in relationship with the amount of light in the reaction cell.
• The PMT Preamplifier PCA converts the current output by the PMT into a voltage
and amplifies it to a signal strong enough to be usable by the motherboard’s A à D
converter. It also supplies the drive voltage and gain adjustment for the PMT’s High
Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)
• The Thermo-Electric Cooler (TEC) controls the temperature of the PMT to ensure
the accuracy and stability of the measurements.
13.5. PHOTO MULTIPLIER TUBE (PMT)

The T200 uses a photo multiplier tube (Figure 12-9) to detect the amount of
chemiluminescence created in the Reaction Cell.
A typical PMT is a vacuum tube containing a variety of specially designed electrodes.
Photons from the reaction are filtered by an optical high-pass filter, enter the PMT and
strike a negatively charged photo cathode causing it to emit electrons. A high voltage
potential across these focusing electrodes directs the electrons toward an array of high
voltage dynodes.
The dynodes in this electron multiplier array are designed so that each stage multiplies
the number of emitted electrons by emitting multiple, new electrons. The greatly
increased number of electrons emitted from one end of electron multiplier are collected
by a positively charged anode at the other end, which creates a useable current signal.
This current signal is amplified by the preamplifier board and then reported to the
motherboard.
316 06858F DCN8038

Figure 13-18: Basic PMT Design
A significant performance characteristic of the PMT is the voltage potential across the
electron multiplier. The higher the voltage, the greater the number of electrons emitted
from each dynode of the electron multiplier, in effect, making the PMT more sensitive
and responsive to smaller variations in light intensity but also more noisy (this is
referred to as “dark noise”).
• The gain voltage of the PMT used in the T200 is usually set between 400 V and 800 V.
• This parameter is viewable through the front panel as test function HVPS (see
Section 4.1.1).
• For information on when and how to set this voltage, see Section 12.8.4.
The PMT is housed inside the PMT module assembly (see Figure 12-9). This assembly
also includes the high voltage power supply required to drive the PMT, an LED used by
the instrument’s optical test function, a thermistor that measures the temperature of the
PMT and various components of the PMT cooling system including the TEC.
13.5.1. PMT PREAMPLIFIER

The PMT preamplifier board provides a variety of functions:
• It amplifies the PMT signal into a useable analog voltage (PMTDET) that can be
processed by the motherboard into a digital signal to be used by the CPU to
calculate the NO, NO2 and NOx concentrations of the gas in the sample chamber.
• It supplies the drive voltage for the HVPS.
• It includes the circuitry for switching between the two physical ranges.
• It amplifies the signal output by the PMT temperature sensor and feeds it back to
the thermoelectric cooler driver PCA. This amplified signal is also sent to the
Motherboard to be digitized and forwarded to the CPU. It is viewable via the front
panel as the test function PMT TEMP.
• It provides means for adjusting the electronic signal output from the PMT by:
• Adjusting this voltage directly the sensitivity of the PMT’s dynode array and
therefore the strength of the signal output by the PMT through the use of two
hexadecimal switches.
• Directly adjusting the gain of the output signal.
06858F DCN8038 317

Note These adjustments should only be performed when encountering problems with
the software calibration that cannot be rectified otherwise. See Section 12.8.4 for
more information about this hardware calibration.
PMT Preamplifier PCA
X
Optical Test Optical Test Control
Generator from CPU
Electric Test Control

From CPU
X
HI Range Select
Electric
From CPU
X
Test
Generator
PMT Output
Physical Range
Gain
Select Circuitry
Adjustment
Optical
Test Amp à Volts
Low Pass
Converter
LED
High
MUX and
Noise
Filter
Voltage Amplifier
PMT
Power
Supply
HVPS Fine
Gain
Adjustment
(Rotary)
To PMT HVPS
X Motherboard Drive Voltage
DàA
Converter
HVPS Coarse
Gain
PMT Temp Adjustment
(Rotary)
Sensor
PMT
(Thermistor)
Temperature
Feedback
TEC Control Circuit
PCA
X
PMT Temp Analog Signal
To Motherboard
PMT Output Signal (PMT DET)
X to Motherboard
Figure 13-19: PMT Preamp Block Diagram
318 06858F DCN8038

The PMT preamplifier PCA also operates two different tests used to calibrate and check
the performance of the sensor module.
• The electrical test (ETEST) circuit generates a constant, electronic signal intended
to simulate the output of the PMT (after conversion from current to voltage). By
bypassing the detector’s actual signal, it is possible to test most of the signal
handling and conditioning circuitry on the PMT preamplifier board. See section
12.7.12.2 for instructions on performing this test.
• The optical test (OTEST) feature causes an LED inside the PMT cold block to
create a light signal that can be measured with the PMT. If zero air is supplied to
the analyzer, the entire measurement capability of the sensor module can be tested
including the PMT and the current to voltage conversion circuit on the PMT
preamplifier board. See Section 12.7.12.1 for instructions on performing this test.
13.5.2. PMT COOLING SYSTEM

The performance of the analyzer’s PMT is significantly affected by temperature.
Variations in PMT temperature are directly reflected in the signal output of the PMT.
Also the signal to noise ratio of the PMT output is radically influenced by temperature
as well. The warmer the PMT is, the noisier its signal becomes until the noise renders
the concentration signal useless.
To alleviate this problem a special cooling system exists utilizing a type of electronic
heat pump called a thermo-electric cooler (TEC). A TEC is a solid-state active heat
pump which transfers heat from a heat absorbing “cool” side to a heat releasing “hot”
side via a series of DC powered semiconductor junctions. The effectiveness of the pump
at moving heat away from the cold side is reliant on the amount of current flowing
through the semiconductor junctions and how well the heat from the hot side can be
removed.
Figure 13-20: Typical Thermo-Electric Cooler
In the case of the T200, the current flow is controlled by the TEC Control PCA which
adjusts the amount of current applied to the TEC based on the temperature sensed by a
thermistor embedded in the PMT’s cold block. The higher the temperature of the PMT,
the more current is pumped through the TEC. The “hot” side of the TEC is cooled by a
constant flow of ambient air that is directed across a set of heat sinks by a fan.
06858F DCN8038 319

Preamp PCA sends

buffered and
TEC PCA sets amplified thermistor
appropriate signal to TEC PCA
drive voltage for
cooler
TEC PMT
Control Preamp
PCA
PCA
Thermo-Electric Cooler
PMT Temperature Sensor Thermistor
outputs temp of
cold block to
preamp PCA
Heat Sink
PMT
Cold Block
Heat form PMT is absorbed
by the cold block and
transferred to the heat sink
via the TEC then bled off
into the cool air stream.
Cooling Fan
Figure 13-21: PMT Cooling System Block Diagram
The target temperature at which the TEC system keeps the PMT is approximately 8.0ºC.
Arriving at this temperature may take up to 30 minutes after the instrument is turned on.
The actual temperature of the PMT can be viewed via the front panel as the test function
PMT TEMP (see Section 4.1.1).
13.5.2.1. TEC CONTROL BOARD

The TEC control PCA is located on the sensor housing assembly, under the slanted
shroud, next to the cooling fins and directly above the cooling fan. Using the amplified
PMT temperature signal from the PMT preamplifier board (see Section 10.4.5), it sets
the drive voltage for the thermoelectric cooler. The warmer the PMT gets, the more
current is passed through the TEC causing it to pump more heat to the heat sink.
• A red LED located on the top edge of this circuit board indicates that the control
circuit is receiving power.
• Four test points are also located at the top of this assembly.
• For the definitions and acceptable signal levels of these test points see 12.7.14.
13.6. PNEUMATIC SENSOR BOARD

The flow and pressure sensors of the T200 are located on a printed circuit assembly just
behind the PMT sensor. Refer to Section 12.7.6.1 for a figure and on how to test this
assembly. The signals of this board are supplied to the motherboard for further signal
processing. All sensors are linearized in the firmware and can be span calibrated from
the front panel.
320 06858F DCN8038

13.7. POWER SUPPLY/CIRCUIT BREAKER

The analyzer operates on 100 VAC, 115 VAC or 230 VAC power at either 50 Hz or
60Hz. Individual instruments are set up at the factory to accept any combination of
these five attributes. A 6.75 amp circuit breaker is built into the ON/OFF switch. In
case of a wiring fault or incorrect supply power, the circuit breaker will automatically
turn off the analyzer.
• Under normal operation, the T200 draws about 1.5 A at 115 V and 2.0 A during
start-up.
WARNING
Should the AC power circuit breaker trip, investigate and correct the condition
causing this situation before turning the analyzer back on.
Power enters the analyzer through a standard International Electrotechnical Commission

(IEC) 320 power receptacle located on the rear panel of the instrument. From there it is
routed through the ON/OFF Switch located in the lower right corner of the front panel.
AC Line power is stepped down and converted to DC power by two DC power supplies
(PS).
• One PS provides +5 VDC (3 A) and ±15 VDC (1.5/0.5 A) for logic and analog
circuitry as well as the power for the O3 generator.
• A second PS provides +12 VDC (5 A), for the PMT’s thermoelectric cooler, fans and
as well as the various gas stream valves (both standard and optional).
All AC and DC Voltages are distributed via the relay PCA.
06858F DCN8038 321

SENSOR MODULE
Pre-Amplifiers KEY
& Amplifiers HVPS PMT
ANALOG AC POWER
SENSORS
(e.g. Temp DC POWER
Sensors, Flow Sensor Control
Sensors) & I/O Logic LOGIC DEVICES
(e.g. CPU, I2C bus,
MotherBoard, etc.)
O3
Generator PS 1
+5 VDC
±15 VDC
PUMP Configuration
(Internal Only) Jumpers
AC HEATERS ON / OFF
NO2 à NO Configuration SWITCH
(Converter & Jumpers
Reaction Cell)
Optional
AC HEATERS
( Internal Span
Generator Perm Tube Solenoid PS 2
Heater) Drivers (+12 VDC)
RELAY PCA
AC
MODEL SPECIFIC Fans: POWER IN
OPTIONAL
VALVES VALVES TEC and
(e.g. NOX – NO Valves, (e.g. Sample/Cal,
Auto-zero valves, etc.) Chassis
Zero/Span, Shutoff,
etc.)
Figure 13-22: Power Distribution Block Diagram
13.7.1. AC POWER CONFIGURATION

The T200 analyzer’s digital components will operate with any of the specified power
regimes. As long as instrument is connected to 100-120 VAC or 220-240 VAC at either
50 or 60 Hz,. Internally, the status LEDs located on the Relay PCA, Motherboard and
CPU should turn on as soon as the power is supplied.
However, some of the analyzer’s non-digital components, such as the various internal
pump options or the AC powered heaters for the NO2 à NO converter the reaction cell
and some of the T200’s must be properly configured for the type of power being
supplied to the instrument.
Configuration of the power circuits is set using several jumper sets located on the
instruments relay PCA.
322 06858F DCN8038

RELAY PCA
JP6
Configuration Jumpers
for Optional AC Heaters
(O2 Sensor, Internal Perm
Tube Oven Heater)
JP2
JP7 Configuration Jumpers
Pump for AC Heaters
Configuration (NO2 à NO converter,
(Internal Pump Reaction Cell)
Options Only)
Figure 13-23: Location of AC power Configuration Jumpers
06858F DCN8038 323

13.7.1.1. AC CONFIGURATION – INTERNAL PUMP (JP7)

If your T200 includes an internal pump the following table, jumper set JP7 is used to
configure the power supplied to it as shown in Figure 13-24.
Table 13-6: AC Power Configuration for Internal Pumps (JP7)

JUMPER
LINE LINE JUMPER
FUNCTION BETWEEN
POWER FREQUENCY COLOR
PINS
Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line 2 to 7
60 HZ WHITE Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line 3 to 8
110VAC Connects pump pins 2 & 4 to Neutral 4 to 9

115 VAC Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line 2 to 7
50 HZ1 BLACK Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line 3 to 8
Connects pump pins 2 & 4 to Neutral 4 to 9
Connects pump pins 3 and 4 together 1 to 6
60 HZ BROWN
220VAC Connects pump pin 1 to 220 / 240VAC power line 3 to 8
240 VAC Connects pump pins 3 and 4 together 1 to 6
50 HZ1 BLUE
Connects pump pin 1 to 220 / 240VAC power line 3 to 8
1 A jumper between pins 5 and 10 may be present on the jumper plug assembly, but has no function on the Model T200.
110 VAC /115 VAC 220 VAC /240 VAC
1 6 1 6
2 7 2 7
3 8 3 8
4 9 4 9
5 10 5 10
May be present on 50 Hz version of

jumper set, but is not functional on
the T200
Figure 13-24: Pump AC Power Jumpers (JP7)
324 06858F DCN8038

13.7.1.2. AC CONFIGURATION – STANDARD HEATERS (JP2)

Power configuration for the AC the standard heaters is set using Jumper set JP2 (see
Figure 13-25 for the location of JP2).
Table 13-7: Power Configuration for Standard AC Heaters (JP2)

JUMPER
JUMPER
LINE VOLTAGE HEATER(S) BETWEEN FUNCTION
COLOR
PINS
1 to 8 Common
Reaction Cell / Sample
Chamber Heaters 2 to 7 Neutral to Load
110 VAC / 115 VAC 4 to 9 Neutral to Load
50Hz & 60 Hz
WHITE
3 to 10 Common
Moly Converter 4 to 9 Neutral to Load
6 to 11 Neutral to Load
Reaction Cell / Sample

220 VAC / 240 VAC Chamber Heaters 1 to 7 Load
BLUE
50Hz & 60 Hz
Moly Converter 3 to 9 Load
Figure 13-25: Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP2)
06858F DCN8038 325

13.7.1.3. AC CONFIGURATION – HEATERS FOR OPTION PACKAGES (JP6)

The IZS valve option includes an AC heaters that maintain an optimum operating
temperature for key components of those options. Jumper set JP6 is used to connect the
heaters associated with those options to AC power. Since these heaters work with either
110/155 VAC or 220/240 VAC, there is only one jumper configuration.
Table 13-8: Power Configuration for Optional Heaters (JP6)

JUMPER
JUMPER
HEATER(S) BETWEEN FUNCTION
COLOR
PINS
Internal Permeation Tube 1 to 8 Common

RED
Oven Heater
2 to 7 Neutral to Load
IZS 10 9
Permeation Tube 12 11 8 7
Heater
6 5 4 3 2 1
Figure 13-26: Typical Jumper Set (JP2) Set Up of Heaters
326 06858F DCN8038

13.8. FRONT PANEL TOUCHSCREEN/DISPLAY INTERFACE

Users can input data and receive information directly through the front panel
touchscreen display. The LCD display is controlled directly by the CPU board. The
touchscreen is interfaced to the CPU by means of a touchscreen controller that connects
to the CPU via the internal USB bus and emulates a computer mouse.
Figure 13-27: Front Panel and Display Interface Block Diagram
06858F DCN8038 327

13.8.1. LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD

The LVDS (low voltage differential signaling) transmitter board converts the parallel
display bus to a serialized, low voltage, differential signal bus in order to transmit the
video signal to the LCD interface PCA.
13.8.2. FRONT PANEL TOUCHSCREEN/DISPLAY INTERFACE PCA

The front panel interface PCA controls the various functions of the display and
touchscreen. For driving the display it provides connection between the CPU video
controller and the LCD display module. This PCA also contains:
• power supply circuitry for the LCD display module
• a USB hub that is used for communications with the touchscreen controller and
the two front panel USB device ports
• the circuitry for powering the display backlight
13.9. SOFTWARE OPERATION

The T200 has a high performance, VortexX86-based microcomputer running
WINDOWS CE. Inside the WINDOWS CE shell, special software developed by
Teledyne API interprets user commands via the various interfaces, performs procedures
and tasks, stores data in the CPU’s various memory devices and calculates the
concentration of the sample gas.
Windows CE
API FIRMWARE
ANALYZER
MEMORY HANDLING OPERATIONS
DAS Records Calibration Procedures PC-104 BUSS
Calibration Data Configuration Procedures
System Status Data Autonomic Systems
Diagnostic Routines
ANALYZER
HARDWARE
INTERFACE HANDLING
Sensor input Data Display
Messages
MEASUREMENT
Touchscreen PC-104 BUSS
ALGORITHM
Analog Output Data
RS232 & RS485
External Digital I/O
Figure 13-28: Basic Software Operation
328 06858F DCN8038

13.9.1. ADAPTIVE FILTER

The T200 NOX analyzer software processes sample gas concentration data through a
built-in adaptive filter. Unlike other analyzers that average the output signal over a
fixed time period, the T200 averages over a defined number of samples, with samples
being about 8 seconds apart (reflecting the switching time of 4 s each for NO and NOX).
This technique is known as boxcar filtering. During operation, the software may
automatically switch between two different filters lengths based on the conditions at
hand.
During constant or nearly constant concentrations, the software, by default, computes an
average of the last 42 samples, or approximately 5.6 minutes. This provides smooth and
stable readings and averages out a considerable amount of random noise for an overall
less noisy concentration reading.
If the filter detects rapid changes in concentration the filter reduces the averaging to only
6 samples or about 48 seconds to allow the analyzer to respond more quickly. Two
conditions must be simultaneously met to switch to the short filter. First, the
instantaneous concentration must differ from the average in the long filter by at least 50
ppb. Second, the instantaneous concentration must differ from the average in the long
filter by at least 10% of the average in the long filter
13.9.2. TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE COMPENSATION (TPC)

The T200 software includes a feature that compensates for some temperature and
pressure changes that might affect measurement of NO and NOX concentrations.
When the TPC feature is enabled (default setting), the analyzer divides the value of the
PMT output signal (PMTDET) by a value called TP_FACTOR, which is calculated
using the following four parameters:
• BOX TEMP: The temperature inside the analyzer’s case measured in K. This is
typically about 5 K higher than room temperature.
• RCELL TEMP: The temperature of the reaction cell, measured in K.
• RCEL: The pressure of the gas in the vacuum manifold, measured in in-Hg-A.
• SAMP: The pressure of the sample gas before it reaches the reaction cell,
measured in in-Hg-A. This measurement is ~1 in-Hg-A lower than atmospheric
pressure.
As RCEL TEMP, BOX TEMP, RCELL and SAMP pressure increase, the value of
TP_FACTOR increases and, hence, the PMTDET value decreases. These adjustments
are meant to counter-act changes in the concentrations caused by these parameters.
• The current value of all four of these measurements are viewable as TEST
FUNCTIONS through the instrument’s front panel display (see Section 4.1.1).
• The preset gain parameters are set at the factory and may vary from analyzer to
analyzer. The TPC feature is enabled or disabled by setting the value of the
variable TPC_ENABLE (see Section 5.8).
06858F DCN8038 329

13.9.3. CALIBRATION - SLOPE AND OFFSET

Calibration of the analyzer is performed exclusively in software. During instrument
calibration, (see Sections 9 and 10) the user enters expected values for zero and span via
the front panel touchscreen control and commands the instrument to make readings of
calibrated sample gases for both levels.
• The readings taken are adjusted, linearized and compared to the expected values.
• With this information, the software computes values for instrument slope and offset
and stores these values in memory for use in calculating the NOx, NO and NO2
concentrations of the sample gas.
The instrument slope and offset values recorded during the last calibration can be
viewed via the instrument’s front panel (see Section 4.1.1).
330 06858F DCN8038

GLOSSARY
Term Description/Definition
10BaseT an Ethernet standard that uses twisted (“T”) pairs of copper wires to transmit at 10
megabits per second (Mbps)
100BaseT same as 10BaseT except ten times faster (100 Mbps)
APICOM name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne-API to its customers
ASSY Assembly
CAS Code-Activated Switch
CD Corona Discharge, a frequently luminous discharge, at the surface of a conductor or

between two conductors of the same transmission line, accompanied by ionization of the
surrounding atmosphere and often by a power loss
CE Converter Efficiency, the percentage of the total amount that is actually converted (e.g.,
light energy into electricity; NO2 into NO, etc.)
CEM Continuous Emission Monitoring
Chemical elements that may be included in this document:

CO2 carbon dioxide
C3H8 propane
CH4 methane
H2O water vapor
HC general abbreviation for hydrocarbon
HNO3 nitric acid
H2S hydrogen sulfide
NO nitric oxide
NO2 nitrogen dioxide
NOX nitrogen oxides, here defined as the sum of NO and NO2
NOy nitrogen oxides, often called odd nitrogen: the sum of NOX plus other compounds such as HNO3
(definitions vary widely and may include nitrate (NO3), PAN, N2O and other compounds as well)
NH3 ammonia
O2 molecular oxygen
O3 ozone
SO2 sulfur dioxide
cm3 metric abbreviation for cubic centimeter (replaces the obsolete abbreviation “cc”)
CPU Central Processing Unit
DAC Digital-to-Analog Converter
DAS Data Acquisition System
DCE Data Communication Equipment
DFU Dry Filter Unit
06858F DCN8038 331

Glossary Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOx Analyzer Operation Manual
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol used by LAN or Internet servers to
automatically set up the interface protocols between themselves and any other
addressable device connected to the network
DIAG Diagnostics, the diagnostic settings of the analyzer.
DOM Disk On Module, a 44-pin IDE flash drive with up to 128MB storage capacity for
instrument’s firmware, configuration settings and data
DOS Disk Operating System
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
DR-DOS Digital Research DOS
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory also referred to as a FLASH chip
or drive
ESD Electro-Static Discharge
ETEST Electrical Test
Ethernet a standardized (IEEE 802.3) computer networking technology for local area networks
(LANs), facilitating communication and sharing resources
FEP Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene polymer, one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as
Teflon®
Flash non-volatile, solid-state memory
FPI Fabry-Perot Interface: a special light filter typically made of a transparent plate with two
reflecting surfaces or two parallel, highly reflective mirrors
GFC Gas Filter Correlation
I2C bus a clocked, bi-directional, serial bus for communication between individual analyzer
components
IC Integrated Circuit, a modern, semi-conductor circuit that can contain many basic
components such as resistors, transistors, capacitors etc in a miniaturized package used in
electronic assemblies
IP Internet Protocol
IZS Internal Zero Span
LAN Local Area Network
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
332 06858F DCN8038

Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual Glossary
LPM Liters Per Minute
MFC Mass Flow Controller
M/R Measure/Reference
NDIR Non-Dispersive Infrared
MOLAR the mass, expressed in grams, of 1 mole of a specific substance. Conversely, one mole is
MASS the amount of the substance needed for the molar mass to be the same number in grams
as the atomic mass of that substance.
EXAMPLE: The atomic weight of Carbon is 12 therefore the molar mass of Carbon is 12
grams. Conversely, one mole of carbon equals the amount of carbon atoms that weighs
12 grams.
Atomic weights can be found on any Periodic Table of Elements.
NDIR Non-Dispersive Infrared
NIST-SRM National Institute of Standards and Technology - Standard Reference Material
PC Personal Computer
PCA Printed Circuit Assembly, the PCB with electronic components, ready to use
PC/AT Personal Computer / Advanced Technology
PCB Printed Circuit Board, the bare board without electronic component
PFA Per-Fluoro-Alkoxy, an inert polymer; one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon®
PLC Programmable Logic Controller, a device that is used to control instruments based on a
logic level signal coming from the analyzer
PLD Programmable Logic Device
PLL Phase Lock Loop
PMT Photo Multiplier Tube, a vacuum tube of electrodes that multiply electrons collected and
charged to create a detectable current signal
P/N (or PN) Part Number
PSD Prevention of Significant Deterioration
PTFE Poly-Tetra-Fluoro-Ethylene, a very inert polymer material used to handle gases that may
react on other surfaces; one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon®
PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride, a polymer used for downstream tubing
Rdg Reading
RS-232 specification and standard describing a serial communication method between DTE (Data
Terminal Equipment) and DCE (Data Circuit-terminating Equipment) devices, using a
maximum cable-length of 50 feet
RS-485 specification and standard describing a binary serial communication method among
multiple devices at a data rate faster than RS-232 with a much longer distance between
the host and the furthest device
SAROAD Storage and Retrieval of Aerometric Data
06858F DCN8038 333

Glossary Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOx Analyzer Operation Manual
SLAMS State and Local Air Monitoring Network Plan
SLPM Standard Liters Per Minute of a gas at standard temperature and pressure
STP Standard Temperature and Pressure
TCP/IP Transfer Control Protocol / Internet Protocol, the standard communications protocol for
Ethernet devices
TEC Thermal Electric Cooler
TPC Temperature/Pressure Compensation
USB Universal Serial Bus: a standard connection method to establish communication between
peripheral devices and a host controller, such as a mouse and/or keyboard and a personal
computer or laptop
VARS Variables, the variable settings of the instrument
V-F Voltage-to-Frequency
Z/S Zero / Span
334 06858F DCN8038

INDEX
BOX TEMP, 66, 76, 77, 120, 145, 235
BOX TEMP WARNING, 66, 77, 145
A
AC Power, 19, 322, 324
115 VAC, 324 C
50 HZ, 324 CAL Button, 78, 280
60 Hz, 19, 248, 322, 324 CAL_ON_NO2, 100
AIN, 118 CALCHEK, 150
AMBIENT ZERO/SPAN VALVE OPTION, 53 CALDAT, 150
AMBIENT ZERO/SPAN VALVE OPTION Calibration
Flow Diagram, 56 AIN, 118
INTERNAL PNEUMATICS, 56 Analog Ouputs, 27, 79, 110
Valve States, 56 ANALOG OUTPUTS
Ambient Zero/Span Valve Options Current Loop, 113, 115
Rear Panel, 54 VOLTAGE, 111
Ammonia (NH3), 63 Initial Calibration
ANALOG CAL WARNING, 66, 77, 145 Basic Configuration, 68, 69, 71
Analog Inputs, 118 Calibration Checks, 181, 182, 194
Analog Outputs, 19, 34, 35, 36, 38, 76, 79, 80, 82, Calibration Gases, 179
83, 102, 235, 251, 308 Span Gas, 49, 51, 55, 57, 58, 68, 70, 82, 102, 177,
AIN Calibration, 118 178, 179, 180, 182, 184, 190, 195, 199, 280
Configuration & Calibration, 80, 106, 107, 108, 109, Dilution Feature, 92
110, 112, 114, 116, 117, 118 Standard Reference Materials (SRM’s)
Automatic, 27, 79, 110 NOx/NO Span Gas, 49, 180
Manual-Current Loop, 113, 115 Zero Air, 30, 48, 51, 177, 178, 179, 182, 199
MANUAL-VOLTAGE, 111 Calibration Mode, 78
Converting Voltage to Current Output, 36 CALS BUTTON, 78, 193, 280
Current Loop, 83 CALZ Button, 78, 193
Electronic Range Selection, 85, 107 CANNOT DYN SPAN, 66, 77, 145
IND Mode Assignments, 86 CANNOT DYN ZERO, 66, 77, 145
OUTPUT LOOP-BACK, 308
Reporting Range, 69, 75, 76, 79
chemiluminescence, 15, 68, 248, 283, 284, 286,
Test Channel, 34, 35, 120, 235, 251, 308 287, 288, 289, 290, 293, 294, 303, 316
APICOM, 124, 169 Chemiluminescence, 284, 285, 293, 294, 316
and DAS, 147, 149, 151, 154, 159, 161, 163, 165, 167 Circuit Breaker, 321
and Ethernet, 129 CLOCK_ADJ, 97, 100
and Failure Prediction, 209 CO2, 49, 68, 180
Approvals, 19 COMM PORT
ATIMER, 149, 154, 156 Default Settings, 43
AUTO, 89, 177 COMM Ports, 124
AutoCal, 76, 79, 177, 197, 198, 199 and DAS System, 163
AutoZero, 214, 232, 242, 247, 248, 275, 287, 293, Baud Rate, 126
COM1, 44, 140
295, 299
COM2, 44, 124, 140
Pneumatic Flow, 288, 303
Communication Modes, 124, 125
Test Function, 75
Machine ID, 46
Valve, 76, 120, 187, 213, 232, 235, 247, 292, 293, 312
Parity, 124, 138
Warnings, 66, 247
Testing, 126
AUTOZERO
CONC, 150
WARNINGS, 145
AZERO, 66, 75, 77, 150, 209, 230, 232, 248, 287, CONC Button, 100, 253, 280
293 CONC_PRECISION, 100
DAS Parameter, 150 Concentration Field, 27
AZERO WARN, 66, 77 CONFIG INITIALIZED, 66, 77
Continuous Emission Monitoring (CEM), 91
Control Buttons Definition Field, 27
B Control Inputs, 38, 177, 197, 254, 281, 308
Baud Rate, 138 SPAN_CAL 1, 254
06858F DCN8038 335

Index Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual
ZERO_CAL, 254 Desorber

CONV TEMP WARNING, 66, 77, 145 HNO3, 62
CPU, 42, 43, 66, 77, 97, 105, 118, 228, 231, 233, DHCP, 131
236, 248, 256, 257, 303, 304, 305, 308, 309, 310, DIAG
312, 322, 328 DAS Channel, 150
Analog to Digital Converter, 66, 77, 105, 252, 305, 308 DIAG AIO, 102
STATUS LED’S, 236 DIAG AOUT, 102
Critical Flow Orifices, 223, 293, 294, 295 DIAG ELEC, 102
CriticalflowOrifices, 295 DIAG FCAL, 102
CriticalFlowOrifices, 281, 294 DIAG I/O, 102
Current Loop Outputs, 34, 36, 83, 113, 115 DIAG OPTIC, 102
Converting from Voltage Output, 36 DIAG TCHN, 102
Manual Calibration, 113 DIAGNOSTIC MENU (DIAG), 80, 93, 94, 95, 251
Accesing, 103
D AIN Calibrated, 105
AIN CALIBRATED, 118
DAS System, 27, 66, 73, 76, 77, 79, 96, 230 Analog I/O
and APICOM, 166, 168 AOUT CALIBRATED Configuration, 105, 109
and Terminal Emulation Programs, 168 CONC_OUT_1, 105
Channel Names, 155 CONC_OUT_2, 105
Channels, 148, 152 CONC_OUT_3, 105
CALCHEK, 150 Analog I/O Configuration, 102, 106, 107, 108, 109, 110,
CALDAT, 150 112, 114, 116, 117, 118
CONC, 150 Analog Output Step Test, 102, 251
Defaults, 150 Electrical Test, 102
DIAG, 150 Flow Calibration, 102
HIRES, 150 Optic Test, 102
Compact Data Report, 165 OZONE GEN OVERRIDE, 102
Default Settings, 150 Signal I/O, 102
HOLD OFF, 100, 149, 164 SIGNAL I/O, 233, 234, 236, 250, 252, 253, 254, 309
Number of Records, 149, 162 Test Chan Ouptut, 102
Parameters, 148, 149, 157 Test Output, 105
AZERO, 150 TEST OUTPUT, 308
HVPS, 150 Diagnostics, 209
NXCNC1, 154 Dilution Ratio, 49
PMTDET, 149 Display Precision, 100
STABIL, 150 DUAL, 177
Precision, 157
DYN_SPAN, 100
Report Period, 149, 160, 165
Sample Mode
DYN_ZERO, 100
AVG, 157, 158, 159, 161 Dynamic Span, 100
INST, 157, 158, 159, 161 Dynamic Zero, 100
MAX, 157
MIN, 157, 158, 159, 161
SDEV, 157, 158, 159, 161 E
Sample Period, 160 EEPROM
Starting Date, 165 Disk on Module, 159, 230
Store Number of Samples, 157, 158, 159, 161 Electrical Connections
Triggerning Events, 148, 149, 156 AC Power, 322, 323
ATIMER, 149, 154, 156 Analog Outputs, 34, 35, 83
EXITZR, 156 Current Loop, 36, 113
SLPCHG, 150, 156 Voltage Ranges, 111
DAS_HOLD_OFF, 100 Control Inputs, 38, 254
DATA INITIALIZED, 66, 77 Ethernet, 80, 129
DB-25M, 18 Modem, 172, 257
DB-9F, 18 Multidrop, 47
DC Power, 37, 38, 249, 250, 321 Serial/COMM Ports, 41, 43
DC Power Test Points, 249 Electrical Test, 102, 243, 266, 319
Default Settings Electro-Static Discharge, 23, 44
COMM PORT, 43 ENTR Button, 80, 95, 161, 202, 207
DAS, 149, 150 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
Hessen Protocol, 141, 145 Calibration, 49
VARS, 100
336 06858F DCN8038

Teledyne API – T200 NO/NO2/NOX Analyzer Operation Manual Index
Environmental Protection Agency(EPA), 20, 49, Modes, 145

178, 180 Unassigned Flags, 145
Calibration, 68, 78, 177, 180 Unused Bits, 145
ETEST, 278 Warnings, 145
Ethernet, 73, 129 types, 140
Configuration High voltage power supply (HVPS), 66, 76
using DHCP, 131 HIRES, 150
DHCP, 131 HNO3, 60, 62
HOSTNAME, 133 Desorber, 62
Exhaust Gas, 30 HVPS, 76
Exhaust Gas Outlet, 30, 52, 55, 59 DAS Parameter, 150
Exhaust Manifold, 61 HVPS WARNING, 66, 77, 145
EXIT Button, 80
EXITZR, 156 I
I2C, 236, 303, 309, 310
F Status LED, 236
Final Test and Validation Data Sheet, 24, 67, 209 IND Range Mode, 86, 88
Flash Chip, 304 Interferents, 68
flow control assemblies, 293 Internal Pneumatics
Flow Diagram Sample Gas Dryer, 63
Scrubber
Pressurized Span Gas Inlet Option, 59
NH3, 63
Pressurized Zero Air Inlet, 59
FROM DRYER OUTLET, 60 Internal Pump, 324
Front Panel, 25, 281, 328 internal span gas Generator, 76
Concentration Field, 27 Internal Span Gas Generator, 60, 66, 100
Display, 102, 120, 230, 231 and Nitric Acid (HNO3), 62
Message Field, 27 AutoCal, 198
Mode Field, 27 Hessen Flags, 145
Status LED’s, 27, 147 Valve States, 63
Touchscreen Definition Field, 27 Warning Messages, 66, 77
FRONT PANEL WARN, 145 Internal Zero Air (IZS), 30
INVALID CONC, 145
IZE TEMP, 76
G IZS TEMP WARNING, 66, 77, 145
g IZS_SET, 100
Temperature, 76
Gas Inlets, 231
Sample, 30
M
Span, 30 Machine ID, 46
SPAN, 53, 57 Maintenance Schedule, 150, 207, 280, 291
ZERO AIR, 53, 55, 57, 60 MANIFOLD TEMP WARN, 145
ZERO AIR, 30 Material Safety Data Sheet, 296
Gas Outlets, 33, 68 MEASURE_MODE, 100
Exhaust, 30, 52, 55, 59 Menu Buttons
FROM DRYER, 60
CAL, 78, 280
CALS, 78, 193, 280
H CALZ, 78, 193
CONC, 100, 253, 280
H2O, 49, 68, 180 ENTR, 80, 95, 161, 202, 207
Heaters, 102, 157, 219, 220, 221, 222, 231, 232, EXIT, 80
237, 248, 250, 257, 271, 279, 290, 303, 310, 313, Message Field, 27
314, 322, 325, 326 Metal Wool Scrubber, 120, 235
Hessen Protocol, 124, 138, 140, 141, 145 microcomputer, 303, 328
and Reporting Ranges, 142 Mode Field, 27
Default Settings, 141 Modem, 172, 257
Gas List, 143, 144 MOLY TEMP, 76
Latency Period, 138 Motherboard, 77, 105, 113, 231, 236, 248, 251,
SETUP Parameters, 138 303, 305, 309, 322
Status Flag
Default Settings, 145
Multidrop, 46, 124, 138
06858F DCN8038 337

N Sensor
Flow, 256
Nafion®, 63, 297, 298 PRessure, 255
National Institute of Standards and Technology Physical Range, 75, 82
(NIST), 199 High Range, 82
Standard Reference Materials (SRM), 49, 57, 180 Low Range, 82
NH3, 48, 63, 68, 179, 290, 298 PMT, 66, 232, 235, 255, 265, 271, 274, 275, 285,
(NH3)2SO4, 290 288, 297, 301, 305, 306, 316, 320
nitric acid, 60, 62 (TEC), 228, 268, 276, 307, 316, 319, 320, 321
Sensor Control, 271
NO OFFSET, 76
AZERO, 209, 242
NO SLOPE, 76 Calibration, 274
NO2 à NO Converter, 66, 68, 76, 77, 187, 208, 219, Detector, 120
237, 243, 247, 257, 258, 262, 271, 273, 290, 292, Electric Test, 102
293, 299, 313 Electrical Test, 266
NORM PMT, 75 Gain Voltage, 317
NOX OFFSET, 76 Housing, 221, 224
NXCNC1, 154 HVPS, 267, 276, 278, 316
HVPS Voltage, 120, 235
Light Leaks, 224
O Maintenance, 208, 224
Noise, 242, 287
O2CELL TEMP WARN, 145 NORM PMT, 75, 275, 305
O3 Generator, 102, 211, 212, 230, 290, 297, 299, Offset, 287
301, 309 Optic Test, 102, 265, 319
O3 Option Output, 82, 287, 305, 317, 319
Relay PCA PMT TEMP, 76, 232, 271, 306
Status LED’s, 236, 237 PMT TEMP WARNING, 77, 145, 230, 235
Offset, 113, 230, 330 PMTDET, 235, 305, 317, 329
OFFSET, 207, 330 Preamplifier, 230, 267, 307, 309, 317, 318
ON/OFF Switch, 248, 321 PReamplifier, 274
Reaction Cell, 285
Operating Modes, 102
Replacement, 276
Calibration Mode, 78, 145
TEMP, 306
Diagnostic Mode (DIAG), 102
Temperature, 66, 277, 315, 317, 320
M-P CAL Mode, 145
Test Function, 75, 224, 232, 247
Sample Mode, 27
Theory of Operation, 316, 317
SAMPLE mode, 73, 74, 100, 197
Thermistors, 307
SAMPLE Mode, 56, 60, 63
Troubleshooting, 230, 242, 243, 244, 246
Secondary Setup, 80
With Zero NOx, 75
SPAN CAL, 56, 60, 63
Warm Up Mode, 145 PMT Preamp PCA, 102
ZERO CAL, 56, 60, 63 PMT TEMP, 76
Optic Test, 102 PMT TEMP WARNING, 66, 145
Optical Test, 265 PMTDET, 149
OTEST, 278 Pneumatic Sensors
Ozone, 15, 63, 66, 77, 102, 120, 122, 208, 212, O3 Flow, 301
Sample Gas Flow, 301
221, 222, 223, 226, 230, 235, 238, 239, 240, 241,
Sample Pressure, 300
242, 243, 245, 248, 262, 265, 269, 273, 283, 284, Vacuum Pressure, 300
295, 296, 297, 299, 301 Pneumatic Setu
OZONE FL, 75 Basic T200
OZONE FLOW WARNING, 66, 77, 145 Bottled Gas, 51
OZONE GEN OFF, 66, 77, 145, 230, 301 Pneumatic Setup
Ozone Generator, 66 Basic, 50
OZONE_FLOW, 252, 301, 306 Preamplifier, 230, 267, 307, 316, 317
Predictive Diagnostics, 147, 150, 169
P Using DAS, 150
Pressurized Span Gas Inlet Option
Particulate Filter, 210, 230, 231, 280 Rear Panel, 57
Perma Pure®, 290, 295, 297, 298, 301 Valve States, 60
Permeation Rate, 61, 100 Pressurized Zero Air Inlet
Permeation Tube, 60, 61, 62, 76, 100, 280 Valve States, 60
Photometer PTEF, 51, 52, 54, 55, 58, 59
338 06858F DCN8038

Pump Sample Pressure Sensor, 300

Sample, 230, 231, 324 SOx, 290
Purafil Chemisorbant, 60 Temperature, 314
Temperature Control, 290
Temperature Sensor, 307
R Test Functions, 120
Theory of Operation, 284, 285, 287
RANGE, 75, 142 Thermistor, 290
HIGH, 75 Third Body Quenching, 288
LOW, 75 Troubleshooting, 245, 248
Range Mode Vacuum Pressure Sensor, 300
AUTO, 89, 177 Reaction Cell Temperature, 76
DUAL, 177 REAR BOARD NOT DET, 66, 77
IND, 86, 88
SNGL, 69, 84
Rear Panel
Ambient Zero/Span Valve Options, 54
RANGE1, 75, 142 Analog Outputs, 83
AUTO, 89
Pressurized Span Gas Inlet Option, 57
IND, 86
REF_4096_MV, 252
RANGE2, 75, 142
AUTO, 89
REF_GND, 252
IND, 86 RELAY BOARD WARN, 66, 77, 145
RANGE3, 75, 86 relay PCA, 66, 77, 228, 249, 279, 303, 310, 311,
RCEL, 76 313, 314, 315, 321, 322
RCELL PRESS WARN, 66, 77, 145 Relay PCA, 309–16
RCELL TEMP, 76 DC Power Test Points, 249
Status LED’s, 236, 237, 311, 312, 322
RCELL TEMP WARNING, 66, 77, 145 Troubleshooting, 236, 237, 248, 249, 250
Reaction Cel Reporting Range, 69, 79, 82, 84
direct Interferencel, 288
Configuration, 79
Reaction Cell, 76, 214, 222, 223, 224, 269, 276, Dilution Feature, 91
278, 290, 291, 293, 295, 297, 299, 303, 306, 322 HIGH, 89
Auto Zero, 287 LOW, 89
Auto Zero Valve, 292, 312 Modes, 92
AutoZero, 295 AUTO, 89
AZERO, 293 IND, 86
Chemiluminescence, 285, 293 SNGL, 84
Cleaning, 221, 242, 247, 248 Upper Span Limit, 75, 82, 85, 86, 88, 92
Contamination, 242 RJ45, 18
Critical Flow Orifice RS-232, 15, 44, 45, 46, 73, 80, 128, 148, 149, 163,
Cleaning, 223
Critical Flow Orifices, 294, 296
165, 169, 305
Activity Indicators, 43
Dirty, 221, 230, 242, 245, 247, 248
Troubleshooting, 256
Dwell Time, 293
Gas Flow RS-485, 73, 124, 128, 305
Troubleshooting, 240
Gas Flow Caclulation, 301
Gas Inlets, 295
S
Heater, 271, 290 Safety Messages
Interferents, 68 ELECTRIC SHOCK, 33, 207, 224, 249, 272, 310
Light Leaks, 235, 289 General, 17, 23, 33, 47, 113, 296
Mounting Screws, 224 SAMP, 76
NH3, 290 SAMP FLW, 75
NO/NOX valve, 292 Sample Flow Sensor, 230
Optical Filter, 285
Ozone, 75, 295, 296
SAMPLE FLOW WARNING, 66, 77, 145
Scrubber, 299 Sample Gas Dryer
PMT, 316 Internal Pneumatics, 63
Pneumatice Leaks, 240 Sample Gas Line, 51, 55, 58
Principles of Operation, 284 Sample Inlet, 30
RCELL PRESS WARN, 66 Sample Mode, 27
RCELL PRESSURE, 235 SAMPLE mode, 73, 74, 100, 197
RCELL TEMP, 235, 329 Sample Pressure Sensor, 231
RCELL TEMP WARN, 66 Sample Temperature Sensor, 230, 231
SAMP, 329 Scrubber
SAMP FLOW, 75
NH3
06858F DCN8038 339

Internal Pneumatics, 63 ST_SYSTEM_OK, 253

Scubber ST_ZERO_CAL, 253
Zero Air, 15, 48, 179 STB (Stability Test function), 75, 100
Sensors SYSTEM
Sample Flow, 230 DEFAULT SETTINGS, 149
Sample Pressure, 231, 306 SYSTEM RESET, 66, 77, 145
Sample Temperature, 230, 231
Thermistors, 307
Box Temperature, 307 T
IZS Oven Temperature, 307
Reaction Cell Temperature, 307
Teledyne Contact Information
Email Address, 21, 281
Sample Temperature, 230, 231
Fax, 21, 281
Thermocouples
Phone, 21, 281
Inputs, 315
Technical Assistance, 281
VACUUM PRESSURE, 306
Website, 281
Serial I/O Ports, 20, 229, 231, 303
Modem, 172, 257
Temperature and Pressure Compensation (TPC),
Multidrop, 46, 124 100
RS-232, 15, 44, 73, 80, 148, 149, 163, 165, 169, 305 Terminal Mode, 170
Troubleshooting, 256 Command Syntax, 170
RS-485, 73, 124, 305 Computer mode, 124
Shutoff Valve Test Channel, 34, 35, 102, 105, 120, 235, 251
Span Gas, 57, 60 Test Functions, 67, 74, 75, 76, 105, 120, 209, 232,
Zero Air, 60 251
Signal I/O AZERO, 75
OZONE_FLOW, 252 BOX TEMP, 66, 76, 77, 145
REF_4096_MV, 252 HVPS, 76
REF_GND, 252 IZE TEMP, 76
Sintered Filter, 281 MOLY TEMP, 76
Slope, 230, 330 NO OFFSET, 76
SLOPE, 207, 330 NO SLOPE, 76
NORM PMT, 75
SLPCHG, 150, 156 NOX OFFSET, 76
SNGL, 69, 84 OFFSET, 207, 330
SNGL Range Mode, 84 OZONE FL, 75
SO2, 68 PMT, 75
SO3 FLOW SENSOR, 306 PMT TEMP, 76
Span Gas, 30, 49, 51, 55, 57, 58, 68, 70, 82, 102, RANGE, 75, 142
177, 178, 179, 180, 182, 184, 190, 195, 199, 280 RANGE1, 75, 142
Dilution Feature, 92 AUTO, 89
Standard Reference Materials (SRM’s) ) IND, 86
NOx/NO Span Gas, 49, 180 RANGE2, 75, 142
Span Inlet, 30, 53, 57 AUTO, 89
IND, 86
SPAN_CAL 1, 254
RANGE3, 75, 86
Specifications, 19 RCEL, 76
STABIL RCELL TEMP, 76
DAS Parameter, 150 SAMP, 76
STABIL_GAS, 100 SAMP FLW, 75
Standard Reference Materials (SRM), 57, 58 SLOPE, 207, 330
Standard Temperature and Pressure, 91 STB (Stability), 75, 100
TEST4, 76
status LED’s, 313
Status LED’s TIME, 76, 199
CPU, 236 , 76
TEST4
I2C, 236 Thermistors, 307, 314

Relay PCA, 236, 311, 312, 322 Thermocouples, 219, 232, 237, 257, 258, 314, 315
O3 Option, 237 Inputs, 315
Watchdog, 236, 312 Thermo-Electric Cooler, 287, 316, 317, 319, 320,
Status Outputs, 37, 89, 253, 308 See
ST_CONC_VALID, 253 TIME, 76, 199
ST_DIAG, 253
TPC_ENABLE, 100
ST_HIGH_RANGE, 253
ST_O2_CAL, 253
ST_SPAN_CAL, 253
340 06858F DCN8038

U STABIL_GAS, 100
TPC_ENABLE, 100
Units of Measurement, 69, 91, 92 Ventilation Clearance, 24
Volumetric Units vs Mass Units, 91 Venting, 51, 52, 55, 58
visible light spectrum, 289
V
vacuum manifold, 215, 223, 224, 238, 274, 287,
W
291, 292, 293 warm-up period, 64
Vacuum Manifold, 76, 224, 329 Warning Messages, 64, 66, 77, 228, 230
Valve Options, 30, 68, 194, 195 ANALOG CAL WARNING, 66, 77, 145
Ambient Zero/Span Valve Option, 53 AUTOZERO WARNING, 145
Flow Diagram, 56 AZERO WARN, 66, 77
INTERNAL PNEUMATICS, 56 BOX TEMP WARNING, 66, 77, 145
Rear Panel, 54 CANNOT DYN SPAN, 66, 77, 145
Valve States, 56 CANNOT DYN ZERO, 66, 77, 145
Internal Span Gas Generator, 60, 66, 100 CONFIG INITIALIZED, 66, 77
AC Power, 326 CONV TEMP WARNING, 66, 145
AutoCal, 198 DATA INITIALIZED, 66, 77
Flow Diagram, 62 FRONT PANEL WARN, 145
Hessen Flags, 145 HVPS WARNING, 66, 77, 145
Internal Span Gas Generation, 61 INVALID CONC, 145
Test Channel Functions, 120, 235 IZS TEMP WARNING, 66, 77, 145
Valve States, 63 MANIFOLD TEMP WARN, 145
Warning Messages, 66, 77 O2 CELL TEMP WARN, 145
Pressurized Span Gas Inlet Option OZONE FLOW WARNING, 66, 77, 145
Flow Diagram, 59 OZONE GEN OFF, 66, 77, 145
Rear Panel, 57 PMT TEMP WARNING, 66, 77, 145
Pressurized Zero Air Inlet RCELL PRESS WARN, 66, 77, 145
Flow Diagram, 59 RCELL TEMP WARNING, 66, 77, 145
Valve States, 60 REAR BOARD NOT DET, 66, 77
Shutoff Valve RELAY BOARD WARN, 66, 77, 145
Span Gas, 57, 60 SAMPLE FLOW WARNING, 66, 77, 145
Zero Air, 60 SYSTEM RESET, 66, 77, 145
Zero/Span WARNING MESSAGES
and AutoCal, 177, 197 CONV TEMP WARNING, 77
Calibration, 68, 193 Watchdog Circuit, 236
with Remote Contact Closure, 197 Status LED, 236, 312
VARS MENU, 80, 93, 94, 95, 97, 100, 101, 149,
164
VARIABLE DEFAULT VALUES, 100 Z
Variable Names Zero Air, 30, 48, 51, 61, 122, 177, 178, 179, 182,
CAL_ON_NO2, 100 199
CLOCK_ADJ, 100
ZERO AIR INLET, 53, 55, 57, 60
CONC_PRECISION, 100
DAS_HOLD_OFF, 100 ZERO AIR Inlet, 30
DYN_SPAN, 100 Zero Air Scrubber, 48
DYN_ZERO, 100 ZERO/SPAN valve, 197
IZS_SET, 100 ZERO_CAL, 254
MEASURE_MODE, 100
06858F DCN8038 341

342 06858F DCN8038

Teledyne API - T200, T204 and 200E Series (05295F DCN6900) APPENDIX A: Version Specific Software Documentation
APPENDIX A: Version Specific Software Documentation
APPENDIX A-1: SOFTWARE MENU TREES, VERSION 1.1.0 (T200, T204)/KB7 (200E) ........... 3
APPENDIX A-2: SETUP VARIABLES ....................................................................................... 9
APPENDIX A-3: WARNINGS AND TEST MEASUREMENTS ..................................................... 10
APPENDIX A-4: SIGNAL I/O DEFINITIONS ......................................................................... 16
APPENDIX A-5: TRIGGER EVENTS AND DAS PARAMETERS .................................................. 22
APPENDIX A-6: TERMINAL COMMAND DESIGNATORS ........................................................ 26
APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS REGISTER MAP ............................................................................ 28

06858F DCN8038 A-1

APPENDIX A: Version Specific Software Documentation Teledyne API - T200, T204 and 200E Series (05295F DCN6900)
A-2 06858F DCN8038

Teledyne API - T200, T204 and 200E Series (05295F DCN6900) APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Version 1.1.0 (T200, T204)/Kb7 (200E)
APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Version 1.1.0 (T200, T204)/Kb7 (200E)
Figure A-1: Basic Sample Display Menu
06858F DCN8038 A-3

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Version 1.1.0 (T200, T204)/Kb7 (200E) Teledyne API - T200, T204 and 200E Series (05295F DCN6900)
SAMPLE SETUP
CFG ACAL1 DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
ON
<PREV NEXT> PREV NEXT MODE OFF
Go to iDAS TIME DATE
Menu Tree
SEQ 1) Go to SECONDARY SETUP
MODEL TYPE AND SEQ 2) Menu Tree
NUMBER SEQ 3)
PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
SOFTWARE REVISION MODE SET UNIT
LIBRARY REVISION
iCHIP SOFTWARE
REVISION
PREV NEXT
CPU TYPE & OS
SNGL IND AUTO PPB PPM UGM MGM
REVISION
DATE FACTORY DISABLED
CONFIGURATION SAVED
SETUP X.X LOW RANGE:500.0 Conc
ZERO
ZERO-SPAN 0 0 5 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
SPAN
SETUP X.X HIGH RANGE:500.0 Conc
0 0 5 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
2
SET
ON
TIMER ENABLE
<SET SET> OFF
4
STARTING DATE
STARTING TIME4
DELTA DAYS4
1
DELTA TIME4
ACAL menu and its submenus only appear if the analyzer is
equipped with calibration valves or the internal span gas DURATION
generator. ON
2
Appears whenever the currently displayed sequence is not set CALIBRATE
for DISABLED. OFF
3
Only appears when reporting range is set to AUTO range mode. RANGE TO CAL3
4
Only Appears if TIME ENABLE is set to “ON”.
LOW HIGH
Figure A-2: Primary Setup Menu (Except DAS)
A-4 06858F DCN8038

Figure A-3: Secondary Setup Menu (COMM & VARS)
06858F DCN8038 A-5

Go to Menu Go to Menu
Go to Menu Tree
Tree Tree
Set/create unique
gas ID number
Figure A-4: Secondary Setup Menu (HESSEN)
A-6 06858F DCN8038

Figure A-5: Secondary Setup Menu (DIAG)
06858F DCN8038 A-7

Figure A-6: Internal Data Acquisition (DAS) Menu
A-8 06858F DCN8038

Teledyne API - T200, T204 and 200E Series (05295F DCN6900) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables

Table A-1: Setup Variables
Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Range Description

Units Value
DAS_HOLD_OFF Minutes 15 0.5–20 Duration of DAS hold off period.
MEASURE_MODE — NO-NOX, NO, Gas measure mode. Enclose value in
NOX 4 NOX, NOX-NO, double quotes (") when setting from the
NON-OX RS-232 interface.
STABIL_GAS — NOX NO, Selects gas for stability measurement.
NO2, Enclose value in double quotes (") when
NOX, setting from the RS-232 interface.
5
O2 ,
6
CO2
TPC_ENABLE — ON OFF, ON ON enables temperature/ pressure
compensation; OFF disables it.
DYN_ZERO — OFF ON, OFF ON enables remote dynamic zero
calibration; OFF disables it.
DYN_SPAN — OFF ON, OFF ON enables remote dynamic span
calibration; OFF disables it.
IZS_SET 1 ºC 51 30–70 IZS temperature set point and warning
limits.
Warnings:
50–52
CONC_PRECISION — AUTO 1, AUTO, Number of digits to display to the right of
2, 3 0, the decimal point for concentrations on the
3
1, display. Enclose value in double quotes (")
2, when setting from the RS-232 interface.
3,
4
STAT_REP_GAS 4 — NOX NO, Selects gas to report in TAI protocol status
NO2, message. Enclose value in double quotes
NOX, (") when setting from the RS-232 interface.
6
CO2 ,
5
O2
REM_CAL_DURATI Minutes 20 1–120 Duration of automatic calibration initiated
ON 4 from TAI protocol.
CLOCK_ADJ Sec./Da 0 -60–60 Time-of-day clock speed adjustment.
y
1
CAL_ON_NO2 — OFF ON, OFF ON enables span calibration on pure NO2;
OFF disables it.
SERVICE_CLEAR — OFF OFF ON resets the service interval timer.
ON
TIME_SINCE_SVC Hours 0 0–500000 Time since last service.
SVC_INTERVAL Hours 0 0–100000 Sets the interval between service
reminders.
1
T200 and M200E.
2
T200H and M200EH.
3
T200U and M200EU.
4
TAI protocol
5
O2 option.
6
CO2 option.
06858F DCN8038 A-9

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements Teledyne API - T200, T204 and 200E Series (05295F DCN6900)
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements

Table A-2: Warning Messages
Warning Name 1 Message Text Description

WSYSRES SYSTEM RESET Instrument was power-cycled or the
CPU was reset.
WDATAINIT DATA INITIALIZED Data storage was erased.
WCONFIGINIT CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration storage was reset to
factory configuration or erased.
9
WNOXALARM1 NOX ALARM 1 WARN NOX concentration alarm limit #1
exceeded
9
WNOXALARM2 NOX ALARM 2 WARN NOX concentration alarm limit #2
exceeded
9
WNOALARM1 NO ALARM 1 WARN NO concentration alarm limit #1
exceeded
9
WNOALARM2 NO ALARM 2 WARN NO concentration alarm limit #2
exceeded
9
WNO2ALARM1 NO2 ALARM 1 WARN NO2 concentration alarm limit #1
exceeded
9
WNO2ALARM2 NO2 ALARM 2 WARN NO2 concentration alarm limit #2
exceeded
5+9
WO2ALARM1 O2 ALARM 1 WARN O2 concentration alarm limit #1
exceeded
5+9
WO2ALARM2 O2 ALARM 2 WARN O2 concentration alarm limit #2
exceeded
8+9
WCO2ALARM1 CO2 ALARM 1 WARN CO2 concentration alarm limit #1
exceeded
8+9
WCO2ALARM2 CO2 ALARM 2 WARN CO2 concentration alarm limit #2
exceeded
WO3ALARM1 13 O3 ALARM1 WARNING O3 concentration alarm limit #1
exceeded
WO3ALARM2 13 O3 ALARM2 WARNING O3 concentration alarm limit #2
exceeded
WSAMPFLOW SAMPLE FLOW WARN Sample flow outside of warning
limits.
WOZONEFLOW OZONE FLOW WARNING Ozone flow outside of warning limits.
WOZONEGEN OZONE GEN OFF Ozone generator is off. This is the
only warning message that
automatically clears itself. It clears
itself when the ozone generator is
turned on.
A-10 06858F DCN8038

Teledyne API - T200, T204 and 200E Series (05295F DCN6900) Appendix A3: Warnings and Test Measurements, Software Version K.3

WRCELLPRESS RCELL PRESS WARN Reaction cell pressure outside of
warning limits.
WBOXTEMP BOX TEMP WARNING Chassis temperature outside of
warning limits.
WRCELLTEMP RCELL TEMP WARNING Reaction cell temperature outside of
warning limits.
4
WMANIFOLDTEMP MANIFOLD TEMP WARN Bypass or dilution manifold
temperature outside of warning
limits.
8
WCO2CELLTEMP CO2 CELL TEMP WARN CO2 sensor cell temperature outside
of warning limits.
5
WO2CELLTEMP O2 CELL TEMP WARN O2 sensor cell temperature outside of
warning limits.
WO3CELLTEMP 13 O3 CELL TEMP WARN O3 sensor sample temperature
outside of warning limits.
WO3PHOTOREF 13 O3 CELL PHOTOREF WARN O3 sensor photometer reference
signal warning.
WO3LAMPTEMP 13 O3 CELL LAMP WARN O3 cell lamp temperature warning.
13
WO3PRESSURE O3 CELL PRESS WARN O3 cell pressure warning.
WIZSTEMP IZS TEMP WARNING IZS temperature outside of warning
limits.
WCONVTEMP CONV TEMP WARNING Converter temperature outside of
warning limits.
WPMTTEMP PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature outside of warning
limits.
WAUTOZERO AZERO WRN XXX.X MV Auto-zero reading above limit. Value
WPREREACT 11 PRACT WRN XXX.X MV 11 shown in message indicates auto-
zero reading at time warning was
displayed.
WHVPS HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply output
outside of warning limits.
WDYNZERO CANNOT DYN ZERO Contact closure zero calibration
failed while DYN_ZERO was set to
ON.
WDYNSPAN CANNOT DYN SPAN Contact closure span calibration
failed while DYN_SPAN was set to
ON.
WREARBOARD REAR BOARD NOT DET Rear board was not detected during
power up.
WRELAYBOARD RELAY BOARD WARN Firmware is unable to communicate
with the relay board.
06858F DCN8038 A-11


WFRONTPANEL FRONT PANEL WARN Firmware is unable to communicate
with the front panel.
WANALOGCAL ANALOG CAL WARNING The A/D or at least one D/A channel
has not been calibrated.
1
The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP”.
2
Engineering firmware only.
3
Current instrument units.
4
Factory option.
5
O2 option.
6
User-configurable D/A output option.
7
Optional.
8
CO2 option.
9
Concentration alarm option.
10
M200EUP.
11
M200EU and M200EU_NOy.
12
External analog input option.
13
O3 option
A-12 06858F DCN8038

Table A-3: Test Measurements
Test Name 1 Message Text Description

3
NONOXCONC NO=396.5 NOX=396.5 Simultaneously displays NO and NOX
concentrations.
not 6
RANGE RANGE=500.0 PPB 3 D/A range in single or auto-range
modes.
not 6
RANGE1 RANGE1=500.0 PPB 3 D/A #1 range in independent range
mode.
not 6
mode.
not 6
mode.
O3SN O3 S/N=0123 O3 sensor serial number.
O3READ O3 READ=100.0 PPB O3 concentration.
O3STAB O3 STAB=0.0 PPB O3 concentration stability.
O3SLOPE O3 SLOPE=1.000 O3 calibration slope.
O3OFFSET O3 OFFS=0.0 PPB O3 calibration offset.
O3RANGE O3 RNG=500.0 PPB O3 analog output range.
PHOTOMEAS O3 MEAS=1230.0 MV O3 photometer measurement signal.
PHOTOREF O3 REF=1230.0 MV O3 photometer reference signal.
CELLPRESS O3CEL PR=14.7 PSIA O3 cell pressure.
CELLTEMP O3SAMP TMP-25.0 C O3 sample temperature.
LAMPTEMP O3LMP TEMP=52.0 C O3 photometer lamp temperature.
3
STABILITY NOX STB=0.0 PPB Concentration stability (standard
O2 STB=0.0 PCT 5 deviation based on setting of
CO2 STB=0.0 PCT 8 STABIL_FREQ and STABIL_SAMPLES).
Select gas with STABIL_GAS variable.
RESPONSE 2 RSP=8.81(1.30) SEC Instrument response. Length of each
signal processing loop. Time in
parenthesis is standard deviation.
SAMPFLOW SAMP FLW=460 CC/M Sample flow rate.
OZONEFLOW OZGEN FL=87 CC/M Ozone flow rate.
PMT PMT=800.0 MV Raw PMT reading.
NORMPMT NORM PMT=793.0 MV PMT reading normalized for
temperature, pressure, auto-zero
offset, but not range.
AUTOZERO AZERO=1.3 MV Auto-zero offset.
HVPS HVPS=650 V High voltage power supply output.
RCELLTEMP RCELL TEMP=50.8 C Reaction cell temperature.
BOXTEMP BOX TEMP=28.2 C Internal chassis temperature.
10
REMBOXTEMP REM BOX TMP=30.1 C Remote chassis temperature.
PMTTEMP PMT TEMP=7.0 C PMT temperature.
4
MANIFOLDTEMP MF TEMP=50.8 C Bypass or dilution manifold
temperature.
06858F DCN8038 A-13


8
CO2CELLTEMP CO2 CELL TEMP=50.8 C CO2 sensor cell temperature.
5
O2CELLTEMP O2 CELL TEMP=50.8 C O2 sensor cell temperature.
IZSTEMP IZS TEMP=50.8 C IZS temperature.
CONVTEMP MOLY TEMP=315.0 C Converter temperature. Converter type
is MOLY, CONV, or O3KL.
SAMPRESTTEMP 10 SMP RST TMP=49.8 C Sample restrictor temperature.
RCELLPRESS RCEL=7.0 IN-HG-A Reaction cell pressure.
SAMPPRESS SAMP=29.9 IN-HG-A Sample pressure.
NOXSLOPE NOX SLOPE=1.000 NOX slope for current range, computed
during zero/span calibration.
NOXOFFSET NOX OFFS=0.0 MV NOX offset for current range,
computed during zero/span calibration.
NOSLOPE NO SLOPE=1.000 NO slope for current range, computed
NOOFFSET NO OFFS=0.0 MV NO offset for current range, computed
NO2 NO2=0.0 PPB 3 NO2 concentration for current range.
7 3
NO2_1 NO2_1=0.0 PPB NO2 concentration for range #1.
7 3
NO2_2 NO2_2=0.0 PPB NO2 concentration for range #2.
3
NOX NOX=396.5 PPB NOX concentration for current range.
7 3
NOX_1 NOX_1=396.5 PPB NOX concentration for range #1.
7 3
NOX_2 NOX_2=396.5 PPB NOX concentration for range #2.
3
NO NO=396.5 PPB NO concentration for current range.
7 3
NO_1 NO_1=396.5 PPB NO concentration for range #1.
7 3
NO_2 NO_2=396.5 PPB NO concentration for range #2.
8, not 6
CO2RANGE CO2 RANGE=100.00 PCT D/A #4 range for CO2 concentration.
8
CO2SLOPE CO2 SLOPE=1.000 CO2 slope, computed during zero/span
calibration.
8
CO2OFFSET CO2 OFFSET=0.000 CO2 offset, computed during zero/span
calibration.
8
CO2 CO2=15.0 % CO2 concentration.
5, not 6
O2RANGE O2 RANGE=100.00 PCT D/A #4 range for O2 concentration.
5
O2SLOPE O2 SLOPE=1.000 O2 slope computed during zero/span
calibration.
5
O2OFFSET O2 OFFSET=0.00 % O2 offset computed during zero/span
calibration.
5
O2 O2=0.00 % O2 concentration.
5,6,8
TESTCHAN TEST=3627.1 MV Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog
output, selected with TEST_CHAN_ID
variable.
A-14 06858F DCN8038


12
XIN1 AIN1=37.15 EU External analog input 1 value in
engineering units.
12
engineering units.
12
engineering units.
12
engineering units.
12
engineering units.
12
engineering units.
12
engineering units.
12
engineering units.
CLOCKTIME TIME=10:38:27 Current instrument time of day clock.
1
The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP”.
2
3
4
Factory option.
5
O2 option.
6
7
Optional.
8
CO2 option.
9
10
M200EUP.
11
12
13
O3 option
06858F DCN8038 A-15

APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions Teledyne API - T200, T204 and 200E Series (05295F DCN6900)
APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions

Table A-4: Signal I/O Definitions
Signal Name Bit or Channel Number Description

Internal inputs, U7, J108, pins 9–16 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 322 hex
0–7 Spare
Internal outputs, U8, J108, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 322 hex
ELEC_TEST 0 1 = electrical test on
0 = off
OPTIC_TEST 1 1 = optic test on
0 = off
PREAMP_RANGE_HI 2 1 = select high preamp range
0 = select low range
O3GEN_STATUS 3 0 = ozone generator on
1 = off
4–5 Spare
I2C_RESET 6 1 = reset I2C peripherals
0 = normal
I2C_DRV_RST 7 0 = hardware reset 8584 chip
1 = normal
Control inputs, U11, J1004, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 321 hex
EXT_ZERO_CAL 0 0 = go into zero calibration
1 = exit zero calibration
EXT_SPAN_CAL 1 0 = go into span calibration
1 = exit span calibration
20
EXT_LOW_SPAN 2 0 = go into low span calibration
1 = exit low span calibration
21
REMOTE_RANGE_HI 3 0 = remote select high range
1 = default range
5
CAL_MODE_0 0 Three inputs, taken as binary number
CAL_MODE_1 1 (CAL_MODE_2 is MSB) select
CAL_MODE_2 2 calibration level and range:
0 & 7 = Measure
1 = Zero, range #3
2 = Span, range #3
3 = Zero, range #2
4 = Span, range #2
5 = Zero, range #1
6 = Span, range #1
4–5 Spare
6–7 Always 1
Control inputs, U14, J1006, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 325 hex
0–5 Spare
6–7 Always 1
A-16 06858F DCN8038


Control outputs, U17, J1008, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 321 hex
0–7 Spare
Control outputs, U21, J1008, pins 9–12 = bits 0–3, default I/O address 325 hex
0–3 Spare
Alarm outputs, U21, J1009, pins 1–12 = bits 4–7, default I/O address 325 hex
12
ST_SYSTEM_OK2 4 1 = system OK
0 = any alarm condition or in
diagnostics mode
18
MB_RELAY_36 Controlled by MODBUS coil register
13
OUT_CAL_MODE 1 = calibration mode
0 = measure mode
17
ST_CONC_ALARM_1 5 1 = conc. limit 1 exceeded
0 = conc. OK
18
13
OUT_SPAN_CAL 1 = span calibration
0 = zero calibration
17
ST_CONC_ALARM_2 6 1 = conc. limit 2 exceeded
0 = conc. OK
18
13
OUT_PROBE_1 0 = select probe #1
1 = not selected
19
ST_HIGH_RANGE2 7 1 = high auto-range in use (mirrors
ST_HIGH_RANGE status output)
0 = low auto-range
18
13
OUT_PROBE_2 0 = select probe #2
1 = not selected
06858F DCN8038 A-17


A status outputs, U24, J1017, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 323 hex
ST_SYSTEM_OK 0 0 = system OK
1 = any alarm condition
ST_CONC_VALID 1 0 = conc. valid
1 = conc. filters contain no data
ST_HIGH_RANGE 2 0 = high auto-range in use
1 = low auto-range
ST_ZERO_CAL 3 0 = in zero calibration
1 = not in zero
ST_SPAN_CAL 4 0 = in span calibration
1 = not in span
ST_DIAG_MODE 5 0 = in diagnostic mode
1 = not in diagnostic mode
20
ST_LOW_SPAN_CAL 6 0 = in low span calibration
1 = not in low span
11
ST_O2_CAL 7 0 = in O2 calibration mode
1 = in measure or other calibration
ST_CO2_CAL 15
7 mode
0 = in CO2 calibration mode
ST_O3_CAL 23
7 1 = in measure or other calibration
mode
0 = in O3 calibration mode
1 = in measure or other calibration
mode
B status outputs, U27, J1018, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 324 hex
0–7 Spare
2 2
Front panel I C keyboard, default I C address 4E hex
MAINT_MODE 5 (input) 0 = maintenance mode
1 = normal mode
LANG2_SELECT 6 (input) 0 = select second language
1 = select first language (English)
SAMPLE_LED 8 (output) 0 = sample LED on
1 = off
CAL_LED 9 (output) 0 = cal. LED on
1 = off
FAULT_LED 10 (output) 0 = fault LED on
1 = off
AUDIBLE_BEEPER 14 (output) 0 = beeper on (for diagnostic testing
only)
1 = off
A-18 06858F DCN8038


2
Relay board digital output (PCF8575), default I C address 44 hex
RELAY_WATCHDOG 0 Alternate between 0 and 1 at least
every 5 seconds to keep relay board
active
RCELL_HEATER 1 0 = reaction cell heater on
1 = off
CONV_HEATER 2 0 = converter heater on
1 = off
10
MANIFOLD_HEATER 3 0 = bypass or dilution manifold heater
on
1 = off
IZS_HEATER 4 0 = IZS heater on
1 = off
15
CO2_CELL_HEATER 0 = CO2 sensor cell heater on
1 = off
11
O2_CELL_HEATER 5 0 = O2 sensor cell heater on
1 = off
SPAN_VALVE 6 0 = let span gas in
1 = let zero gas in
ZERO_VALVE 3 0 = let zero gas in
1 = let sample gas in
CAL_VALVE 7 0 = let cal. gas in
AUTO_ZERO_VALVE 8 0 = let zero air in
NOX_VALVE 9 0 = let NOX gas into reaction cell
1 = let NO gas into reaction cell
NO2_CONVERTER 4 0 = turn on NO2 converter (measure
NOx)
1 = turn off NO2 converter (measure
NO)
20
LOW_SPAN_VALVE 10 0 = let low span gas in
1 = let high span/sample gas in
3
SPAN_VALVE 11 0 = let span gas in
16
NO2_VALVE 12 0 = let NO2 gas into reaction cell
1 = let NOX/NO gas into reaction cell
7
VENT_VALVE 0 = open vent valve
1 = close vent valve
13–15 Spare
06858F DCN8038 A-19


Rear board primary MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 32A hex
PMT_SIGNAL 0 PMT detector
HVPS_VOLTAGE 1 HV power supply output
PMT_TEMP 2 PMT temperature
15
CO2_SENSOR 3 CO2 concentration sensor
4 Temperature MUX
5 Spare
11
O2_SENSOR 6 O2 concentration sensor
SAMPLE_PRESSURE 7 Sample pressure
RCELL_PRESSURE 8 Reaction cell pressure
REF_4096_MV 9 4.096V reference from MAX6241
OZONE_FLOW 10 Ozone flow rate
TEST_INPUT_11 11 Diagnostic test input
SAMP_REST_TEMP 4 Sample restrictor temperature
CONV_TEMP 12 Converter temperature
TEST_INPUT_13 13 Diagnostic test input
14 DAC loopback MUX
REF_GND 15 Ground reference
Rear board temperature MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 326 hex
BOX_TEMP 0 Internal box temperature
RCELL_TEMP 1 Reaction cell temperature
IZS_TEMP 2 IZS temperature
15
CO2_CELL_TEMP CO2 sensor cell temperature
3 Spare
11
O2_CELL_TEMP 4 O2 sensor cell temperature
TEMP_INPUT_5 5 Diagnostic temperature input
REM_BOX_TEMP 4 Remote box temperature
TEMP_INPUT_6 6 Diagnostic temperature input
10
MANIFOLD_TEMP 7 Bypass or dilution manifold
temperature
Rear board DAC MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 327 hex
DAC_CHAN_1 0 DAC channel 0 loopback
A-20 06858F DCN8038


Rear board analog outputs, default I/O address 327 hex
CONC_OUT_1 0 Concentration output #1 (NOX)
6
DATA_OUT_1 Data output #1
CONC_OUT_2 1 Concentration output #2 (NO)
6
CONC_OUT_3 2 Concentration output #3 (NO2)
6
TEST_OUTPUT 3 Test measurement output
11, 15
CONC_OUT_4 Concentration output #4 (CO2, O2, or
O3 )
6
External analog input board, default I2C address 5C hex
22
XIN1 0 External analog input 1
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
1
Hessen protocol.
2
M200EH.
3
M200EU.
4
M200EUP.
5
Triple-range option.
6
7
Pressurized zero/span option.
8
Dual NOX option.
9
MAS special.
10
Factory option.
11
O2 option.
12
Optional
13
Probe-select special.
15
CO2 option.
16
NO2 valve option.
17
18
MODBUS option.
19
High auto range relay option
20
Low span option.
21
Remote range control option
22
23
O3 option
06858F DCN8038 A-21

APPENDIX A-5: Trigger Events and DAS Parameters Teledyne API - T200, T204 and 200E Series (05295F DCN6900)
APPENDIX A-5: Trigger Events and DAS Parameters

Table A-5: DAS Trigger Events
Name Description
ATIMER Automatic timer expired
EXITZR Exit zero calibration mode
1
EXITLS Exit low span calibration mode
EXITHS Exit high span calibration mode
EXITMP Exit multi-point calibration mode
4
EXITC2 Exit CO2 calibration mode
3
EXITO2 Exit O2 calibration mode
6
EXITO3 Exit O3 calibration mode
SLPCHG Slope and offset recalculated
4
CO2SLC CO2 slope and offset recalculated
3
O2SLPC O2 slope and offset recalculated
6
O3SLPC O3 slope and offset recalculated
EXITDG Exit diagnostic mode
5
CONC1W Concentration exceeds limit 1 warning
5
CONC2W Concentration exceeds limit 2 warning
AZEROW Auto-zero warning
OFLOWW Ozone flow warning
RPRESW Reaction cell pressure warning
RTEMPW Reaction cell temperature warning
2
MFTMPW Bypass or dilution manifold temperature warning
4
C2TMPW CO2 sensor cell temperature warning
3
O2TMPW O2 sensor cell temperature warning
6
O3TMPW O3 sensor cell temperature warning
6
O3LMPW O3 sensor lamp temperature warning
6
O3REFW O3 sensor photometer reference warning
6
O3PRSW O3 sensor pressure warning
IZTMPW IZS temperature warning
CTEMPW Converter temperature warning
PTEMPW PMT temperature warning
SFLOWW Sample flow warning
BTEMPW Box temperature warning
HVPSW HV power supply warning
1
Low span option.
2
Factory option.
3
O2 option.
4
CO2 option.
5
6
O3 option.
A-22 06858F DCN8038

Table A-6: DAS Parameters
Name Description Units

PMTDET PMT detector reading mV
6
RAWNOX Raw PMT detector reading for NOX mV
6
RAWNO Raw PMT detector reading for NO mV
NXSLP1 NOX slope for range #1 —
7
NOSLP1 NO slope for range #1 —
7
NXOFS1 NOX offset for range #1 mV
7
NOOFS1 NO offset for range #1 mV
7
5
CO2SLP CO2 slope —
5
CO2OFS CO2 offset %
3
O2SLPE O2 slope —
3
O2OFST O2 offset %
2
NXZSC1 NOX concentration for range #1 during zero/span PPB
calibration, just before computing new slope and offset
2
7 2
2
NOZSC1 NO concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, PPB
just before computing new slope and offset
2
7 2
2
N2ZSC1 NO2 concentration for range #1 during zero/span PPB
2
7 2
5
CO2ZSC CO2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before %
computing new slope and offset
3
O2ZSCN O2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before %
2
NXCNC1 NOX concentration for range #1 PPB
06858F DCN8038 A-23

APPENDIX A-5: Trigger Events and DAS Parameters Teledyne API - T200, T204 and 200E Series (05295F DCN6900)

2
7 2
2
NOCNC1 NO concentration for range #1 PPB
2
7 2
2
N2CNC1 NO2 concentration for range #1 PPB
2
7 2
5
CO2CNC CO2 concentration %
3
O2CONC O2 concentration %
2
STABIL Concentration stability PPB
AZERO Auto zero offset (range de-normalized) mV
O3FLOW Ozone flow rate cc/m
RCPRES Reaction cell pressure "Hg
RCTEMP Reaction cell temperature °C
1
MFTEMP Bypass or dilution manifold temperature °C
5
C2TEMP CO2 sensor cell temperature °C
3
O2TEMP O2 sensor cell temperature °C
IZTEMP IZS block temperature °C
CNVEF1 Converter efficiency factor for range #1 —
7
CNVTMP Converter temperature °C
PMTTMP PMT temperature °C
SMPFLW Sample flow rate cc/m
SMPPRS Sample pressure "Hg
SRSTMP 8 Sample restrictor temperature °C
BOXTMP Internal box temperature °C
8
RBXTMP Remote box temperature °C
HVPS High voltage power supply output Volts
REFGND Ground reference (REF_GND) mV
9
XIN1 Channel 1 Analog In
9
XIN1SLPE Channel 1 Analog In Slope
XIN1OFST 9 Channel 1 Analog In Offset
9
9
9
XIN2OFST Channel 2 Analog In Offset
9
XIN3SLPE 9 Channel 3 Analog In Slope
9
A-24 06858F DCN8038


XIN4 9 Channel 4 Analog In
9
9
9
9
9
9
XIN7 9 Channel 7 Analog In
9
9
9
RF4096 4096 mV reference (REF_4096_MV) mV
TEST11 Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_11) mV
TEST13 Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_13) mV
TEMP5 Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_5) °C
TEMP6 Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_6) °C
Factory option.
1

2
O2 option.
3
Optional.
4
CO2 option.
5

6
7
M200EUP.
8
9
Analog In option, T-Series only.
06858F DCN8038 A-25

APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators Teledyne API - T200, T204 and 200E Series (05295F DCN6900)
APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators

Table A-7: Terminal Command Designators
Command Additional Command Syntax Description

Display help screen and this list of
? [ID]
commands
LOGON [ID] password Establish connection to instrument
LOGOFF [ID] Terminate connection to instrument
SET ALL|name|hexmask Display test(s)
LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX] Print test(s) to screen
T [ID]
name Print single test
CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask Disable test(s)
SET ALL|name|hexmask Display warning(s)
LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX] Print warning(s)
W [ID]
name Clear single warning
CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask Clear warning(s)
ZERO|LOWSPAN|SPAN [1|2] Enter calibration mode
ASEQ number Execute automatic sequence
C [ID] COMPUTE ZERO|SPAN Compute new slope/offset
EXIT Exit calibration mode
ABORT Abort calibration sequence
LIST Print all I/O signals
name[=value] Examine or set I/O signal
LIST NAMES Print names of all diagnostic tests
ENTER name Execute diagnostic test
EXIT Exit diagnostic test
RESET [DATA] [CONFIG] [exitcode] Reset instrument
D [ID] PRINT ["name"] [SCRIPT] Print DAS configuration
RECORDS ["name"] Print number of DAS records
REPORT ["name"] [RECORDS=number]
[FROM=<start date>][TO=<end
date>][VERBOSE|COMPACT|HEX] (Print DAS Print DAS records
records)(date format: MM/DD/YYYY(or YY)
[HH:MM:SS]
CANCEL Halt printing DAS records
LIST Print setup variables
name[=value [warn_low [warn_high]]] Modify variable
name="value" Modify enumerated variable
V [ID]
CONFIG Print instrument configuration
MAINT ON|OFF Enter/exit maintenance mode
MODE Print current instrument mode
DASBEGIN [<data channel definitions>]
Upload DAS configuration
DASEND
CHANNELBEGIN propertylist CHANNELEND Upload single DAS channel
CHANNELDELETE ["name"] Delete DAS channels
A-26 06858F DCN8038

The command syntax follows the command type, separated by a space character. Strings in
[brackets] are optional designators. The following key assignments also apply.
Terminal Key Assignments

ESC Abort line
CR (ENTER) Execute command
Ctrl-C Switch to computer mode
Computer Mode Key Assignments
LF (line feed) Execute command
Ctrl-T Switch to terminal mode
06858F DCN8038 A-27

APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map Teledyne API - T200, T204 and 200E Series (05295F DCN6900)
APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map

MODBUS Register Description 10 Units
Address
(decimal, 0-based)
MODBUS Floating Point Input Registers
(32-bit IEEE 754 format; read in high-word, low-word order; read-only)
0 Instantaneous PMT detector reading mV
2 NOX slope for range #1 —
6 NO slope for range #1 —
8 NO slope for range #2 mV
10 NOX offset for range #1 mV
14 NO offset for range #1 mV
18 NOX concentration for range #1 during zero/span PPB
22 NO concentration for range #1 during zero/span PPB
26 NO2 concentration for range #1 during zero/span PPB
30 NOX concentration for range #1 PPB
34 NO concentration for range #1 PPB
38 NO2 concentration for range #1 PPB
42 Concentration stability PPB
44 Auto zero offset (range de-normalized) mV
Pre React 11
46 Ozone flow rate cc/m
48 Reaction cell pressure "Hg
50 Reaction cell temperature C
52 Manifold temperature °C
54 Converter efficiency factor for range #1 —
58 Converter temperature °C
60 PMT temperature C
A-28 06858F DCN8038


Address
(decimal, 0-based)
62 Sample flow rate cc/m
64 Sample pressure “Hg
66 Internal box temperature C
68 High voltage power supply output Volts
70 Ground reference (REF_GND) mV
72 4096 mV reference (REF_4096_MV) mV
74 Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_13) mV
76 Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_6) °C
78 IZS temperature C
9
80 Sample restrictor temperature C
9
82 Remote box temperature C
80 Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_11) mV
82 Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_5) °C
1
84 Raw PMT detector reading for NOX mV
1
86 Raw PMT detector reading for NO mV
3
3
102 NO slope for range #3 mV
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
12
130 External analog input 1 value Volts
12
132 External analog input 1 slope eng unit /V
12
134 External analog input 1 offset eng unit
12
12
12
12
144 12 External analog input 3 slope eng unit /V
146 12 External analog input 3 offset eng unit
12
06858F DCN8038 A-29


Address
(decimal, 0-based)
150 12 External analog input 4 slope eng unit /V
12
12
12
158 12 External analog input 5 offset eng unit
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
13
188 Converter efficiency factor slope for range #1 —
13
190 Converter efficiency factor offset for range #1 —
13
13
13, 3
13, 3
5
200 O2 concentration %
5
202 O2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before %
5
204 O2 slope —
5
206 O2 offset %
5
208 O2 sensor cell temperature °C
6
300 CO2 concentration %
6
302 CO2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before %
6
304 CO2 slope —
6
306 CO2 offset %
6
308 CO2 sensor cell temperature °C
14
400 O3 concentration PPB
14
402 O3 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before PPB
404 14 O3 slope —
14
406 O3 offset PPB
14
408 O3 sensor cell temperature °C
14
410 O3 photometer reference potential mV
A-30 06858F DCN8038


Address
(decimal, 0-based)
412 14 O3 photometer measurement potential mV
14
414 O3 cell pressure PSIA
14
416 O3 lamp temperature °C
14 + 15
418 O3 bench serial number —
420 14 O3 bench firmware revision —
MODBUS Floating Point Holding Registers
(32-bit IEEE 754 format; read/write in high-word, low-word order; read/write)
0 Maps to NOX_SPAN1 variable; target conc. for range #1 Conc. units
2 Maps to NO_SPAN1 variable; target conc. for range #1 Conc. units
3
3
5
200 Maps to O2_TARG_SPAN_CONC variable; target conc. for %
range O2 gas
6
300 Maps to CO2_TARG_SPAN_CONC variable; target conc. for %
range CO2 gas
400 14 Maps to ID_VAR_O3_TARG_SPAN_CONC variable; O3 target PPB
span concentration
402 14 Maps to ID_VAR_O3_PRESSURE_OFFSET variable; O3 cell PSIA
pressure compensation offset
404 14 Maps to ID_VAR_O3_PRESSURE_SLOPE variable; O3 cell —
pressure slope compensation
406 14 Maps to ID_VAR_O3_TEMP_SET variable; O3 temperature °C
setpoint
408 14 Maps to ID_VAR_O3_DWELL variable; O3 dwell time Seconds
14
410 Maps to ID_VAR_O3_RANGE variable; O3 analog output PPB
range
MODBUS Discrete Input Registers
(single-bit; read-only)
0 Manifold temperature warning
1 Converter temperature warning
2 Auto-zero warning
3 Box temperature warning
4 PMT detector temperature warning
5 Reaction cell temperature warning
6 Sample flow warning
7 Ozone flow warning
8 Reaction cell pressure warning
9 HVPS warning
10 System reset warning
06858F DCN8038 A-31


Address
(decimal, 0-based)
11 Rear board communication warning
12 Relay board communication warning
13 Front panel communication warning
14 Analog calibration warning
15 Dynamic zero warning
16 Dynamic span warning
17 Invalid concentration
18 In zero calibration mode
19 In span calibration mode
20 In multi-point calibration mode
21 System is OK (same meaning as SYSTEM_OK I/O signal)
22 Ozone generator warning
23 IZS temperature warning
8
24 In low span calibration mode
7
25 NO concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded
7
26 NO concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded
7
27 NO2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded
7
28 NO2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded
7
29 NOX concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded
7
30 NOX concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded
5
200 Calibrating O2 gas
5
201 O2 sensor cell temperature warning
5+7
202 O2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded
5+7
6
300 Calibrating CO2 gas
6
301 CO2 sensor cell temperature warning
6+7
302 CO2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded
6+7
303 CO2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded
14
400 Calibrating O3 gas
401 14 O3 cell temperature warning
402 14 O3 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded
14
MODBUS Coil Registers
(single-bit; read/write)
0 Maps to relay output signal 36 (MB_RELAY_36 in signal I/O list)
2
20 Triggers zero calibration of NOX range #1 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.)
A-32 06858F DCN8038


Address
(decimal, 0-based)
2
21 Triggers span calibration of NOX range #1 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.)
2
22 Triggers zero calibration of NOX range #2 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.)
2
23 Triggers span calibration of NOX range #2 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.)
1
2
Set DYN_ZERO or DYN_SPAN variables to ON to enable calculating new slope or offset. Otherwise
a calibration check is performed.
3
4
Optional.
5
O2 option.
6
CO2 option.
7
8
Low span option.
9
M200EUP.
10
All NOX references become NOy for M200EU_NOy.
11
12
13
M200EU_PHOTO.
14
O3 option.
15
32-bit integer value stored in high/low word order (i.e. not a floating-point value).
06858F DCN8038 A-33

A-34 06858F DCN8038

Appendix B
06858F DCN8038 B-1

Manual, Operators, T200 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual, Operators, T200 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual, Operators, T200 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Manual

Toll-free Phone: 800-324-5190

Copyright 2010-2018 06858F DCN8038

WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard

HAZARD: Strong oxidizer

GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION: Read the accompanying message for

CAUTION: Hot Surface Warning

Do Not Touch: Touching some parts of the instrument without protection or

Technician Symbol: All operations marked with this symbol are to be

NEVER use any gas analyzer to sample combustible gas(es).

06858F DCN8038 iii

DANGER : Oxydant puissant

AVERTISSEMENT GÉNÉRAL / MISE EN GARDE : Lire la consigne

MISE EN GARDE : Surface chaude

Ne pas toucher : Toucher à certaines parties de l’instrument sans protection ou

Mise à la terre : Ce symbole à l’intérieur de l’instrument détermine le point central

The complete Terms and Conditions of Sale can be reviewed at http://www.teledyne-

CAUTION – Avoid Warranty Invalidation

ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY

IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA

06858F DCN8038 vii

viii 06858F DCN8038

5.7.2. INET (Ethernet)................................................................................................................................ 99

12.7.7. Pressure / Flow Sensor Assembly ................................................................................................ 255

xii 06858F DCN8038

Figure 11-2: Particle Filter on O3 Supply Air Dryer .................................................................................... 211

06858F DCN8038 xiii

xiv 06858F DCN8038

1.2. SUPPORT DOCUMENTATION

Table 1-1. Analyzer Options

CAUTION – GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD

Table 2-1: T200 Basic Unit Specifications

2.2. EPA REFERENCE DESIGNATION

2.3. APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS

2.3.3. OTHER TYPE CERTIFICATIONS

This page intentionally left blank.

3.1. UNPACKING THE T200 ANALYZER

ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY

WARNING – ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD

Never disconnect PCAs, wiring harnesses or electronic subassemblies

3.1.1. VENTILATION CLEARANCE

Table 3-1: Ventilation Clearance

3.2. INSTRUMENT LAYOUT

3.2.1. FRONT PANEL

Figure 3-1: Front Panel Layout

Figure 3-2: Display Screen and Touch Control

ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY

Table 3-2: Display Screen and Touch Control Description

Figure 3-3: Display/Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts

3.2.2. REAR PANEL

Figure 3-4: Rear Panel Layout – Base Unit

Table 3-3 provides a description of each component on the rear panel.

Table 3-3: Rear Panel Description

3.2.3. INTERNAL CHASSIS LAYOUT

Figure 3-5: Internal Layout – Top View with IZS Option

Figure 3-6: Internal Layout - Top View Showing Other Options

3.3. CONNECTIONS AND SETUP

3.3.1. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

3.3.1.1. CONNECTING POWER